You are on page 1of 311

SECTION C SPECIFICATIONS

TECHNICAL SUBMISSION SECTION C

SPECIFICATION

SECTION C SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS PART 1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS PART 2 PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS PART 3 C1/1 C1/2 C2/1 C2/23

SPECIFICATIONS
Architectural & Structural Specifications Electrical Specifications Plumbing Specifications AC Specifications AS/1 AS/176 E-1 E-136 P-1 P-56 M-1 M-105

BA 13/12 C 011 G C/Contents Construction of 3 New Schools of 56 Schools at Doha, Stage 9, Package 1

April 2013

SECTION C SPECIFICATIONS PART 1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

TECHNICAL SUBMISSION SECTION C - PART 1 PART 1 - GENERAL SPECIFICATION

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

GOVERNMENT PUBLISHED SPECIFICATIONS, REGULATIONS, NOTICES AND CIRCULARS A. The Works shall be executed in accordance with the following State of Qatar Standard Publications, Specifications, Regulations, Notices and Circulars current at the date of Tender unless otherwise stated. (a) (b) The General Conditions of Contract May 2007 prepared by the Contracts & Engineering Business Affairs (CEBA), Public Works Authority. Qatar National Construction Standards (QCS2010) Revision III prepared by the Qatar General Organization for Standards and Metrology (QGOSM) issued with Standard No. QS27/2010 dated March 2011 for use commencing January 1st 2012 and all subsequent revisions and amendments. The Code of Practice and Specification for Road Opening in the Highway prepared by the Public Works Authority, January 1992 WITH January 2011 amendments and revision. The Guide for Civil Users of Explosives in Qatar prepared by the Ministry of Public Works. The Qatar Survey Manuals prepared by the Urban Planning and Development Authority (UPDA). All current Public Works Authority regulations concerning the organization of Tenders and Public Auctions and all subsequent revisions and amendments. The Qatar Traffic Manual (QTM) and Qatar Highway Design Manual (QHDM) prepared by the Ministry of Public Works. Drainage Affairs, Standard Supplementary Specification to Qatar Construction Specification. Any current and relevant regulation, notice or circular issued by Qatar Telecom (Q-tel) and Vodafone Qatar prior to the date of the letter or advertisement inviting tenderers. Any and all applicable local Municipality regulations. State of Qatar Law No. (6) of the year 1987 and all subsequent amendments concerning Materials and Equipment from Qatar or other CCASG countries, obtainable from Government House, Doha. Safety Rules issued by the Department of Electricity Networks. The Traffic Control at Road works published by the Ministry of Industry and Public Works and any other rules and regulations issued by Roads Department. The Standard Method of Measurement of Building Works Seventh Edition Revised 1998 issued by The Royal Institution of Chartered Surveyors (SMM7). State of Qatar Law No (30) of the year 2002 and all subsequent amendments concerning Protection of the Environment, obtainable from Government House, Doha. State of Qatar Law No. 32 of 2002 and all subsequent amendments concerning protection of environment, and all associated rules and regulations issued by the Supreme Council for the Environment and Natural Resources. All current and relevant regulation, notice or circular issued by Water Department and Electricity Department of the Qatar General Electricity and Water Corporation (QGEWC) specifications and all subsequent revisions and amendments.

(c)

(d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) (j) (k)

(l) (n) (o) (p) (q)

(m) The Jointing Manual prepared by Electricity Networks Department.

(r)

BA 13/14 C 011 G C1/1 Construction of 3 New Schools of 56 Schools at Doha, Stage 9, Package 1

April 2013

TECHNICAL SUBMISSION SECTION C - PART 1 (s)

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

The Regulations for the Installation of Electrical Wiring, Equipment and Air Conditioning of Residential and Commercial Buildings, fifth re-issue dated June 1986 prepared by the Ministry of Electricity and Water, P.O. Box 41, Doha. Any Amiri Decree or current and relevant regulation, notice or circular issued by the Ministry of Municipal Affairs and Agriculture (including the previous Ministry of Public Works and the previous Ministry of Industry and Public Works), the Ministry of Electricity and Water or the appropriate local Municipality prior to the date of the newspaper advertisement to Tender. Drafting Standards prepared by Public Works Authority.

(t)

(u) B. C. D. E.

The Contractor shall be deemed to have his own copy of the Authority specifications, regulations, notices and circulars referred to in (A) above. These Government Specifications, Regulations, Notices and Circulars are amended and complemented by "Part 2 - Project Specification" as detailed hereafter. In the case of any ambiguity or discrepancy the provisions of the Project Specification shall prevail over the provisions of the Government published specifications. The Contractor shall consult the Survey Section of the Ministry of Municipal Affairs and Agriculture prior to any earth or other works to determine if the work is likely to disturb survey marks. If Survey Section require a survey mark to be moved the Contractor will be responsible for recreating the survey mark to an approved design and specification, and for resurveying the point using survey companies approved by the Survey Section. The Contractor shall be responsible for the protection of the Survey marks, within the boundaries of the site, for the duration of the contract period, and shall be liable for all costs of any remedial work required by the Survey Section. On the completion of the works the Survey Section will issue a certificate stating that all survey marks, whether disturbed or otherwise, by the Contractor have been reinstated or protected to the satisfaction of the Survey Section. In the event of failure to comply with the requirements of this Clause the Authority, without prejudice to any other method of recovery, may deduct the costs of any remedial work after the practical completion date, carried out by Survey Section from any monies in its hands due or which become due to the Contractor. Where any Standard Publication, Specification, Regulation, Notice, etc or any correspondence refers to a Government Ministry, Department, Division, Section, etc. it will be deemed to be the same as any successor Ministry, Department, Division, Section, etc which has or may subsequently be officially promulgated by the Government of the State of Qatar Upon approval from Engineers representative on any road closure for the purpose of carrying out the works of PWA, the Contractor shall place a sufficient notification to the general public in local newspapers both in Arabic and English languages at least one (1) week prior to the road closure. The contents of the notification shall be approved by the Engineer and the extent shall not be less than a quarter of the standard size page of a reputed local newspaper. In order to evident the notification the contractor shall submit to the Engineer a copy as appeared on the newspaper on the same day of the notification.

F.

G.

H.

I.

J.

BA 13/14 C 011 G C1/2 Construction of 3 New Schools of 56 Schools at Doha, Stage 9, Package 1

April 2013

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX


CL. NO. TITLE PAGE NO.

PART 'A' - GENERAL .....................................................................................................................1 A.1 SITE................................................................................................................................1 A.2 SITE CONDITIONS ........................................................................................................1 A.3 DEFINITIONS .................................................................................................................2 A.4 SCOPE OF WORKS ......................................................................................................3 A.5 COMPLIANCE WITH SPECIFICATION AND REGULATIONS .....................................4 A.6 ELECTRICAL SUPPLY SYSTEM ..................................................................................5 A.7 PROGRAMME................................................................................................................5 A.8 TENDER DRAWINGS ...................................................................................................6 A.9 WORKING DRAWINGS .................................................................................................6 A.10 CO-ORDINATION OF DRAWINGS................................................................................6 A.11 MATERIAL SUBMITTALS ..............................................................................................7 A.12 LOCAL AGENT...............................................................................................................7 A.13 MATERIAL INSPECTION...............................................................................................8 A.14 ALTERNATIVES.............................................................................................................8 A.15 SETTING OUT OF WORKS...........................................................................................8 A.16 SAFETY..........................................................................................................................8 A.17 CONTRACTOR'S LICENCE...........................................................................................9 A.18 DAMAGE TO PLANT AND MATERIALS .......................................................................9 A.19 PROTECTIVE FINISHES .............................................................................................10 A.20 LABELS AND IDENTIFICATION..................................................................................10 A.21 WORKS TESTS AND CERTIFICATES........................................................................11 A.22 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS ..........................................................11 A.23 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS.................................................................................................11 PART 'B' - EQUIPMENT SECTION............................................................................................11 B.1 TRANSFORMER ..........................................................................................................11 B.2 MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCHBOARD .........................................................................12 B.3 SUBMAIN BOARD .......................................................................................................33 B.4 DISTRIBUTION BOARDS ............................................................................................35 B.5 FUSE SWITCH AND ISOLATOR UNITS .....................................................................38 B.6 WIRES & CABLES .......................................................................................................39 B.7 CONDUIT AND CONDUIT FITTINGS..........................................................................48 B.8 CABLE TRUNKING ......................................................................................................53 B.9 CABLE TRAY ...............................................................................................................56 B.10 WIRING ACCESSORIES .............................................................................................57 B.11 LIGHT FITTINGS..........................................................................................................68 B.12 EMERGENCY PACK FOR LIGHTING .........................................................................71 B.13 WIRING SYSTEMS ......................................................................................................72 B.14 INTERCOM SYSTEM...................................................................................................72 B.15 COMPUTER SYSTEM .................................................................................................74 B.16 QATAR CABLE VISION AND VIDEO SYSTEM .........................................................76 B.17 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM..................................................................77

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

B.18 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM............................................................88 B.19 LIFTS ............................................................................................................................89 B.20 PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM ......................................................................................92 B.21 FARASH CALL SYSTEM .............................................................................................98 B.22 AUTO CLASS CHANGE OVER SYSTEM ...................................................................98 B.23 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM..........................................................................99 B.24 EARTHING AND BONDING SYSTEM.......................................................................100 B.25 BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM103 B.26 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING ............................................................................102 B.27 WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE ...............................................................................107 B.28 SPARES FOR ELECTRICAL ITEMS .........................................................................108 B.29 SCHEDULE OF LIGHT FIXTURES............................................................................109 B.30 SCHEDULE OF APPROVED MANUFACTURERS OF EQUIPMENT.......................115 B.31 SCHEDULE OF MOUNTING HEIGHTS ....................................................................119 B.32 SCHEDULE OF DRAWINGS .....................................................................................136 B.33 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING ............................................................................122 ALL BELLS INSTALLED & WIRED ............................................................................................122 FUNCTIONAL TESTS ................................................................................................................122 CHECK MAIN MENU DISPLAY OK ...........................................................................................122 SET CLOCK & CHECK OK ........................................................................................................122 CHECK MAIN FAILURE TO BATTERY OK ...............................................................................122 ALL DUCT SMOKE DETECTORS INSTALLED & WIRED ........................................................124 FUNCTIONAL TESTS (With Power ON)..124 CHECK MAIN MENU DISPLAY OK ...........................................................................................124 SET CLOCK & CHECK OK ........................................................................................................124 CHECK BATTERY VOLTAGE OK .............................................................................................124 PANEL INSTALLED PROPERLY...............................................................................................126 TESTING ..126 CHECK TRANSFORMER VOLTAGE OK ..................................................................................126 CHECK EACH BELL PUSH WHETHER OK ..............................................................................126 CHECK ALL SPEAKERS INSTALLED OK.................................................................................127 FUNCTIONAL TESTS 127 CHECK POWER SUPPLY TO EACH EQUIPMENT OK............................................................127 CHECK CASSETTE, CD PLAYER & FM/AM PLAYER WORKING OK ....................................127

*******************************************

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

PART 'A' - GENERAL

A.1

SITE The site is located as indicated on the contract drawing titles.

A.2

SITE CONDITIONS Unless otherwise specified, all the electrical equipment should be capable of withstanding the following site conditions: i. ii. iii. iv. v. vi. vii. Maximum Ambient Temperature : Altitude Maximum Relative Humidity Maximum Wind Velocity Prevailing Wind Storms Annual Rainfall : : : : : : 50C (Dry Bulb) in summer 8C ( -do- ) in winter Sea level 95% to 98% 140 kms per hour North or North-westerly Dusty, sporadic & irregular 50 mm between January & April

All equipment shall be rated for continuous operation, twenty four hours a day, seven days a week, throughout its normal rated life, except for routine maintenance period.

E-1

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

A.3

DEFINITIONS The following terms and abbreviations used in these specifications/drawings shall mean : Contractor : The Contractor appointed by the Client or Client's representative to carry out the works as laid down in the tender drawings/ Specifications. Qatar General Electricity and Water Corporation Doha, Qatar. Qatar Telecom, Doha, Qatar. Regulations issued by the Qatar General Electricity and Water Corporation, Doha, Qatar Regarding the installation of electrical equipment, wiring and air conditioning of residential and commercial buildings (latest edition) Qatar Construction Specification Regulations for electrical installations issued by The Institution of Electrical Engineers (16th Edition). British Standard Specification British Standard Code of Practice. The drawings on which the tender is based and schedules therein. The drawings prepared by the Contractor for the purpose of execution of work at site. The final drawings prepared by the Contractor which is the true record of the actual work carried out at site. To include the provision of all equipment and materials and all works to be carried out by the Contractor as per these specifications and drawings for the satisfactory completion and operation of the installation. The location where the works are to be carried out.

Kahra-maa Q-Tel Kahra-maa Regulations

: : :

Q.C.S. I.E.E. Regulations

: :

B.S.S. B.S.C.P. Tender Drawings Working Drawings As-built Drawings

: : : : :

Works

Site

E-2

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

Engineer Approved Submitted Accepted Concealed

: : : : :

The representative of the Client assigned to supervise the work. Shall mean approved by the Engineer in writing. Shall mean submitted to the Engineer in writing. Shall mean accepted by the Engineer in writing. Shall mean hidden from normal sight in shafts, ceiling spaces, walls, slabs, partitions, screed or floor slab. Shall mean visible to normal sight. Shall mean supply, install, test and commission. Shall mean install, test and commission. Shall mean supply only.

Exposed Provide Install Furnish

: : : :

A.4

SCOPE OF WORKS The scope of works under this contract includes the supply, installation, testing and commissioning of the electrical materials and equipments as per the specifications drafted in these sections and the tender drawings referred in the Schedule of Drawings. All the electrical equipments shall strictly comply with the regulations published in the latest edition issued by the Kahra-maa, Q.C.S., Q-Tel and Fire Department of the State of Qatar. The Contractor shall provide complete installation of the project and also include other associated works such as supporting structures, ducts, manholes and ancillary works etc. The detail of the scope of work is explained in the relevant section of the specifications given elsewhere. A brief description of electrical works included in these specifications is as follows : i. ii. iii. iv. v. vi. Transformers M.V. panels Submain boards and Distribution boards Copper wires and cables for final circuits and submain power. PVC conduit and conduit fittings for lighting, small power and auxiliary services. G.I. trunking and cable trays for cables and circuits.
E-3

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

vii. viii. ix. x. xi. xii. xiii. xiv. xv. xvi. xvii. xviii. xix. xx. xxi.

Wiring Accessories Lighting fittings as per the schedule enclosed Emergency Pack for Lighting Telephone System Computer System Qatar Cable Vision and Video System Fire Alarm and Detection system Fire Fighting System Lifts Public Address System Farash Call System Auto Class Change Over System Lightning Protection System Earthing and Bonding System Testing and Commissioning

Connection Fee The Contractor shall allow for the Kahra-maa connection fee in his price based on the kW connected load of the project. However, if there is a change in the fee tariff by Kahra-maa at the time of construction / connection, the Contractor shall not be paid for any additional cost.

A.5

COMPLIANCE WITH SPECIFICATION AND REGULATIONS The Contractor shall supply all materials which shall be new and in a new condition. The Contractor shall supply all the necessary skilled and non-skilled labour to complete the works in accordance with the programme. The installations shall comply with the following regulations : i. The installation of works shall be as per the 6th edition and publication of Kahra-maa regulations, 16th edition of IEE regulations and Q.C.S. In case of contradiction, Kahra-maa regulations shall take precedence. The equipments shall conform to the British Standard Specifications & Codes of Practice (current editions including all amendments). If the Contractor wishes to use installations or equipments other than specified and conforming to different standards, then a written approval from the Engineer will be necessary.

ii. iii.

E-4

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

A.6

ELECTRICAL SUPPLY SYSTEM The following supply system is prevailing at present in the State of Qatar. * * * * * * Supply Voltage Frequency Number of wires Neutral Voltage Tolerance : : : : : : Alternating current 415 volts on 3 Phase and 240 volts on 1 phase 50 cycles per second (Hz) 4 (3 phases + 1 neutral) + Earth conductor Full capacity as phase solidly earthed at main switchboard. 6%

Note : All equipments shall be rated for 240 OR 415 volts, 50 Hz A.C. Equipments rated 220/380 volts or 115/220 volts equipment will be rejected and Contractor shall have to replace the same if detected at any stage of the contract. In case Contractor fails to replace the same within the stipulated time, the Engineer reserves the right to get it replaced from another agency at Contractor's cost. A.7 PROGRAMME The Contractor shall produce the work programme based on CPM or Barchart indicating the time required for various operations to complete the project in time. The following points shall be high-lighted in the programme. i. ii. iii. iv. v. vi. vii. viii. ix. x. xi. Mobilisation Drawings/Submittals Approvals Equipment Deliveries First fix Cabling Main/Sub-main Distribution equipment Second fix Fixing of light fittings Testing Commissioning and Handing Over

E-5

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

A.8

TENDER DRAWINGS The Electrical tender drawings related to this project have been listed in the Schedule of Drawings enclosed with these specifications. The tender drawings have been prepared to show the tenderer the principal equipment and general arrangement required for this project. These drawings do not indicate every detail of work. It is the Contractor's responsibility to check the positions/locations at site. All dimensions are tentative and shall be checked with the Architectural and Structural drawings. Any discrepancy shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer at the time of tender. The Contractor is deemed to have studied the services drawings and have included in his price for all builders work associated with these drawings.

A.9

WORKING DRAWINGS The Contractor after completing all contractual obligations shall prepare the working drawings in a scale of 1 : 50 for Plans, 1 : 10 for Details and 1 : 200 for Site Plan. The Contractor shall project the following in the above drawings : i. Actual conduit routes with circular junction boxes indicating the size of conduit, number and size of wires it is carrying, where it is rising up or bending down etc. Separate drawing shall be prepared for Small power and Lighting systems. Reflected ceiling plans showing co-ordinated services, light fittings and other ancillary equipment such as Fire alarm, A.C. diffusers etc., with respect to the ceiling. Mounting arrangement of light fittings, cables, cable trays, trunking, isolators, distribution boards etc. Sectional views for co-ordinating the electrical wiring and other services i.e. Air conditioning, Drainage and Plumbing to the Engineer's requirements.

ii. iii.

iv. v.

A.10

CO-ORDINATION OF DRAWINGS The Contractor shall produce working drawings for building works required for services showing the integration of all the services i.e. Electrical, Mechanical, Plumbing & Drainage. The Contractor should ensure that all the working drawings are properly coordinated before submitting to the Engineer for approval. All the services shall be installed in such a manner so as to avoid conflict with each other and maintain the clearance required between each of them as per Kahra-maa regulations.

E-6

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

A.11

MATERIAL SUBMITTALS The materials offered for approval shall be strictly in accordance with the specifications and tender drawings. The Contractor shall submit in triplicate, the technical literature for each item of equipment he intends to use at this project, to the Engineer for the necessary approval. If in case the technical literature is not available, then a sample shall be submitted; in the absence of either of these, typed technical data shall be submitted, duly supported by telex/letter of the manufacturer for confirmation. In case of items involving aesthetics, like light fittings, wiring accessories, smoke/heat detectors, exhaust fans etc., samples must be submitted for approval. Each copy of the submittal shall be numbered and signed with the list of equipment's, parts of equipment and the technical literature clearly marked in red, indicating the model, type and capacity of the equipment offered. The Engineer shall retain two copies and return one, either approved or not approved, to the Contractor. The Contractor shall maintain a schedule of all the electrical equipment as per the following proforma and submit a monthly report to the Engineer : i. ii. iii. iv. v. vi. vii. viii. Submittal Number Equipment/Model Number Manufacturer/Local Agent Date of Approval Date of Order/Order No. Mode of Delivery (Air, Land or Sea) ETA on site Status as on date of report.

A.12

LOCAL AGENT The materials and equipments proposed by the Contractor shall be of a reputed make represented in Qatar by a recognised local agent. The Contractor shall furnish along with the submittal a letter from the local agent stating that : a. They are the local agent in Qatar of the manufacturer (principal) along with proof of agency (a letter from the manufacturer). The local agent should be registered with the Ministry of Commerce and Industry and agency registration number should be provided. They have the facilities available for the repairing/servicing of the equipment and they are either maintaining adequate stock of spares or shall arrange for the same at short notice.

b.

An undertaking to this effect shall be furnished mentioning the name of the particular project.
E-7

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

No materials and equipments shall be considered for approval which are not represented by local agents. A certificate of origin should be provided by the local agent for the relevant materials. A.13 MATERIAL INSPECTION The Contractor shall inform the Engineer within one week upon receipt of all the materials at site and arrange for the inspection of the same. Written approval should be obtained from the Engineer prior to using materials at site. Any material used at site which is not approved earlier shall stand rejected without notice. The Contractor will have to remove the rejected materials from site and replace with approved materials at his own expense. In the event Contractor fails to do so, the Client will have the liberty to carry out such works from other agencies and debit the ensuing amount to the Contractor.

A.14

ALTERNATIVES The tenderer has the liberty to submit with his tender the name of alternative firms considered of equal performance which he wishes to offer. Such alternatives will be considered by the Engineer in consultation with the Client before the tender is accepted. The acceptance of alternatives will be confirmed in writing by the Engineer. During the execution of the contract, no alternative equipment, materials or fittings will be permitted and the Contractor is fore-warned that any item provided by him which is not up to the specification, must be replaced at his own expense. In cases where time will not permit, then such replacements shall be at the Client's convenience, but nevertheless at the Contractor's expense etc.

A.15

SETTING OUT OF WORKS The location of switches and sockets as indicated on the tender drawings is tentative and may require some variation to suit the site requirements. The exact positions must be checked and shown on the detailed working drawings as indicated on the detailed Architectural drawings and co-ordinated with furnishing and other services.

A.16

SAFETY The Contractor shall maintain all the safety procedures at site to protect manpower and machinery. The temporary supply either generated or obtained from supply authorities shall be effectively earthed and protected with suitable earth leakage circuit breaker.
E-8

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

The socket outlets used for construction shall be weather proof, industrial type with suitable plugs etc. The cables and socket outlets shall be protected against mechanical damage at site. The assembly of the socket outlets shall be properly wired and mounted on purpose made racks fabricated out of sheet steel and angle iron. These racks shall be securely fixed on the wall at convenient places and shall also be earthed. Wooden racks will not be allowed to be used for this temporary supply. The cables shall also be properly supported on the wall. Only those wires used for the final connections from the socket outlets to the tools will be allowed to lie on the floor preferably protected against mechanical damage. The Contractor shall provide single line wiring scheme for the approval of the Engineer and carry out the works strictly in accordance with the Kahra-maa regulations. The Contractor shall provide a 240V AC supply for the use of all temporary lighting and power tools on site. The whole of the works shall be carried out with care and so arranged as to minimise the risk of fire and the extent of damage resulting from any outbreak of fire. The Contractor shall provide adequate guards to all moving parts of the plant whether particularly specified or not. A.17 CONTRACTOR'S LICENCE The Contractor shall ensure that the Sub-contractor appointed for Electrical works shall have the valid licence from Kahra-maa. The grade of licence shall also be in accordance with the total load of this project. The Contractor shall submit the qualifications and experience particulars of the Electrical Engineer, Electrical Foreman and Electricians to be employed on the project to the Engineer for approval. Once approval is obtained, the Contractor shall not replace the staff from site. In case the same becomes necessary, a reapproval should be obtained and the new staff shall continue working with the old staff for a minimum period of 30 days before the latter is withdrawn from site.

A.18

DAMAGE TO PLANT AND MATERIALS Any plant or material which is damaged by any means whatsoever, shall not be used in the works. Should the Contractor wish to rectify such damage in order to utilize the plant or materials in the permanent works, the matter shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer, who in turn shall conduct a proper survey after which the necessary instructions will be issued. Only after obtaining a written permission from the Engineer shall any remedial work be carried out. Any damaged plant or material allegedly brought to a "as-new" condition following such a procedure, shall only be accepted at the discretion of the Engineer, whose decision in such matters shall be final.
E-9

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

A.19

PROTECTIVE FINISHES The protective finishes must be provided on all materials and equipment used in this contract to ensure that no deterioration is caused by the interaction of local climatic conditions. All materials shall be inspected by the Contractor or his representative before shipment to ensure that the finishes are in accordance with the specifications. The Contractor shall be responsible for the safe storage of materials on site and provision of such covering as may be necessary to ensure that on completion, all items are handed over in a sound condition with all protective finishes undamaged.

A.20

LABELS AND IDENTIFICATION All main switches, isolating switches, distribution boards and main switch boards shall have affixed to the outside by means of four small round-head screws, labels of not less than 50 x12 mm high, engraved with 5 mm black lettering to indicate the purpose of the switch or distribution board. The labels shall be of white/black/white traffolyte. The minimum height of lettering for switchgear equipment shall be 10 mm. Contractor to provide an A2 size drawing showing the schematic diagrams for Electrical and Fire Alarm Systems. The electrical schematic shall be framed and fixed in the MV room at a location to be agreed with the Engineer. For fire alarm, the same shall be fixed next to the fire alarm panel. Each distribution board shall be provided with type-written or printed circuit list on cartridge paper protected overall by thin perspex sheet and fixed to the inside of the door. The circuit list shall give the number and details of points served by each circuit and the rating of the fuse or circuit breaker. Sample lists shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval before installation. Each underground cable shall have its size and feeder's name engraved/punched on an aluminium strip 12 mm wide of 16 gauge thickness and shall be tightened on each end where cables enter/come out of trench or soil. All the accessible switch boards, distribution boards, lids, covers and door of any equipment which contains terminals or conductors connected to more than one phase, shall be provided with warning plate - "DANGER 440 VOLTS" having 12 mm red letters on white vitreous enamel plate. The method of fixing shall be as detailed above. All conductors shall have their outer covering coloured to the phase colour to which they are connected. An instruction notice giving details of First Aid Treatment for electric shock shall be positioned in each switch room. Manufacturer's or Contractor's names or trade marks shall not be exhibited anywhere through the installation without the prior approval and permission of the Engineer with the exception that the Contractor's name, address, telephone number and contact person shall be fixed in the main switch room at the appropriate position.

E - 10

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

A.21

WORKS TESTS AND CERTIFICATES As per Qatar construction specifications (Q.C.S). The Contractor shall supply all the Test certificates in original to the Engineer at the time of handing over the project.

A.22

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS The Contractor shall provide six copies in the form of bound documents the operating instructions and Maintenance manuals with printed name of the project, consultant and contractor on the cover indicating the following : i. ii. iii. iv. v. vi. vii. Step to step operating procedures. Preventive maintenance schedule. Technical literature Spare parts list Manufacturer's name, address, fax no., telephone no., and contact person. Work test certificates, if any. Routine test results carried out at site.

A.23

AS-BUILT DRAWINGS After the working drawings have been approved, no alteration to the drawings shall be carried out without the consent of the Engineer. These changes shall be supported by sketches and incorporated on the 'As-built' drawings which are to be submitted to the Engineer within one month of completion of the project. Two sets of process negatives along with three sets of drawings shall be submitted after approval of the Engineer for onward submission to the Client. A set of computer CDs should also be provided for all the as-built drawings.

PART 'B' - EQUIPMENT SECTION

B.1

TRANSFORMER The Contractor shall include for the supply, installation, testing and commissioning of an oil type transformer 11 kV / 415 volt for the 2x1600 kVA rating as specified on the contract drawings. The detailed specifications for the transformer shall have to
E - 11

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

be obtained from Kahra-maa by the Contractor. The Contractor shall obtain Kahramaa approval before buying the transformer. After installation of the transformer, the testing and commissioning shall be carried out as per Kahra-maa regulations and shall be approved by them. The single core secondary cables from the transformer to the M.V. panel incomer shall be laid by the Contractor. However, the H.V. cables shall be laid by Kahramaa. UPVC Ducts The underground ducts or sleeves shall be of UPVC to BS 4660 and GCC specifications. The minimum wall thickness of ducts shall be as under: * * 160 mm diameter 110 mm diameter : : 3.6 mm 2.4 mm

The UPVC pipes, all parallel sockets and long radius bends shall be of high impact resistance of minimum impact strength of 4.6 to 5.5 joules with colour code Black or Grey and to Kahra-maa approval. All underground ducts shall be installed 600 mm below ground and wherever road crossings, it shall be encased in concrete and with slow radius bend at the ends with appropriate pull cord in each duct.

B.2

MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCHBOARD

General The Contractor shall supply, erect, install, test and commission a medium voltage switch board, factory assembled, front accessible and by a Specialist manufacturer. The switch board shall be suitable for operating on a 3 phase, 4 wire, 415 volts, 50 Hz supply. The ampere rating of the panel shall be as indicated on the drawings. The symmetrical fault rating shall be of minimum 44 kA for 3 seconds. The whole of the switch board shall be type tested, assembly in accordance with IEC 60439-1 Standard covering verification of the following seven tests on the same panel configuration from an internationally, recognised testing laboratory. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Temperature rise limits Short circuit withstand strength Dielectric properties Effectiveness of protection circuit. Clearance and creepage distances Mechanical operation Degree of protection for the enclosure

Copies of the test certificates shall be submitted for Engineers approval.

E - 12

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

All the equipment like ACB, MCCB, relay etc., shall be of the latest technology having latest protection and metering system. The switchboard shall be totally compartmentalised and manufactured to BS EN 60439-1, IEC 439-1, Form 3B Type 2. The switchboard shall be so designed to ensure safety during operation, inspection and maintenance and so arranged to minimise the risk of fire arising and spreading. The switchboard shall comprise all equipment necessary to control all associated services including all instruments, interlocking, CTs, auxiliary fuses, relays, control wiring and interconnections. The switch board shall be of the free standing cubicle pattern having rear, top and bottom access. It shall not be possible to access live parts from the front of the switch board. It shall be sectionalised to facilitate easy transport and erection. The switch board shall be of robust construction, fabricated from heavy gauge folded steel angles strengthened by horizontal and vertical folded channels. The thickness of structure shall be as per the ASTA certificate issued for the proposed panel. The framework shall be enclosed in self-supporting, screw-on front, rear and top covers of sheet steel with gaskets. Covers shall be of a minimum of 1.6 mm (16 swg) thick sheet steel. The doors shall have concealed hinges provided with gaskets. The height of the switch board shall be limited to 2200mm unless specifically required to meet the site constraints and approved in writing by the Engineer. The manufacturer of the switch board shall provide at a height of not less than 900mm from the cable glanding plate, a purposely installed cable connection arrangement with terminals suitably marked and identified for the incoming cables to the approval of Kahra-maa. The structure shall be protected from rust and oxidisation. The paint shall be applied to rust and grease free surface of metal. The steel shall be electro-zinc plated (ZINTEC) and must have a minimum of priming coat, undercoat and finishing coat. The undercoat and finishing coat shall be stove enamelled. The finished paint colour code number as per appropriate B.S. shall be selected from manufacturer's range with the Engineer's approval prior to manufacturing. All busbars shall be 3 phase and full neutral and shall comply with B.S. 159. They shall be of high conductivity rectangular section, hard-drawn copper, electrolytic grade suitably marked and colour coded PVC sleeves in accordance with B.S. 159 or epoxy painted with thickness 80 to 100 micron. The material of the PVC sleeves shall be fire retardant of 1.2 mm thick. The short circuit ratings of the bus bars shall be as stated above. All the busbars shall be provided with bolts, nuts, pressure type flat washers and spring washers at all joints. The jointing of bus bars shall be carried out by special torque wrench to the pressure recommended by the relevant B.S. The switchboard shall be so arranged that the bus bars are accessible without removing any ACB, fuse switch, isolator or MCCB.
E - 13

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

Insulators for busbar supports shall be non-hygroscopic and of non-ageing material and shall be able to withstand the designed fault current referred above. All interconnections shall be of copper bus bars. These connections shall be so arranged that they do not obstruct the access to cable terminations. The switch board shall be complete with all necessary sealing chambers and cable connecting (glanding) plates to terminate all incoming and outgoing cables. Where single core cables are required to enter the switch board, a removable non-ferrous gland plate shall be provided. The outgoing MCCBs shall be located in their own compartments completely segregated from all other parts of the switch board with front access and the handle shall be door inter-lockable and pad-lockable. All outgoing circuits shall be prewired back to a purposely installed cable connecting bar located 600mm above the base of the panel and suitably inscribed with feeder name or number. Cable boxes, glands and lugs shall be supplied and installed as applicable for each main or submain cable entering or leaving the cubicle. Cable glands shall be as near to the terminations as possible but enough space shall be allowed to terminate cables. Cable glands shall be of brass and compression type to suit the size of cable. Where termination chambers are provided for outgoing cables, terminations shall consist of adequately fixed threaded cadmium plated steel studs to which cable lugs shall be fixed with nuts and washers. Control wiring within the cubicle shall be in accordance with B.S. 6004 or B.S. 5467 and shall be neatly arranged and cleated. Cleats shall be fixed to the switch board structure at sufficient intervals to avoid cable sag. Adequate cable loops must be allowed to accessories on doors to avoid cable stretch. Control wiring within the switch boards shall be a minimum 2.5 sq.mm and protected by HRC fuses of 20A mounted directly on the bus bars in an accessible location. The bus bar shroud shall be extended around the fuse bases to prevent accidental contact with the bus bars while replacing the fuses. If a special chamber is required, e.g. to accommodate the panel manufacturer's CTs or to provide essential, non-essential services (split bus bars) this will be indicated on the diagram of distribution. Each bus bar chamber shall be constructed to withstand the fault rating as laid down by Kahra-maa. The neutral bus bars shall be linked to the earth bus bars. These links shall be removable. The earth bar shall be a minimum of 300 sq. mm or 50% of phase bus bar and continuous throughout the length of the panel. Under no circumstance, a common earth/neutral bar will be accepted. All earth bars shall be so mounted that there is no restriction to the cable access by the structure / frame work. If required, cable trays shall be mounted to support the cables.
E - 14

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

The cubicle protection shall be IP 42 to BSEN 60529. The switch board manufacturer shall be deemed to have included in his price for compliance with Kahra-maa regulations for all internal wiring, connections, earthing tapes, meters and instruments etc. Drawings The manufacturer shall submit to the Engineer before manufacture, detail drawings showing the layout, construction, dimensions, weights and connections of the switch board. Unless otherwise instructed, no manufacturing work is to be carried out until the drawings have the Engineer's and Kahra-maa approval in writing. The Contractor shall approach Kahra-maa for approval after obtaining approval from the Engineer. Labels Each item of equipment shall be provided with a label, the exact wording to be agreed with the Engineer. The label shall be made of traffolyte with black lettering on a white background and shall be screwed to the switch board. The minimum height of lettering shall be 6mm. Forms for Panel The forms for the assembly of switch board and dividing of assemblies by barrier or partitions, metallic or non-metallic into separate sub-compartments shall be according to BSEN 60439-1. Note : Moulded case circuit breaker (MCCB) shall not be used without compartmentalisation in Form 3 and 4 panels. The body of MCCB shall not be considered as separation of all functional units.

Air Circuit Breakers Air circuit breakers shall be fully withdrawable type, motor operated mechanism, 3 pole with solid neutral suitable for 3 phase, 415 volts, 4 wires, 50 Hz alternating current supply as indicated on the drawings. ACBs shall be of the horizontal withdrawable, load making and breaking type with the contacts being of the double break pattern with arcing chutes, shutters etc. The main arcing contacts shall be of the high pressure butt type with wipe and roll action on opening and closing. The main contacts shall be of silver alloy. Removable arc chutes shall be fitted together with an air circuit breaker. ACB shall be complete with a mechanical ON/OFF position indicator, pad-lockable. ACB shall conform to B.S. EN 60947-2 (EN 60947-2, IEC 947-2) and B.S. EN 60664-1. Each circuit breaker shall be enclosed in sheet steel and provided with three phase manual and automatic isolating devices suitably interlocked so as to prevent isolation except when the circuit breaker is in open position. It shall be arranged in such a manner that it will not be possible to withdraw the breaker or remove the
E - 15

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

front cover unless the ACB is in the isolated position. Provision shall be made for locking the ACB in this position (isolated position). Shutters shall be provided to protect the live terminals against accidental touch when the ACBs are in a fully withdrawable position. The ACB shall have solid state overload and short circuit protection devices along with earth fault trip mechanism. The solid state circuit shall be provided with proper LED indication to indicate the trip status of the ACB. The ACBs shall be equipped with shunt trip of 30V DC trip mechanism for tripping the breaker with restrictive earth fault relay to be provided separately with suitable size of CTS. The ACB shall have adjustable settings and following facility: * * * * * * * * * * * Long time current setting and tripping delay. Overload signal Short time pick up and tripping delay Instantaneous pick-up. Earth leakage or earth-fault pick-up and tripping delay with OFF position Earth leakage test button Long time rating plug screw Test connector Lamp test, reset and battery test Indication of tripping cause Setting / programmable buttons

The ultimate breaking capacity (ICU) shall be minimum of 44 kA for 3 seconds. The rated service breaking capacity (ICS) and rated short time withstand current (ICW) shall be equal to or greater than ICU. The ACB section of the switch board shall be in separate cubicle separated from other parts of the switch board. This section shall not have any outgoing feeders. The gland plate for the incoming cables shall be non-ferrous material with brass compression type glands, earthing tags and shrouds. In case single core PILCA/PVC cables are used, the clamping arrangement is to be supplied as per the sketch nos. 9 & 10 shown on pages 144/145 of Kahra-maa regulations.

Outgoing Feeders Moulded Case Circuit Breaker Contractor to provide MCCB's as indicated on the tender drawings for the outgoing feeders. They shall be triple pole, 415 volts, 50 Hz, with magnetic short circuit and thermal over load protection complying with BS EN 60947-2. MCCB shall be of interrupting rating as indicated below and conform to Kahra-maa regulations. In case these MCCB's do not meet with required fault level, the current limiting device shall be used in series with them as per Kahra-maa regulations Table No.1.
E - 16

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

The following fault levels of MCCB can be used in the MV panel : High Interrupting Capacity Breakers (Moulded Case) Frame Size 160 A 250 A 400 A 630 A 800 A Voltage Rating 660 660 660 660 660 Breaking Capacity (KA) 35 50 50 50 60

Thermal magnetic adjustment for standard and high Interrupting circuit breakers (MCCB)
Circuit Breaker Rated Voltage
Thermal Setting Adjustable From To (A) Magnetic Setting Adjustable From To (A) 100-125A 660 V 160A 660 V 250A 660 V 400A 660 V 250A 187-250 320A 240-320 400A 300-400 630A 660 V 400A 300-400 500A 375-500 630A 472-630

100A70-100 100A 63-100 200A 140-200 125A 94-125 160A 100-160 250A 175-250 Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed

Thermal Magnetic Release

200A 1000-2000 250A 1250-2500 400A 2000-4000 320A 1600-3200 500A 2400-5000 250A 1250-2500 400A 2000-4000 630A 3200-6300

Note :

Loads which may have peaks of comparatively short duration above its rated value, e.g. motors, capacitors etc. Circuits feeding such apparatus are called fluctuating load circuits and such circuits shall be protected by miniature circuit breakers for fluctuating load circuits. For these loads, the circuit breakers shall have time/current characteristics that will allow the transient overcurrent to be carried without tripping or derate the size of MCCB to take care of this transient current as recommended by the manufacturer.

D.C Supply 30V D.C. supply is required for tripping of the LV ACBs through D.C. shunt trip for restricted earth fault relay. Contractor to provide for this unit complete with trickle charger and long life nickel-cadmium batteries. The unit shall be designed to operate on 240V,1 Phase, 50 Hz A.C. supply and for continuous duty at an ambient temperature of 50C. and 98% relative humidity. The capacity of the unit is to be determined by the manufacturers and based on number of trip units.

Meters and Instruments Provision shall be made in the M.V. cubicle main switch board for the installation of the metering equipment, located in a separate cubicle above the main incomer. The panel manufacturer shall supply and install their current transformers complete with wiring to the future Kahra-maa meter positions. All CTs shall be Class 'B' and located on the main busbars immediately after the main incoming switch/breaker
E - 17

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

so as to facilitate the metering at source in future. The CTs shall be positioned on removable links. Meters and instruments shall be housed in separate compartments and shall conform to the requirements of B.S. 37, 89 Part 1, B.S. 90, B.S. 3938, 3941, 142 and B.S. 3693 Part 1. All meters and instruments shall be flush mounted on the facia of the switch board so that all will be easily visible and accessible and be of the following type. 3 nos. : 1 no. : Ammeter suitably scaled with maximum demand indication (max. demand dead pointer) Voltmeter, 0 - 500 volts, with OFF, phase to phase and phase to neutral selector switch and cartridge fuses. Current transformer, -/5A, 5VA burden and Class 1 accuracy for ammeters. Current transformer -/5A, 5VA burden and suitable accuracy for kWH meter. The CTs shall be capable for dual reading (i.e. 2000 A and 2500 A) HRC type control fuses; maximum rating - 20A; bus-bar mounted. HRC control fuses, 6A (carrier 20A) for future kWH meter. Restrictive earth fault relay - 10 to 40% or 20 - 80% setting with time delay and complete with a set of four current transformers 30 volts DC shunt trip with auxiliary switch. Red, Yellow and Green indicator lamps to give phase indication with control fuse. Trip alarm with acceptance and reset push buttons (alarm bell to be located outside the panel board). Cable box/terminals for control cable to provide inter-tripping interlock facility between H.V. and L.V. circuit breakers. Test Terminals for maintenance purposes

4 nos. : 6 nos. :

3 sets : 9 sets : 1 no. :

3 nos. : 3 sets : 1 set :

2 sets : 1 set :

The class and accuracy required shall be Class 3 for metering including instruments and recorders and Class 5 P10 for protection. All the breakers, ACBs, MCCBs and other electrical components of the panel shall be calibrated to 50C ambient temperature for use in the State of Qatar.

POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITOR BANKS 1. SCOPE: This specification covers the design, manufacture, assembly, testing at the manufacturers works at country of origin before dispatch, installation, site testing and commissioning etc., of Automatically Switched Low Voltage Capacitor Banks to be installed and connected to the Main LV Distribution Boards in order to improve the power factor and maintain between 0.95 lag and unity, as per KHARAMAA regulations. E - 18

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

2. TYPE: The power factor correction capacitor banks shall be three phase, of modular design, shall be switched ON/OFF automatically in steps through the use of Electromagnetic Contactors designed for capacitor switching depending on the type of electrical loads and shall incorporate series reactors to prevent amplification of system harmonics and resonance. 3. NORMAL RATING: The normal rating of the Capacitor Banks shall be the maximum continuous rating under the worst temperature conditions encountered in Qatar (i.e., at 50oC). The capacitors banks, series reactors, power factor controllers, power quality meters, switchgear and other equipment called for in this specification must give continuous and trouble free service under the arduous temperature conditions mentioned above. 4. APPLICABLE STANDARDS Unless specified otherwise the capacitor banks shall conform in design, material, construction and performance to the latest editions of the IEC standards, their corresponding British / European (BS EN) standards and in particular to the following publications : IEC 60831-1 & 2: IEC 61921: IEC 60076-6: IEC 60085-1: IEC 60664: IEC 60439-1: IEC 60947-1: IEC 60947-2: IEC 60947-4-1: IEC 60529: IEEE 519-1992: Shunt power capacitors of the self-healing type for A.C. systems having a rated voltage up to and including 1000 V. Power capacitors Low voltage power factor correction banks. Power transformers - Part 6: Reactors Electrical insulation Thermal evaluation and designation. Insulation coordination for equipment within low-voltage systems. Low-Voltage Switchgear and Control gear Assemblies - Part 1: Type- Tested and Partially Type-Tested Assemblies. Low-voltage Switchgear and Control gear - Part 1: General Rules Low-voltage Switchgear and Control gear - Part 2: CircuitBreakers. Low-voltage Switchgear and Control gear Part 4-1: Contactors and Motor-starters. Degree of protection provided enclosures (IP code) IEEE Recommended Practices and Requirements for Harmonic Control in Electric Power Systems.

In addition to the above listed standards, the regulations for electrical installations issued by KAHRAMAA shall also be adhered to. 5. DRAWINGS AND INFORMATION The contractor shall furnish the following drawings and documents along this submittal for approval: 1. Dimensioned drawing showing outline of the capacitor bank. 2. Single line diagram showing all the major electrical components. 3. Protection and control schematics of the capacitor bank E - 19

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

Details of cable terminations and fittings. Foundation plan, including foundation loading. Original catalogues for various proposed components. Type test certificates of all the major components including the capacitor bank. Technical Manual giving installation, operation and maintenance instructions Schedule of recommended spare parts.

6. CAPACITOR UNITS: The capacitor units shall be dry, self-healing type with individual and internal discharge resistors shall be protected against internal faults, over pressure, etc. and shall fully comply with and tested to the requirements of the International Electro-technical Commission Publication No IEC 60831, Part-1 and Part-2. Each coil must have 3 internal protections: self healing of the film electrical fuse overpressure device The capacitor units will be installed in an electrical distribution system having system voltage of 415 volts (System highest voltage 457 volts) and shall be rated at 525 volts due to the voltage rise caused by connecting the detuned series reactors. The ambient temperature category of the capacitor units shall be -25/D as per the IEC Publication No. 60831, Part-1, but as mentioned under Cl.2, the normal rating of the capacitor banks shall be the maximum continuous rating under the worst temperature conditions encountered in Qatar (i.e., at 50oC). The capacitors shall be completely leakage proof and of dry type construction without any filling of jelly, wax, etc. They shall be of the self-healing type utilizing low-loss metalized polypropylene film dielectrics. Unit coils must be coated under vacuum to insure no air or humidity remains close to the electrical part. The capacitor element casings shall be from Aluminum a self-extinguishing polyurethane resin casing or high temperature withstanding material. Each unit coil capacitor element shall have an internal HRC fuse combined with a secondary solid foil electrode to ensure safe disconnection from the circuit at the end of its normal working life. Each unit coil shall be provided in such a way to automatically disconnect the capacitor unit from supply if excessive pressure is generated inside the unit. The capacitors shall have permanently connected built-in discharge resistors to ensure safe discharge of the capacitors to less than 50 volts in 1 minute after switch off. The total losses including discharge resistors to be less than 0.5 Watt/KVAR. The capacitors shall be rated for a minimum of 130% continuous current overload and 110% continuous voltage overload based on the Rated Voltage of the capacitors.

7. SERIES REACTORS TO PREVENT AMPLIFCATION OF SYSTEM HARMONICS The three phase series reactors to be connected in series with each capacitor unit for harmonic current suppression and to prevent resonance shall be iron cored type with copper windings. The reactor shall comply with the IEC Publication No. 60076-6. The current ratings of the Reactors shall be increased suitably to take into account the effect of harmonics in the networks which could be generated by variable speed drives, dimmers, elevators, UPS system, fax machines, computers, fluorescent and other discharge lamps, E - 20

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

etc. The offered Reactors shall be tested by harmonic current generating test equipment with magnitudes corresponding to the maximum harmonic current magnitudes measured in any distribution system. All necessary test reports for such tests and measurements shall be submitted to the Purchaser for scrutiny and record purposes. The reactor insulation shall be Class H rated at 180oC to IEC 60085-1. The maximum temperature of the reactor at maximum continuous RMS amperage shall be no higher than 145oC with a 45 oC ambient. The maximum continuous RMS amperage of the reactor shall be sized to match the maximum continuous RMS amperage of the capacitors. The minimum reactor Q factor shall be 25. The Reactors shall be equipped with snap action thermostats to trip at 160oC and shall be wired to the associated controller output contact. In the event of a reactor Over Temperature the stage contactor shall open. There should be an option of automatic re-closures or latching action. The Capacitors and the Reactors combination shall be tuned below the lowest harmonic present in a particular distribution system. 8. CIRCUIT BREAKERS: The capacitor bank shall have a suitably rated circuit breaker at the incomer. The circuit breaker shall be a three pole MCCB and shall fully comply with the requirements of the IEC 60947-1 & 2. They shall be rated for a minimum insulation voltage of 660 V and designed for 52 degrees C ambient temperature. The current rating shall be at least 1.5 times the full load current of the capacitor bank and have a mechanical endurance of a minimum 1000 operations. It shall have a rotary front operating door mounted handle and should be interlocked with the door to ensure that the capacitor bank is de-energized when door is open. Each stage of the capacitor bank shall also have a suitably rated circuit breaker. The circuit breaker shall be adjusted to trip if the RMS current of the stage exceeds 130%. 9. ELECTROMAGNETIC CONTACTOR: The electromagnetic contactors shall be 690 Volts rated, of 3-pole type suitable for switching 'on' and switching 'off' operations of capacitor banks and shall comply with the requirements of the IEC 60947-1 & 4-1. The supplier shall choose a contactor of a suitable operational current rating taking into consideration the inrush current and the special considerations of capacitor switching duty. Incidence of higher inrush current in the case of successive switching of capacitor banks shall also be taken into account. The supplier shall furnish data sheet of contactor in support of proper selection of the contactor rating including the making and breaking current ratings. The contactors shall isolate all three supply phases to the capacitor on switch off. The rated voltage of control coil shall be 415V (phase-to-phase). This voltage is subject to a variation of (+) 20% and (-) 40%. The contactors shall work satisfactorily within this voltage range. The pick up voltage of coil shall be 60% and drop out voltage shall not be more than 50% of rated voltage. The mechanical endurance of the contactors shall not be less than 3 million operating cycles at no load. The electrical endurance at normal utilization duty for capacitor shall not be less than 200,000 operations. The contactors shall be subjected to routine and type tests as described in IEC 60947. TDD / THD CALCULATIONS: With capacitors and reactors connected in series it should be proved through submission of software simulations / calculations that the Total Demand Distortion (TDD) / Total E - 21

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

Harmonic Distortion (THD) is within the limits as specified in IEEE Std 519-1992, standards on IEEE recommended practices and requirements for Harmonic Control in Electric Power System. If the TDD / THD limits are exceeded even with the use of the detuned capacitor banks, then suitably rated Active Harmonic Filters shall be proposed in conjunction with the detuned capacitor banks to limit the TDD / THD below the specified limits in IEEE 519.

10. ACTIVE HARMONIC FILTERS FOR HARMONIC CURRENT FILTERATION : The Active Harmonic Filters shall work on the principle of measurement of harmonic currents and generate actively a harmonic spectrum in opposite phrase to the measured distorting harmonic current thereby canceling the original harmonics. a) The rating of the Active Harmonic Filters shall be so selected that the Total Harmonic Voltage Distortion at the point of common coupling is brought down to below the Total Demand Distortion (TDD) limits specified in IEEE 519. Extracts of IEEE 519 is as shown below:

b)

Should there be large a component of single phase non linear loads present in a distribution system ( offices, shopping malls etc) then measurements / calculations must be carried out to ascertain the magnitude of the third harmonic current. Provisions shall be made for a 120A, 3 Phase, 4 wire active harmonic filters. Should there be large a component of three phase non linear loads present in a distribution system ( Industrial loads with VFDs etc) then measurements / calculations must be carried out to ascertain the magnitude of the third harmonic current. Provisions shall be made for a 300A, 3 Phase, 3 wire active harmonic filters. The Active Harmonic Filters shall be of parallel configuration. The Active Harmonic Filters shall monitor all three phases of the low voltage line current in real time by means of a Digital Signal Processor (DSP). The output of the DSP unit in combination with a micro-controller based system shall generate a pulse width modulated (PWM) signal to control power modules based on IGBT (Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor) technology which act as a current source. E - 22

c)

d) e) f)

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

g) h)

The PWM signal shall be of fixed switching frequency. The system shall be operated under closed loop control and shall have a maximum response time of not more than 40 milliseconds. The control system shall be such that the Active Filter cannot be overloaded. Simultaneous filtering shall be provided for all harmonics up to the 50th one. The filtering efficiency shall be typically of better than 97%. The operating power factor of the Active Harmonic Filters shall be programmable over the range 0.7 capacitive. Both fixed and dynamic reactive power compensation shall be available for selection by the programmer. The Active Harmonic Filters shall be protected against over current, short-circuit, thermal overload and IGBT bridge abnormal operation.

i) j) k)

l)

m) The design of the Active Harmonic Filters shall be such that the current rating of the filter system can be increased by the addition of extra power modules. n) o) p) Optional graphic monitoring of the wave shape shall be provided. Optional on-line harmonic analysis shall be provided. After the installation of the Active Harmonic Filters, harmonic measurements shall be carried out by the Contractor to prove that the Total Harmonic Distortion is within IEEE 519 limits as confirmed by the tenderer, at the time of award of the Contract.

11. AUTOMATIC POWER FACTOR CONTROLLERS: The automatic power factor controller shall be microprocessor based VAR Sensing type and shall comply with IEC 61326. The controller shall be able to sense the reactive current requirement and switch on / off to the required stage of the capacitor bank. a) The automatic power factor controller shall maintain a targeted power factor within 0.95 lagging and unity. b) The controller shall be programmed to have different switching sequences. In general, for 500 KVAR Capacitor Banks the sequence shall be 1:1:2:2:2:2 (i.e., 50/50/100/100/100/100 KVAR. c) The controller shall sense current from a single phase and voltage from two phases to compute the average 3-phase power factor and accordingly compensate by switching in necessary capacitor stages. d) The controller shall be suitable for 1A or 5 A current input. e) The voltage on the capacitor terminals may be particularly high at times of light load conditions. In such cases, some or all of the capacitors shall be switched out of circuit in order to prevent overstressing of the capacitors and undue voltage increase in the distribution system. f) The controller shall be easily programmable from front panel itself. g) The controller shall be able to recognize the connection of CT and Voltage and be able to automatically adjust itself to the phase angle difference. h) The voltage input to the controller should be through a VT and protected by a fuse.

E - 23

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

i) There should be a time delay of 120 seconds for Switching on a capacitor bank into circuit, from its last disconnection from the circuit. j) The controller shall have LED / LCD Display. Parameter in display should be cyclic with suitable time delay. The display unit shall be easily visible, without opening the APFC Cabinet door/cover. The APF controller shall display the following parameters. k) The Automatic Power Factor Controllers shall allow the following settings and readings. i) ii) iii) iv) v) vi) vii) viii) ix) x) xi) xii) xiii) xiv) xv) xvi) xvii) xviii) Discharge time, Disconnection pause of relay stages, Power station service, Choke degree, Voltage transformer ratio, Harmonic table, Switching frequency of transistor stages, Averaging time for reactive power, Averaging time of the mean value cos (phi), Fan control, Over temperature disconnection, Indication in manual mode, Password, Contrast, Reset of programming, Connection configuration, Software release, RS485 interface.

l) The Automatic Power Factor Controllers shall initiate alarms and warnings in the following events. xix) xx) xxi) xxii) xxiii) xxiv) xxv) xxvi) xxvii) Insufficient capacitor output Over current Under voltage Over voltage Over temperature Total voltage harmonic distortion Overcompensation Low current No voltage release

m) The Automatic Power Factor Controllers shall instantaneously switch off the thyristor in the following contingencies occurring in any of the Phases. i) ii) Voltage above 457V. Voltage below 290V.

12. POWER QUALITY METERING: The Power Quality (PQ) Meter shall be a Digital Signal Processor (DSP) based micro controller operating as an intelligent unit to monitor and measure all the electrical parameters of the system as well as that of the capacitor control panel. The controller shall sense and monitor 3 Phase Currents, Neutral Current, 3 Phase Voltages, 3 Phase Power Factors, 3 Phase KW, KVA, KVAR, KW-HR, KVA-HR, KVAR-HR, Capacitance of all 3 phases, Capacitance of each capacitor and % THD, and shall switch in necessary rating of capacitors to maintain the minimum power factor specified.

E - 24

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

1) Compliance to Standards: a) The power quality meters shall comply with one or more of the following safety/construction standards: i) IEC 61010-1 (EN 61010-1): Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement, control and laboratory use. ii) CSA C22.2 No 1010-1: Canadian Standards Association. Certified by Canadian Standards Association (CSA). iii) UL 61010B-1 Measuring, Testing and Signal Generation Equipment iv) IEC 62052-11: Electricity metering equipment (AC) General requirements, tests and test conditions. b) The power quality meters shall comply to the following electromagnetic immunity standards: i) IEEE C.37-90.1: IEEE Standard Surge Withstand Capability (SWC) Tests for Protective Relays and Relay Systems (ANSI). All inputs tested, except for the network communications port. ii) IEC 1000-4-2 (EN61000-4-2/IEC801-2): Electrostatic Discharge (B). iii) IEC 1000-4-3 (EN61000-4-3/IEC801-3): Radiated EM Field Immunity (A). iv) IEC 1000-4-4 (EN61000-4-4/IEC801-4): Electric Fast Transient (B). v) IEC 1000-4-5 (EN61000-4-5/IEC801-5): Surge Immunity (B). IEC 1000-4-6 (EN61000-46/IEC801-6): Conducted Immunity. vii) IEC 1000-4-12 (EN61000-4-12/IEC801-12): Immunity to damped oscillatory waves. viii) IEC 1000-3-2 (EN61000-3-2): Limits for harmonic currents emissions (equipment input current < 16 amps per phase). ix) IEC 1000-3-3 (EN61000-3-3): Limitation of voltage fluctuations and flicker in low voltage supply systems for equipment with rated current < 16 amps. c) The power quality meter shall have a 3rd party certification proving compliance to one or more of the following electromagnetic emission standards: i) FCC Part 15 Subpart B, Class A: Class A Digital Device, Radiated Emissions. ii) ICES-003, Industry Canada, Interference Causing Equipment Standard (ICES) Class A Digital Device, Radiated/Conducted Emissions. iii) EN55011 (CISPR 11): Radiated/Conducted Emissions (Group 1, Class A). iv) EN55022 (CISPR 22): Radiated/Conducted Emissions (Class A). 2) Current/Voltage Inputs: a) The current input for power quality meter as well as APF controller shall be taken from the same current transformer on the LV board. b) The power quality meter shall have no less then 4 voltage inputs and 5 current inputs. c) In its standard configuration, the meter shall be able to accept 600VAC LL / 347VAC LN without using potential transformers. d) It shall be able to withstand 1500 VAC RMS continuously without damaging the device. e) It shall have adequate nominal and overcorrect current ratings. 3) Measured Values: a) The power quality meter shall provide at minimum the following voltage, current, power and energy values: Voltage: Voltage LL Per-Phase Voltage L-L 3-Phase Avg Voltage LN Per-Phase Voltage 3-Phase Avg Voltage % unbalanced E - 25

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

Current: Current Per-Phase Current, Neutral (measured) Current 3-Phase Avg Current % Unbalanced Power: Real Power (Per-Phase, 3-Phase Total) Reactive Power (Per-Phase, 3-Phase Total) Apparent Power (Per-Phase, 3-Phase Total) Power Factor True (Per-Phase, 3-Phase Total) Power Factor Displacement (Per-Phase, 3-Phase Total) Energy: Accumulated Energy (Real kWh, Reactive kVARh, Apparent kVAh) (Signed/Absolute) Incremental Energy (Real kWh, Reactive kVARh, Apparent kVAh) (Signed/Absolute) Conditional Energy (Real kWh, Reactive kVARh, Apparent kVAh) (Signed/Absolute) Reactive Energy by Quadrant

4) Accuracy: The power quality meters shall meet the following accuracy classes. a) ANSI C12.20 accuracy class 0.2. b) IEC62053-22: Electricity metering equipment (AC) particular requirements part 22: static meters for active energy, accuracy class 0.2S c) IEC62053-23: Electricity metering equipment (AC) particular requirements part 23: static meters for reactive energy, accuracy class 1. 5) Sampling: a) The power quality meter shall sample at 256 samples / cycle. b) The meter shall be able to perform high speed sag/swell detection of voltage disturbances on a cycle-by-cycle basis, providing the duration of the disturbance, the minimum, maximum, and average value of the voltage for each phase during the disturbance. Disturbances less than one cycle in duration can be detected. 6) Display: a) The power quality meter shall have a LCD display of reasonably high level pixel value. b) It shall support direct display of all parameters on the front panel. c) It shall provide a trend display of any parameter internally recorded at regular intervals. d) It shall have a user programmable custom display that is capable of displaying up to 20 quantities on a single screen. e) It shall be able to display advanced graphical representations of metering information including at minimum spectral components, phasor diagrams, and trending charts. f) It shall be able to display measurements in either IEC or IEEE formats. g) It shall be able to display the following front panel screens: i) Numeric: Display 2, 3, 3 with timestamp, 4, 8, 10 or 20 parameters at a time. k) Event Log: Display recent events written to the power quality meters event log, including diagnostic events. l) Nameplate: Display information in a tabular format (default nameplates show owner, meter and power system details). m) Trend Bar: Display up to 4 real time numeric parameters along with their upper and lower extremes. n) Histogram: Display harmonics content in histogram format, including 2nd to 63rd harmonic, THD (total, even, odd); current harmonics histogram screens display K Factor and Crest Factor. 0) Phasor: Display phase information in phasor diagram format, including phase, voltage and current magnitudes; phasors that are too small in magnitude are shown as table entries only. E - 26

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

7) Logging: a) The power quality meter shall have at least 5MB of user programmable onboard data logging. Field Expansion shall be possible. b) The PMS will store all critical internal and revenue data upon sudden power loss. c) The meter shall have non-volatile memory. d) It shall have a time-stamped event log with the following features: i) Supports at least 500 events. ii) The number of records in the log is programmable. iii) Each event is recorded with the date and time of the event, the cause and effect of the event, and the priority of the event. iv) All events relating to set-point activity, relay operation and self-diagnostics is recorded in the event log. v) Time stamps have a resolution of 1 millisecond. vi) Time stamps can be synchronized to within 100 ms between devices on the same serial communications medium. vii) Minimum event recording response time is cycle (8.3ms 60Hz, 10ms 50Hz) for high speed events and 1 second for other events. viii) The priority of set-point events is programmable. 8) Alarms: a) The power quality meter shall have set-point driven alarming capability b) It shall be able to generate an email on an alarm condition. c) It shall have millisecond timestamp resolution on alarm entries. d) It shall be able to readjust alarm set-points based on the alarm quantity (Alarm Set-point Learning) e) It shall support consecutive high-speed alarm conditions which trigger on a cycle-bycycle basis with no dead time between events (i.e. no need for a rearming delay time between events). f) It shall be able to operate relays on alarm conditions. g) It shall be able to initiate data log captures on alarm conditions. h) It shall be able to control digital output relays in an AND or an OR configuration, using pulse mode or latch mode operation, for control and alarm purposes. i) It shall be able to combine any logical combination of any number of available set-point conditions to control any internal or external function or event. Capacitor Bank Status Capacitor bank main incomer breaker ON / OFF Stage breaker ON / OFF Over Temperature Alarm / Trip Event Information Power interruption (System & phase wise) Voltage & current unbalance Capacitor Bank fault Critical / Fault Information Like Overloading of transformer Failure of Capacitor Bank Failure of PFC controller

E - 27

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

Load profile, voltage profile, current profile reports shall be available as per requirement. Power supply availability, Interruption report shall be generated. List of overloaded transformers, list of transformers with unbalance load, list of transformers with defective capacitor bank shall be generated on demand. Time for collection of data through GSM modem should be every 5 minutes.

13. CAPACITOR BANK ENCLOSURE SYSTEM: The capacitor bank comprising of capacitor units, power factor controller, series reactors, contactors, MCCB, MCB etc shall be housed in a suitable metallic enclosure having a front door with a provision for locking arrangement. The capacitor bank enclosure shall be fabricated from sheet steel of minimum thickness 2 mm and having Aluzinc coated steel having a coating thickness of minimum 25 microns shall be used for the enclosures. The degree of protection of enclosures for indoor application shall not exceed IP31 in accordance with IEC 60529. The compartment door(s) shall be fitted by long robust weatherproof stainless steel hinges and suitable locking devices. Temperature rise calculations shall be submitted along with the offer to prove that the temperature rise is within the temperature tolerance levels of the capacitor bank components.

14. RATING PLATE: Substantial brass or stainless steel diagram and rating plates shall be provided on the capacitor bank unit giving full detailed information as follows: a) b) c) d) e) f) g) h) i) Manufacturer. Serial number and manufacturing year. Rated total output in kilovars (KVAR) / Number of switchable Capacitors with capacity Rated voltage in volts (V). Rated frequency in hertz (Hz). Suitable for: Rating of Transformer in KVA Maximum power consumption of APFC panel Guarantee period Date of dispatch

15. INTERNAL WIRING: All small wiring shall have a cross sectional area of not less than 2.5 sq. mm. and shall be 600/1000 volts, insulated with type 5 PVC table I of BS. 6746, stranded copper conductors. All small wiring shall be suitably terminated and fitted with identification ferrules and marked with circuit numbers in accordance with British Central Electricity Authority Engineering Recommendations S-12 standard numbers for small wiring or similar approved standard. The trip circuits shall have an additional ferrule colored red and marked trip. All terminal blocks shall be from an approved design and all exposed terminals shall be enclosed by detachable covers. The trip circuit cables shall be colored black and the E - 28

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

instrument transformer cables (C.Ts) colored with their respective phase colors. Alternatively, all small wiring can be uniform color (e.g. grey) but instrument transformer cables shall have additional colored ferrules at both ends of each conductor run (in accordance with their phase colors). The wiring of the auxiliary circuits shall be segregated from the main circuit by heat resistant tubes made of insulating material covered by earthed metallic partitions. Terminal blocks, small wiring terminations, ferrules and wire numbering and coloring shall be subject to the approval of the Purchaser.

16. CAPACITOR BANK INSTALLATION: The installation of the capacitor bank shall be generally in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Clearance shall be provided around the capacitor bank as per the manufacturer's recommendations. The connection between the capacitor bank and the MV Distribution Boards shall be carried out with 2 Nos. of Single Core 240 sq. mm. CU/XLPE cables per phase. Connection cables between the capacitor bank and MV panel shall comply with the relevant clauses of this specification and shall be laid / installed in a fully professional manner. Suitable cable lugs shall be provided for terminations of cables at the capacitor bank and the MV panel. Provision of proper earthing of the capacitor bank shall be made. 17. TESTS: GENERAL The manufacturer shall prepare a programme for routine tests and submit these to the purchaser at least on month before commencement of the programme. Each capacitor unit shall be routine tested to as per IEC 60831, Part-1 and Part-2. Type test certification shall be submitted to the Purchaser for approval. Type test evidence in lieu of tests shall only be accepted on units of identical construction and similar rating to those proposed for this application. Other equipment associated with that capacitor banks shall be subject to routine tests to the relevant IEC standard. The complete capacitor bank assembly shall be subject to insulation testing at the factory. A functional test of the complete capacitor bank control, protection and interlocking schemes shall be carried out in the factory. These shall include secondary injection tests on the protection relays. Routine test results shall be produced and must be available at the time of delivery of the equipment. ROUTINE TESTS: The manufacturer of the capacitor bank shall carry out the tests specified in any applicable International Electro-technical Commission (IEC) and/or British Standard (BS) Specifications, unless otherwise agreed upon and such additional tests in the manufacturers works as in the opinion of the purchaser or his representative are necessary to determine that the works comply with the conditions of these specifications.

E - 29

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

All tests shall be carried out in the presence of and to the satisfaction of the purchaser or his representative and at such times as he may reasonably require. All samples used for testing shall be to the contractors expense and shall not affect the quantities to be supplied under this contract. All instrument used for testing purposes, shall if required by the engineer be calibrated by an approved authority. The cost of all tests shall be included in the contract price and shall not be quoted for separately. The following test / inspections shall be carried out: a) Routine Tests on Capacitor Units All routine tests shall be carried out in accordance with the International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) Publication No. IEC 60831 as per the relevant clauses mentioned against each test. Routine tests shall be carried out by the manufacturer on every capacitor before delivery. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Capacitance measurement and output calculation (Cl. 7). Measurement of the tangent of the loss angle (tan ) of the capacitor (Cl. 8). Voltage test between terminals (Cl. 9.1). Voltage test between terminals and container (Cl.10.1). Test of the internal discharge device (Cl. 11). Sealing test (Cl. 12).

b)

Routine Tests on Capacitor Bank All routine tests shall be carried out in accordance with the International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) Publication No. IEC 60439 as per the relevant clauses mentioned against each test. Routine tests shall be carried out by the manufacturer on every APFC Cabinets before delivery. 1. 2. Inspection, including checking of clearance, dimensions etc. (Cl. 8.3.1) Di-electric Test (Cl. 8.3.2)

TYPE TESTS: a) Type Test on Capacitor Unit : All type tests shall be carried out in accordance with the International Electro-technical Commission (IEC) Publication No. IEC 60831 as per the relevant clauses mentioned against each test. Every capacitor sample to which it is intended to apply the type test shall first have withstood satisfactorily the application of all the routine tests. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Thermal stability test (Cl.13). Measurement of the tangent of the loss angle (tan ) of the capacitor at elevated temperature (Cl. 14). Voltage test between terminals (Cl. 9.2) Voltage test between terminals and container (Cl. 10.2). Lightning impulse voltage test between terminals and container (Cl. 15). Discharge test (Cl. 16). Ageing test (Cl. 17). Self-healing test (Cl. 18). Destruction test (Cl. 19). E - 30

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

b)

Type Tests on Capacitor Bank All type tests shall be carried out in accordance with the International Electro-technical Commission (IEC) Publication No. IEC 60439 as per the relevant clauses mentioned against each test. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Temperature Rise Test (Cl. 8.2.1) Di-electric Test (Cl. 8.2.2) Short-circuit withstand strength ( Cl. 8.2.3) Effectiveness of the protective circuit ( Cl. 8.2.4.1 & 8.2.4.2) Clearances and creepage distances ( Cl. 8.2.5) Mechanical operation ( Cl. 8.2.6) Verification of Degree of Protection (Cl. 8.2.7) Wiring, electrical operation ( Cl. 8.3.1) Electromagnetic compatibility EMC ( Cl. 7.10)

c)

MCCBs, Reactors, Current Transformers : Complete type test certificates for all major components, like MCCBs, Reactors, Current Transformers, etc. shall be submitted as per the relevant IEC/BS standards along with the tender.

d)

Low Voltage Cables: All routine and type tests shall be carried out in accordance with the latest I.E.C. recommendations No. 502 and supplements. NB: If the successful tenderer produces evidence in the form of the test certificates from an acknowledged International Testing authority for any of the type tests listed above on any of the equipment, he may be relieved from repeating that type test. However, if such evidence is not acceptable to the Purchaser for any reason, all the necessary type tests shall be carried out without any extra cost whatsoever.

SITE TESTS: The contractor is responsible for submitting all contract works to site inspection by the Engineer, before site tests are commenced. Before commissioning, the contractor shall depute an experienced and qualified testing Engineer from the manufacturers works to carry out the following tests on the equipment and such other tests that may be considered necessary by the Purchaser. The Site Acceptance Test (SAT) format for the capacitor bank shall be forwarded to the purchaser prior to the SAT. The contractors test engineer shall complete all pre-commissioning tests, commission all plant and equipment supplied by him and hand over the entire contract works to the Purchaser in good shape. All the charges connected with the pre-commissioning tests of the equipment shall be included in the tender price. The contractors testing engineer shall carry out all commissioning tests in co-operation with and to the satisfaction of the Purchasers engineer who will take part in all these tests.

E - 31

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

The Contractor shall provide all test equipment required for different test purposes at site. The following test / inspections at site shall be carried out:

1.

Mechanical Tests: Visual inspection to verify degree of protection creepage and clearance distances. All conductors and cables are checked for proper routing and all devices for proper mounting. Check effectiveness of all mechanical devices, e.g. handles, locks, interlocks, operating devices, etc. Check panel conformity to drawing and Engineers requirements. a) b) c) d) e) f) g) Checking of all mounting plates/fasteners. Checking of dimensions and components as per drawings. Electrical circuits fasteners tightness/ surface area contacts. Crimping and ferrules as per drawing. Labels / Identification/ Nameplate. All doors checking, safety and accessibility. APFC cabinet surface finish/smoothness.

2.

Electrical Tests: Megger test all main circuit through to final terminals. Insulation resistance shall exceed 10 meghoms. Record all measurements. Flash test all main circuit at 2.5 kV for one minute. Record leakage current. Repeat megger test to verify insulation resistance has not been affected by the dielectric test. Function test of all circuit breakers switches, contacts, etc. and every circuit to verify correct operation. Primary and secondary injection tests of all relays, CTs and indicating and metering instruments. a) b) c) d) e) f) Insulations resistance tests between phases and earth and between neutral and earth. Operational test on components. Switching ON/Off of capacitor bank on various KVAR requirement. Checking of Display parameters. Switching On/Off logic verification. Data communication through Serial/optical port between AFC &

E - 32

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

g) h)

HHU(MRI) & dumping of data in computer. Verification of data/reports/functions in base computer software. Prior to energizing the capacitor bank the following checks shall be carried out at site: Operate the equipment through all design functions, including remote operation, actuation of alarm and indicating devices, mechanical and electrical tripping and closing and operation of the protective devices. Insulation resistance measurements on the buses, phase to phase and phase to ground, with all breakers in the fully connected position and contacts open. Control circuit insulation resistance to ground. Inspect all relays and protective devices, and verify settings in accordance with the manufacturers instructions. Inspect current transformers and relays for correct polarity of connections and the installation of jumpers on unused current transformer circuits. Simulate the operations and check the logic of interlocks. Manually close and trip each breaker checking and adjusting the main contact alignment and wiring action in accordance with the manufacturers instructions. Check the phasing on each side tie breaker, before closing. Test protective relay operation for incomer air circuit breakers.

Measurement of the power factor and system harmonics before and after commissioning of the capacitor bank.

B.3

SUBMAIN BOARD The sub-main board shall be suitable for operation on 3 phase, 4 wire, 50 Hz, 415 volts, A.C. supply. The panel shall be cubicle type suitable for wall mounting or free standing, comprising of isolator, contactor, MCCB or switch fuse units as shown on the electrical schematic drawing. The construction shall be of Form 2 type as explained earlier. The bus bars shall be electrolytic copper, PVC sleeved, supported on nonhygroscopic insulating supports conforming to B.S. 159 and suitably derated for providing sleeves. The board shall be equipped with name plates to identify the feeders and also danger boards as specified earlier. The minimum fault level of this panel shall be 25 KA as per Kahra-maa regulations. In case the fault level does not match the specified 25 KA, the current limiting devices shall be provided in accordance with Table no. 1 of Kahra-maa regulations, latest edition. The MCCBs shall be triple pole, moulded case type complete with magnetic short circuit and thermal overload protection, derated for the ambient temperature of 50C.
E - 33

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

The sub-main board shall be complete with ammeters, current transformers and maximum demand indicator. The detailed specifications for MCCBs shall be the same as indicated in the M.V. panel specifications.

POWER METERS (PM) : A. General Provisions 1. All setup parameters required by the PM shall be stores in non-volatile memory. 2. The PM shall support single phase and three-phase, three or four- wire systems with nominal frequencies of 45 to 65 Hz without modification. 3. The PM shall comply with installation category III pollution degree 2 for distribution systems up to 277 V L-N/480 VAC L-L. B. Measured values The PM shall provide the following, true RMS metered quantities: 1. Real-time readings: Current, Voltage, Real Power, Reactive Power, Apparent Power, THD (V and I). 2. Energy Readings: Accumulated Energy (Real KWH, Reactive KVARh, Apparent KVAh). 3. Demand and peak Readings: Current, Real Power, Reactive Power, Apparent Power. 4. Other: Power Factor, Load Operating Time. C. Sampling The Current and Voltage Signals Shall be digitally sampled at a rate high enough to provide true rms accuracy to the 15th harmonic.

D. Minimum and Maximum Values The PM shall provide minimum and maximum values with phase indication via communications and display for the following parameters: Voltage, Current, Power Factor, Real Power Total, Reactive Power Total, Apparent Power Total, THD (Voltage and Current) and Frequency E. Voltage and Current Inputs 1. The Circuit monitor shall allow direct connection to circuits up to 480 volts AC LL with a 20% over range capacity and 2 Mohm (L-L) or 1Mohm (L-N) of voltage input impedance. The PM shall also accept voltage inputs from standard instrument potential transformers with primaries up 1.6MV. 2. The PM shall accept current inputs from standard instrument current transformers with 5 amp secondary output and shall have a metering range of 0-6 amps with the following withstand currents: 15 amp continuous, 50 amp 10 sec per hour, 120 amp 1 sec per hour. F. Accuracy 1. Frequency accuracy shall be .01 Hz from 45 to 65 Hz. 2. No annual calibration shall be required to maintain this accuracy. G. Control Power
E - 34

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

1. The PM shall operate with the following auxiliary power 110-415 VAC, +/- 10% or 125-250 VDC, +/- 20%. H. Display 1. The PM display shall be a back lit LCD, anti-glare and scratch resistant. 2. The PM display shall be capable of providing four values on one screen at the same time. A summary screen shall provide average current, average voltage, power and energy values in a single view. 3. The PM shall provide an intuitive navigation with context-sensitive menus for easy to use.

B.4

DISTRIBUTION BOARDS General Distribution boards shall be totally rust proof and conform to BS EN 60439-1 Part 12 and be suitable for operation on 240/415 volts, 1 phase/3 phase, 50 Hz, 4 wire A.C. system. These boards shall be factory assembled, either flush or surface mounted as indicated on the tender drawings. The boards generally shall have mixed capacity for lighting and general power subcircuits for items as shown and indicated on the drawings or in these electrical specifications. All boards shall be complete with MCBs, RCCBs, main incoming isolator which shall be connected directly to the D.B bus bars and other accessories as required and indicated in the D.B. schedules. The enclosure shall be fabricated from zinc coated steel sheet having adequate gauge to ensure a rigid robust construction free from distortion. Each enclosure shall be of adequate size to accommodate all the components specified, stove enamelled. The enclosure shall be fitted with a sheet steel front panel which shall be firmly fixed by cheese-head screws. Screw holes shall have a minimum depth of 6 mm. The front panel shall be cut neatly to allow the MCBs/RCCBs levers to protrude through. The front panel shall however effectively conceal all conductors, contactors, bus bars and any other live parts installed within the enclosures. Each enclosure shall be fitted with a rigidly constructed double hinged steel sheet door. All doors shall be provided with gaskets and fitted with at least two robust hinges. Each enclosure shall be fully equipped to accommodate the number of MCBs/RCCBs of ratings as indicated on the drawings. Where the Contractor offers enclosures designed to accommodate a greater number of breakers than indicated on the drawings, the Contractor shall supply the additional breakers of rating to be agreed with the Engineer. Blank shields shall be provided for the rest of the space. Distribution boards located remote from the main switch boards shall be mounted at a height of not less than 1200 mm from finished floor level to bottom of the D.B. and maximum height of this D.B. shall be 2200 mm. Where single phase distribution boards are specified they shall be complete with double pole isolator and where three phase distribution boards are specified they shall be complete with triple pole isolator and a demountable/removable neutral link. These isolators shall be integral and connected directly to bus bars. These bus bars shall be shrouded.
E - 35

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

Each distribution board shall have separate earth and neutral bars having the same number of connections as there are phase connections. A cable connection shall be made from earth bar to the incoming cable gland earth tag. All phase and neutral bars shall be sized to carry the full load current of the controlling breaker which shall be of flat tinned copper rigidly mounted, supported on shock-resisting, non-hygroscopic, high grade insulators with high resistance to tracking, not subject to mould growth or termite attack with adequate spacing and clearance. Connection from the bus bars to the breakers shall be made by using solid circular insulated conductors or insulated and tinned copper strip neatly set and formed. Each connection to or from a phase or neutral bar shall have its own brass fixing screws, washers, butts and locknuts. Each distribution board shall be fitted with an identification label on its front cover. The label shall be suitably inscribed stating the distribution boards reference number/letter, rating in volts & amperes and the number of ways in English and Arabic. In addition to the above a reference card shall be fitted inside the distribution board giving details of each circuit, MCB size, cable size and location. The reference card shall be affixed to the inside of the distribution boards door via a transparent envelope. All live terminals of parts and bus bars shall be shrouded with insulating materials to ensure that it is impossible for any live metal to be touched while withdrawing or replacing MCBs. The correct rating of breakers shall be fitted in each way to conform to the size of the final circuit conductor and its connected load in conformity with Kahra-maa. All breakers and DBs shall be of one make throughout the whole of the works.

Miniature Circuit Breakers (MCB) Miniature circuit breakers shall be of an approved make and comply with IEC-898 with magnetic or temperature compensated thermal overload trips with magnetic short circuit trips. They shall be single pole rated for an ambient temperature of 50C. on the outside of the enclosure in which the breaker is mounted. They shall be of hermetically sealed type with minimum breaking capacity of 9 KA at 415V or otherwise indicated on the tender drawings. The frame size of all MCBs shall be identical so that they can be easily interchanged. Circuit breaker dollies shall be of the trip free pattern to prevent closing the breaker on a faulty circuit without resetting and shall also indicate the ON/OFF positions. Standard rating of MCBs shall be used for ease of availability. The MCB selection shall be carried out on the basis of its application. Different types shall be used for this purpose with the following time / current characteristics: * * * Type B Type C Type D 3 to 5 In 5 to 10 In 10 to 20 In

Type B would be used for circuits with no switching surges. Type C for fluorescent lighting, small motors which can produce switching surges.
E - 36

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

Type D for X-ray machines, industrial equipment and similar application where abnormally high in-rush currents are experienced. The Contractor shall select the type of MCB to be used against each circuit in the submittal and obtain Consultants approval before ordering the material. The most important technical factor upon which the correct selection of circuit breaker for any installation depends is the type of load to be protected by MCB. 1. Load which does not vary much above its rated value, e.g. heating loads - the circuits feeding such apparatus are called steady load circuits and such circuits shall be protected by miniature circuit breakers for steady load circuits. Their current ratings shall be at least equal to that of the load. Loads which may have peaks of comparatively short duration above its rated value, e.g. motors, capacitors etc. Circuits feeding such apparatus are called fluctuating load circuits and such circuits shall be protected by miniature circuit breakers for fluctuating load circuits. For these loads, the circuit breakers shall have time/current characteristics that will allow the transient overcurrent to be carried without tripping or derate the size of MCB to take care of this transient current as recommended by the manufacturer.

2.

Residual Current Circuit Breaker (RCCB) Current operated residual current circuit breakers (RCCB) shall comply with BS EN 61008. They shall consist of a current transformer, tripping coil with contactor assembly, main supply contacts, ON/OFF switch, test button and trip free mechanism all mounted on a robust body of insulated material. The number of poles and the rated current shall be as detailed on the drawings and the terminal sizes shall be suitable for the cables to be connected. The sensitivity of the breakers shall be such that they are capable of detecting earth leakages of 30 milli amps and the operating time shall not exceed 20 milli seconds under earth fault conditions. The breaking capacity shall not be less than 9 KA; tripping time shall be unaffected by temperature changes and shall not be possible to hold the trip mechanism closed under fault conditions. The windings and coils shall be suitably tropicalised for operating in a relative humidity of 98%. All contacts shall be of robust construction and be of nonwelding, self-wiping and self-aligning type designed for a minimum of 10,000 switching operations. The residual current circuit breakers shall be used to protect the ring main, water pumps, water heaters circuits, lighting circuits in bathroom and any other equipment as required by Kahra-maa.

Residual Current Circuit Breaker with MCB (RCCB/MCB) Where combined RCCB/MCB devices are specified, the Contractor shall provide earth leakage, overload and short circuit protection within the same unit, and shall comply with IEC 1009-2-2. The sensitivity and tripping time shall be 30 mA and 20 ms respectively. The unit shall be compatible to other breakers installed within the board and shall have a test circuit with a test button.
E - 37

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

B.5

FUSE SWITCH AND ISOLATOR UNITS Fuse switches shall be of robust construction and rated for 660 volts. The mechanism shall be easily operated and of sound mechanical design. The action shall be of the "quick-make and quick-break" type and the fixed and moving contacts shall be solid copper and of adequate size for the current rating of the switch. Switch contacts shall be shrouded to avoid any accidental contact with live metal. These switches and fuse switches shall be certified for 500 volts duty to the requirement of BS EN 60947-3 : 1992 and shall be metal clad unless otherwise specified and totally dust proof. Each switch shall, unless otherwise specified, be designed to be fitted with high rupturing capacity cartridge fuse links of E.E. or equal make and the Contractor shall provide such fuse links, suitably rated, for the load conditions in the circuits to be protected. Rewirable fuses shall not be acceptable under any circumstances. All fuses shall be HRC cartridge type in compliance with B.S. 88 and shall incorporate a fusible element of appropriate current rating and fusing factor for the purpose of circuit protection and discrimination. All fuses shall be of one manufacture throughout the whole of the works. The operating handle shall be fitted to the front of the unit and shall have positive means of indicating the "ON and OFF" positions. An interlock shall be provided on each switch so that the door cannot be opened or the switch withdrawn when the switch is in "ON" position, nor the switch be closed when the door is open or the switch withdrawn. The door of the switch enclosure shall be hinged at the side or bottom and adequate fastenings provided on the side opposite the hinge. Locks and padlocks shall be provided for each switch to lock the switch into any one service. The fuse switches shall comprise of a triple pole or double pole unit on the phase connection only. A solid copper removable link of the same current rating as the switch shall be provided within the switch enclosure for the neutral connection. Isolating switches without fuses shall be of a similar construction and appearance to that of fuse switches already described above and shall be capable of making and breaking a load equal to their full rated capacity. All isolators shall be On Load type (AC-23) category. "OFF" load isolators will not be accepted in any part of the installation. All external isolators shall be metallic type to IP 65 and covered with sun shade.

E - 38

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

The utilisation categories for switch fuses/fuse switches according to IEC 408 : 1972 standards are given below : Table I
Nature of current Category Typical applications

AC

AC-20 AC-21 AC-22 AC-23

Connecting and disconnecting under no load conditions Switching of resistive loads, including moderate overloads Switching of mixed resistive and inductive loads, including moderate overloads Switching of motor loads or other highly inductive loads

Steel sheet enclosures shall be used for surface mounted isolators with the following degree of protection according to BS 5420, IEC 144 - IP 40, IP 54 and IP 65. All electrical equipment such as air conditioning units and pumps shall be provided with suitably rated isolator near its location as shown on the relevant drawings. The supply and installation of the above equipment and all interconnecting associated wiring shall be carried out to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Switch cases shall be interlocked with the switch action. In areas subject to damp or moisture laden atmosphere, the cases shall be suitably protected. All unit type switch gear shall have detachable end plates either plain, undrilled or with 'knock-out' entries. Combined isolator/starter units may be used wherever suitable in preference to individual isolators and individual starters. The Contractor shall allow in his tender for the final cleaning down and painting of all electrical apparatus and sub-distribution boards. Where PVC/SWA/PVC or XLPE/SWA/PVC cables are used, the correct type of glands shall be fitted to the equipment. B.6 WIRES & CABLES

PVC Insulated Wires - Single Core The PVC insulated non-sheathed wires to be used for lighting and power wiring shall be of 450/750 volts grade conforming to BS 6004-1975 and laid in PVC or galvanised conduit/trunking as specified. The wires used at this project shall have stranded copper conductor and sized as indicated on drawings and in accordance with Kahra-maa regulations. The number and sizes of cables drawn into the conduit/trunking shall not exceed than that given in the appropriate tables of Kahra-maa regulations. In all cases, it
E - 39

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

must be possible to withdraw any wire without damage to the remaining cables. The wires to be used shall be colour coded - Red, Yellow and Blue for the respective phase wiring, Black for the neutral wiring and Green/Yellow for the earth conductor. The cables shall be installed on the 'loop-in' system, no joints being made anywhere in the installation. Wires ends shall be stripped with purpose made stripping tools correctly adjusted to suit the conductor size. All terminations to fittings and accessories subject to a temperature rise shall be carried out with conductors insulated with heat resisting material such as Butyl Hypalon or equal that can stands 85C minimum. In distribution boards the wires comprising each circuit, sub-circuit or final subcircuit shall be bound together and neatly wired into position in an approved manner. When wires are installed in trunking the wires of each circuit, sub-circuit or final sub-circuit shall be bound together in an approved manner at 600 mm intervals. In vertical trunking, wires shall be fixed to prevent stress by weight. Where wires are installed in trunking, the trunking shall be of sufficient cross sectional area, having regard to the number of wires installed so that a space factor of 45% is not exceeded in accordance with Kahra-maa regulations. The wires shall be of stranded core. Compression type lugs and ferrules are preferred and should be included. The tools for making compression joints must be those recommended by the manufacturer of the lugs and ferrules and also approved by the Engineer. For stud type terminals, approved crimping lugs or claw type washers shall be used. All conductors, excluding those terminated into clamp type terminals shall be connected in the foregoing manner. Where clamp type terminals are used, the conductor shall be terminated without lugs with the exception of flexible conductors having wires 0.3 mm or smaller which shall be fitted with crimps. Not more than one conductor shall be terminated in each clamp. To identify the wires, each phase wiring shall be of its own colour at both ends and provided with ferrules to identify the circuit number. The wiring for the entire installation shall be carried out using loop system from point to point with no joints made anywhere on the installation. Not more than two ends of wires shall be joined in each terminal of switch/socket or light fitting. The minimum size of wire to be used for lighting circuits shall be 2.5 mm size and for ring circuits, it shall be 4 mm, unless otherwise specified. The core identification ferrules or sleeves shall be of insulating material which shall be white and shall have a glossy finish. The ferrules or sleeves shall be unaffected by oil or damp. Characters shall be suitably marked in black.

Armoured Cables The armoured cables shall be sized to comply with the following: i. ii. iii. Derating regulations of Kahra-maa Switch rating of the load Allowance for 2.5% voltage drop.
E - 40

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

The Contractor shall provide armoured cables where-ever specified. These cables shall be designed for 600/1000 volts system. These cables shall be either PVC/SWA/PVC or XLPE/SWA/PVC as indicated on the drawings. The cables shall be with inner extruded PVC sheath and fillers. Any armoured cable being used at site must bear the manufacturer's name on the outer sheath and voltage rating for which it is manufactured. XLPE/SWA/PVC B.S. 5467 & B.S. 5468 PVC/SWA/PVC B.S. 6346 All armoured cables must have British Standard and BASEC approval certificates. Those without these certificates will not be accepted. Cables carrying 3 phase and neutral loads shall be 4 core. The neutral conductor shall be of the same cross-sectional area as that of phase conductors. The minimum internal radii of bends in cables shall not be less than that given in the appropriate Table of the IEE regulations for Electrical Equipment of Buildings. Cables laid above the false ceiling or on the walls shall be fixed on suitable size of clamps (PVC) at an interval of every 1.5 metres on the cable tray or cable ladder. Cable trays shall be rigidly fixed on the surface or suspended with the help of clamps made out of 6 mm thick mild steel flats painted with two coats of red oxide paint and one coat of synthetic paint as recommended by the Engineer. The arrangement of cables and the methods of laying shall be approved by the Engineer. Cables shall be laid direct in the ground with protective covers, drawn into pipes or ducts, laid in troughs or on racks or supported on trays or cleats as may be required by the Engineer, in accordance with the following clauses. Where cables are installed in areas or locations that may be subjected to direct sunlight, the Contractor shall provide suitably approved sunshield made of 20 gauge galvanised steel sheet. No cable shall be subjected to direct sunlight. Filling in of trenches shall not be commenced until the Engineer has inspected and approved the cables and accessories in-situ. Cables buried underground shall be laid at a minimum depth of 600 mm from the ground level. The cables shall be laid on a cushion of graded and washed builders fine sand of 200 mm thick and shall be covered with another layer of 200 mm above it. Mechanical punners shall not be used for this work. Cable marking tape shall be installed on the top layer of sand throughout the cable route. A minimum horizontal clearance of 50 mm shall be maintained between the cables. Where, in the opinion of the Engineer, the soil on the site is unsuitable for backfilling, the Contractor shall arrange for the importation of suitable material. Unless otherwise approved, the minimum distance between the centres of three core power cables or three phase groups of single core power cables shall be 0.15 m. On no account shall double banking of cables be allowed. Cable and joint route markers of approved type shall be provided along the route of buried cables as instructed by the Engineer. Markers shall be installed at all duct and joint positions, all places where the route changes direction and on straight
E - 41

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

routes at distances not exceeding 100 m. Their provision and installation shall be included in the schedule rate for excavation and reinstatement. Where three single core cables are laid direct in the ground and form one three phase circuit, they shall, unless otherwise stated, be laid touching one another in triangular formation, the apex of the triangle being uppermost. In order to maintain a triangular formation, the three cables shall be tied together with tarred twine or by other approved means at intervals of 1.5 m. Unless otherwise approved, auxiliary control cables shall be laid under the same covers as the power cables and there shall be at least 70 mm of riddled sand between the two types of cables. After any cable has been laid and until the whole of the cables to the laid in the trench have been covered with their protective covers, no sharp metal tools, such as spades or fencing stakes, shall be used in the trench or placed in such a position that they fall into the trench. Rollers used during the laying of cables shall have no sharp projecting parts liable to damage the cables. Where any part of the cable is buried in the ground, the armouring shall not be used as the earth. Either a separate earth conductor shall be provided or the cable shall be increased by an extra core. Cables crossing the roads/pathways shall be provided with PVC duct of minimum 150 mm dia., buried at a depth of 800 mm below ground level unless otherwise mentioned. The Contractor is to remove any loose material from the ducts and prove them by drawing through a mandrel of slightly less diameter than the duct, immediately before pulling in the cables. Any lubricant used shall have no harmful effect on the cables. Any ducts or pipes not used shall be sealed by plugs supplied by the Contractor before backfilling. The ducts shall be water and vermin proof, scaled in accordance with the specification/drawings. Cables laid in the concrete or block work trenches shall be supported on supports made out of 50x50x6 mm angle iron with clamps. These supports shall be provided at a distance of not more than one metre each. All cables shall be run in a neat and orderly manner and the crossing of cable within the trench shall be avoided as far as possible. The Contractor will be responsible for removing and replacing the trench covers, free of charge, during the execution of his work as directed by the Engineer. All single core and multi core main power cables shall be installed in cleats or saddles fixed on vertical routes. Small power cables, those having conductor areas of 16 mm. sq. and less, shall be installed on trays but segregated from other cables on the same tray by a space of 30 mm. All control cables shall be installed on trays. All cable terminations shall be carried out using compression type cable glands designed to adequately secure the steel wire armouring. All armouring and all faces of armour clamps making contact with them shall be thoroughly cleaned during installation and all clamps shall be adequately tightened to ensure good electrical contact. The installation shall be such that there is no discontinuity in the return circuit via the armouring and no local spot or high resistances. Means of earthing the armouring to the main earth electrode at the supply end shall be provided by means of a metallic bond of adequate conductance and the bonding
E - 42

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

connection shall be as short and straight as practicable. All terminations are to be fitted with PVC shrouds. All cables shall be scheduled and installed with a unique number. The Contractor shall prepare cable schedules in accordance with the typical blank specification schedule. All information required to be completed on the schedules shall be prepared and recorded by the Contractor. All cables shall be numbered in accordance with the cable numbering system already employed at the site. The Engineer will advise the Contractor during the contract of the details of the system and cable numbers allocated for the contract works. All cable schedules shall be to the Engineer's approval. Each end of every cable shall be provided with markers for identification. The markers are to be fitted in a suitable position under cable termination. Where cables enter and leave ducts or pipes, suitable identification markers shall be fitted. The materials of the markers and of the labels and fastenings shall be such as to avoid corrosion due to incompatibility of materials and to ensure permanent legibility. Each cable is to run in one continuous length except where the run of cable exceeds normal manufacturing lengths. Other straight-through joints will not be permitted unless specifically authorised by the Engineer. Where joints cannot be avoided, the estimated weight of joints and supporting steel work together with any additional civil requirements shall be taken into consideration. Joints shall be adequately supported and the provision for such shall be included in the schedule of rates. Each joint shall be clearly labelled in an approved manner to indicate the cable number and the joint number and single core joints shall be so marked that the phase identity of each joint may be subsequently ascertained. Where the armour wires of plastic insulated cables constitute the earthed metallic shield, such wires shall be efficiently bonded across the joint in an approved manner. The electrical resistance of such bonds shall not exceed that of an equal length of the cable armour wires. Suitable care shall be taken to ensure that the bond contacts do not deteriorate in service. The exact location of each trench shall be approved by the Engineer. Trenches shall be kept as straight as possible and each trench shall be excavated to an approved formation and dimensions and shall have vertical sides which shall be timbered where necessary so as to avoid subsidence and damage. The bottom of each trench shall be firm and of smooth contour. Where trenches pass from a footway to a roadway or at other positions where a change of level is necessary, the bottom of the trench shall rise or fall gradually. The Contractor shall take reasonable precaution to prevent damage to the highway or ground surface from a slip or breaking away of sides of trench. Rate of rise or fall shall be approved before-hand. The Contractor shall deal with and dispose of water so as to prevent any risk of the cables and other materials to be laid in the trenches being affected detrimentally. The Contractor shall provide all pumps and appliances required and shall carry out the necessary pumping and bailing. Unless otherwise agreed, provision shall be made during excavation for reasonable access of persons and vehicles to property or places adjacent to the route. This provision shall be maintained until restoration has been completed. When the excavation for trenches have been accurately executed, notice shall be given by the Contractor to the Engineer. Laying of cables or building of the
E - 43

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

structures shall not be started until the Contractor has obtained the Engineer's permission to proceed with the work. The unit price quoted in the schedules shall include the provision of such quantities of skeleton timbering consisting of pairs of boards and struts at intervals of not less than 3 m as may be required by the Engineer. When in the course of the contract works, obstructions are encountered which necessitate diversions or alterations to other underground works, or alterations to buildings or foundation, or when conditions necessitate the adoption of a special form of trench, the Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer; further work shall not proceed until written instructions have been obtained from the Engineer. The material excavated from each trench shall be placed so as to prevent nuisance or damage. Where this is not possible, the excavated material shall be removed from the site and returned for refilling the trench on completion of laying, without cost to the Client. Surplus material shall be disposed of by and at the cost of the Contractor. Single line cable routing drawings showing main cable routes only will be provided by the Engineer, but not detailed routing or cable supporting steelworks drawings. The Contractor is to include in the rate in the schedules for the preparation of all detailed routing and steelworks drawings necessary to enable the Engineer to give his approval of all main and subsidiary routes before installation commences. Adequate allowance is to be made in the designs for additional cabling required for future extensions plus 20%. The whole of the cable supporting steel work including all racks, trays, cleats, clamps, nuts, bolts, washers, fixings and other items required to complete the installation of cables shall be included in the contract. Concrete inserts shall be provided in the vertical walls of all underground cable tunnels and trenches. These inserts will be spaced at 1m centres approximately. All cables are to be run with a particular regard to neatness of appearance. Multiple runs are to be arranged so that cables entering or leaving the run do so in a logical manner. All supporting steel work shall be hot galvanised in accordance with B.S. 729. If not, all the supports shall be painted with two coats of red oxide paint and one coat of approved synthetic paint. All supporting arrangements shall be approved by the Engineer. Included in the contract are the excavation of trenches for laying and installation of the above cables and equipment including all guarding, watching and lighting; the removal of accumulated water, the removal and disposal of all surplus excavated materials, the provision and removal of skeleton timbering and the slinging, strutting and shoring of other works within the trench; the filling of all trenches and interim restoration.

E - 44

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

M.I.C.C. Cables and Fire Resistance Cables All mineral insulated cables having copper conductors and copper sheath shall be PVC covered and be of 500 volt class, conforming to B.S. 6207 Part 1. Only one manufacturer of both cables and accessories shall be used. The whole of the installation shall be carried out with the tools recommended by and in accordance with the instructions and recommendations of the manufacturer. Only tradesmen skilled in the use of MICC cables shall be used on the installation. Unless otherwise specified, all cables shall be supplied and installed complete with a purpose made polyvinyl chloride (PVC) sheath. The fire alarm wiring from panels to various devices shall be carried out by using fire resistance cables. These cables are also to be used for fire alarm system including its link-up with the A.C. system. The minimum size of cable on subcircuits shall be 2.5 mm sq. unless otherwise noted, and the size of the sub-main cables shall be as shown on the relevant drawings and schedules. Terminations Where cables enter boxes and equipment, the following methods of termination shall be adopted. a. A universal ring type compression gland shall be used as standard in all situations other than those specified below and on no occasion shall any other glands be used for main and sub-main cables. Where entry to the equipment or box is already tapped, the gland shall be screwed direct into the equipment utilising, where necessary with reducing sockets. The min. size of entry permitted shall be 20 mm external thread. Where the entry to the equipment or box is a clearance hole, the gland shall be fixed with a solid locknut.

b.

c.

Terminations shall comply with B.S. 6081 Part 1. The temperature classification of the seal shall be Class 105 unless otherwise indicated or directed by the Engineer. PVC shroud over glands shall be provided when PVC covered cables are used. Before applying a shroud, all bare metal shall be wrapped with pressure-sensitive adhesive PVC tape. Unless otherwise detailed elsewhere in this specification, all cable ends shall be sealed with cold, screw-on pot type seals of the appropriate size and utilising cold plastic compound. Where seals are used without a gland, the seal shall be fitted with a permanently fixed flexible earth 'tail' by the manufacturer. The seals shall be drilled between the cable entry and knurling to accept the tail and then 'spot crimped' to ensure electrical connection. The earth 'tail' shall be connected to an earth terminal inside the accessory or apparatus. It should be noted that for certain sizes of cable, a larger size seal is required when an earth 'tail' is added.

E - 45

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

On flush lighting installations only, where special MICC clamp boxes are specified, it is not permissible to omit the flexible copper earth tail. The cable tails shall normally be of neoprene or high temperature insulation with red PTFE or similar material; silicone rubber shall not be used without the approval of the Engineer. Where the Contractor considers it impracticable to utilise the solid conductor for making off his final connections, he may, with the permission of the Engineer and using an equivalent cross-sectional area flexible conductor, make an extended tail utilising the self-screw sleeve connector. This extension shall be carried out within the apparatus concerned. Saddles and Clips Saddles and clips shall be PVC covered when used with PVC covered cables; otherwise they shall be of plain copper. Fixing screws shall be brass wood screws countersunk for one hold fixing saddles and for other situations, round head brass complying with B.S. 1210 or B.S. 450 shall be used. Where machine screws are used, nuts shall be of brass, square pressed type complying with B.S. 2827. Joining Sleeves Joining sleeves shall be of brass with standard terminations. Solder ferrules shall be used to join the conductors; the solder used shall comply with B.S. 219, Type M. Non-corrosive flux only shall be used. Installation All joints shall be made at main switches, distribution boards, switches, ceiling rose boxes, socket outlet boxes and fixed apparatus only. No joints shall be made in joint boxes or through joints made, unless the special permission of the Engineer is obtained and his approval given to the method of joint proposed. As indicated or as directed by the Engineer, cables shall be run neatly on the surface of the building or in roof, ceiling or floor voids, sleeved in galvanised conduits in wall cavities, run neatly or laid in floor trenches or drawn into ducts and buried in the ground through ducts. No bend in cable shall have an inside radius of less than six times the outside diameter of the cable. All cable routes shall be determined by the Contractor and agreed by the Engineer before work is started. Cables shall be run at least 150 mm clear of all plumbing and mechanical services. The use of conduit and/or cable trunking to enclose conductors shall be kept to a minimum. A loop shall be introduced in a cable either in the false ceiling area or immediately before its entry into equipment subject to vibration or occasional movement. A clear space of at least 200 mm shall be maintained at the point in the loop where the cable passes over itself.

E - 46

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

Cables are to be fixed to the various locations as follows: a. b. c. d. e. On the surface of un-plastered walls and ceilings and in damp situations heavy gauge one hold fixing spacing saddles and spacing type 'P' clips. On finished surfaces (where permitted) - heavy gauge saddles. Concealed cables - standard clips and saddles. On cable trays - standard clips and saddles. In corrosive situations - PVC isolated clips and corrosion resistant screws shall be used.

Where necessary and with the approval of the Engineer, the Contractor may, in concealed situations, use straps and saddles of special design for the appropriate purpose, made of heavy gauge metal strip. Tools required for the manipulation and termination of cables shall be of a design approved by the cable makers. Corrugation of the copper sheath at bends will not be accepted. A wood block or wooden faced tool shall be used to finally dress the cables into position. Care shall be exercised during stripping of the sheath and fitting of the sealing pot to ensure that: a. b. c. d. e. The sheath is not bent inwards and burrs are not left which could reduce the design clearance between sheath and conductor(s). The sealing pot is correctly positioned relative to the cut end of the sheath. The interior of the sealing pot is free of any metal particles formed during the process of attaching the pot to the cable. The insulating sleeve is correctly placed relative to the closure of the mouth of the pot. All air is excluded from the sealing pot by the correct introduction of the plastic filling.

Plastic filling compound shall be stored in duct-tight containers when not actually in use. It shall not be used if it is, or is suspected to be, contaminated with dirt or moisture. The Contractor shall at the request of the Engineer, subject any length of installed cable to a insulation resistance test, consisting of applying a 1000 volt megger test to the length of cable when both ends have had the seals affixed. The tests between conductors and between conductors and sheath shall be infinity before conductors are connected at any apparatus.

E - 47

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

B.7

CONDUIT AND CONDUIT FITTINGS General PVC conduits and accessories to be certified to BS EN 61386-21. Generally PVC conduit shall be used for lighting and power circuits, unless otherwise specified. These shall be concealed in slab, walls or floor screed. PVC conduits can be laid on the surface above the suspended ceiling. In areas where the conduit is exposed to external weather or susceptible to mechanical damage, only, galvanised conduits shall be used as per the specifications laid here under.

Polyvinyl Chloride Conduit & Accessories The plastic conduits shall be of heavy gauge, rigid un-plasticised PVC, of the high impact grade. The impact strength shall be tested in accordance with B.S. 4607. No conduit smaller than 20 mm in diameter shall be used. The minimum wall thickness for the conduit shall be as follows : * * * * * 20 mm dia 25 mm dia 32 mm dia 38 mm dia 50 mm dia : : : : : 1.8 mm 1.9 mm 2.5 mm 2.5 mm 3.1 mm

All plastic conduit accessories shall be made from rigid un-plasticised PVC of the same manufacturer as that selected for the conduit. The conduits shall be of sufficiently large sections and so arranged with draw-in boxes to allow easy draw in and out of cables. Where a solid fixed joint between conduit and accessory is required, use shall be made of an adhesive recommended by the manufacturer of the plastic conduit selected. When making a joint, care must be taken to ensure that the plastic conduit is thoroughly cleaned at the ends to ensure good adhesion. Flexible joints shall be made using a non-hardening adhesive and shall be used in conjunction with expansion couplers. Where bends or off-sets are required, these shall be made in accordance with the manufacturer's instruction without altering the section of plastic conduit. For plastic conduit up to 25 mm diameter, cold bends shall be acceptable. The bends shall be formed with the use of a bending spring obtained from the plastic conduit manufacturer. For larger sizes of conduit, bends shall be formed by pre-heating the tube after inserting spring to prevent kinking. Pre-heating shall be done with a blow lamp or a blow flame, care being taken to avoid over-heating the surface or with the application of hot water by immersion, or wrapping hot clothes around the section to be set. Any other method of bending can also be considered but subject to Engineer's approval.

E - 48

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

Deep circular boxes shall be used where more than 10 nos. 2.5 mm sq. PVC wires are crossing within the box. Plastic conduits shall not be installed in situations where continuous ambient temperature exceeds 50C. or where, for intermittent periods, the ambient temperature exceeds 70C.; badly formed plastic conduits or plastic conduits damaged in any way shall not be permitted. Expansion couplers shall be used on all straight runs of plastic conduit exceeding 6 metres in length. The plastic conduit shall be free to slide within saddles if used on the surface above the false ceiling. Special consideration should be given to fixing of accessories in situation where the temperature fluctuates excessively. Draw-in points shall be provided every 8 M straight runs or after not more than two right angle bends; where such points are provided exclusively for draw-in purpose, they must comprise inspection couplers. The Electrical Contractor shall exercise care when installing plastic conduits to prevent interference with or from other services and shall keep at least 250 mm clear of hot water pipes, 50 mm from cold water pipes and 25 mm from ducts. The conduits shall be laid concealed in the concrete slab and the walls. The conduit for the socket outlets, telephones etc., shall be laid in the screed of the floor wherever possible or in the floor slab. No equipment weighing more than 12 kg shall be suspended from circular plastic boxes. For load more than 12 kg, purpose-made supporting system shall be used with flexible cable and ceiling roses. A separate PVC insulated earth wire min. size 1.5 mm shall be included within each conduit and shall be connected to an earth at each end. Draw wires shall be pulled through all conduits as soon as possible after floors have been poured or conduits are concealed in order to dislodge any particles of cement etc.

Galvanised Steel Conduit and Accessories Steel conduit shall be new, heavy gauge, welded steel, galvanised and shall comply with B.S. 4568 Part I and BS 31. Each length of conduit shall bear a stamp guaranteeing it to be as per specifications. The use of conduit less than 20 mm will not be permitted. All conduit fittings and accessories including screwed couplers, ordinary clips, saddles, pipe hooks, screwed reducers, stopping plugs, locknuts and male and female brass bushes shall comply with BS 4568 Parts 1 & 2, BS 31 Table -2, BS 6053 and 6099 wherever applicable. All screwed couplers, screwed reducers and locknuts shall be made of galvanised malleable iron and all stopping plugs, male and female bushes made of brass. Round locknuts only shall be used on surface work. Inspection elbows, bends and inspection couplings must not be used. Galvanised steel sheet adaptable inspection boxes shall be provided and fixed in inspection positions where more than two conduits cross. These boxes shall be 150x150x50 mm deep, (inside measure). Where the boxes are fully recessed, they shall be provided with 14 swg galvanised steel lids, overlapping the boxes 6 mm all around.

E - 49

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

General Method of Installation Generally the conduit installation shall comply with Kahra-maa regulations and IEE regulations. All joints shall be weather proofed using adhesive recommended by the manufacturer. Fittings and draw-in boxes shall be provided with earth terminals where applicable. Termination in metal equipment or accessories shall be with a tapped entry and employ flanged couplings locked to the metal case using smooth brass bushes. Conduits and fittings which are found to be below the standard specified herein, whether due to poor manufacture, rough handling, bad storage on site or poor workmanship, shall be removed from site. Galvanised conduits and fittings may, at the Engineer's discretion and approval be wire brushed and painted to an acceptable standard at no additional cost to the Employer. Conductors for lighting and socket outlets may be run in the same section of conduit if they are in the same phase, but low voltage socket outlets and other auxiliary services shall be run in separate conduits. No wiring associated with one service shall be installed in any conduit, box or trunking containing wires associated with a different service. However, where lighting or socket outlet wiring are served from the same distribution board, the cables may be run in the same trunking, provided they are in the same phase. Conduits shall not be laid to falls, but care shall be taken to ensure that no pockets are formed within the conduit system in which water can collect. Drainage holes, if necessary, shall be provided at suitable points as agreed and approved by the Engineer. The wiring shall be run in the conduits so as not to exceed the capacities set out in the appropriate tables of Kahra-maa and IEE regulations. A separate PVC insulated earth wire minimum size 1.5 mm shall be included within each conduit and shall be connected to an earth terminal at each end. On no account shall galvanised conduit be permitted to be used as an earthing route. Conduits installed on the surface of walls or ceilings shall be fixed by spacer bar saddles fixed at no more than 1250 mm apart and secured by means of 1 no. 30 mm countersunk screw in a fibre white metal or similar plug of the correct size. All conduits shall be installed vertically. Horizontal and diagonal runs will not be permitted on walls except where it is absolutely necessary, subject to the approval of the Engineer. Conduits shall be fixed to adaptable boxes, fuse boards, switches etc., by means of smooth bore male brass bushes and couplers. The conduit system shall be completed and continuous throughout and shall not rely on light fittings or equipment bodies or casings to provide earth continuity of through capacity for wiring.

E - 50

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

Where conduits cross expansion joints, a slip joint shall be installed and earth continuity shall be maintained by using stranded bare earth copper 4 mm2 wiring connected by clips to each side of the slip joint. Where conduits cross expansion joints in the building structure, special expansion couplings shall be employed or other approved methods adopted. Continuity through all such joints shall be maintained. Conduits buried on concrete shall have 37 mm depth of concrete cover over its entire length. Conduit buried in plaster shall have 6 mm depth of cover over its entire length and shall be fixed by means of zinc coated screws in hard wood plugs, not more than one metre apart. Conduits penetrating through roof slabs shall be complete with goose neck and sealed. Conduits laid on concrete floor slabs shall be fixed by means of corrugated steel saddles secured by hardened steel pins driven by percussion tool (Hilti or similar) at 1200 mm centres. On prestressed floor slabs and beams, fixings must be into the joints between the beams or planks unless instructed otherwise by the Engineer. In cast 'in-situ' applications, the Contractor shall ensure that adequate precautions are taken for the secure fixing, positioning, alignment and protection of all conduits and boxes during the building operations. All conduit outlets or other 'in-situ' construction must be plugged with extreme care to prevent the ingress of foreign matter and the conduit system from becoming blocked during building construction. The Contractor will be held entirely responsible for any additional costs resulting from blockage or damage to conduits due to neglect or lack of attendance. All spare ways in junction boxes etc., left for possible future extensions shall be fitted with brass stopping plugs. For wiring purposes, all draw-in and inspection boxes must be installed in readily accessible positions, which have been agreed by the Engineer. No more than two right angle bends or equivalent sets must be made in conduit runs between inspection boxes. On straight runs, inspection boxes must be inserted after each second conduit length. Corners shall be turned by easy bends or sets made cold without altering the section or opening the seams of the conduit. No bend shall have an inside seam radius of less than three times the external diameter of the conduit. All bends must be machine-made. Where cables of 2.5 mm2 or over are being drawn, draw through boxes may be used to minimise the bending of cables. Where conduits are installed in straight runs, draw boxes shall be provided at centres not greater than 8 m and on runs with not more than two right angle bends, boxes shall be provided at centres not greater than 8 m. No boxes shall be provided in voids where access cannot be readily obtained. No draw-in boxes, other than point boxes shall be installed in plastered walls or ceilings where the conduit work is concealed within the building fabric, excepting within cupboards or switch rooms or where permission has been given by the Engineer. All exposed threads and parts of conduit where the enamel or galvanised finish has been damaged during erection shall be thoroughly cleaned and adequately painted immediately after erection. The inside surfaces of erected conduit and conduit fittings shall be smooth and free from burrs and other defects.

E - 51

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

Running joints shall only be used where absolutely necessary and shall be painted with two coats of aluminium paint as soon as they have been tightened. Female brass bushes shall be greased on to all free ends of conduit. Conduit systems shall be electrically and mechanically continuous and water tight after installation. All conduit systems shall be arranged, wherever possible to be self-draining to conduit boxes and outlet points. Where necessary, provision shall be made to counteract condensation as directed by the Engineer. Immediately before wiring, all conduit systems shall be thoroughly swabbed out until dry and clean. Malleable cast iron adaptable inspection boxes shall be provided and fixed at inspection positions where more than two conduits cross. These boxes shall be 150 x 150 x 50 mm deep inside measurements, except in cases where they occur on stanchions where boxes of 100 x 100 x 40 mm deep inside measurement will be permitted. The boxes shall be provided with malleable cast iron sunk lids secured by four 2BA brass cheese head screws. Where the boxes are fully recessed, they shall be provided with 1.5 mm mild steel lids overlapping the boxes 6 mm all round. Boxes shall be fixed by means of two nos. 10 countersunk head screws and the holes in the back of the box must be countersunk to receive the screws. No more than three conduits upto 25 mm will be allowed per side on the above adaptable boxes. Where more than three conduits per side occur larger boxes shall be used. Deeper boxes shall be provided for conduits larger than 25 mm diameter. All boxes must be positioned to the approval of the Engineer in readily accessible positions. Galvanised ceiling boxes or equivalent BS looping-in boxes shall be provided and securely fixed for all ceiling points. Where overlapping lids are required, they are to be as specified. Small standard circular malleable iron conduit boxes conforming to BS 31 - 1940 and BS 4568 with heavy malleable cast iron lids and brass fixing screws shall be provided and fixed at all junctions and necessary angles and bends of conduit. All boxes installed in false ceilings shall be so positioned that they are easily accessible. Where conduits are installed in positions exposed to the weather or in damp or other specified locations, they shall be of the PVC covered rubber packed metallic type. All flexible metallic conduits and adapters shall comply with BS 731 Part 1. Conduit installed in dry indoor locations shall be the standard metallic type. All exposed conduits shall be painted with two coats of paint to match with the colour of the wall/ceiling.

E - 52

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

B.8

CABLE TRUNKING

G.I. Trunking Cable trunking shall be installed where it is accessible and can replace congestion of conduits. All trunking and fittings shall be manufactured by a reputed engineering company. Sheet metal cable trunking shall be used throughout in all vertical rising ducts, in the positions detailed on the drawings or for terminating conduits and cables at distribution boards etc. Cable trunking may be used if required in ceiling voids where otherwise large runs of multiple conduits would occur. Cable trunking and fittings shall be in accordance with B.S. 4678 and shall be either Class 2 stoved black enamel (BE) or Class 3 galvanised (G) protected as detailed in the following specifications and drawings. All the trunkings installed on the floors shall be stove enamelled. All cable trunking shall consist of butting sections manufactured from Zintec coated high grade steel sheet of not less than 16 swg. All accessories such as bends, tees, off-sets, reducers etc., shall be of the same manufacture and finish. Multi-way trunking shall be divided into the required number of compartments by means of continuous steel sheet separators running the full length of the trunking. Each separator shall be at such depth that when the trunking cover is fastened in position there is no gap between the edge of the separator and the inside face of the cover. Separate compartments shall be provided in all tees, angles, reducers etc., to ensure that segregation of the various services is effected as detailed in the specifications and drawings. All tees, reducers and angles for trunking shall have folded and welded corners. All angles formed in wall trunking shall have fillet corners. Adjoining lengths shall be correctly aligned and trunking shall be joined together by means of internal fish plate connector or purpose made coupling pieces depending on the design of the trunking. After joining, there shall be no gap visible between sections of the trunking nor between lengths of separators where these are used. Internal fish plate connectors shall be not less than 2.5 mm thick and attached by means of not less than 4 nos. cadmium plated steel mushroom headed M4 screws for trunking having a total cross sectional area below 5700 mm and 8 nos. cadmium plated steel mushroom headed M4 screws for trunking having cross sectional areas in excess of 5700 mm each passing through clearance holes, shake proof washers and buts. Two pairs of screws on either side of the joint shall be connected by tinned copper links with split soldering washers under the nuts to provide electrical continuity across the joints. The nuts shall be located on the outside of the trunking and the tinned copper straps shall be provided across all joints formed by straight lengths, angles, tees etc.

E - 53

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

All joints shall be securely bolted together and the whole assembly shall be fixed at intervals not greater than 1.2 m. The trunking shall be fitted with a continuous lid made from the same material or cover secured to the trunking by means of cadmium plated mushroom head screws spaced not greater than 450 mm. Where trunking terminates in any piece or a apparatus, a proper flanged coupling piece shall be used, securely bolted to the trunking and to the piece of apparatus. Solid end stops shall be purpose made steel sheet terminal piece. In case of trunking covers which are cut, the Contractor shall ensure that the cut edges are true and match with the adjacent covers. The over lapping of covers will not be permitted and under no circumstance, gaps in covers shall be accepted. Where the trunking passes through walls or floors, sections of cover plate shall be fitted before erection such that the cover plate extends approx. 50 mm beyond the finished surfaces of the walls or floors. The wiring within the trunking shall be securely held in position by means of suitable clips fitted at regular intervals throughout the run of trunking, separate cable clips being provided for each compartment of the trunking. Where cables are to be enclosed in the same trunking compartment and connected to different distribution boards i.e. single phase and 3 phase power circuits, they shall be distinguished by separating the cables with insulated taping at intervals of 1.20 metres together with an approved means of identification sleeve adjacent to each taping that clearly denotes the circuit type and reference. Each circuit within a trunking shall be taped together at intervals of 800 mm with three wraps of high quality PVC insulating tape. Vertical sections of trunking over 8 metres in length shall be fitted with staggered insulated tie or studs fastened to the back of trunking at every 3 meter to support the weight of cables. Where trunking passes through walls or floor, fire barriers shall be fitted internally and externally as described in Regulation 523-6 and 528-1 of 15th Edition of IEE regulations or the latest edition. The trunking shall also be bonded to each piece of apparatus to which it is directly connected by means of copper bonding strips of 13 x 2mm and also at each joint and bend. All connections between trunking and/or busbar chambers to each item of switch, switch fuse or distribution board are to be made direct and without intermediate conduit or conduit couplers. The top and/or bottom plates of the items being connected are to be removed and a suitable dimensioned slot is to be cut to accommodate the cable plus a further 6 mm all round with similar slot in the appropriate position in the trunking or busbar chamber. A laminated paxolin fillet 5 mm thick is to be inserted between the item plate and trunking and busbar chamber with a slot 6 mm smaller all round than the slot cut in the metal parts so that damage to the cable is avoided.

E - 54

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

The item of equipment is to be fixed to the trunking of the busbar chamber through the paxolin fillet into the top of the bottom end plate fixing holes, using the end plate fixing screws. The paxolin fillet is to be cut accurately and smoothly to the same outer dimensions as the end plate. All covers shall be easily removable and the trunking shall be properly spaced away from any surface which may prevent this. Trunking shall be fixed to walls, etc., with No.12 round headed wood screws to lengths depending on material in which the fixing is made. The Contractor shall include for providing all necessary supporting devices for trunking and adequate allowance shall be made for expansion and contraction of long runs. All cable trunking shall be fixed clear of the respective surfaces by means of not less than 6 mm spacers. Shape of purpose-made pieces of trunking shall be determined by dimensions obtained from site. On-site welding shall not be allowed. Flexible expansion joints shall be provided in trunking runs as necessary. Cable trunking shall have 25% spare capacity for the installation of any future cables. Due precaution shall be taken to ensure that the correct space factor of the fully loaded trunking is provided in accordance with IEE regulations. The minimum cable trunking requirement shown on the drawings shall be supplemented if required. Proposals for any such supplementary trunking shall be indicated on the installation drawings at the time of submission for approval. It shall be clearly understood that the introduction of supplementary trunking runs or the increase of compartment size will be allowed only at the discretion of the Engineer and if accepted shall be regarded as a concession to permit cables that would otherwise be enclosed in conduit, to be accommodated in trunking. Cable trunking installed on the exposed surfaces of walls shall be arranged with the respective wiring compartments in the vertical plane with all conduits emanating from the top, bottom and side of the assembly. In all cases, the access lid shall be fitted to the exposed side of such assemblies. Cable trunking installed either in voids or on the soffit of exposed ceilings wherever possible shall be installed with the compartments arranged in a horizontal plane with the access lid at the lower edge of the trunking and all conduits connected to the top and sides of the assembly. The cable trunking shall be installed immediately above the false ceiling structure within ceiling voids. Trunking shall be supported by purpose made brackets suspended from the structural concrete ceiling slab soffit. Conduits used to complete the final section of each circuit from the general trunking system installed in the ceiling voids unless otherwise stated shall emanate from the top of the appropriate compartment of the cable trunking and rise vertically to the structural soffit. The conduits shall be taken then through the structural slab or be arranged to drop vertically to terminate at the various lighting, power, telephone or auxiliary service outlet points.

E - 55

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

For recessed cables terminating in recessed DBs, a recessed trunking shall be used with cover flush with the outer surface of wall. In case of new cables being installed on the surface of existing wall, surface trunking shall be used. In both cases, cables shall be terminated with glands of appropriate size. The Contractor shall include for the preparation of detailed installation drawings of all trunking and conduits runs and submission of these to the Engineer for approval. These drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer as quickly as possible for approval before installation. The whole of the trunking shall be installed in a workmanship like manner so that it presents a neat appearance and shall ensure that continuous cable access is maintained so that cables may be laid in the trunking and not drawn-in. Installation of wiring in trunking shall in general, follow the details give in Conduit Installation. B.9 CABLE TRAY The Contractor shall include for the supply and installation of cable trays wherever indicated or as required for the execution of works. The cable trays shall be of the conventional perforated pattern with return flanges manufactured from a minimum of 16 swg or above M.S. sheet. The cable trays shall be hot dip galvanised to withstand the external climatic conditions of Qatar. Wherever the cable trays are exposed to outside conditions, i.e. laid on the roof, these shall be covered with galvanised steel sheet of 20 gauge to protect from heat and rain. Sections of tray shall be jointed together with mushroom head screws, nuts and spring washers. These shall be plated or treated with rust inhibitor. The screws and nuts shall be so arranged to ensure that no projecting screw threads occur on the part of the tray upon which the cables are laid. The cable trays shall be securely fixed to purpose made brackets with space behind to allow the insertion of tools for the tightening up of nuts. The brackets shall be spaced in such a way so as to prevent sagging. The Contractor shall ensure that overall tray arrangement is rigid. The Contractor shall include for all cable trays necessary to be fixed at the terrace or above the false ceiling. The cable trays shall be of sufficient width to take all cables without crowding and shall allow for possible future additions to the proportions of the present requirements. Cables shall be run singly and stacking will not be permitted. Cable trays fixed to walls or flat ceilings shall be installed with the flange outwards or downwards respectively to suit and shall be fixed with an approved fixing with spacing and washers such that the tray is at least 25 mm from the surface of the wall or ceiling. Earth continuity shall be maintained between each section of cable tray and total run of tray shall be effectively bonded to the nearest earth continuity conductor at both ends. Each length of tray shall be securely bolted to an adjacent length with sufficient overlap to prevent sagging and twisting. Normal bend of not less than 450 mm shall be used. The method of fixing each run of cable tray shall be approved by
E - 56

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

the Engineer prior to installation. In all instances, the cable trays shall be supported from the structure of the building. Wherever the tee or flat bends are required to be used, they shall be factory made. No cutting of tray shall be permitted. Wherever necessary, the same shall be properly painted with the prior permission of the Engineer. Deviation from the straight shall, if possible, be made with purpose made bends. Where purpose made bends cannot be used, the tray may be cut and the bends fabricated on site. All the supports shall be fabricated out of galvanised angle iron or uni-strut channels. If not, the M.S. supports shall be painted with two coats of red oxide and two coats of lacquered paint of approved colour.

B.10

WIRING ACCESSORIES 1.0 1 General The Contractor shall include in his cost for supply, erection, and connection of all specified wiring accessories in specified locations, unless otherwise directed, from the specified manufacturers. Details of circuits are shown on the electrical drawings and are to be read in conjunction to these specifications. All accessories necessary to form a complete installation should be available from a single manufacturer to ensure uniformity and visual compatibility. This should include all switches, power outlets and ceiling accessories to relevant British Standards specifications and CE marked. Selected manufacturer shall provide 20 years warranty for Electro mechanical wiring accessories (Switches / Sockets / Power Modules etc.) and minimum 10 years for mains operated electronic devices (Computer Jacks / Telephone Jacks / Dimmers / TV / SAT / FM Sockets etc). The manufacturer shall guarantee the metal cover plate finish for minimum 10 years. All socket outlets should have unique 3 pin operated safety shutter mechanism. All socket outlets should be Double pole switched as standard with the contacts arranged such that the neutral pole makes before and breaks after the live pole. To ensure easy and correct connection of conductors during installation and maintenance the accessory terminals shall: 1. 2. 3. Be easily identified by White marking on a dark ground. Be grouped together and where possible like terminals will be in line. Terminal screws to be upward facing, captive and backed out prior to installation. Terminals should be so shaped to provide a generous lead in to the conductor.
E - 57

2 3

5.

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

5. 2.0

Switches Should have minimum 3mm contact gap. Codes and Standards All materials required for installation under this specification shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. Where no specific indication as to the type or quality of material is indicated, a first class article to the Engineers/Architects approval shall be furnished.

i.

Switches The switches shall be single pole type of 240 V grade. These shall be of robust construction to provide long life of operation. The cover plate shall be of Screwless metal finish in Lacquered Brushed Steel to avoid finger prints or marks on general usage for all other schools unless mentioned & subject to Architect's approval with 20AX single pole grid mounted switches. The switches shall conform to BS EN 60669-1 and shall operate on downward mode only. Wherever more than one switch is shown on the drawings, they shall be multi-gang and where they are wired with different phases, phase barriers shall be used with the warning label or separate boxes shall be used. External switches shall be metal clad type with powder coat and weather proof range manufactured in polycarbonate to IP 65. IEE WIRING REGULATIONS: All products should be designed and manufactured to allow the designer and installer to comply in all respects with the 16th Edition of the IEE Wiring Regulations. The wiring regulations are now dual numbered and have been incorporated into the British Standard System under BS 7671: 1992 incorporating Amendment No.1, 1994. All switches shall be of standard concave rocker type with maximum 3 gangs on a single plate except for grid modules. The rockers shall be of same material as the plate with easy to operate action with no access to live parts or visible arc flashes from the front of the switch. All plate switches more than 3 gang shall be on twin plate except for grid switches. All switchs shall have large terminals to accept 2 x 2.5 mm2 conductors. All terminals should have insulated bell mouth terminal guides for each of termination. All switches should have slim rear projection and be suited for mounting in 16mm/25mm/35mm/47mm deep boxes. All switches shall be 20AX rated and suitable for switching fluorescent loads. All switches to have clear legible white markings on dark background identifying type nos., rating, voltage, terminal labels, name of manufacturer and standards. All switches shall comply with BS EN 60669-1: 2000.

E - 58

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

ii.

Switched Socket Outlets The socket outlets shall be of switched socket combination type of 13 A rating with double pole switching for switches and with Hi-integrity dual earth terminals. These shall be 3 pin, 240 volts with 3 pin child-resistant safety shutters conforming to B.S. 1363. Twin socket outlets shall be used wherever two sockets are shown together unless otherwise mentioned. All socket outlets shall be adequately earthed to terminate direct into outlet and a flying lead shall be installed between outlet and outlet box. The switched socket outlets exposed to external environmental conditions shall be weather proof in galvanised ceiling. The switched socket outlets shall be provided with indicating lamp to indicate the 'ON' status of switch, unless otherwise instructed by the Engineer. All switch socket outlets shall be connected in ring circuits unless otherwise specified. The connected load for each ring circuit shall be considered as 1000 watts. External switches shall be metallic type switched and weather proof to IP 65.

1. 2. 3.

All socket outlets shall be of types specified and shall have plates finishes to match the lighting switches unless otherwise specified. All switch socket outlets shall comply with BS1363 Pt2. The 13A switch socket outlets shall have double pole switching. The front shall be shuttered to operate only on insertion of all 3 pins. Terminal capacity shall be of adequate size to accommodate 4 x 2.5mm2 cables. All terminals shall be box type with captive screws and grouped on the top for ease of access during installation. Wherever specified, switch socket outlets shall incorporate dual earth terminals to meet the requirements of section 607 of BS 7671, IEE wiring regulations when used in ring network. For switch socket outlets supplied from UPS, clean earth provision shall be incorporated. Twin switch socket outlets with outboard rocker shall be installed where shown on the drawings. For emergency circuits, switch socket outlets shall incorporate red rockers on white front plates or red rockers on red front plates. The switch socket outlets shall match the lighting switches and the other accessories. Where indication is required, the switch socket shall have neon built into the cover plate providing illumination at a viewing angle of 1750. Connection units Wherever connection units are shown on the drawings, provide switched fuse connection unit with indicating lamp. These units shall also be provided with flexible cable outlet plate and shall be of approved finish similar to other accessories conforming to BS 5733:1995. All connection units to comply with
E - 59

4.

5. 6. 7.

iii.

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

BS 1363: Part 4: 1995. All 20A DP switch complies with BS EN 60669-1: 2000. FUSED CONNECTION UNIT UNSWITCHED: An unswitched 13 amp 250 volt fused Connection unit complying with both BS 1363: Pt 4: 1995, the general section of this specification covering wiring accessories and the following requirements. A fuse holder incorporating a BS 1362 13A fuse link. The holder being screw clamped into the front plate and must be released by operating the clamping screw as a 'jack out' device. When in the fully released position the fuse holder must remain attached to the front plate and shutter the fixed fuse connection such that they cannot be probed. The fuse holder must also be capable of being padlocked in the released position. A screwless cord grip which upon insertion of the cord automatically holds and clamps the cord. A flex outlet, supplied blanked off with a removable plug, positioned in the lower edge of the front plate. SWITCHED AND FUSED CONNECTION UNIT WITH NEON: The switched 13 amp 250 volt Fused Connection Unit, complete with neon indication must comply to BS.1363 Pt : 1995 & the 20 amp 250 volt Fused Connection Unit, complete with neon indication must comply to BS EN 60669-1:2000. These are designed for connection of refrigerators, water heaters, central heating boilers & other fixed appliances. Fuse holder should incorporate a BS 1362 13 A fuse link. The holder being screw clamped into the front plate and must be released by operating the clamping screw as a 'jack out' device. When in the fully released position the fuse holder must remain attached to the front plate and shutter the fixed fuse connection such that they cannot be probed. The fuse holder must also be capable of being padlocked in the released position. A screw less cord grip upon insertion of the cord should automatically hold and clamp the cord. A flex outlet, supplied blanked off with a removable plug, positioned in the lower edge of the front plate. The switch will be double pole with the contacts arranged such that the neutral pole makes before and breaks after the live pole. When the switch is in the open position the contact gap must be a minimum of 3mm. The switch rocker must include an indelible red flash, preferably a moulded insert, to provide indication that the switch rocker is in the 'ON' position. A neon indicator is to illuminate when the switch is placed in the closed position. The neon indicator assembly and lens should form an integral part of the switch rocker. Captive Fuse carrier & captive terminal screws. iv. Flex Outlets The flex outlets shall be installed near the equipment like air conditioners, water heaters, cooker units and exhaust fans. These exhaust fan outlets shall be of suitable rating having three-way terminal blocks and brass screws for direct connection of flexible heat resistant cables. They shall be of robust
E - 60

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

construction, approved finish similar to other accessories of very high quality. All flex outlets other than the ones for exhaust fans shall conform to BS 5733. FLEX OUTLET PLATE UNSWITCHED AND UNFUSED: Single gang 20 amp Flex Outlet plate is to be unswitched unfused and comply with BS 5733: 1995, the General Section of this specification covering wiring accessories together with the following requirements. The flex outlet shall be supplied with three pairs of terminals each suitable for min 2 x 2.5 mm2 conductors and a 1.5 mm2 flexible cord. A cord grip should also be fitted. A screwless cord grip, which upon insertion of the cord automatically holds and clamps the cord. A flex outlet, supplied blanked off with a removable plug, positioned in the lower edge of the front plate. v. Ceiling Rose Ceiling roses shall be of approved manufacture and be of PVC moulded white finish conforming to BS 6972 (plug-in type). All ceiling roses shall be fitted with integral enclosure and earthing plate or connection to comply with Kahra-maa regulations and shall be fitted with a break joint ring where used on recessed conduit boxes. The ceiling roses shall be plug-in socket type. The ceiling roses for light fittings with emergency lighting battery pack to have a different colour code for identification. 1 2 3 Supply and install ceiling switches of suitable ratings, on locations showed on the drawings. Supply and install ceiling accessories like batten holders, ceiling roses etc. on locations showed on the drawings. All lamp holders batten or pendant shall be of Shockguard type i.e. disconnect automatically on bulb removal & must comply with BS 7895: 1997 & BS EN 61184: 1995 T2. All lamp holders shall be Bayonet Cap B22. Wherever shown on the drawings, use 3 pins (normal lighting) and 4 pins (emergency lighting) plug in ceiling roses for lighting point connection. The plug in ceiling roses shall comply with BS6972 and BS5733. Plug-in ceiling roses with per-wired assemblies of 2mtr & 3mtr with PVC flexible cable or LSF cable shall be used in large buildings, with extensive false ceiling systems. The pre-wired ceiling rose shall be fitted with the respective length of heat resisting PVC insulated & sheathed flexible 0.75mm 3 core circular cable complying with BS 6141 or the LSF - low smoke zero halogen insulated & sheathed flexible 0.75mm 3 core circular cable to comply with BS 6500 Ceiling roses shall be 4 Pin type with terminals for Phase, neutral, earth, auxiliary & loop in terminals will each accept 5x0.75mm, 5x1.00mm, 4x1.5mm, 3x2.5mm or 2x4.00mm conductors as per BS 6972 & BS 5733
E - 61

4 5

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

8 9

The ceiling roses must have a clear base & pre-cut aperture for ease of installation. The static suspension load for plugs, sockets & pre-wired assemblies must withstand 5 kg max. Double Pole Switch The switches where indicated for water heater, hand driers or for other equipment etc., shall be double pole, 20 or 32 or 45 ampere rating based on the load current. The switches shall have indicating lamps and the covers finish shall match with lighting switches. All DP switches shall conform to BS EN 60669-1: 2000. All external DP switches shall be metallic type in plant, storage rooms & heat generating areas and must be of weather proof to IP 65. A 20 amp D P Switch complete with neon indicator all supplied within a 86 mm x 86 mm front plate complying with both BS EN 60669-1: 2000, the General section of this specification covering wiring accessories and the following requirements. The switch will be double pole with the contacts arranged such that the neutral pole makes before and breaks after the live pole. When the switch is in the open position the contact gap must be a minimum of 3mm. The switch rocker must include an indelible red flash, preferably a moulded insert, to provide indication that the switch rocker is in the 'ON' position. A screwless cord grip which upon insertion of the cord automatically holds and clamps the cord. A flex outlet, supplied blanked off with a removable plug, positioned in the lower edge of the front plate. A neon indicator is to illuminate when the switch is placed in the closed position. The neon indicator assembly and lens should form an integral part of the switch rocker.

vi.

vii.

45A D.P. Switch Cooker Control Units The switches where indicated for cooker outlets shall be double pole, 45 amps fixed only in a double gang box. The switches shall have indicating neon lamps and the covers shall be of metallic finish. All external DP switches shall be in similar finish of cover plates suiting to the switches.

1. 2.

Cooker control units shall be wired to separate circuit in the distribution boards. In case of cooker control units with integral socket outlet shall be with installed 300mm above kitchen worktops and shall be placed at least 2m away from the washbasin and away from the cooking range. Cooker control units must be with neon indicators.
E - 62

3.

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

4. 5.

Suitable cooker outlet plates shall be installed for wiring to the cooker. Cooker control units shall comply with BS 4177:1992 & the Cooker Connection unit conforms to BS 5733: 1995. All 45A DP switches in the range conform to BS EN 60669-1:2000. When 45A DP Cooker Control units used along with 13A Socket must always be connected with a 45A Cooker Connection unit. Wiring Accessories Box / Enclosure These shall be flush steel boxes with adjustable lugs, brass earth terminal and manufactured to BS 4662. The depth of the box shall be minimum 35 mm and deeper upto 47mm if necessary in order to accommodate wiring of 6 mm2. The box thickness shall not be less than 1.0 mm.

6.

viii.

ix.

Time Switches Time switches shall be photo-resistor type mounted remote from the contactor at the place approved by Engineer. These photo-resistors shall be equipped with lux adjustment to operate the switch at the desired light level. As an alternative to above, the electro-mechanical time switch can be provided. The time switch shall be suitable for solar time adjustment throughout the year. It shall have 12 hours reserve winding so that the power failure upto 12 hours will not change the operating time of the time switch. The contactor shall be of 240 volts 50 Hz, 1 Phase A.C.coil. It shall conform to relevant British Standard.

x.

Contactors Contactors shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with B.S. 775 / IEC 158.1 and shall be sized in accordance with the requirements shown on the schematic or DB schedules. Category AC1: Applies to all types of A.C. load with a power factor not less than 0.95. Category AC2: Applies to starting, plugging of slip ring motors on closing or opening. The making and breaking current of the contactor should not be less than 2.5 times the rated current of the motor. Category AC3: Applies to squirrel cage motors with breaking during normal running. The making current of the contactor should not be less than 6 - 7 times the rated current of the motor while the breaking current shall be equal to the rated current of the motor. Category AC4: Applies to starting, plugging of squirrel cage motors. The making and breaking current of the contactor should not be less than 6 - 7 times the rated current of the motor.

E - 63

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

The contactor shall be capable of withstanding the fault ratings of the system when protected by HRC fuses. These HRC fuses shall form part of the fault fused switch where isolation is required. Fuses shall always be installed on the live side of the contactor. xi. Dimmer System The Contractor shall supply, install and commission the dimming system consisting of (4 No. 1.5 kW dimmers racks for auditorium and 1 No. 1.5 KW dimmer rack for video projection room ) enclosed in suitable sheet steel enclosure with louvers for heat dissipation and complete with bus MCB and terminal black for safe operation of the system. The specification of individual dimmers shall be as under: a) Dimmer pack for dimming tungsten filament / low voltage halogen luminaries shall be 40W/VA-220W/180VA used with max 3 Nos. of transformers in 1 Module size or 60W/VA-400W/320VA used with max 5 Nos. of transformers in 2 Module, 240V, 50 Hz., suitable for electronic ballasts. The dimmers must employ the latest microcontroller based circuitry to provide electronic soft start & overload protection. The dimmers must be suitable for use with good quality electronic or wire wound transformers. Dimmers must conform to BS EN 60669-1-1 & BS EN 55015 for RFI suppression. Fused GLS Tungsten Filament lamps to BS EN 60065: 1996 & BS EN: 60432-1,2 rated at 230/240V. Unidirectional current sensing, while being used with wire-wound transformers for low voltage lighting. These dimmers continuously monitor the drive conditions to the transformers, which require essentially, bi-directional A/c supply at their input terminals. If, due to some fault condition, the supply to the wire wound transformer is detected to be unidirectional, which could result in overheating &/or damaging the transformer, the dimmer switches circuitry automatically stops supplying the transformer after a few cycles of detected unidirectional supply. The dimmers monitor the load current to help protect against overheating in wire wound transformers & to prevent overloading of the dimmer for long term reliability. Soft start, which gradually increases the light output, from the load over 1 to 3 seconds after switch on. The Soft start feature is beneficial when used to dim Mains Voltage Tungsten Halogen Lamps which have inherent very high inrush current at switch on. b) Dimmer pack for dimming fluorescent luminaries shall be of an analogue 1-10V controllable ballast inputs & requires only a single two-core wire connection. The dimmer operates by applying a variable resistance to the ballast 1-10V control input. Separate on/off switch to be used to isolate the luminaires in use. Preset adjust to set minimum light level. Preset adjust for use with multiple dimmable ballasts. Upto 4 ballasts an be connected to one dimmer. This 1-10V fluorescent dimming controller can be used to dim 4x18W or 2x36W fluorescent tube luminaries when connected through HF Fluorescent controllable ballast with 1-100% dimming. Wires must be connected to the correct dimmer terminals. DO NOT connect earth to dimmer.
E - 64

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

xii

UnderFloor Service Outlet & Junction Box for Screed System Under floor box shall generally be in 265x265mm in size, tested in accordance with BS EN 50085-2-2, to accept 5000N load made of min 2.5mm thick pre-galvanised steel sheet to BS EN 10142 & 3. The box shall be complete with outlets as indicated in the following drawings. The cover shall be made from flame retardant and high impact material UL 94 V2 rated Nylon, It shall be hinged and must have self closing in accordance with the draft of IEC 61534-22. The lids shall be fully reversible without the need to remove the frame, thereby allowing cable exits from both ends. All cord caps shall be on the cover edge and fold down flush when not in use. Cord caps to be suitably gasketed to prevent ingress of dust. The outlets grommets shall also be hinged for cable management/protection. The selection of box and cover shall be suitable to receive the floor finish where installed. The floor boxes must carry a guarantee of minimum 5 years from the manufacturer. The box must be designed to support Cat6 structured cabling systems. 10mm height adjustment kit to be supplied by the manufacturer, required for increased wiring space. The arrangement of mounting plates must be in a staggered plate to provide strain relief clearance for moulded case plug tops. The staggered plate must have the following arrangement, 1st compartment as left centered, 2nd compartment as right centered & the 3rd compartment as left centered & where a 4th compartment exist, it must be right centered. The base screed box must be supplied with a Throw-Away cum Protection Lid in metal with a knock-out in the centre. The Throw-Away Disposable steel screeding lid helps to prevent seepage of cement, slurry & cement during the screeding process. Min 2 side blanks of the Inscreed box must have pre-perforated knock-outs to accommodate uPVC ducting or metal trunking. Side adaptor plate options to suit uPVC ducting, metal trunking, conduits & blanks must be available from the manufacturer. Slot Provision for looping of wires between 2 compartments must be available. Top cover Lid must be available to accommodate 8mm, 10mm & 12mm recess for carpet or tiles. The junction boxes shall be manufactured at factory and shall not be modified at site. The junction box should be universal and adaptable for different cable. The entire inscreed floor trunking system shall be tested for electrical continuity to the satisfaction of the Architect and all necessary labour, instruments etc for such tests shall be included in the Contract, by the contractor. The entire inscreed floor trunking installation shall be dried and cleaned of all water, dirt/debris etc. before handing over the works. The inscreed floor trunking system shall comply with the requirements of draft pr EN50085-2-2 Cable trunking systems and cable ducting systems for electrical installations. Cable trunking systems and cable ducting systems intended for mounting underfloor, flushfloor or onfloor. The vertical loading capability of the entire system shall be a minimum of 1.5kN for the vertical load applied by a small surface area load and 5kN for the vertical load applied by a large surface area. The deflections under load shall be less than 6mm and the permanent deflection after removal of load shall be less than 3mm. Certificates of Compliance shall be provided.
E - 65

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

Additionally the service and junction boxes shall comply with IEC 60670 Parts 1 and 23 - Boxes and enclosures for electrical accessories for household and similar fixed electrical installations Particular requirements for floor boxes and enclosures. Certificates of Compliance shall be provided. All service outlet boxes shall be installed with wiring devices from the same manufacturer, for better coordination of works, warranties and responsibility. The following standards and specifications must be complied with:BSEN 50085-1:2005 Cable Trunking systems and cable ducting systems for electrical installation General Requirements Cable trunking systems and cable ducting systems for electrical installations. Cable trunking systems and cable ducting systems intended for mounting underfloor, flushfloor or onfloor This standard applies to boxes and enclosures intended to be installed in any kind of floor. Continuously hot-dip coated strip and sheet of low carbon steels for cold forming. Technical delivery conditions. Specification for cable trunking made of insulating material. I.E.E. Wiring Regulations Inscreed floor PVCu Ducts : Contractor to install PVCu trapezoidal ducts wherever specified or shown on the drawings. PVCu ducts to be extruded from 100% recycled PVCu. Fittings to be formed by injection moulding. All PVCu ducts shall be matt white finish, heavy gauge, medium impact resistance, non flame propagating Class 1 spread of flame. The PVCu ducts shall be from the same manufacturer as under floor system. The size of the ducts to be accommodate all the necessary power and data wires in separate ducts. All accessories such as bends, risers, couplers and GI steel fixing clips shall be installed from the same manufacturer to deliver a complete under floor system. PVCu ducts should conform to BS 4678-4:1988. BS7671 17th Edition Wiring Regulations

Draft pr EN 50085-22

IEC 60670 Pts1 & 23: 2007 BS EN 10327:2004

BS 4678 Pt4:1982

E - 66

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

xiii.

Hand Driers

The hand driers shall be installed and fixed as indicated on the drawings. The hand driers shall be as follows: * * * * * * * * ix Deep drawn steel covers of 2 mm thick and glazed porcelain coating. High speed brush motors with self lubricating bearings, long brush life, insulated by resilient mounting to eliminate noise and vibration and protected by fuses. Push button operated. Effective air flow....................................................................................:330 m/h (5.5001/min) Free air flow ..........................................................................................:470 m/h (7.8001/min) Noise level ............................................................................................:75 dB Timer at 34" 240 volts, 50 Hz. Hair Driers The hair driers shall be installed and fixed as indicated on the drawings. The specifications of the hair driers shall be same as the hand driers, except the timer shall be at 90 degree. Installation Switches mounted in external locations or areas subject to moisture shall be enclosed in a weather proof enclosure which shall be of the heavy duty type, quick make and slow break pattern. Phase power identification and phase barriers shall be provided in accordance with IEE regulations where two or more phases are connected to a single switch assembly. The socket outlets shall be circuited as indicated on the drawings, wired using 4 mm sq. cables. Socket outlets shall be wired by the same method as indicated for lighting switches. Fixing height to be indicated on the drawings. All Plant room and storage areas having switch socket outlets shall be of the industrial pattern and galvanised. A separate PVC covered copper earth continuity conductor shall run from the isolator to the equipment. Pumps, fans, pressure switches, etc., shall be supplied and installed under the mechanical portion of the contract. The Contractor shall allow for supplying and fixing the isolators and for final connections to all equipment. Unless specified to the contrary in the specifications, the extract fans and controllers shall be supplied and installed by the Contractor including all wiring and connections. Wiring to the extract fans and controllers shall be as detailed on the drawings and Contractor shall supply and install a control isolator or switched spur unit as shown on the drawings. The control isolator or spur unit shall be engraved. The isolator or spur unit shall be mounted at a suitable height and the fan controller mounted adjacent. Wiring from the fan controller shall be terminated adjacent to the fan position in a flush or surface mounted box fitted with a multi-pin plug and socket. The multi-pin plug and socket shall be of sufficient rating for the particular fan being connected and final connections shall be carried out in circular multi-core flexible cable. Where excessive moisture is envisaged, the flexible cable shall enter the fan via packing gland. Wiring for all split units shall first terminate in the isolator of outdoor unit and then extend to DP switch of indoor unit.
E - 67

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

iix.

Presence detector The presence detector shall be microwave type. The presence detector shall be ceiling mountable and flush. The presence detector shall be work on 240V AC. The output terminal shall be rated for 10XA 240V AC.The presence detector shall have 360 degree coverage. The presence detector shall cover a diameter of 5 meter presence detection and a diameter of 7.5 meter movement detection, when mounted at 3.00 meter height. The presence detector shall have provision to set operating time after the last movement detection from 1 minute to 1 hour via a potentiometer. The presence detector shall have provision to set brightness level from 5 lux to 1000 lux via a potentiometer. The presence detector shall have provision to be connected in parallel. The presence detector shall be rated for an operating temperature of -10oC to +45oC.The presence detector shall be rated for a storage temperature of -20oC to +60oC.The presence detector shall be rated for IP41 ingress protection. The presence detector shall have a fire resistance up to 650oC.The presence detector shall comply with IEC 60669-1, IEC 60669-2-1 standards. The terminal shall have provision for connecting 0.5mm2 to 1.5mm2 flexible or rigid cables. The presence detector shall have an option for control via an additional handheld IR remote control for manual over rides. The presence detector shall have LEDs for testing and IR acknowledgement.

B.11

LIGHT FITTINGS The Contractor shall include in his costs for supply, erection, connection of all specified light fittings complete with suitable lamps in positions specified, unless otherwise directed. No lighting fittings shall be purchased until authorisation has been received, in writing from the Engineer. This authorisation shall be sought by the Contractor in good time in order to allow the programme of works to continue unaffected. All light fittings shall be of types specified or similar and approved. No alternative light fitting will be considered unless permission is received by the Contractor in writing from the Engineer. The luminaires shall comply with EN 60598-1 and got CE and ENEC marking. Where tube pendants are required, ball and socket back plates shall be used unless otherwise indicated. The body thickness of sheet steel of the light fittings shall be minimum 0.6 mm and the luminaries shall comply with BS EN 60598. All aluminium louvers shall be made of minimum 99% purity with anodization. The Contractor shall provide certificate from an independent testing laboratory conforming to various standards for all proposed light fittings (i.e. IP rating, photometric test), which shall be submitted along with the submittal. All fluorescent fittings shall be complete with electronic ballasts as per EN 55015 and harmonics compatibility unless otherwise indicated and power factor correction condensers to give a minimum power factor of 0.9 lagging and control gear noise level shall be limited to 24 dB.

E - 68

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

The Contractor shall provide and fix plain pendants. Each pendant shall comprise of ceiling rose, a suitable length of flexible cord in relation to the mounting height of the fitting and BS lamp holder with H.O. pattern skirt. Lamp holders incorporated in tungsten luminaires shall comply with BS 5042 Part 1 in the case of bayonet cap holders and with BS 5042 Part 2 where screw type lamp caps are employed. Lamp holders incorporated in fluorescent luminaires shall comply with BS 5042 Part 4. Ceiling roses shall be manufactured from either rigid PVC or bakelite. Wiring from the ceiling rose to the lamp holder shall be carried out using heat resistant flexible cord of minimum size 1.0 mm.sq. The insulated heat resistant flexible cord may be butyl rubber or equal that can stands 85C minimum. A plug and socket type ceiling rose 3-pin white colour shall be provided for all recessed luminaires and 4-pin red colour supply to emergency fittings, located within each reach of the aperture provided for the luminaire. The light fitting shall not be considered complete without the lamps of specified wattage. The connections between the circuit wiring and fitting shall be effected by means of fixed nylon connector terminal block mounted in the lighting outlet conduit box or ceiling rose above the false ceiling. All metal work shall be bonded to earth. Where surface mounted light fittings are installed, conduit boxes, either of the loopin type or standard type shall be installed above each fitting position. Extension rings shall be fitted as necessary so that the bottom of the ring is flush with the underside of the ceiling. White break joint rings shall be provided between the fittings and conduit box to mask the joints as deemed necessary by the Engineer. Light fittings designed for mounting on a flush ceiling shall be mounted on a surface outlet box. The Contractor shall supply and install a suitable metal support for each fitting. In areas where the ceiling is of the suspended type, the weight of the conduit and light fittings shall under no circumstance be carried by this type of ceiling and suitable two independent fixings shall be provided and installed by the Contractor to carry the weight of the fittings. All lighting fixtures are to be suspended as required by Kahra-maa regulations. Ensure that the light fittings are adequately ventilated and where appropriate, suitable spacers shall be installed to give a minimum clearance of 6 mm between the fitting and the finished ceiling. In the buildings where steel trusses are provided, all the light fixtures shall be supported from the trusses or the purlins with the help of double chains to withstand the weight of the light fixture. All lamps throughout the installation shall be supplied and fixed in position as per this contract. They shall be of the sizes and types specified. All lamps over 150 watts shall be of screwed cap-type. The lamps shall be supplied complete with end caps suitable for the fitting to which it is to be attached. The lamps shall be rated for 240 volts. Unless otherwise specified, lamps shall be coiled coil conforming to BS 161, 555, 1853. Fluorescent tubes shall be triphosphor type with minimum colour temperature of 4000 K and colour rendering index of 85% certified tubes will be used only. Each
E - 69

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

and every fluorescent light fitting shall be fitted with power factor correction capacitors. All lighting luminaires shall comply with BS 4533 and 5225 and fitted with bi-pin and bayonet end caps as necessary. All control gear associated with fluorescent fittings shall comply with BS 2818 and 4017 and shall be of the electronic start type. Final connections to luminaires shall be by 3 core heat resisting flexible cables connected as previously described. The Contractor shall ensure that fluorescent fittings are connected to the three phase distribution boards such that there is no stroboscopic effect or error. With the exception of certain light weight domestic and commercial types of light fittings, no fittings shall be suspended by means of flexible cables. Where light fittings are suspended they shall be by means of purpose made metal supports. In case of hazardous locations, the light fittings shall have Zone 1 classification as per IEC-79, B.S. 4683 and B.S. 5501 and rated IP 66. The luminaires shall have a direct entry fitting with a terminal block for mains supply and a switch live terminal facility. The terminals shall be capable of accepting conductors upto 4 mm. The fitting should be swivel mounted to allow for a 90 swing for relamping. The luminaire casing shall be of aluminium with an exterior finish of white enamel. All fluorescent light fittings shall be provided with electronic solid state two pin starter device for different sizes of lamps (linear fluorescent lamps from 600 mm to 1500 mm, 18W, 36W, 58W, compact fluorescent lamps and 4 pin 2D lamps). Electronic ballasts shall be used with fluorescent lamps for dimmable lights. The electronic ballast shall be suitable to work with 26 mm dia fluorescent lamps (TLD). The main function groups of the electronic ballast shall be HF generator with current limitation, power supply consisting of rectifier with harmonic limitation and HF filter for radio interference suppression. The components of the dimming system with electronic ballast shall be: * * * * Fluorescent lamp (RS) dimmer capacity - 1200 VA Electronic ballast Resistive base load eg., 25W incandescent lamp Dimming range - 100 - 30%

For all non-dimmable lights, electronic starters shall be provided.

Fluorescent Lamps The Contractor shall ensure that the fluorescent lamps shall have the following lumen output: Tube 18W 36W 58W
E - 70

Luminaire Output 1300 3300 5200

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

However, the fluorescent lamps shall be tri-phosphor type which may have a better output than as indicated above. The colour rendering index shall be 85% with 4000k colour temperature certified lamps will be used only. External Lighting The requirements of electrical work under this heading shall comprise the supply and installation of: a. b. Light fittings (wall / ceiling mounted and bracket mounted), lamps, control gear fuse units as detailed on the drawings and Schedule of light fittings. Contactor units, each incorporating a controlling photo-cell and time switch within the external lighting distribution board for the control of external lighting. Underground PVC/SWA/PVC cabling or MICC/PVC wiring as detailed on the drawing and accessories.

c.

B.12

EMERGENCY PACK FOR LIGHTING The emergency pack for lighting shall consist of individual power packs installed within the light fittings, as shown on the tender drawings. The light fittings to be provided with these power packs have been indicated with a symbol. These power packs shall consist of convertor/invertor with nickle-cadmium battery to provide 3 hours operation for one of the lamps in these fittings. The light output from these packs shall be as follows: * * * * * * * For 20 watts fluorescence For 40 watts fluorescence For 65 watts fluorescence For 18 watts PL lamp For 24 watts PL lamp For 16 watts 2D lamp For 28 watts 2D lamp : : : : : : : 30% of initial lamp lumens 11% of initial lamp lumens 11% of initial lamp lumens 25% of initial lamp lumens 25% of initial lamp lumens 25% of initial lamp lumens 25% of initial lamp lumens

The design of the unit shall be such that it can be fitted easily into all types of fittings including batten luminaire. The unit shall have the capability of sustaining high temperature so that it can be accommodated into the fittings with high internal temperature. However, if the internal temperature of the fitting exceeds 50C. then the provision of mounting it in remote location shall be made. In case of remote mounting, a purpose made remote box shall be provided. Charger system shall have solid state constant current with full recharge time of 24 hours. The inverter shall be high frequency transistor oscillator, producing sine wave output.

E - 71

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

There shall be red light emitting diode type charge indicator and an internal control circuit to prevent the battery from deep discharge. The circuitry shall have two live supplies, one switched and one unswitched. Failure of unswitched supply shall operate the change over circuit. The system shall be suitable for operation on 240V, 1 Ph, 50 Hz., A.C. system.

B.13

WIRING SYSTEMS The method of laying conduits/cables and its wiring shall be carried out as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. The Contractor to provide PVC conduits and accessories on the surface below the soffit but above the false ceiling. G.I. trunking shall be run from DB to all the Corridors and PVC conduits shall be tapped from this G.I. trunking. PVC conduits to run concealed in the walls up to the service outlet. Where there is no false ceiling, the conduits for light points shall be laid within the concrete roof slab. Conduits for the sockets shall be laid in the floor slab and laying in the screed shall be avoided as far as possible.

B.14

INTERCOM SYSTEM The Contractor shall provide 100 lines intercom exchange with outlet points as shown on the tender drawings. The system shall be suitable for 1 phase, 240 volts, 50 Hz. A.C. supply. Contractor shall include everything necessary to enable the telephone exchange to be commissioned and work efficiently. This inter-communication system shall utilize key operated loudspeaker / microphone instruments. They shall consist of desk type for Administration areas or wall mounted sub instruments for all Classrooms, Labs, Stores, Auditorium, Guard and Gardener Rooms and master instrument. It shall be possible for the master instrument to call or be called from any of the sub instruments. Sub instruments shall not be allowed to talk to each other. The wall mounted subinstruments shall be flush type, vandal proof and mounted at 1250 mm A.F.F.L. All cables within the buildings shall be supplied and installed as part of this contract. The system shall conform to the following standards: a. b. The International Telegraph and Telephone Consultative Committee (CCITT) Electronic Industries Association (EIA)

E - 72

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

Prior to ordering / installation, the following documents shall be submitted by the Contractor for approval: i. ii. iii. iv. v. Outline drawings showing general arrangement and approximate dimensions. Electrical specifications and descriptive literature. A listing of factory tests performed. A list of site tests which will be performed. Shop drawings.

The system shall comprise of and function as follows: a. A fully electronic communications 100 lines exchange system for speech transmission shall be used to control all the rooms from a master station. The master station shall be equipped with a directory of reference numbers. If any fault occurs in the line it shall be disconnected. Incoming calls shall be announced by an intermittent ringing but not fully put through. If a call is not answered within 30 seconds, it shall be disconnected. All desk station instruments shall be equipped with a loudspeaker and microphone handset for confidential conversations and also should work without lifting the handset if required. The master instrument shall be situated in the Secretary Room at ground floor or as approved by the Client and the exchange and power supply shall be located in the Telecom room in the Administration area as shown on the drawing. The intercom system shall work with a power supply of 240 volts, single phase, 50 Hz. The standard telephone multi-pin twisted cable shall be used. The total line resistance, exchange to station shall not exceed 200 ohms per wire for this equipment using speech transmission via the 50 volt DC telephone network cabling. The cabling distribution within buildings shall be independent of the PABX telephone system which is provided by Q-Tel.

b. c. d.

e.

f. g.

h.

E - 73

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

B.15

COMPUTER SYSTEM The Contractor shall engage the services of a previously approved (by concerned authority) specialist firms / Contractor for installation, testing and commissioning for providing the computer system as per the specifications detailed herein and as shown on the tender drawings. The Contractor shall provide for heavy duty PVC conduits and accessories for this system. The minimum size of conduits shall be 25 mm. All pull boxes, trunking shall be provided. The computer wiring shall be UTP Cat. 6a shall be provided by the Contractor. The computer wiring shall be laid from the user outlets up to the Computer Room directly without any joints in between. ** The Contractor shall provide communication cabinet at the Computer room to the following specifications: a. Front glass door with key locks and keys b. Metal back door. c. Fan tray d. Power distribution e. Patch panel with number of ports equal to the number of points in the school. f. Main server room network cabinet should be 42U (800 x 800) with following specification. * Minimum 6 way fan tray along with fans, minimum 12 socket PDU with fuse, Front glass door and rear metal door, front and rear locks. * Castors, side opening doors with locks and vertical cable managers. ** The Contractor shall provide communication cabinet in supervisor room 3 to the following specifications: Minimum 19U cabinet should be installed in the remote site and the cabinet should be equipped with minimum 2 way fan tray along with fans, minimum 8 sockets PDU with fuse, cabinet should be open from rear and front side, front and rear door locks Castors, side opening doors with locks and vertical cable managers. The Contractor shall provide cable termination at both ends (at user end and patch panel end) complete with labelling. In addition the Contractor shall provide the following: 1. 2. 220 x 5 metre long patch cord cable. 368 x 1 metre long patch cord cable.

E - 74

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

NETWORK REQUIRMENT: Passive network to be installed in all the area of the schools, Passive network includes wired network points as well as to the wireless access points, as indicated in the drawings. Separate patch panel to be provided for wireless network and should be differentiate with different label numbers from the wired passive network. Both networks should be split in two portions, main server room and remote cabinet, and both the cabinet should be connected through 12 core multimode indoor 50/125 fibre optic cable. The fibre should be spliced and both sides should be equipped with fibre patch panel fully loaded with the LC connectors. There should be cable manager for each fibre patch panel.

MULTIMEDIA PROJECTORS The contractor shall provide in all classrooms the following: 25mm dia pvc conduit embedded in the wall ( the white board wall )is to be starting at a height of 1000mm and running in the slab 2800mm away from the wall. The conduit shall be terminated with a 3x3 metal wiring accessories boxes at both ends. Pull wire inside the conduit.

RAISED FLOOR IN THE COMPUTER ROOM The installation of calcium sulphate panels with steel sheet on bottom complete with 30 cm pedestals with the following specification: - High fire resistance excellent acoustical behaviour- high load bearing capacityvery low panel deflection- low sensibility to humidity. Concentrated load Fire classification acc. To DIN 4102 Fire resistance acc. To DIN 41022 Electrical resistance System weight System heights Panel thickness Pedestal spacing 7.5 KN A2 F 30 106 61 Kg/m 70-1250 mm 36.5 mm 600 mm

Panel lifters for to be provided and GI cable tray under raised floor for each power services and data with 20% spare space in each tray for future expansion. A sufficient number of holes to pass power cables and network patch card (under the raised floor) to be provided.

E - 75

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

NETWORK OUTLET POINTS: Network points will be located and distributed as shown in the attached drawings. A total of 220 wired network points and 74 wireless network access point. 1x13A double socket power outlet should be installed with each wired network point in all areas. Each network cable should not exceed more than 75 meters from the network point to cabinet. All the cables should be cat 6 cables. All the patch panels should be 24-port cat 6a patch panels and the patch panel should be with minimum 3U. All the patch panel must have cable manager to manage the cable. Each network outlet points ( Face Plates ) shall be category 6a with DUAL 45 angle RJ45 jack. Each network outlet point shall be with label slots and transparent cover. A clear plastic cover shall be provided for all points for protection purpose. All the network points should be tested and test report should be generated through branded testing equipment for example fluke. Complete documentation should be there along with detail layout of network points, Network point location should exact match with the layout of the network. Soft copy of the documentation should be provided. The spaces of Switches and Routers equipment shall be provided as required.

B.16

QATAR CABLE VISION AND VIDEO SYSTEM The Contractor shall provide PVC conduits of 25 mm dia., trunking, splitters and outlets as shown on the drawings in every classroom. The outlets shall be of metal clad finish suitable for radio and cable T.V. The wiring to these outlets and antenna on the roof shall be carried out by the Contractor. However, the head end equipment shall be installed by others. Antenna on the roof shall be provided by the Contractor.

E - 76

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

B.17

FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM Addressable Fire Alarm and Detection System General The Contractor shall install, test and commission the fire alarm system as per the specifications detailed herein. The work under this section shall include for the complete performance of Fire Alarm and Detection System in accordance with the specification, drawings, Qatar Civil Defence Department requirements and relevant British standards. The system shall be composed of an addressable system with latest technology in the field to achieve maximum facilities in identifying the spot of fire outbreak and with minimum annunciation of false fire phenomena. All the systems components such as control panel, sensors, manual call points, sounders, etc., shall be produced by the same manufacturer who has at least five (5) years experience in design, manufacturing, installation, commissioning and maintenance of Fire Alarm System in the State of Qatar. Design Criteria The system shall comply with BS 5839, Part 1, BS 5444 Part 4 and latest amendments if any. The system shall include i. ii. iii. iv. v. vi. vii. viii. ix. x. Addressable Fire Alarm Control Panel. Addressable Optical Smoke Sensor Addressable Heat Detector with rate of rise Addressable Manual Call Point. Addressable Electronic Sounder. Addressable Interface Unit Addressable Repeat Panel Built-in printer Indicators Auto-dialling facility.

E - 77

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

System Description Contractor shall provide a complete high quality fire alarm and detection system composed of fully electronic hardware to achieve maximum facilities in identifying the source of fire outbreak in its very early stages and minimize unwanted false alarms. The system shall include but not limited to the following: 1. Addressable Main Fire Alarm control panel with Analogue Detection Technique with integral battery and charger, in-built keyboard (function keys to facilitate on-site programming), in-built printer, visual display unit capable of displaying 2 lines of 40 characters each, indicators to denote "FIRE", "POWER ON", "WARNING" and "FAULT". Addressable Manual call points. Addressable fire sensor - optical and beam type. Addressable Electronic sounders with flashing beacon Addressable fire alarm interface units Addressable repeat panel Built-in printer Other accessories required and wiring Auxiliary Components Auto-dialling facility RS port for communication.

2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11.

The system shall as minimum include the following provisions : 1. All necessary software and/ or programming to provide a fully comprehensive error checking and signal processing system. This shall include analysis of the analogue information received to reduce false alarms incurred by insects, electrical transients, faulty equipment, and the like, together with self compensation monitoring of sensor threshold levels in order to instigate maintenance warning prior to "Fault or Failure" occurrences. Automatically and electronically "Address" all field devices directly connected to the loop circuits. This shall include to automatically memorising all field devices connected to the loop circuit and transfer same on to the on-board printer for read out if requested. Automatically integrate field devices (manual call points, fire sensors, sounders, repeat panel, interface units) where connected to common or different loop circuits to satisfy the "Fire Alarm System Operation Matrix" requirements as shown on the drawings.

2.

3.

E - 78

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

4.

Removal of one or more field devices from a loop circuit shall not in any way impair the correct operation of all other field devices forming part of the loop or system. Synchronization of all sounders whether operating in a continuous or intermittent mode including zoning of alarm for the desired fire compartmentalisation of the area to be individual zone alarm. Identification and display of power supply faults from Graphics Mimic Repeat panels and Interface units, etc. Memories up to 256 events (i.e. Fire/Fault/Message) and transfer same to onboard printer for readout. Accept, identify and verify "Fire Condition" information received from field devices (fire sensors, manual call points, interface units, etc.) and operate sounders.

5.

6. 7. 8.

The system generally comprises of 4 No. individually integrated 2 wire loop circuits derived direct from the central master alarm panel as denoted on the drawings. Each integrated loop circuit being suitable for accepting up to 99 addresses directly connected to the same. System Hardware Fire Alarm Panel The addressable fire alarm control panel with analogue detection technique shall have the following features: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. Multi tasking micro-computer controlled Self-contained and wall mountable or self contained and floor standing. Integral switch mode power supply and battery chargers 24 hour battery back-up Printer and full keyboard as standard Twin 24V master alarm circuits. Manned centre link connection facility Twin Auxiliary relays configurable for Fire, Fault and/or warning operation

E - 79

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

Panel Indications a. b. c. d. e. Alphanumeric Liquid Crystal Display for Fire, Fault and Warning messages (2 lines of 40 characters each). Back light facility on Liquid crystal display Modules of light emitting diodes (Red - Fire, Green - Power on, Yellow Warning and Fault). Two tone buzzer for fire / fault audible indication. Audible bleep for keypad press confirmation

Controls a b. c. d. e. f. g. Silence fault buzzer facility Time and date setting facility Master alarm START/STOP controls Selector alarms ALERT/EVACUATE/STOP controls Test for Liquid crystal display, Light emitting diodes and fault buzzer. Printer ON, OFF, LINE FEED and TEST facilities Disabling facilities for Outstations, Zones, Sectors, Auxiliary Relays, Master alarms.

Panel - Loop Configuration: a. b. c. d. e. Up to 8 addressable loops capacity Each loop of minimum 1 km length Sensors, manual call points, sounders, repeat panels, interface units (all addressable) shall be connected on the same 2 wire loop. 99 addressable outstations per loop Each and every device shall have a loop breaker relay to maintain the loop integrity and keep the entire loops functional isolating only the particular faulty device. A single open-circuit or short-circuit fault on a loop wiring shall not disable any device on it and the system shall remain fully functional.

Labelling of devices: a. b. c. 2 character label per outstation 32 character label per zone 32 character label per Input/Output line on Interface unit.

Event Log a. b. c. A log of 256 previous Fire, Fault, Warning and status events. Separate log of 100 previous fire events 64 current fault and warning events

E - 80

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

Time Zone and Delay Block a. b. c. d. e. 15 itemize programs over 7 day period 16 delay programs of duration 0-10 minutes Sectors can operate with delayed action Any sectors can operate other sectors with delayed action Auxiliary relays can operate ON or OFF with delayed action

System Monitoring a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. Loop communication shall be monitored for errors Loop wiring shall be monitored for short circuit with response time of 0.5 second Loop wiring shall be monitored for open circuit every 10 seconds or less Outstations shall be monitored for disconnection from loop every 10 seconds or less. All outstations shall be monitored for communication failure Loop supply shall be fully monitored Local communication, card functions and interconnection of electronics within the panel shall be monitored for fault. Earth fault, keyboards, and printer shall be monitored for failure.

Engineering Techniques If the control panel is interrupted by an outstation on its loop holding Fire or Fault threshold, the control panel shall immediately perform a fast scan to locate the outstation requesting attention and when it is located, 256 data readings taken from it and used in conjunction to analyse the event. A slow drift of analogue channel readings from a sensor requiring maintenance shall be reflected by changes to the time average values, allowing alarm level off-set values to be created for event analysis, maintaining the sensors sensitivity and allowing the early detection of slow burning fires. The response time from the sensing of a threshold at an outstation to appropriate event action being taken by the control panel should be less than 1 second, independent of the system size. An even faster response of 0.5 second shall be achieved if the threshold is from a manual call point within the system. Other Features a. b. c. d. e. Printer disables facility. Information retrieval facilities for engineering set-up and system status. Memory of configuration and engineering set-up Clearing Fault and Warning facilities Password protected access to engineering controls

E - 81

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

Power Supply Unit A power supply unit shall be provided for each control panel and interface unit forming part of the system, and these shall comply in all respects with the requirements of BS 3116:Part 4 and BS 5839:Part 1. Each power supply unit shall be suitable for operating in conjunction with its associated panel/interface unit, and be complete with suitably rated solid state fully automatic charger, sealed lead acid battery, status control/indicating module and interface input/output fuses having a life span of 20 - 25 years. Each unit shall be suitable for accepting a 240V 50 Hz AC input and have a 24V DC nominal output suitably rated to operate its panel/interface unit and associated equipment for both normal operating conditions and a mains failure standby period of 24 hours (minimum) with a further 30 minutes under full alarm/control load conditions. Automatic Analogue / Addressable Fire Sensors All automatic sensors shall be analogue addressable pattern and comply with the following requirements:a. Smoke Sensors - Optical Type These shall be optical / heat combined type in a single head. Smoke and heat element shall combine to react to the presence of smoke and heat at the same time. The smoke sensing design shall comply with BS 5445 : Part 7 and heat sensing design to BS 5445 Part 5, Grade 2. All smoke sensors shall comprise of three components - termination plate, electronics module and a replaceable sensing chamber. The termination plate shall incorporate the terminals for wiring only and shall not contain any electronic parts. The electronic module shall plug into the termination plate as a second fix item. The sensing chamber shall fit on the electronics module as a third fix item. b. Heat Sensor Shall comply where applicable with the requirements of BS 5445:Part 5. Heat sensing shall be carried out by the thermistor and heat sink assembly. The microprocessor on the PCB performs monitoring of the thermistor through analogue to digital conversion circuitry and uses the measurement to enable heat sensing to be performed. c. Duct Sensor The duct sensor shall use an optical sensor. The housing shall include inlet and outlet probes and terminations to the sensor base. It shall monitor an air flow of 0 - 10 metres per second in ventilation ducts. Therefore a correct positioning of duct detectors is a must. Air turbulences caused by bends, fans or obstructions shall reduce the efficiency of the probes and the unit shall be fitted away from these positions. A position shall be selected where a sufficient density of smoke can reach the probe. If smoke is present in sufficient quantity in the duct it shall be sensed by optical sensor. Weather Proof Duct Housing enclosure to be provided made from non-metallic material with captive cover screws and shall be full size mounting template and all required gasket are supplied for installation convenience. The enclosure certified as UL listed to Standard 268A along with NEMA 4X rating to IP65.
E - 82

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

d.

Addressable Manual Call Points (Pull type) All manually operated contacts shall be addressable pattern and comply with the following requirements:i. ii. Comply in all respect with BS 5839:Part 2. Contain integral L.E.D. indication to denote operational mode, all necessary electronic components and circuitry required to form an addressable device for direct connection to the loop circuits originating from the control panel, and operate in conjunction with the system circuitry/operational arrangements. Suitable for flush mounting, complete with box, test probe, transparent plastic fill covering to pull switch in order to avoid disoperation of the pull switch.

iii.

e.

Addressable Electronic Sounders with Flashing Beacon. The electronic sounder shall meet the requirements of BS 5839:Part 1. It shall be electronic addressable pattern with two link selectable volume - 95 dB at 1 m and 104 dB at 1 m. The Sounder shall be equipped with flashing beacon to meet the international standard for the Disables. The sounders shall be compatible to be connected on the same loop along with addressable sensors and addressable manual call points.

Addressable Fire Alarm Interface Unit All interface units shall be addressable and contain all necessary microprocessors electronic components/ circuitry required to form an addressable device for direct connection to the loop circuits and operate in conjunction with the system circuitry/operational requirements. It shall have the capacity to drive the required number of outlets to be controlled via relays with 1 set of 240V AC/DC 6A rated volt free change over contacts, all prewired to terminals for accepting incoming cables by the sub-contractor. The relay coil shall be controlled from the control panel via the loop circuits and internal micro-processors/ electronic components/circuitry, the contacting being generally utilized to transfer ventilation plants to a fire status under a fire alarm condition. The interface units shall be complete with power supply units i.e. integral battery and charger, all housed within a surface mounted metallic enclosure. The interfacing shall include but not limited to the following systems: Liquefied Petroleum Gas ( LPG ), Fire Fighting ( 2no. supervisory switches, 2no. pressure switches ), AHUs , Lift , Public Address ( PA ) , Police Auto Dialer , etc.

E - 83

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

Addressable Fire Alarm Repeat Panel The Contractor shall provide the fire alarm repeater panel in the Guard House to meet the following specifications: Fire alarm repeat panel shall be addressable pattern, containing all necessary microprocessors, electronic components and circuitry required to form an addressable device for direct connection to the loop circuits or main fire alarm panel and operate in conjunction with the system circuitry/operational requirements. It shall give secondary indication and control of the main fire alarm control panel and repeat system FIRE, FAULT and WARNING messages with indications and also duplicate essential system controls for emergency conditions. The messages on the repeat panel shall be given by an alphanumeric 2 lines by 40 characters liquid crystal display. Audible indications shall be by means of a 2 tone buzzer for FIRE and FAULT, with silencing facility for the FAULT sound. It shall have an identical display to that used on the control panel and include start sounders, stop sounders, reset controls and test engineering facilities. It shall have integral power supply and battery charger with 24 hour battery back-up. Repeat panel shall be given a 32 character label from the main control panel for its location identification. Local communication, interconnection of electronics disconnection from the loop power supply and standby supply shall be monitored. Auto-dialling Facility An auto-dialler facility shall be provided for dialling to the local Fire Brigade / Civil Defence Department in case of fire. The Contractor shall liaise with the department for the same. The auto-dialling facility shall be by dialling pre-programmed numbers from a cartridge tape and then transmitting speech messages in Arabic and English. The facility shall be equipped with manual and automatic reset functions. Description of Operation The fire alarm panel shall have individually integrated loop circuits as shown on the drawing, distributed to cover the various building levels of the whole development. The various areas of the building shall be identified as "FIRE ZONES" and generally operate in the following manner.

E - 84

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

Fire Alarm Condition 1. Alarm initiation Should fire zone contact glass be broken or smoke/heat sensor operate, the following functions where applicable shall operate:a. Energise the "FIRE" indicators and instigate the L.C.D. to denote address identification and label details, all forming part of the master fire alarm panel. Selected sounder zones to operate on a continuous/intermittent basis as required. Energise the applicable relays, which in turn signal the ventilation plant to a fire status and shut the PACU.'s etc. Signal for shut down to be arranged in such away to trip only the zone (group of PACUs) of the particular Air Conditioning Control Panel Retain the event within the master alarm panel memory for logging on the onboard printer if and when required. Auto-dial a pre-recorded message to the different locations i.e. Fire Brigade, Director and Security Officer.

b. c.

d. e.

2.

Silence Sounders To silence the activated sounders the following procedure where applicable shall apply:a. b. c. Release key operated hinged access lid to control key board. Press "Silence Alarm" control key, to de-activate an internal supervisory tone unit. The functions listed above in no.1 (a), (b), (d) and (e) above shall remain active after completion of this procedure.

3.

System Reset To reset the system after completing (2) above, the following procedure where applicable shall apply:a. b. Replace the broken contact glass or check the activate sensor as returned to the normal status. Press "Reset" control key, to automatically extinguish the "FIRE" indicators, remove the information from the L.C.D., all forming part of the master alarm control panel, and extinguish the "FIRE ZONE" area/Register title L.E.D.'s forming part of the graphic mimic display panel.

E - 85

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

Fault Condition 1. Fault initiation Should a monitored loop circuit be subject to a line break/ short/open circuit or an equipment item develops any fault/incur supply problems, the following functions where applicable shall operate:a. b. 2. Energise the "Fault" indicators and instigate the L.C.D. to denote incident location/address and label details. Energise the internal fault tone unit

Fault Reset To reset the system after initiation of (1) above, the following procedure shall apply. a. Rectification of the fault shall automatically extinguish the "Fault" indicators, and automatically de-energise the internal fault tone unit.

Warning Condition 1. Warning initiation Should a field device be changed/replaced for a dissimilar device (i.e. smoke sensor replaced by heat), the following functions where applicable shall operate:a. b. 2. Energise the "Warning" indicators and instigate the L.C.D. to denote the incident location/address and label details. Energise the internal fault tone unit.

Warning Reset To reset the system after initiation of (1) above, the following procedure shall apply:a. Replace correct type of field device or if field device type change is deliberate due to area functional requirements this situation can be accepted via the function keys. On completion of (a) above, the "Warning" indicators and internal fault tone unit shall automatically de-energise.

b.

System Check Circuitry This shall incorporate all the necessary requirements to provide a full comprehensive error checking and signal processing system, the operation of which being as detailed for "Fault Condition" above.

E - 86

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

General A manually operated control key shall be included, which if pressed shall signal all sounders to an "Evacuate" status. A key operated code system shall be provided within the microcomputer to enable the user to select to retain or delete in any combination the sounders, or interface unit relays operation during "Test" conditions. Once an alarm is initiated it shall continue until normal conditions are restored. Submittals Contractor to submit complete list of materials and equipment of Fire Alarm and Detection system for Engineer's approval including catalogues, illustrations, diagram, and any other relevant descriptive literature. Maintenance Manual The contractor shall provide six copies of a manual giving complete instructions for the operation, inspection, testing and maintenance of the system including wiring diagrams of units and main control panel. It shall also include the following: 1. 2. Manufacturer's instructions for testing and frequency of cleaning for automatic smoke detector heads. Manufacturer's instructions for any control adjustment and maintenance of battery/charger units.

Maintenance and Service Contractor shall provide call back service for 400 days following final acceptance date of the fire alarm and detection works. Maintenance shall include the visit of contractor's competent personnel for necessary adjustments, cleaning and replacement of parts. Spare Parts The contractor shall guarantee the supply of spare parts for at least ten (10) years from the end of the guarantee period. The contractor shall list the spare parts required for a period of two years, with prices and provide two complete sets of special tools necessary for the routine maintenance and testing of the complete fire alarm system. Training The contractor shall organise training courses on the maintenance of the fire alarm system for the personnel designated by the Employer.

E - 87

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

Wiring and Wiring Facilities Supply and install the necessary conduit, cable tray, MICC cables and accessories and wiring for the fire alarm system. The system shall operate on 2 wire lines for detection, alarm and control functions. Wire size, termination and other details shall be as per Fire Alarm System manufacturer's recommendations. All wiring shall be installed to provide a complete and satisfactory functional system in all respects. All cable terminations at components and junction boxes shall have identification tags, indicating polarity and function in a manner which is consistent throughout the system. The Alarm/Detection system wiring shall be completely independent from the other system wiring in all respects in accordance with the IEE Regulations. Joints in fire alarm system wiring shall be avoided. Where joints calves are unavoidable the joints shall be enclosed in a suitable junction box labelled 'Fire Alarm" and joints shall not be such as to reduce the reliability and resistance to fire of the cable below that of unjointed cable. Testing and Commissioning After the installation is complete, the Contractor shall conduct operating and commissioning tests. The equipment shall be demonstrated to operate in accordance with the requirements of this specification. The system installation, testing and commissioning shall be as per Qatar Civil Defence approval and requirements. The fire alarm system shall be completely programmed in accordance with Qatar Fire Department requirement and a specialist from the manufacturer shall demonstrate the complete system. B.18 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM Portable Extinguishers The Contractor shall supply and install portable fire extinguishers as shown on the drawings. The fire extinguishers shall be manufactured from robust aluminium cylinder or from high quality 1.4 mm gauge steel, inert gas welded and finished externally in colour in accordance with the BBS EN 3.1 1996 as follows: * * * CO2 fire extinguisher Water fire extinguisher Powder fire extinguisher : : : Colour code -do-doRed with black Red Red with blue - 5 kg. - 9 litres - 6 kg.

The fire extinguishers shall be tested to the following: * * * Working Pressure Test Pressure Temperature Range : : : 10 bar 24 bar - 20C. to 60C.

E - 88

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

The fire extinguishers shall be operated by pulling the safety pin and squeezing the lever. This action shall open a valve in the head allowing the element of extinguisher to be expelled under its own pressure to the horn through siphon and nozzle. All the extinguishers shall be clearly marked with the operating instructions. Fire Blanket The Contractor shall supply, install and connect to the surface of the wall 1.5 x 1.2 m light weight, high efficiency fire fighting agent fibre glass blanket complete with a suitable container clearly marked with the operating instructions. B.19 LIFTS The Contractor shall supply, install and commission 1 No. passenger elevator as specified below. The lift shall comply fully with British Standards BS 2655 / 5655 and Qatar Elevator Code. The specialist sub-contractor shall comply with Qatar Elevator Code, BS 5655 5656 and EN 81-115 latest codes. In case of alternative manufacture, certification to be submitted with a certification from a recognised independent inspecting authority stating compliance with the EN and BS standards. Specified or alternative specialist manufacturer to submit copy of ISO 9000 of quality assurance certification from a recognised independent inspecting authority for the school. Passenger Elevator Number of elevators Type Capacity Speed Number of stops/openings Service floors Travel Operation type Control : : : : : : : : : One Passenger 8 persons [630 kgs] 60 mpm [1.00 mps] 2 stops, 2 openings (front opening at GF and rear opening at FF) G, 1 3.90 m. Selective collective Variable voltage variable frequency with data network system and permanent magnet traction machine. 3700 mm 1450 mm Refer architectural drawing
E - 89

Overhead height Pit depth Hoist way size

: : :

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

Machine room Cabin a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. Cabin walls and doors Cabin size Cabin ceiling & lighting Ventilation Car flooring Car Front Return Panel Entrance Columns Entrance sills

Not required. The traction machine and control panel must be installed within the upper end of hoist way. Hairline finished stainless steel. 1100 mm [W] x 1400 mm [D] x 2200 mm [H] Painted steel sheet ceiling with milky-white globe lighting made of resin based plastic cover. Electric blower 2 mm recess to accept vinyl tiles. Vinyl tiles to match the Lobby tile finish. Hairline finished stainless steel Integrated with front return panel. Extruded hard aluminium Safety shoe - door protection system which utilizes sensitive mechanical door edge, provided for the full height of the doors which will re-open the doors in the event of obstruction. At both floors - lintel and wide jamb in hairline finished stainless steel. Centre opening automatic doors. 900 mm [W] x 2100 mm [H] Hairline finished stainless steel. Extruded hard aluminium a. Landing Indicators - Vertical combined unit comprising digital LED dot display hall position indicator, directional arrows and micro stroke click type tactile call buttons in grey plastic. Face plate in hairline finished stainless steel with dark grey plastic case at all floors. b. Car Operating Panel - Digital LED dot display position indicator with smoke grey plastic display panel and micro stroke click type tactile call buttons in grey plastic which will illuminate on registration of a call. Face plate in hairline finished stainless steel Car operating panels to be provided on both left and right wall of the cabin.

: : : : : : : : :

Door safeties

Landing architraves Landing doors a. b. c. Type Size Finishes at both floors

: : : : :

Landing entrance sills Indicator

E - 90

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

Response light Car operating panel buttons and hall buttons

: :

LED dot display illuminated).

(orange

colour

when

Micro stroke click type tactile buttons with embossed numerals on a smooth base.

Additional features required 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. Overload protective device which makes the car inoperative when overloaded apart from giving an audible and visible indication. Emergency car lighting for 3 hours duration Two sides safety shoe running the full height of the door panels. Interphone between Lift cabin, Ground floor hall and Guard house. Tubular stainless steel handrail on both left and right wall of the cabin. Automatic door-open time adjustment - Door open times shall be automatically adjusted taking into consideration whether the call is a hall call or a car call. Door nudging feature-without buzzer - If the doors are kept open longer than the predetermined time, a temporary override function shall be automatically engaged to close the doors. Car call cancelling - When a car responds to the final car call in up or down direction, the system shall automatically check and clear the remaining calls from memory. Safe landing - if there is a malfunction and the elevator stops between floors, controller shall perform a diagnostic check prior to moving the elevator to the nearest landing. Next landing - if the elevator doors are unable to open fully at a destination floor for any reason, the doors shall close and the elevator shall go to the next floor. Door load detector - if the doors are prevented from opening or closing properly, door direction shall be reversed. Power on releveling - If the car stops at a door zone due to a failure with normal power, the car shall re-level to secure the floor level with the door opens after normal power is resumed. Door load detector - If the doors cannot open or close properly, the door direction shall be reversed. Door sensor self diagnosis - If a non-contact door sensor fails, the system shall automatically determine the door closing timing to maintain the elevator service. Auto door speed control - The system shall monitor the actual door load conditions at each floor and shall automatically adjust the door speed and torque accordingly. Emergency landing device - in the event of power failure, emergency landing device shall bring the elevator to the nearest landing and then keep the door in open position. When the power is resumed, the elevator shall start functioning. Alarm bell. Fire Alarm - In the event of fire and evacuation stage, the fire alarm panel shall activate the lift control panel circuitry to ground the lifts by over-riding all landing calls and then keep the doors open after landing. The operation of the control panel and hence lift shall resume to normal only after resetting the alarm call on the fire alarm panel and the control panel. : : : Spring Gradual 415V, 3 Ph., 50 Hz. / 240V, 1 Ph., 50 Hz.
E - 91

Buffers Car safety Power supply

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

B.20

PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM The Contractor shall engage the services of a Specialist Contractor for designing the Public Address system and submit the scheme for the approval of the Engineer. The Specialist Contractor shall be responsible for the satisfactory execution, installation, commissioning and performance of this system. The system shall be wired independently of other wiring systems using PVC rigid conduit / trunking of its own. The tender drawing only shows the scheme and location of the loudspeakers and amplifier rack. The actual routes of conduits, wires, trunking etc., to the various equipments shall be clearly shown by the Contractor on the working drawings. The Contractor shall provide two independent systems for the Courtyard / Multipurpose Hall / Canteen and the Auditorium as shown on the tender drawings. The equipment shall conform to the following specifications:

Courtyard / Multi-purpose Hall / Canteen a. System Mixer/Pre-Amplifier with Zone Selection This unit shall be a high performance call / BGM pre-amplifier and shall provide a dual channel operation for calls and music simultaneously to a maximum of 6 zones. Technical Data Frequency response Distortion Priority mute Call station input Input sensitivity Data Mic / Line input S/N Ratio CMRR Speech filter Phantom power supply Master output Override relay for Volume controls b. Power Amplifier The amplifiers shall be rated to cover the system demand as shown in the drawings . Fully transistorized power amplifier modular type consisting of a central housing incorporating a power amplifier and all the necessary
E - 92

: : : : : : : : : : : : :

50 Hz - 20 KHz. < 0.5% > 50 dB 8 pin DIN balanced 1V RS 485, 1200, N, 8, 1, 0 3 pin XLR / 5 pin DIN > 63 dB for mic and > 70 dB for music > 40 dB -3 dB @ 315 Hz 16 V 3 Pin XLR Yes

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

interface circuitry for connection of other input and output modules shall be provided. The master module in the main amplifier should have mains on/off indicator, an output level indicator and red LED as a peak overload indicator. The audio output transformer should have three voltage tapping viz., 100V, 70V and 50V wired to a 12 way Mate-N lock connector on the rear panel. The connector should have six outlet points for the output zone selector module. Technical Data Power supply Rated power Input sensitivity No. of inputs Frequency response Tone control Indicator Distortion (at 1 KHz) Signal to noise ratio c. : : : : : : : : : 240V AC, 50 Hz, 1 pH. Based on the scheme provided in the single line diagram 0.5 mV 5 nos. + 1 aux. 60 - 20,000 Hz ( 3 dB) Treble 10 dB at 10 KHz Bass 10 dB at 100 HZ LED for power and output levels. <1% 80 dB

Microphones (in Courtyard and Multi-purpose Hall) 2 no. condenser type cardoid microphones, goose neck type, one with full height adjustable stand and the other mounted on to a table stand. Technical Data Frequency range Polar pattern Output impedance at 1 KHz : : : 100 - 16000 Hz Cardiod for goose neck and omni-direction for others. 200/ 250 ohm (unbalanced)

The microphone shall override the cassette player or AM / FM tuner once initiated. The unit shall be compatible with the amplifier and in case any mixing amplifiers are required, the same shall be provided. Microphone Outlets 2 no. 3 pin DIN microphone outlets shall be provided complete with wiring, box and plastic white plates in Courtyard and Multi-purpose Halls. d. Microphone (Telecom Room) Microphone with 6 zone selection shall be located in the Telecom room and be flexible goose neck stem mounted on to a table stand. The microphone shall comply with the following specifications:

E - 93

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

Voltage range Frequency range Sensitivity Rated output

: : : :

18 - 24 V 100 Hz to 16 KHz. 85 dB SPL 2000 ohms

The microphone shall override the cassette player or FM/AM tuner once initiated. The unit shall be compatible with the amplifier and in case any mixing amplifiers are required, the same shall be provided. e. Cardoid Column Speakers These speakers are to be mounted on the wall at the Courtyard as indicated on the tender drawings. The speakers shall conform to the following specifications: Technical Data for 24 watts Power handling Sound Pressure Level Rated voltage Frequency range f. Sound Projectors These speakers are to be installed at the Multi-purpose Hall and First Floor Corridor as indicated on the tender drawings. The speakers shall conform to the following specifications: Technical Data for 18 watts sound projectors Power handling Sound Pressure Level Rated voltage Frequency range g. : : : : 18 W (18, 9, 4.5 W) 106 dB (at 1m - 1 KHz) 100 V 120 Hz - 18 KHz. : : : : 24 W (24, 12, 6 W) 114 dB (at 1m - 1 KHz) 100 V 250 - 12000 Hz

Ceiling loudspeakers, at library Power handling : 6W. Sound Pressure Level : 89 dB (at 1m - 1 KHz) Rated voltage : 100 V Frequency ranges : 80 Hz 14 KHz Matching Transformer with 50% & 25% tapping

h.

High Quality Music Horn Speakers These speakers are to be mounted on the external wall as indicated on the tender drawings. The speakers shall conform to the following specifications:
E - 94

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

Technical Data for 30 watts horn speakers Power handling Sound Pressure Level Rated voltage Frequency range i. AM / FM Tuner The AM / FM tuner shall be self contained unit with AM wide band tuner with frequency range of 522 - 1611 KHz and FM tuner with frequency range of 87.5 - 108 MHz. The system shall be compatible with the amplifier. j. Multi-CD Player Contractor shall provide 1 No. compact disc player for a standard compact disc. The CD player shall confirm to the following specification:Power Supply Power Consumption Frequency Response Sampling Frequency k. Cassette Player Contractor to provide 2 no. cassette players with track sequence switch and built-in AGC circuit and balancing transformer, conforming to the following specifications: Power supply Consumption Distortion Frequency response Tape Playing System : : : : : : 240V AC, 50 Hz, 1 PH. 16 VA < 3% at 1 KHz 100 - 8,000 Hz Compact normal tape Auto reverse : : : : 240 V AC, 50 Hz 1 Ph. 11 W 10 Hz - 20 KHz 44.1 KHz at normal pitch : : : : 30 W (30, 15, 7.5, 3.75 W) 112 dB (at 1m - 1 KHz) 100 V 125 - 20 KHz

E - 95

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

Auditorium a. Mixer Power Amplifier The mixer power amplifier shall be a high performance one with a wide choice of input connectors like XLR, DIN and phono jack, with rated power covers the connected load. Technical Data Frequency response Distortion Phantom power supply Microphone Inputs Sensitivity Impedance Music input S/N Ratio Loudspeaker output b. Microphones 2 no. condenser type cardoid microphones, goose neck type, one with full height adjustable stand and the other mounted on to a table stand. Technical Data Frequency range Polar pattern Output impedance at 1 KHz : : : 100 - 16000 Hz Cardiod for goose neck and omni-direction for others. 200 / 250 ohm (unbalanced) : : : : : : : : : 50 Hz - 20 KHz. < 1% 16 V 4 No. 200 mV > 22 k ohm Sensitivity 1 mV > 60 dB 70 and 100 V

The microphone shall override the cassette player or AM / FM tuner once initiated. The unit shall be compatible with the amplifier and in case any mixing amplifiers are required, the same shall be provided. Microphone Outlets 2 no. 3 pin DIN microphone outlets shall be provided complete with wiring, box and plastic white plates in Courtyard and Multi-purpose Halls. c. Column Speakers These speakers are to be mounted on the walls of the Auditorium as indicated on the tender drawings. The speakers shall conform to the following specifications:

E - 96

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

Technical Data for 12 watts Power handling Sound Pressure Level Rated voltage Frequency range d. AM / FM Tuner The AM / FM tuner shall be self contained unit with AM wide band tuner with frequency range of 522 - 1611 KHz and FM tuner with frequency range of 87.5 - 108 MHz. The system shall be compatible with the amplifier. e. Multi-CD Player Contractor shall provide 1 No. compact disc player for a standard compact disc. The CD player shall conform the following specification:Power Supply Power Consumption Frequency Response Sampling Frequency f. Cassette Player Contractor to provide 2 no. cassette players with track sequence switch and built-in AGC circuit and balancing transformer, conforming to the following specifications : Power supply Consumption Distortion Frequency response Tape Playing System : : : : : : 240V AC, 50 Hz, 1 PH. 16 VA < 3% at 1 KHz 100 - 8,000 Hz Compact normal tape Auto reverse : : : : 240 V AC, 50 Hz 1 Ph. 11 W 10 Hz - 20 KHz 44.1 KHz at normal pitch : : : : 12 W 109 dB (at 1m - 12 W) 100 V 250 - 12500 Hz

Note: - For the above mentioned systems. All equipments (sound sources, power amplifiers modules, power supply modulesetc) shall be mounted and designed for 19 inch rack, which in return shall be supplied with IP42, and with suitable fan for ventilation.

E - 97

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

B.21

FARASH CALL SYSTEM The Farash Call system manufacturer shall have at least ten (10) years experience in design, manufacturing, installation, commissioning and maintenance of farash call system in the State of Qatar. The Farash Call System shall be installed and fixed as indicated on the drawings. The number of directions indicated on the drawings is minimum. The panel shall be integral with 240 / 24 volt transformer. Once any bell push is depressed the panel shall indicate that by a buzzer and 24 volt indicator lights showing the direction number which can be cancelled by a push button on the panel. The bell push shall be of the same make and finish as the general wiring accessories. All wiring system shall be carried out in 25 mm diameter conduit separated from any other wiring.

B.22

AUTO CLASS CHANGE OVER SYSTEM General The system shall comprise, but not limited to : a. b. c. d. e. Auto class change over panel Bells (8 inch size) Batteries Battery charger Wiring

The system shall operate on nominal 240 volt. 50Hz All the system components shall be factory assembled and produced by the same manufacturer who has at least ten (10) years experience in design, manufacturing, installation, commissioning and maintenance of auto class change over system in the State of Qatar. Auto Class Change over Panel The panel shall incorporate an automatic bell ring for a programmed session, class break, class start, class end etc. The panel shall be mounted at 1.25 metre from ground level. The panel shall provide a minimum of 20 possible settings automatic alarms per day with a possible of 5 minute successive alarm programs and 7 days / week programmes. The panel shall be a digital type with LCD digital clock on the panel face, easy adjustment and programming type with a selectable manual - auto switch to allow for over riding the setting programmes and initiating the bells manually with a built-in push button. Bells
E - 98

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

The bells shall be electronic type, grey colour mounted on standard recessed conduit junction box, weather proof type, if used externally to IP 55 minimum and shall provide a sound level not less 96 dB at one metre distance. The sound shall not be similar to other alarm signals in the project. Wiring The wiring shall be via 1.5 mm2 PVC wires in 25 mm diameter PVC conduits concealed within the building fabric.

B.23

LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM The Contractor shall be responsible and shall include in his costs for the supply, erection, testing, commissioning and setting to work of a lightning protection system as indicated on the tender drawings. The base of the down conductor shall be taken to an earth electrode. The base rock shall be bored to the water table to accept the earth electrode. Each electrode shall be 25mm copper-bond type fitted with clamps for earth tape connection. The earth electrodes shall be protected at the top by concrete or brick lines pit complete with inspection cover. Provision shall be provided within the pit for disconnection of the tape for test purposes. The Contractor shall test the resistance to earth of the complete system in accordance with C.P. 326 and obtain a resistance to earth not exceeding 5 ohms. The lightning protection system shall briefly comprise of the following : i. The parapet wall on the building roof is to be used for air terminal and it is to be connected with down tapes of 25mm x 3mm PVC covered copper tape terminating 450mm above finished ground level at a test clamp. Tapes from the test clamp to the earth termination shall be carried out using 25x3mm plain copper tape. Earth terminations shall be 25mm copper bond earth electrodes housed in 350 x 350mm concrete unit. Joints shall be copper square clamp. Test clamps shall be copper with bolted joints. Before any joint is formed between dissimilar metals, the copper shall be tinned for a distance of at least 150mm. Earth electrodes must penetrate to a minimum level of 2 metres below the summer water table of the site.

ii. iii. iv. v. vi. vii.

The earth rod shall be located at the position shown on the drawing. The earth rod shall terminate in special pit incorporating puddle flange and seal. A 75mm

E - 99

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

diameter duct shall be installed in the concrete slab from the pit to the wall incorporating any easy bond. Joints in conductors shall be kept to a minimum. Joints shall be both electrically and mechanically sound and constructed so as to prevent the ingress of moisture. Joints between copper strips shall be made by overlapping tinned joint faces and rivetting with 4 x 5mm copper rivets. The length of overlap shall not be less than 20mm or the width of the largest conductor whichever is greater. Wherever riveted connections are to be made, the joint faces shall be thoroughly cleaned and a suitable compound such as 'Densal' paste shall be applied to the contact surfaces immediately before joining. After completing the installation of the lightning protection system, the Contractor shall provide a certificate of tests.

B.24

EARTHING AND BONDING SYSTEM Earthing The Contractor shall provide for and adhere to Kahra-maa regulations very strictly as regards earthing and bonding systems are involved. However, the contexts of these regulations are highlighted briefly as follows: i. The M.V. panels connected from the transformers shall have an earth bar of minimum cross-sectional area of 300sq.mm running the full length of the panels. Removable neutral and earth links shall be provided in the M.V. panels which shall be of a minimum cross sectional area of 300sq.m. The earth bar in the M.V. panels shall be connected to the earth provided by Kahra-maa or with independent earth station specially provided for this. Where armoured cables are above ground, the armouring of the cable shall be used as the earthing conductor and in case of armoured cable in ground and back-filled, the armouring is not to be used as a sole means of earthing, but additional means are provided by either of the following : a. A separate single insulated PVC copper cable whose insulation colour shall be green or green and yellow. The cable shall be run along with the main cable and tapped to it at regular intervals. b. The inner lead or lead alloy sheath of armoured cable i.e. in case of P.I.L.S.T.A. or PVC cable. iii. iv. v. The outer copper sheath of MICC cables may be used as the earth conductor. This cable shall not be buried in ground directly but in a non-metallic pipe. In case of wiring in conduits, a separate earth conductor of PVC copper of appropriate size shall run. For ring main circuits, the earth conductor shall also complete the ring.
E - 100

ii.

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

vi.

Where a means of earthing has not been provided by Kahra-maa, the consumer's earthing terminal shall be connected by the earthing lead to an effective earth electrode or electrodes, such as copper strip or rod, which shall be buried in the ground at a position as near as practicable to the consumer's earthing terminal. Each electrode shall be driven to a depth such that it penetrates the summer water table by a minimum of 2 metres. Every connection of an earthing lead to an earth electrode shall be made in a pit measuring 300 mm x 300 mm. The connection shall be either soldered or clamped. The pit shall be filled with sand and a removable cover placed on each pit.

Bonding i. Where metal work other than current carrying conductors is liable to become charged with electricity in such a manner as to create a danger, if the insulation of a conductor should become defective, or if a defect should occur in any apparatus : a. The metal work shall be earthed in such a manner as will ensure immediate electrical discharge without danger OR b. Other adequate precautions shall be taken to prevent danger. ii. In a situation which may be normally wet or damp, where electrical apparatus is present and might give rise to danger and where there are substantial exposed metal parts of other services (such as gas and water pipes, sinks and baths), the earth continuity conductor of the electrical installation shall be effectively connected, electrically and mechanically to all such metal parts and to any exposed metalwork of the electrical apparatus. A separate green/yellow PVC insulated copper bonding lead shall be taken from the earthing terminal of the water heater and bonded to the metal pipe work on both sides of the pump. Where water pumps are installed a bonding lead shall be taken from the earthing terminal of the local isolator and bonded to the metal pipe work on both sides of the pump. The size of bonding lead shall be the same as the earth continuity conductor of the circuit subject to a minimum size of 2.5 mm sq.

iii.

iv.

v.

B.25

BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

The Building Management System (BMS) is introduced in the mechanical drawings and specification. The contractor shall make the proper coordination between all available systems that are offered for monitoring/control as per the schedule of input/output points. The contractor shall ensure the compatibility of all parts of the system.
E - 101

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

The system shall provide the following: (a) ON/OFF status of the following systems: 1- MV Panel. 2- Fire Alarm Panel. 3- Lift. 4- Auto Class Change. (b) Software integration for DigitalPower Metres: The system software shall be capable to interface minimum ten parameters (different type of readings) between the BMS and the Digital Power metres. The system shall be enhanced with bacnet/ip or bacnet-mstp or lonworks or Modbus protocol. To avoid any disabilities in the system configuration the power metres are preferred to be supplied by the BMS supplier.

B.26

TESTING AND COMMISSIONING General The Contractor shall fully test and commission the whole of the electrical installation in accordance with Kahra-maa /IEE regulations and also in accordance with the following clauses. The tests shall be recorded in detail and the results submitted to the Engineer according to the enclosed sheets. The Contractor shall then demonstrate that the installations are properly commissioned, that they operate in the correct manner and are capable of functioning to accomplish the design intention as outlined herein. Works Tests All electrical LV switch gear, transformer and associated equipment shall be tested at the manufacturers in the presence of the Electrical Engineer before despatch and duplicate test certificates shall be handed to the Engineer. All works test shall be carried out in accordance with the relevant British Standards and Codes of Practice contained therein. Site Tests Site testing of all systems and components comprising the works shall be carried out in the presence and to the complete satisfaction of the Engineer after the Contractor has first satisfied himself that the installation is functioning properly. The Contractor shall provide all certified instruments, equipment, plant, labour and materials necessary for conducting specified site tests and shall be responsible for and prepared to demonstrate the accuracy of all the test instruments supplied by him. The Contractor shall give the Engineer, notice in writing when any portion of the electrical installation is complete. Should the Engineer or his representative not
E - 102

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

attend within 7 days of receipt of such written notice, the Contractor may proceed with the tests; however duplicate certified copies of the results obtained shall be forwarded to the Engineer. All electrical installations, plant and equipment tests shall fully satisfy the requirements of the Kahra-maa, State of Qatar and those laid down in the IEE regulations as issued by the Institute of Electrical Engineers, 15th edition. The Contractor shall be deemed to have included in his price for all safety devices etc., as required by Kahra-maa. Once the Contractor has satisfied himself that the installation complies with Kahra-maa requirements, he shall arrange for Kahra-maa to conduct their own tests prior to the handing over date. Observations shall be made of the operation and performance of the installation and subsequent readjustments shall be made as necessary. Records of commissioning and testing shall be kept and when the Contractor has satisfied himself that the installation is functioning correctly, the results shall be comprehensively reported in a bound copy to the Engineer. Where it is not possible at the particular time of commissioning and/or demonstration of the plant for full load conditions to be obtained or simulated, the Contractor shall repeat the requisite operations of the commissioning and demonstration under such full load conditions (or the reasonable approximation of such condition acceptable to the Engineer) at the earliest opportunity. Statutory Authority Approval Contractor shall submit the final official approval from Kahra-maa, Q-Tel and Fire Department.

Maintenance and Servicing The Contractor shall be held responsible and shall replace any defective part of all and every part of the works for the period of the guarantee from the date of the acceptance test carried out by the Engineer. The Contractor shall also be held liable for any cost of dismantling or re-erection and making good of any works which may have to be undertaken in order to replace defective parts. Electrical Tests Following tests shall be carried out by the Contractor. * * * All alarm, control and protective circuits shall be tested for correct operation. All lighting circuits shall be energised and checked to ensure that they are all operational. All single pole switches shall be checked to ensure correct polarity and that the live conductor has been connected. Neutrals must not pass through any switch. All motors, plant and any electrical equipment connected with mechanical services shall be checked to ensure that they run freely in the correct direction of rotation and that they run without undue noise or vibration.
E - 103

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

Test of Continuity of Ring Final Circuit A test shall be made to verify the continuity of all conductors (including the earth continuity conductor) of every ring circuit and all readings shall be tabulated. Continuity of Protective Conductors and Equipotential Bonding A test shall be made before the connection of an electrical installation to the supply to verify that all protective conductors are connected correctly and electrically sound. If the protective conductor forms part of a cable such as a core of a multicore PVCinsulated cable or a single protective conductor, a DC ohmmeter may be used to measure the resistance. Where steel conduit, trunking or other steel enclosures form the protective conductor the test shall be carried out by use of a high current test instrument at a voltage not exceeding 50 volts AC or DC and at a current approaching 1.5 times normal circuit current up to a maximum of 25A. When using a DC test supply it must be noted that an inspection of the length of the protective conductor must be made to ensure that there are no inductors fitted. It is preferable to use a hand generator, or other portable instrument to carry out the test so that the disconnected phase conductor can be connected to the consumer's earth terminal and the test can be made between phase conductor and protective conductor at each outlet. Earthing Resistance Tests Upon the installation of an earth electrode, a test shall be made to verify that the resistance of the electrode does not increase the earth fault impedance above the required limit. Resistance to earth of all earthing rods, each earth termination network, continuity of conductors and efficiency of all bends and joints shall be tested by means of a Wenner test. In each case, the resistance to earth shall not exceed 1 ohm. Insulation Resistance Test Insulation resistance tests shall be made before a completed installation or major alteration to an existing installation is permanently connected to the supply. For these tests, large installations may be divided into groups. A D.C. voltage not less than twice the normal voltage of the supply (R.M.S. value of a A.C. supply) shall be applied for the measurement of insulation resistance provided that for tests on low voltage circuits, the test voltage need not exceed 500V D.C. When measured with all fuse links in place, all switches (including if practicable, the main switch) closed and except where earthed concentric wiring is installed the insulation resistance for whole installation shall not be less than 1 mega ohm. When measured between all the conductors connected to any one pole or phase of the supply and in turn all conductors connected to each other pole or phase of the supply, the insulation resistance shall be not less than 1 mega ohm. Wherever practicable, so that all parts of the wiring may be tested, all lamps shall be removed and all current using apparatus shall be disconnected and all local switches
E - 104

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

controlling lamps or apparatus shall be closed; where the removal of lamps and/or the disconnection of current using apparatus is impracticable, the local switches controlling such lamps and/or apparatus shall be open. This test is not applicable to earthed concentric wiring system. Where apparatus is disconnected for the tests, the insulation resistance between the case or framework and all live parts of each item of fixed apparatus shall be measured separately and shall comply with the requirements given in the appropriate British Standard for the apparatus. If there is no appropriate British Standard, the insulation resistance shall be not less than 0.5 mega ohm. Insulation of Site Built Assemblies Protection against direct contact provided by insulation applied to live parts during erection shall be tested to ensure that the insulation is able to withstand without breakdown an applied test voltage equal to that specified in the British Standard for factory built assemblies: BS 5486. BS 5486 requires the test voltage to be applied between all live parts and the frame of assembly and between each pole and all other poles connected to the frame of the assembly. If the assembly includes a protective conductor, the conductor should be regarded as a separate circuit. The test voltage should be steadily raised to its full value over a few seconds. Main circuit test voltage depends on the voltage rating of the applied insulation and ranges from 1000V to 3500V AC. The test is considered to have been successful if there is no puncture or flash over. When protection against indirect contact is provided by additional insulation installed during erection it must be verified that the insulated enclosure gives a protection of not less than IP2X to BS 5490 and that the insulating enclosure should be able to withstand without breakdown or flashover an applied voltage test equal to that specified in the British Standard BS 5486 "Factory Built assemblies of switch gear and control gear for voltages up to and including 1000V AC and 1200V DC. For enclosures made of insulating material, BS 5486 requires an additional dielectric test to be carried out by applying a test voltage of between 1500V to 5200V. The test is between metal foil laid on the outside of the enclosure over opening and joints and the interconnected line and exposed conductive parts within the enclosure located next to the opening and joints. Verification of dielectric properties is not required by BS 5486 for those parts which have already been type tested provided their dielectric strength has not been impaired by their mountings. Protection by Electrical Separation When source of supply in double wound transformer according to BS 3535 or a motor generator set with same degree of protection or mobile source with double or reinforced insulation this method of protection is to be used. Only one circuit should be supplied and under no circumstances should that circuit be earthed. No connections between a live part of separated circuit and any part of another circuit shall be permitted. In case of a possible mechanical damage, flexible cord should be visible over its full length. Protection by electrical separation shall be used for BS 3052 shaver sockets.
E - 105

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

Protection by Barrier or Enclosures during Erection A test shall be conducted according to IEE regulations to ensure protection by barrier or enclosures during erection. Verification of Polarity & Phase Rotation A verification of polarity shall be made to ensure that all fuses and single pole control devices are connected in the phase conductor only. The centre contact of Edison type screw lamp holders is connected to the phase conductor and outer metal threaded part is connected to neutral conductor. Wiring to plugs and socket outlets should be such that they are connected with phase conductor on right when inspected from front. A proprietary type of polarity testing device shall be used for the tests. The complete installation shall be tested to ensure that all main switch gear is connected to give the correct phase rotation. Earth Fault Loop Impedance Test The Contractor or others responsible for the work shall test the effectiveness of the earthing of each completed installation by means of an earth fault loop impedance test. This test shall be carried out by using earth fault loop impedance test instrument. Operation of Residual Current Operated and Fault Voltage Operated Protective Devices A test shall be conducted to check for instantaneous operation of above devices by external means. The testing device shall be a single phase double wound mains transformer with an output voltage not exceeding 50 volts (rms) AC, having a short period rating of 750 VA (minimum): and shall be connected across the circuit line conductor and circuit protective conductor of an residual current operated device, or the neutral & frame terminals of a fault voltage operated device. In the case of former, the device should trip within the time delay declared by the manufacturer and in the case of latter, should trip instantaneously. On completion of sections of the work, the Contractor shall test the electrical installation in accordance with current IEE regulations and wiring regulations of Kahra-maa, State of Qatar, in the presence of the Engineer. Duplicate copies of the final test results and of the certificates described in the current IEE regulations shall be submitted for approval to the Engineer. The Contractor shall provide instruments for all tests. General Commissioning The Contractor shall:E - 106

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

a. b.

Set all units and apparatus to work. Adjust and set up all automatic controls, regulating devices, measure and adjust any plant under his responsibility, duties and ratings and performance of all components for all items installed separately and integrated into the installation as a whole. Record in detail each step and stage of commissioning and test results, reporting the test stages until the tests are satisfactory. The Contractor shall carry out insulation, continuity, earth loop impedance, switching and sequencing, direction of rotation and all other tests required under the IEE regulations, 15th edition. Should the tests carried out fail to demonstrate that the plant and equipment is correctly installed and/or functioning correctly, the Engineer shall decide whether such failure is due to negligence upon the Contractor's part (including in this context as defined all his Subcontractor's and suppliers) in which case, the Contractor shall carry out all remedial works entirely at his own expense. After remedial works have been completed the Contractor shall again report to the Engineer for further tests to be carried out. The Engineer's decision as to what constitutes a satisfactory result shall be final.

c. d.

e.

f.

Commissioning & Testing of Distribution System The completed installation or parts thereof shall be subjected to acceptance tests as instructed by Kahra-maa or the Engineers before being connected to the supply. The following tests shall be included as applicable: i. ii. iii. iv. v. vi. vii. Tests as prescribed in the Kahra-maa regulation. Tests in accordance with British Standards and Codes of Practice contained therein. Insulation resistance Earth continuity Continuity resistance of conductors and sheathing of each section and the whole installation. Full load tests as required by the Engineer Current injection tests of all over-current devices and residual current operated circuit breakers etc.

These tests shall be carried out in the presence of the Engineer. The Contractor shall give 7 days written notice of any intention to carry out any of the tests. B.27 WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE The Contractor shall guarantee for a period of (as stated in the form of tender clause 49(1) )after the practical completion of the installation that all plant and equipment shall operate free of any defects due to defective material and bad workmanship and

E - 107

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

that any part found defective during this period shall be replaced free of cost by the Contractor. Maintenance period for all electrical equipment, panels, controls, fittings, wiring accessories, cables and systems etc., shall start only after regular electricity power supply is available at site. If the defects are not rectified within a reasonable period, the Client may proceed to do so by another agency at the Contractor's entire risk and expense without prejudice to any rights of the Client. The Contractor shall also provide guarantee for the items detailed hereunder for the time period stated, following the date of Practical completion: i. ii. iii. iv. v. vi. Lifts Fire Alarm System Auto-class Change over System Intercom System Emergency Pack Public address system : : : : : : 3 years 3 years 3 years 3 years 3 years 3 years

The supplier / Contractor shall provide annual report for the above items stating the condition of the equipment.

B.28

SPARES FOR ELECTRICAL ITEMS The Contractor shall include manufacturer's spares for 2 years running, further to the Warranty period, in addition to the spare parts mentioned in the QCS. These shall be provided in this contract. Prior to order, the Contractor shall prepare in triplicate a submittal listing all spares for each item/equipment, clearly detailing manufacturer's name, address telephone and telex numbers and spare part reference number, together with component cost. The submittal shall be passed to the Engineer for approval and only upon receipt of approval in writing from the Engineer may the final order be placed. Contractor shall ensure that the manufacturers provide a warranty for providing spares up to a period of 10 years for all the equipment supplied on this project. The recommendation of 2 years (spare) shall be provided by the respective approved manufacturer through the authorised local agent and to be delivered to central stores. The spares shall include but not limited to the following systems: 1. Transformers 2. M.V. Panels 3. Sub main Boards & Distribution Boards 4. Lifts 5. Farash Call Bell
E - 108

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

6. Dimming System 7. Fire Alarm System 8. Auto Class Change over System 9. Intercom System 10. Emergency Pack 11. Public Address System 12. Lighting Fittings 13. Wiring Accessories 14. Isolators 15. Lightning Protection

B.29

SCHEDULE OF LIGHT FIXTURES Type


CP

Description
2X36W weather proof fixture to IP66. The body made of anodised extruded aluminium with VO-UL94 techno polymer ends, high purity aluminium reflector anodised & polished, toughened safety glass hinged to the body with silicone anti-ageing gasket complete with stainless steel accessories for external fixing, The fitting to be switch start type 240V/50HZ, Down light surface mounted, with reflector, AL99, 98%, high specular, extreme wide light distribution, HFG- Professional of proprietary brand, 2 x TC-DEL 18 W, terminal block with integrated fuse, 3-pole, and max. 2,52, housing made of sheet steel, white finish (RAL 9010), protection category: IP54, protection class:class1 As above but with factory fitted integral NiCd Emergency Kit suitable for 3Hrs Operation and having BLF mentioned elsewhere in the specification, Weather-proof surface-mounted luminaire made of polycarbonate, for T5 fluorescent lamps IP 66, 1 x 35W T5 Socket G5 Optical system Clear polycarbonate diffuser with finely structured front ends, impactresistant, UV stabilised, smooth outer, inner longitudinal prisms. Diffuser manufactured from one piece, mechanically robust. Secure fixing of diffuser with tool-free clip-in quick-release catches. Luminaire body Polycarbonate, recyclable, flame-resistant, light grey, with push-outs on ceiling side and front ends for mains cable rounding and through-wiring via heat-resistant inner wiring. Ceiling mounting with stainless steel fixing clamps. With wire clamp of stainless steel, Degree of protection IP 66. Multi-Lamp electronic control gear for 35W, 49W or 80W lamps (ENEC Approved, CELMA class A2) wiring ready for connection with terminal block with integrated fuse, 3-pole, 2.5mm2 LOR (efficiency factor) = 0,98 Hot wire test Safety class 850 C I (EN 61140)
E - 109

SB

SB/E SC

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

Approval Luminaire: CE, ENEC: class1,Dimension: (LxWxH) 1277x84x102 mm. Manufactured and tested according to EN 60598. SC/E As above but with factory fitted integral NiCd Emergency Kit suitable for 3Hrs Operation and having BLF mentioned elsewhere in the specification, 1x150W metal halide lamp, recessed luminaire with body in die cast aluminium, reflector optics symmetrical, high purity aluminium anodised and polished.5mm toughened glass, cover fixing clips in anodized aluminium with AISI 302 stainless steel spring. Steel chromate pre-treated recessing frame finished RAL9006; the external metal parts are in stainless steel, class I, dual foam silicon gasket IP66, 1x250W metal halide lamp, recessed luminaire with body in die cast aluminium, reflector optics symmetrical/asymmetrical(Imax. 45degre and 55degree), high purity aluminium anodised and polished.5mm toughened glass, cover fixing clips in anodized aluminium with AISI 302 stainless steel spring. Steel chromate pre-treated recessing frame finished RAL9006; the external metal parts are in stainless steel, class I, dual foam silicon gasket IP66, Ditto as SC but 2x35W As above but with factory fitted integral NiCd Emergency Kit suitable for 3Hrs Operation and having BLF mentioned elsewhere in the specification, 2x36Watts surface mounted explosion proof fluorescent fitting.

SD

SF

SH SH/E EX

Type

Description

SJ

Diffuser luminaire surface or pendant mounted, with injection-moulded prismatic diffuser made of PMMA, with ceiling illumnation and direct lightdistribution, HFG-Professional of proprietary brand, 2 x T26, 36 W, terminal block with integrated fuse, 3-pole, max. 2,52, housing made of powder coated sheet steel, white finish, (similar to RAL9010), protection category: IP50, protection class: class1,Dimension: (LxWxH) 1270x185x99 mm. As above but with factory fitted integral NiCd Emergency Kit suitable for 3Hrs Operation and having BLF mentioned elsewhere in the specification, Recessed track lighting system complete with all mounting and electrical accessories suitable for 3 Nos. of 100 W Tungsten Halogen lamp complete with directional baffles white colour, as model: 3Nos. mode 20 track 300112+017234+017210+017208 , Same as SH As above but with factory fitted integral NiCd Emergency Kit suitable for 3Hrs Operation and having BLF mentioned elsewhere in the specification, Downlight surface mounted, with high specular reflector, AL99, 98%, extreme wide light distribution, HF- Dimming of proprietary brand, 2 x TCTEL /32 W, terminal block with integrated fuse, 3-pole, max. 2,52, housing made of powder coated sheet steel, white finish (RAL 9010), protection category: IP65, protection class:class1,
E - 110

SJ/E SK

SM
SM/E

SQ

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

SR

Downlight surface mounted, with high specular reflector, AL99, 98%, extreme wide light distribution, HFG- Professional of proprietary brand, 2 x TC-TEL 26/32 W, terminal block with integrated fuse, 3-pole, max. 2,52, housing made of sheet steel, white finish (RAL 9010), protection category: IP23 with accessory IP54, protection class:class1. Ceiling spacer adapter made of steel, height = max. 40, coated RAL9010, as model: 5LR214 72VA63+5LR 9226 4BB+5LR 9546-4EA, Round Recessed Down light 1 x 26W TCT Socket GX24q-3 Optical system Energy-efficient HR-AG reflector, highly specular, with reflection-intensifying coated, silver surface, reflectance value > 98%, can be mounted without tools. Luminaire body: Sheet steel, galvanised, with circular die-cast bezel ring, white powder coated (80-120mivrons), RAL 9016. Shadow gap between bezel ring and reflector rim for accommodation of covers. Tool-free ceiling installation via rapid-mounting springs. Electrical connection Control gear in separate housing, with connection terminal to 2.5 mm and cable strain relief system. Housing and lamp holder of heat-resistant plastic, interconnected via 370 mm long connection cable. Multi-Lamp electronic control gear for 26W or 32W lamps (ENEC Approved, CELMA class A2) wiring ready for connection with terminal block with integrated fuse, 3-pole, 2.5mm2 LOR (efficiency factor) = 0,92 Hot wire test Safety class 850 C I (EN 61140)

RB

Luminaire approvals: CE, ENEC Manufactured and tested according to EN 60598 RB/E As above but with factory fitted integral NiCd Emergency Kit suitable for 3Hrs Operation and having BLF mentioned elsewhere in the specification,

Type
RC

Description
Can be universally used in cut-out recess openings and in system ceilings with concealed or exposed grids (trunking15mm/24mm) for module size 600 as well as for ceiling with cut-out openings 580x580mm. 4x14W T5 Socket G5 Optical System Parabolic Louvre RPVof99.98% high purity aluminium, highly specular anodized Suitable for VDU work stations according to EN12464 via reduced Luminaire L<200cd/m2 For beam angle above 65 all around. Louvre mounting and self-actuating electrical earthing Via sliding contact catches. Louvre can be hinged downwards and
E - 111

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

unhooked on both sides without tools. luminaire Body Sheet steel, white powder coated (80-120microns),RAL9016.material thickness 0.50mm, Increased stability via additional grooves with luminaire top. Low 83mm construction height enables hooking square luminaries into exposed grids even with low cavity ceiling from 200mm. Electronic control gear(ENEC approved ,CELMA ClassA2) Wiring ready for Connection with terminal block with integrated fuse, 3-pole, 2.5mm2 LOR (efficiency factor) = 0.75 Hot wire test 960C Safety Class I (EN 61140) luminaire Approvals: CE, ENEC Manufactured and tested according to EN 60598 RC/E RC-Dim RG RH As above but with factory fitted integral NiCd Emergency Kit suitable for 3Hrs Operation and having BLF mentioned elsewhere in the specification, Ditto as RC but with dimmable frequency gear (HF-dimming) As RB but with 2xPL-C 2pin/G24d -3/26w and HFD (dimmable ballast), Battan luminaire, pendant, wall or surface mounted, HF of proprietary brand, 1 x T26, 36 W, terminal block with integrated fuse, 3-pole, max. 2,52, single length, housing made of sheet steel, white finish (similar to RAL9010), protection category: IP20, protection class: class1, dimension: (LxWxH) 1232x55x80 mm, Ditto as RC but with: Prismatic optical System PMMA cover, in white coated (80-120microns) aluminium frame. With photometrical designed prisms To direct light primarily onto the working plane. Protection rating IP54 on room side. RI/E RJ As above but with factory fitted integral NiCd Emergency Kit suitable for 3Hrs Operation and having BLF mentioned elsewhere in the specification, Battan luminaire, pendant, wall or surface mounted, HF of proprietary brand, 1 x T26, 18 W, terminal block with integrated fuse, 3-pole, max. 2,52, single length, housing made of sheet steel, white finish (similar to RAL9010), protection category: IP20, protection class: class1, dimension: (LxWxH) 622x55x80 mm, 2x8W fluorescent Emergency maintained luminaire with EXIT sign in English and Arabic single side or double side to suite the location, luminaires with integral emergency kit with BLF mentioned elsewhere in the specifications, However, not less than as mentioned below : 18 W T8 24%, 36 W T8 14%, 58 W T8 10%,

RI

EXIT /E

E - 112

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

Type
WA

Description
Surface mounted luminaire with wall washer reflector RAX 1x28W T5 socket G5. Optical system Wall washer reflector RAX, asymmetrical distribution, aluminium, reflectivityenhanced coating, for uniform illumination of vertical surfaces. Luminaire body sheet steel, white powder-coated (80-120microns), RAL 9016 material thickness 0.75mm.visible construction height 24mm, total height 42mm. with all round uncut rim on underside, width 50mm, and flush mounted, integrated flat end caps. multi lamp electronic control gear for 28W or 54W lamps (ENEC approved, CELMA classA2). Wiring ready for connection with terminal block with integrated fuse, 3-pole, 2.5mm2 LOR (efficiency factor) = 0.83 Hot wire test 850 C Safety class I (EN 61140) Luminaire approved: CE, ENEC Manufactured and tested according to EN 60598 WC Damp proof luminaire with injection-moulded prismatic diffuser made of PMMA, direct wide-beam light-distribution, HFG-Professional of proprietary brand, 1 x T26, 18 W, terminal block with integrated fuse, max. 2,52, housing made of high quality glass-fibre reinforced polyester, grey finish, diffuser locks made of stainless steel, protection category: IP65, protection class: class1, Dimension: (LxWxH) 667x84x102 . Decorative wall mounted luminaire 1x26W TC-D, body in die cast aluminium in white, safely glass diffuser, protection category IP54 Shall be control via photo cell & timer & contactor, Compact floodlight with safety glass and bracket, flat, asymmetric light distribution, up to 1 x HIT DE-DE 150 W, complete with integrated electrical components, ignitor with automatic power disconnection and ballast with thermal protection, power factor corrected, housing made of die cast aluminium, iron mica finish (DB702S), protection category: IP66, protection class: class1, certification symbol: VDE, ENEC10, impact resistant (VDE 0710), dimension: (LxWxH) 355x276x95 mm, Bulkhead luminaire 1x50W MBF wall mounted with die-cast aluminium body, aluminium reflector and toughened glass & protection category IP65, Wall mounted rectangular luminaire die-cast aluminium copper free body with high corrosion resistant, pure aluminium reflector, cleared toughened glass complete with stainless steel screws. The luminaire is dual lamps up with TC-D 18W GZD and the down one with HID-DE 70W with wide beams from both directions up and down. With IP66 fixed at (2.1M) height, LED Street light LED-IN suitable to fix on 8M pole with fixing system pole top or bracket version diameter 60-70-76mm in die cast aluminium, die cast aluminium frame with aluminium canopy, metalized polycarbonate optic 90 LED 91Watts 240Volt 50Hz 6000K colour temperature and tempered flat glass 4mm thickness screen. Photo cell contactors, cable clamp plasticIP68, wiring equipped with cable and mains connector. Standard color: black
E - 113

WD

WF

WG WL

XA

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

frame and white canopy, luminaire body dimension 73X374X134mm, insulation class II, main reference standards: EN60598-1, EN 60598-2-1,EN 60598-2-3, EN 55015, EN 61547, EN 610003-2, EN 61000-3-3 and total protection degree IP66, XB 2x LED Street light LED-IN suitable to fix on 8M pole with fixing system pole top or bracket version diameter 60-70-76mm in die cast aluminium, die cast aluminium frame with aluminium canopy, metalized polycarbonate optic 90 LED 91Watts 240Volt 50Hz 6000K colour temperature and tempered flat glass 4mm thickness screen. Photo cell contactors, cable clamp plastic IP68, wiring equipped with cable and mains connector. Standard color: black frame and white canopy, luminaire body dimension 73X374X134mm, insulation class II, main reference standards: EN60598-1, EN 60598-2-1,EN 60598-2-3, EN 55015, EN 61547, EN 610003-2, EN 61000-3-3 and total protection degree IP66,

Type

Description

XC

LED flood light, extruded aluminium frame and its divided in two parts: wiring compartment and optic compartment. Fixing is realized by a special adjustable flange attached to the body and making it working as a floodlight, by using its own particular reflector, 54 LED 72Watts 240Volt 50Hz 6000K colour temperature, asymmetrical optical unit is made of high efficiency metalized polycarbonate and the screen in tempered flat glass 4mm thickness, luminaire body dimensions (LxWxH) 980x150x80mm, anodizing aluminium protection treatment, corrosion and saline test according to EN ISO 9227, polyester powder coating, cable clamp plastic M20x1.5 the cable are internally fixed IP68, optic compartment IP66 and wiring compartment IP66, 3 x Floodlight with safety glass and bracket, flat, asymmetric diffuse lightdistribution, 1 x HIT-DE 400W, complete with integrated electrical components, ignitor with automatic power disconnection and ballast with thermal protection, power factor corrected, housing made of die cast aluminium, iron mica finish (DB702S), protection category: IP66, protection class: class 1, impact resistant (VDE 0710), dimension: (LxWxH) 565x465x155 mm . Mounted on 8M HDG pole with suitable sized cross arm & complete with all foundation, mounting and electrical accessories, 2 x Floodlight with bracket for mounting on multiple flood light mast-top, flat safety glass, asymmetric diffuse light-distribution, 1 x HIT-DE 1000W, housing made of die cast aluminium, sand blasted with built on ignotor protection category: IP65, protection class: class 1, impact resistant (VDE 0710),Individual control gear required, dimension: (LxWxH) 790x630x230 mm, 2 x control gear unit, 1 x HIT 1000 W, power factor corrected, 240 V, protection category = IP55 & p41rotection class: class 1, Mounted on 13M HDG pole with suitable sized cross arm & complete with all foundation, mounting and electrical accessories.

XD

XF

XH

4 x Floodlight with bracket for mounting on multiple flood light mast-top, flat safety glass, asymmetric diffuse light-distribution, 1 x HIT-DE 1000W, housing made of die cast aluminium, sand blasted with built on ignitor protection category: IP65, protection class: class 1, impact resistant (VDE 0710), individual control gears required & dimension: (LxWxH) 790x630x230 mm, 4 x control gear unit, 1 x HIT 1000 W, power factor
E - 114

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

corrected, 240 V, protection category = IP55 & protection class: class 1, Mounted on 13M HDG pole with suitable sized cross arm & complete with all foundation, mounting and electrical accessories. XJ Compact floodlight for sign board illumination with safety glass and bracket, flat, asymmetric light distribution, up to 1 x HIT-DE-DE 150 W, complete with integrated electrical components, ignitor with automatic power disconnection and ballast with thermal protection, power factor corrected, housing made of die cast aluminium, iron mica finish (DB702S), protection category: IP66, protection class: class1, certification symbol: VDE, ENEC10, impact resistant (VDE 0710), dimension: (LxWxH) 355x276x95 mm. Customised arm for suitable mounting and positioning of the floodlight for the desired application.

Notes : 1. 2. For light fitting Type XA, XB, XD, XF AND XH foundation details shall be as recommended by the approved lighting manufacturer. For approval of materials equivalent to the specified one, the Engineer's decision shall be final and binding.

3.

Wire guard for Type SF shall be provided for multi-purpose high bay fittings only.

B.30

SCHEDULE OF SUGGESTED MANUFACTURERS OF EQUIPMENT Notes: 1. For approval of materials equivalent to the specified, the Engineers decision shall be final and binding. 2. The below recommended manufacturers should meet the detailed specifications given in the relevant section. 3. The name of the Manufacturer, model no and the country where the product is manufactured should be clearly and permanently marked (sticker is not acceptable) on the product itself. 4. All materials/equipment related to fire such as pumps. Pipes, fittings, valves, etc should be UL, FM, LPCB or others and approved by Civil Defence. Any proposal not complying with the aforesaid shall not be accepted. 5. Written guarantees for Materials & Equipment from suppliers, subcontractors, manufacturers or others engaged in the works where such guarantees are stipulated in the Contract should be provided during the approval stage as a prerequisite for the final approval of the Engineer. The Contractor shall not be entitled to any claims or whatsoever for any delays in the approvals due to this regard. 6. Cut-outs of lighting poles shall be equipped with MCB and not fuse.
E - 115

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

1.

Transformers

: FEDERAL TRANSFORMER (UAE)


EMIRATES TRANSFORMER & SWITCHGEAR (UAE) SAUDI TRANSFORMER COMPANY (SAUDI ARABIA) ABB (SWEDEN), ALSTOM (UK) OR EQUAL & APPROVED

2.

MV Switch boards

A- ABB (ITALY) / ARTUK SYSTEM, QATAR SWITCHGEAR. B- SCHNEIDER (FRANCE OR UK) / BLOCKSET SYSTEM, BIN GHALIB ENG. C- MEM SHIELD(UK) / HOLEC SYSTEM(UK). D- DORMAN SMITH(UK) / HOLEC SYSTEM(UK). E- CUTLER HAMMER(USA) / ETA STAR SYSTEM, GULF SWITCHGEAR(QATAR). OR EQUAL & APPROVED SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC, ALPES TCHNOLOGIES(FRANCE), ABB(SWEDEN), EATON(UK), OR EQUAL & APPROVED

Capacitor Bank

3.

MCB Distribution Boards and Sub-main boards

: MEM SHIELD (UK),

HAGER(FRANCE), ABB(ITALY), BILL(UK), SCHNEIDER(FRANCE OR UK), DORMAN SMITH(UK), OR EQUAL & APPROVED

4.

Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker

: HAGER(FRANCE), ABB(ITALY),
DORMAN SMITH(UK), SCHNEIDER(FRANCE OR UK), SQUARE D(UK), BILL (UK), MEM SHEILD (UK), OR EQUAL & APPROVED

5.

Fuse Switch, Switch fuses and Isolators

: SOCOMEC (FRANCE),
MEM (UK), STROMBERG, BILL (UK), SQUARE D (UK), ABB (FINLAND), OR EQUAL & APPROVED

6.

Cables and Accessories


E - 116

: DOHA CABLES,QATAR

RIYADH CABLES(KSA),

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

BICC - DUCAB(UAE), OMAN CABLES, PIRELLI (UK), GULF CABLES (KUWAIT), OR EQUAL & APPROVED

7.

Cable Tray

: WIREMOLD,
PHILIPS GRAHAME, ERICO, LEGRAND, UNI TRUNK (U.K) OR EQUAL & APPROVED

8.

PVC Conduits and Fittings

: QATAR MANUFACTURING CO.,


QNPF,QATAR MK, DECODUCT,(UAE) SAUDI EGA, HOTACE(OMAN) COMAT (UAE) OR EQUAL & APPROVED

9.

G.I. Conduits, Cable Trunking and Fittings

: BARTON, BURNS,
WALLSALL, MITSUBISHI, ERICO, OR EQUAL & APPROVED

10.

Fire Detection and Alarm Systems

: AUTRONICA (NORWAY),
GENT (UK), NOTIFIER (USA), SIMPLEX (USA), PHOTAIN CONTROLS (UK), EDWARDS(CANADA), OR EQUAL & APPROVED

11.

Emergency Pack for Lighting

: VENTILUX, BARDIC,
MANVIER, JSB, THORN OR EQUAL & APPROVED

12.

Public Address System

: MILLBANK (UK),
PANASONIC (Japan), BOUYER (France), WHITELEY ELECTRONICS (UK), OR EQUAL & APPROVED

13.

DIMMING SYSTEM

14.

Lighting Fixtures

QUANTRAN (UK), EATON (UK), CLIPSAL (Australia), LEGRAND (UK), OR EQUAL & APPROVED HOFFMEISTER (Germany), RZB (Germany), REGGIANI (Italy) DISANO (Italy), REGIOLUX (UK), SITECO (Germany) MARLIN (UK),TRILUX (Germany),,

E - 117

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

15.

EXIT Sign

THORLUX (UK), THORN (UK), AEC, (Italy) IGUZZINI (Italy), CROMPTON (UK), ABACUS(UK), SBP/PRISMA (Italy). ZUMTOBEL (Austria). PHILIPS(France) OR EQUAL & APPROVED VENTILUX, BARDIC, MENVIER, Thorn JSB, OR EQUAL & APPROVED

16.

Intercom System

: ELVOX (Japan),AIPHONE

(JAPAN), ZENITEL (Norway), JERRON (USA), RING MASTER (Norway), COMELIT (Italy), OR EQUAL & APPROVED

17.

Fire Extinguisher

: SAFICO,
NAFFCO, COMBAT, BRISTOL, CHUBB, OR EQUAL & APPROVED

18.

Fire Resistant Cables

: FIRE TUFF, DRAKA, TEKAP,


FIRE CELL, FP200,(PRYSMIAN) U.K OR EQUAL & APPROVED

19.

Lifts

: MITSUBISHI (JAPAN),
HITACHI (JAPAN), FUJITEC( JAPAN), KONE (Finland), OR EQUAL & APPROVED

20.

Hand and Hair Driers

: SEIMENS(GERMANY),
INTERCARE, WANDSWORTH, MEDICLINICS, RED RING (UK), XPELAIR (UK), OR EQUAL & APPROVED

21.

Wiring Accessories

: MK (UK),
CRABTREE (UK), WANDSWORTH(UK), HAMILTON (UK), OR EQUAL & APPROVED

22.

Wiring Accessories G.I Box

MK (UK),ELETRA (KSA) VOLEX (UK) OR EQUAL & APPROVED E - 118

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

23.

Computer Face Plates

Panduit, MK (UK) 3M, R&M Nexans OR EQUAL & APPROVED

24.

Floor box

MK, DAVIS THORSMAN, SALAMANDRE OR EQUAL & APPROVED PHILIPS, HOLLAND SONY,JAPAN GROUND, GERMANY SHARP, JAPAN OR EQUAL & APPROVED

25.

T.V System

Note :

For approval of materials equivalent to the specified, Engineer's decision shall be final and binding. All components and assembling shall be from original manufacture.

B.31

SCHEDULE OF MOUNTING HEIGHTS 1. Lighting switches : 1600 mm AFFL at Classrooms, General Toilets and Corridors and 1250 mm AFFL at Administration Area and Laboratories 450 mm AFFL OR 250 mm above worktop 2000mm AFFL 1350 mm AFFL 2200 mm AFFL OR 300 mm below false ceiling 1250 mm AFFL 1400mm AFFL 3000mm above ground floor level 2200mm AFFL

2.

13A socket outlet, computer terminal, : socket (unless otherwise mentioned) 13A Double socket for TV and TV Outlet Wall mounting telephone Fire alarm bell : : :

3. 4. 5.

6. 7. 8. 9.

Manual pull station Hand dryer and hair dryer External fire alarm bell, class bell And sound horn speakers Wall mounted light fitting for type (WD) stairs 4,5 & 6

: : : :

E - 119

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

10.

Wall mounted light fitting (above The doors) for external and services Buildings External wall mounted light fitting For the main building

2400mm AFFL

11.

3000mm AFFL

Note: The mounting heights shall be indicated by the Contractor in the working drawings for Consultants approval after co-ordinating with the furniture and equipment.

B.32

SCHEDULE OF DRAWINGS The following drawings shall be read in conjunction with these specifications: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13 14 15 16. E-00 E-01 E-02 E-03 E-04 E-05 E-06 E-07 E-08 E-09 E-10 E-11 E-12 E-13 E-14 E-15 : : : : : : : : : : : Site Plan, External Electrical Layout Electrical Single Line Diagram (MV PANEL) Distribution Board Schedules Gardener, Guard House and Substation - Electrical Layout Ground Floor Plan - Lighting Layout First Floor Plan - Lighting Layout Ground Floor Plan Small Power Layout First Floor Plan Small Power Layout Roof Plan Electrical Layout Roof Plan Lightning Protection Layout Ground Floor Plan Intercom, Public address and Farash Call System First Floor Plan Intercom, Public address and Farash Call System Low Voltage System Schematic Diagram Miscellaneous Electrical Details Miscellaneous Electrical Details Electrical Single Line Diagram (SMB )

E - 120

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27.

A-151E T-00 T-01 T-02 T-03 T-04 F-00 F-01 F-02 F-03 F-04 : : : : : : : : : :

Substation Details (Refer to Architectural Drawings) Site Plan, External Telephone Layout Gardener,Guard,Driver,Pump, S/S Plan, IP Tel. and Intercom Layout Ground Floor Plan, IP Tel, Computer, T.V Layout First Floor Plan, IP Tel, Computer, T.V Layout Low Voltage System Schematic Diagram Site Plan, External Fire Alarm Layout Ground Floor Plan, Fire Alarm, Detection ,Extinguishing Layout First Floor Plan, Fire Alarm, Detection ,Extinguishing Layout Gardener, Guard House, Substation, Pump Room-Fire Layout Fire Alarm System Schematic Diagram

E - 121

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

B.33

TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

1. AUTO CLASS CHANGEOVER SYSTEM

PROJECT: REF: CONTRACTOR: DATE: SUB-CONTRACTOR:

CHECK LIST

YES/NO

REMARKS

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

All bells installed & wired All Wires in Panel Terminated Battery Circuit connected Power supply to ACC system connected to unswithched fused spur unit. Check for proper installation of Panel Check for proper installation The Panel & Component inside Panel Thoroughly Cleaned from Dust
FUNCTIONAL TESTS

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
C

Battery Circuit OK Check Main Menu Display OK Set Clock & Check OK Test Lamp OK Check Main Voltage OK Check Main Failure to Battery OK Programme all Data in the Panel of time Schedule Adjust the Tone of Bells
TESTING CHECK

1. 2. 3.

Set Particular Time & Check whether all Bells are Operating Check the sound OK Check alarm on Main Failure

E - 122

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

4. 5. 6. 7.

Check alarm on Battery disconnected Check Bells Operating on Different time schedule upon programming Check the Auto & Manual Mode Check Display of time & status in Panel on programmed time schedules are OK
FINAL CHECK

1. 2. 3. 4.

Clear all Programme Set Final Programme of time schedule for 7 days Display the programmed time schedule chart on side of panel O & M Manuals in English & Arabic Provided

Testing & Commissioning Engineers (Contractor)

Approved

E - 123

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

2. CHECK LIST, TESTING & COMMISSIONING OF FIRE DETECTION SYSTEM

PROJECT: REF: CONTRACTOR: DATE: SUB-CONTRACTOR:

CHECK LIST

YES/NO

REMARKS

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14.

All Duct smoke Detectors installed & wired All Device installed & Wired All Bells installed & wired All Pull-Push Manual call is installed & wired All wires in F.A Panel terminated Battery Circuit connected Power supply to FAP connected through unswitched fused spur unit Repeater FAP installed properly All Wires Thoroughly connected in Repeater Panel. Power supply wires from main FAP to Repeater FAP is installed and terminated Check any damage to FAP & Repeater Panels Check any damages to Devices Bells Manual Call Points & Duct Devices if any Check whether printer installed & function is OK Check Communication Network card to fire brigade provided in panel.
FUNCTIONAL TESTS (With Power ON)

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

Battery Circuit OK Check Main Menu Display OK Set Clock & Check OK Test Lamp OK Check Main Voltage OK Check Battery Voltage OK Check Main Failure OK Programme all Data for all Devices with addresses

E - 124

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

TESTING CHECKS (Both in Main & Repeator Panel)

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.

13. 14.
D

All Bell operating in Loop All Devices operating in Loop All Duct Devices operating in Loop All External Building Devices Operating in Loop Check Loop Resistance & Note Check Alarm in Panel When any device is faulty Check silence & Reset Buttons operations is OK Check under fault/fire condition the panel cannot be reset until it is cleared Check all devices under fire condition & Bell alarm. Check Mains Failure Alarm Check Alarm under Battery disconnected or not Charged Check under fault/fire condition that particular device is addressed in the Main & repeater Panel Check the Belt in the Printer Check message print out from the printer
FINAL CHECK

1. 2. 3. 4.

Clear all faults Check time & Date Display the layout chart with address on the side of Main & repeater Panel O & M Manuals in English and Arabic Provided

Testing Engineers: (Contractors)

Approved :

E - 125

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

3. FARASH CALL SYSTEM

PROJECT: REF: CONTRACTOR: DATE: SUB-CONTRACTOR:

A A A

CHECK LIST

YES/NO

REMARKS

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

Panel Installed Properly Check Power supply to Panel OK Check all devices installed in Panel Check the Bell Push Manual operation OK Check all wires connected in each Bell push & Panel properly Check Panel & components inside thoroughly cleaned from dust. Check identification labels in each panel installed for each bell push TESTING Check Main Voltage OK Check Transformer voltage OK Check each Bell Push Whether OK Check on each Bell Push the Buzzer rings & resets OK Check the lamp ON on panel for each bell push operation & identifications are correct

B 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Testing Engineers: (Contractors)

Approved :

E - 126

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

4. CHECK LIST, TESTING & COMMISSIONING OF PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM PROJECT: REF: CONTRACTOR: DATE: SUB-CONTRACTOR:

CHECK LIST

YES/NO

REMARKS

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

8. 9. 10.

Check all Speakers installed OK Check Wiring to all speakers connected & terminated properly Check all microphone points installed, wired & connected Check all volume control Points installed, wired and connected Check Desk Microphone Unit installed, wired & connected Check all hand microphone with stand provided Check all Components for PA system viz. Amplifier, zoning unit, Players etc. Provided, wired & connected Check item No.7 Properly installed in Panel racks Check ratings of each equipment & in accordance with approved submittal Check speakers are connected to each zone in zoning OK
FUNCTIONAL TESTS

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

Check power supply system OK Check Power supply to each equipment OK Check Cassette, CD Player & FM/AM player working OK Check amplifier & preamplifier zone OK Check table stand microphone with zoning OK Check all speakers are operating OK Check all microphone units & points are operating OK Check power supply & operation of volume control Units in each zone operating OK

E - 127

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

INSTALLATION CHECKS

1.

2.

3. 4.

Check each zone operation for speakers & volume control independently operating OK for speech & music is clear Check all speakers on microphone operating OK with override button for clear speech / announcement. Check SPL in each area at different points note the reading in separate sheets & attach. Check the external speaker SPL & speech is clear.

Testing Engineers: (Contractors)

Approved :

E - 128

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

5. MEASUREMENT OF LOADS

PROJECT: REF: CONTRACTOR: DATE: SUB-CONTRACTOR:

LOADS R PHASE AMPS DESCRIPTION Y PHASE AMPS B PHASE AMPS REMARKS

SMB 1 SMB-2 SMB-3 SMB-4 SMB-5 SMB-AC1 SMB-AC2 SMB-AC3 SMB-AC4 SMB-AC5 SMB-AC6 LIFT Packages Unit DB-HV DB-MV DB-SR DB-GR DB-PR DB-DR

Tested by contractor

Approved :

E - 129

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

6. MEASUREMENT OF LIGHTING LEVEL

PROJECT: REF: CONTRACTOR: DATE: SUB-CONTRACTOR:

MEASUREMENT LUX DESCRIPTION REMARKS

Class Room (Typical) Computer Room 1 Computer Room 2 Head Master Room Multipurpose Hall Assembly Hall Offices

Testing Engineers: (Contractors)

Approved :

E - 130

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

SL.No. 1

DESCRIPTION Material

COMPLY

NOT COMPLY

REMARK

a Manufacturer b Country of Origin c Body Type Thickness of Body before paint & d after paint e Dimension of Body Fabrication Sharp Edgea, Burrs & f Finish g Colour h IP Rating i Classification of Luminaire j Type of Lamp Holder k Lamp Holder Fitting & Earthing l Standards (BS-EN60598) m Provision for Air Handling 2 a b c d e f g Control Gear Type of Control Gear Manufacturer Country of Origin Voltage Rating Frequency & Current Rating Fitting of Body Easy of Replacement Connection h Terminals,Phase,netural,Earth i Starters j Standars Confirmation Wiring 3 a Type of Wiring b Manufacturer c Rating d Colour of Phase, Netural & Earth e Size of Wire Earthing Connection to Body & f Lamp Holder g Type of Terminals & Size 4 a b c d Manufacturer Material Type Category Thickness
E - 131

Diffuser

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

SL.No. e f 5 a b c d e 6 a b c d e f g h 7 a

DESCRIPTION Whether Anodised No. of Rating Lamps Manufacturer Type of Rating Lumen Output Colour Temperature Colour Lamp Installation / Assembly Fixing Detail of Body Gaps With Body & Diffuser Fitting of Diffuser With Body Installation of Lamps Fitting of Control Gear Internal Wiring Rating Plate Complete Assembled Lumanaire Testing Insulation Resistance (i) Control Gear (ii) Wiring (iii) Lamp Holder to Body

COMPLY

NOT COMPLY

REMARK

b c d e f g 8 a b c

Mechanical Test on Body & Components. Measurement of Light out put of Fitting With The Lamps Measurement of Temperature of All Component & Terminals on Load Measurement of Leakage Current Voltage Withstand on Lamp Holders & Fitting Measurement of Voltage Drop Documenttation Factory Test Certificate of Fitting Factory Test Certificate of All Components Type of Test Certificate of Project Requirements (i) IP Rating (ii) Ambien Temterature (iii) Compliance to Standards

E - 132

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

7. M.V. PANEL
SL. NO

DESCRIPTION

PROPOSED

MAKE

REMARKS

1 a b c d e f g h i j k

Construction Structure Sheet Steel Thickness Door Sheet Steel Thickness Type of sheet steel Form of Panel Dimension of Panel No. of Transport section Depth of Single Core Cable Compartment Confirmation to standards Type of Gland Plate for Incomer Type of Gland Plate for Outgoing Outgoing Terminal Suitable for large Parallel Cable Termination All Doors & Openings Properly Earthed / Bonded Busbars a b c d e f g h i Type of Copper & Current Density Size of Main Horizontal and Vertical (at ACB) Busbars Heat shrinkable colour coded sleeve. Size of Vertical Busbars at Outgoings Type of Busbars Supports Size of Earth Busbars Neutral - Earth Link Provided & Size Current Rating of Main Busbars at 35oC&50oCAmbient Temperature Current Rating of Vertical Outgoing Busbars at 35oC & 500CAmbient Temperature Clearance of Busbars Between (i) Phase to Phase (ii) Phase to Neutral (iii)Phase to Body

l 2

E - 133

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

3 a

Panel Components Air Circuit Breaker Panel (i) Rating (ii) Model No. of ACB (iii) Whether Drawout & Motorised (iv) Type of Control unit with setting range (v) Rating of CT's for metering (vi) Rating of CT's for REF & Qty. (vii) Shunt Voltage for trip (viii)Type & Range of Ammeter (ix) Type & Range of Voltmeter (x) Type & Range of REF Relay (xi) Type of Indicating Lamp (xii)Type & Rating of control wiring used with sizes (xiii)Control Circuit & Metering circuit protection provided (xiv)whether reset/ Alarm & Hooting Provided (xv) Heater Provided with control (xvi)Type & Rating of Terminal Block (xvii)Whether H.V Inter-trip Provided (xviii)KWH 10 Way Terminal Block Provided Outgoing Panel (i) Rating of each MCCB's (ii)Type & Model Nos. of each MCCB's (iii) Each Type MCCB's With adjustable Thermal & Magnetic trip Provided & Range (iv) whether Padlockable with Door (v) Whether Door Interlockable (vi) Panel Heater Provided Other Components (i) Type of Battery (ii) Rating of Battery (iii)Type & Rating of Battery Charger (iv)Type of Panel Heater & Rating

E - 134

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

4 a b

Test & Certificates Short Circuit Rating & Type test certificates of Proposed Panel Temperature Rise Rating & Type test certificate of Proposed Panel Short Circuit Rating & Type Test Certificate of Proposed ACB with ICU, ICS & ICUS Short Circuit Rating & Type Test Certificates of Proposed MCCB with ICU, ICS Dielectric H.V. Test Mechanical Strength & Test IP Rating of Proposed Panel Arcing Test on ACB Panel Insulation Resistance of Busbar's & control circuit Primary injection test for meters & protection CT's Secondary injection test for relays & CT's Milli Volt Drop Test (Ductor Test) ACB Control Unit Test Confirmation to Standards a b c d e f g Main Panel ACB & MCCB's CT's Busbars REF Relay Meters Battery & Chargers Documents a b c List of Testing equipment in factory Calibration Certificate of all Equipments Type Test Certificate of (i) Short Circuit of Panel & Components (ii)Temperature Rise Factory Routine Sample Test Sheets

d e f g h i j k l m 5

E - 135

Public Works Authority STANDARD SCHOOL

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

8. POWER CABLES

SL. NO

DESCRIPTION

PROPOSED

STANDARDS

REMARKS

1 a b c d e f g h i k 2 a b c d e f g h i j 3 a b 4

Construction Material Type of Conductor Type of insulation Core Identification Type of filler Material Type of Barrier Tape Bedding Type Bedding Material Armour Material Type Oversheath finish Material Type Voltage Rating of the Cable Data for Cable Sizes Thickness of XLPE insulation Thickness of Barrier Tape Thickness of Extruded Bedding Thickness of Armour Thickness of oversheath finish Overall size & weight of cables Current Rating Chart Short Circuit Chart Voltage Drop & Impedance Chart Derating Factors for Installation and Temperatures Documents Factory Test Certificate Type Test Certificates Other Technical Information That You Need to tell us

E - 136

WATER SERVICES, DRAINAGE, FIRE FIGHTING & IRRIGATION SPECIFICATIONS

WATER SERVICES, DRAINAGE,


FIRE FIGHTING AND IRRIGATION SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX

CL. NO.

TITLE

PAGE NO.

PART 'A' : GENERAL .................................................................................................... 1 A.1 SITE CONDITIONS .......................................................................................... 1 A.2 DEFINITIONS ................................................................................................... 1 A.3 SCOPE OF WORKS ......................................................................................... 3 A.4 EXCLUSIONS ................................................................................................... 3 A.5 COMPLIANCE WITH SPECIFICATION AND REGULATIONS ......................... 3 A.6 PROGRAMME .................................................................................................. 5 A.7 TENDER DRAWINGS...................................................................................... 5 A.8 WORKING DRAWINGS .................................................................................... 5 A.9 CO-ORDINATION OF DRAWINGS................................................................... 6 A.10 MATERIAL SUBMITTALS ................................................................................. 6 A.11 EQUIPMENT SIZE AND DELIVERY ................................................................. 7 A.12 MATERIAL INSPECTION ................................................................................. 7 A.13 ALTERNATIVES ............................................................................................... 7 A.14 SETTING OUT OF WORKS.............................................................................. 8 A.15 DAMAGE TO PLANT AND MATERIALS........................................................... 8 A.16 PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT AND PIPING ................................................. 8 A.17 INSPECTION OF INSTALLATION .................................................................... 9 A.18 IDENTIFICATION, COLOUR CODING AND PAINTING ................................... 9 A.19 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS.............................................. 11 A.20 AS BUILT DRAWINGS ................................................................................... 12 A.21 WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE .................................................................... 12 PART B : WATER AND DRAINAGE SERVICES ....................................................... 13 B.1 HOT AND COLD WATER SERVICES ............................................................ 13 B.2 EXTERNAL PIPEWORK ................................................................................. 19 B.3 WATER STORAGE TANKS ............................................................................ 19 B.4 ELECTRICAL WATER HEATERS .................................................................. 20 B.5 PACKAGED BOOSTER PUMPSET................................................................ 21 B.6 CENTRAL WATER FILTERS .......................................................................... 22 B.7 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING FOR WATER PIPES ................................ 22 B.8 DISINFECTION OF WATER LINES ................................................................ 22 B.9 FIRE FIGHTING SERVICES ........................................................................... 23 B.10 LABORATORY LPG SYSTEM PIPING INSTALLATIONS .............................. 34 LPG System 35 B.11 SANITARY WARE INSTALLATIONS .............................................................. 36 B.12 INTERNAL DRAINAGE AND RAIN WATER PIPEWORK & FITTINGS ........... 37 Joining of WC Outlet to UPVC 37

B.13 PIPEWORK INSTALLATIONS ........................................................................ 38 B.14 LABORATORY WASTE SYSTEM .................................................................. 39 B.15 EXTERNAL DRAINAGE ................................................................................. 40 B.16 MANHOLES .................................................................................................... 41 B.17 MANHOLE COVERS AND GRATING............................................................. 41 B.18 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING FOR DRAIN PIPES.................................. 42 B.19 TESTING AFTER BACKFILLING .................................................................... 43 B.20 RECORD OF TESTS ...................................................................................... 43 B.21 RODDING BEFORE HANDOVER .................................................................. 43 B.22 GULLY POT.................................................................................................... 43 B.23 SOAKAWAYS ................................................................................................. 43 Borehole 44 B.24 SEPTIC / HOLDING TANK ............................................................................. 44 PART C : IRRIGATION SYSTEM .............................................................................. 45 C.1 GENERAL....................................................................................................... 45 C.2 WATER TANK AND PUMPSET ...................................................................... 46 C.3 IRRIGATION PIPEWORK ............................................................................... 46 C.4 VALVES .......................................................................................................... 46 C.5 DRIP EMITTERS ............................................................................................ 47 C.6 SPRAY SPRINKLERS .................................................................................... 47 C.7 QUICK COUPLING VALVES .......................................................................... 48 C.8 IRRIGATION CONTROL SYSTEM ................................................................. 48 C.9 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING ................................................................. 50 PART D : SCHEDULES ............................................................................................. 51 D.1 LIST OF APPROVED MANUFACTURERS (PLUMBING & DRAINAGE) ......... 51 D.2 LIST OF APPROVED MANUFACTURERS (FIRE FIGHTING)........................... 55 D.3 SCHEDULE OF DRAWINGS .......................................................................... 57

*********************************************************

____________________________________________________________________________________________________

PART 'A' : GENERAL A.1 SITE CONDITIONS

Unless otherwise specified, all the equipment should be capable of withstanding the following site conditions: i. ii. iii. iv. v. vi. vii. Maximum Ambient Temperature : Altitude Maximum Relative Humidity Maximum Wind Velocity Prevailing Wind Storms Electrical Supply * Supply * Voltage : : Alternating current 415 volts on 3 phase and 240 volts on 1 phase, 50 cycles per second (Hz) : : : : : 50C. Sea level 95% to 98% 140 kms. per hour North or North-westerly Dusty, sporadic & irregular

A.2

DEFINITIONS

The following terms and abbreviations used in these specifications/drawings shall mean : Contractor C.E.D. : : The Main Contractor Civil Engineering Department, Doha, Qatar. Qatar General Electricity Corporation, Doha, Qatar. and Water

Q.G.E.W.C.

Kahra-maa Regulations

Plumbing bye-laws issued by the Water Department of Ministry of Electricity & Water, Doha, Qatar (now QGEWC) British Standard Specification OR British Standard Code of Practice. The drawings on which the tender is based and schedules therein.

B.S.S. or B.S.C.P.

Tender Drawings

_________________________________________________________________________________ P- 1

____________________________________________________________________________________________________

Working Drawings

The drawings prepared by the Contractor for the purpose of execution of work at site. The final drawings prepared by the Contractor which is the true record of the actual work carried out at site. To include the provision of all equipment and materials and all works to be carried out by the Contractor as per these specifications and drawings for the satisfactory completion and operation of the installation. The location where the works are to be carried out. The representative of the Client assigned to supervise the work. Shall mean approved by the Engineer in writing. Shall mean submitted to the Engineer in writing. Shall mean accepted by the Engineer in writing. Shall mean hidden from normal sight in shafts, ceiling spaces, walls, slabs or partitions. Shall mean visible to normal sight. Shall mean supply, install, test and commission. Shall mean install, test and commission. Shall mean supply only.

As-built Drawings

Works

Site

Engineer

Approved Submitted Accepted Concealed

: : : :

Exposed Provide Install Furnish

: : : :

_________________________________________________________________________________ P- 2

____________________________________________________________________________________________________

A.3

SCOPE OF WORKS

The scope of works under this contract includes the supply, delivery to site, installation, testing and commissioning of the following services for this project: a. b. c. d. e. Water Supply System Fire Fighting System Irrigation System LPG System Drainage System

The Contractor shall provide all the materials, labour, cartage, plant and appliances necessary for the supply, installation, testing and commissioning of the works and all other minor and incidental works necessary for the system. The specifications and drawings are intended to indicate the nature and scope of the project. The Contractor shall be responsible for the installation of plant of the correct capacity and shall guarantee the efficient performance of the equipment. This specification shall be read in conjunction with the drawings, bill of quantities and other contract documents. The Contractor shall provide complete installation of the project and also include other associated works such as supporting structures, foundations, ancillary works etc. The Contractor shall include for all extra works involved and also for any reinstatement which may be necessary due to these installations. The Contractor shall allow for obtaining all necessary approvals, permits, inspections etc., which may be required by the local authorities. A.4 EXCLUSIONS Items necessary for the completion of the plant but not included in the tender are to be listed as exclusions. It will be assumed that any items or services necessary for these services and not specifically excluded will be provided by the Contractor even if not mentioned in the tender. A.5 COMPLIANCE WITH SPECIFICATION AND REGULATIONS The Contractor shall supply all materials which shall be new and in a new condition. The Contractor shall supply all the necessary skilled and non-skilled labour to complete the works in accordance with the programme. The installations shall comply with the following regulations : i. The following British Standards and local regulations shall be applicable for fabrication, installation and testing of systems included in this contract :

_________________________________________________________________________________ P- 3

____________________________________________________________________________________________________

a.

BS 6700

Design, Installation, Testing and Maintenance of Services Supplying Water for Domestic use within Buildings and their curtilages. Code of practice for sanitary pipework Code of practice for building drainage Fire extinguishing Premises. installations and Equipment on

b. c. d.

BS 5572 BS 8301 BS 5306

e.

Plumbing Engineering Services Design Guide published by the Institute of Plumbing. Qatar Construction Specifications published by C.E.D. Developers Drainage Guide published by Sewerage Division Plumbing bye laws published by Kahra-maa.

f. g. h. ii.

The equipments shall conform to the British Standard Specifications (current edition including all amendments). If the Contractor wishes to use installations or equipments other than specified and conforming to different standards, then a written approval from the Engineer will be necessary. The workmen employed must be accustomed to the highest class of services installations. A competent Engineer must be in regular attendance throughout the whole contract.

iii.

iv.

v.

_________________________________________________________________________________ P- 4

____________________________________________________________________________________________________

A.6

PROGRAMME Immediately on receipt of order, the Contractor shall produce and submit for approval of Engineer / Client, the work programme based on CPM or Barchart indicating the time required for various operations to complete the project in time. Approval of the programme by the Engineer or Client shall not relieve the Contractor from his obligations to execute and complete the works in conformity with the directions and requirements of the Engineer. The following points shall be highlighted in the programme. i. ii. iii. iv. v. vi. vii. viii. Mobilisation Drawings / Submittals Approvals Equipment Deliveries Installation of Equipment Installation of Piping Works Testing Commissioning and Handing Over

A.7

TENDER DRAWINGS

The tender drawings related to this project have been listed in the Schedule of Drawings enclosed with these specifications. The tender drawings have been prepared to show the tenderer the principal equipment and general arrangement required for this project. These drawings do not indicate every detail of work. It is the Contractor's responsibility to check the actual positions/locations at site. All dimensions are tentative and shall be checked with the Architectural and Structural drawings. Any discrepancy shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer at the time of tender. The Contractor is deemed to have studied the services drawings and have included in his price for all builders work associated with these drawings. Particular attention shall be paid to the positioning of plumbing and drainage points in relation to the equipment, sanitary ware and architectural finishes like tiles etc. A.8 WORKING DRAWINGS The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for his approval within a period of sixty (60) days from the date of award of the contract, detailed shop drawings indicating the equipment, pipework, valves etc., complete with their accessories. The Contractor after completing all contractual obligations shall prepare the working drawings in a scale of 1 : 50 for Layout Plans, 1 : 20 for Plantroom Details and 1 : 200 for Site Plan. The Contractor shall project the following in the above drawings :

_________________________________________________________________________________ P- 5

____________________________________________________________________________________________________

i. ii. iii.

Actual piping layout indicating bends, junctions and other fittings. Mounting arrangement of equipment and pipe support details. Sectional views for coordinating the proposed drawings with other services i.e. Air conditioning and Electrical, to the Engineer's requirements. The schematic arrangements.

iv. A.9

CO-ORDINATION OF DRAWINGS

The Main Contractor shall produce working drawings for building works required for services showing the integration of all the services i.e. Electrical, Mechanical, Plumbing & Drainage. The Contractor should ensure that all the working drawings are properly co-ordinated before submitting to the Engineer for approval. All the services shall be installed in such a manner so as to avoid conflict with each other. A.10 MATERIAL SUBMITTALS The materials offered for approval shall be strictly in accordance with the specifications and tender drawings. The Contractor shall submit in triplicate, the technical literature for each item of equipment he intends to use at this project, to the Engineer for the necessary approval. If in case the technical literature is not available, then a sample shall be submitted; in the absence of either of these, typed technical data shall be submitted, duly supported by telex/letter of the manufacturer for confirmation. Technical literature shall be in original. Each copy of the submittal shall be numbered and signed with the technical literature clearly marked in red, indicating the model, type and capacity of the equipment offered. The Contractor shall submit a technical data sheet giving comparison between the items specified and offered, with each submittal. The Engineer shall retain two copies and return one, either approved or not approved, to the Contractor. The Contractor shall maintain a schedule of all the equipment as per the following pro-forma and submit a monthly report to the Engineer: i. ii. iii. iv. v. vi. vii. viii. Submittal Number Equipment/Model Number Manufacturer/Local Agent Date of Approval Date of Order/Order No. Mode of Delivery (Air, Land or Sea) Expected time of arrival on site Status as on date of report.

_________________________________________________________________________________ P- 6

____________________________________________________________________________________________________

A.11

EQUIPMENT SIZE AND DELIVERY

Each item of equipment shall be delivered to site suitable for installation in position designated, bearing in mind the location, type of structure, construction programme and the method of access. A.12 MATERIAL INSPECTION

All the materials to be used shall be new and delivered to site wherever possible in maker's packing. The Engineer reserves the right to inspect all invoices in order to ensure this fact. The Contractor shall inform the Engineer within one week upon receipt of all the materials at site and arrange for the inspection of the same. Written approval should be obtained from the Engineer prior to using materials at site. Any material used at site which is not approved earlier shall stand rejected without notice. The Contractor will have to remove the rejected materials from site and replace with approved materials at his own expense. In the event Contractor fails to do so, the Client will have the liberty to carry out such works from other agencies and debit the ensuing amount to the Contractor. A.13 ALTERNATIVES

The tenderer has the liberty to submit with his tender the name of alternative firms considered of equal performance which he wishes to offer. Such alternatives will be considered by the Engineer in consultation with the Client before the tender is accepted. The acceptance of alternatives will be confirmed in writing by the Engineer. During the execution of the contract, no alternative equipment, materials or fittings will be permitted and the Contractor is fore-warned that any item provided by him which is not upto the specification, must be replaced at his own expense. In cases where time will not permit, then such replacements shall be at the Client's convenience, but nevertheless at the Contractor's expense etc.

_________________________________________________________________________________ P- 7

____________________________________________________________________________________________________

A.14

SETTING OUT OF WORKS

The location of plumbing and drainage points as indicated on the tender drawings is tentative and may require some variation to suit the site requirements. The exact positions must be checked and shown on the detailed working drawings in co-ordination with the Architectural drawings. A.15 DAMAGE TO PLANT AND MATERIALS

Any plant or material which is damaged by any means whatsoever shall not be used in the works. Should the Contractor wish to rectify such damage in order to utilize the plant or materials in the permanent works, the matter shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer, who in turn shall conduct a proper survey after which the necessary instructions will be issued. Only after obtaining a written permission from the Engineer shall any remedial work be carried out. Any damaged plant or material allegedly brought to a "as-new" condition following such a procedure, shall only be accepted at the discretion of the Engineer, whose decision in such matters shall be final. A.16 PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT AND PIPING

The protective finishes must be provided on all materials and equipment used in this contract to ensure that no deterioration is caused by the interaction of local climatic conditions. All materials shall be inspected by the Contractor or his representative before shipment to ensure that the finishes are in accordance with the specifications. The Contractor shall be responsible for the safe storage of materials on site and provision of such covering as may be necessary to ensure that on completion, all items are handed over in a sound condition with all protective finishes undamaged. All the items of UPVC or rubber are to be protected from continuous exposure to ultra-violet rays. The installation shall be adequately protected against damage and deterioration. When handed over, the installation shall be in a clean and sound condition. Particular care must be taken during the course of construction to seal all open ends of pipework, drainage, gullies, and manholes with a temporary cover. Wood shavings or paper will not be accepted for this purpose.

_________________________________________________________________________________ P- 8

____________________________________________________________________________________________________

A.17

INSPECTION OF INSTALLATION

The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer the list of items to be inspected and subsequently the required notice of the date on which the plant will be ready for testing. The Contractor has to arrange testing facilities - tools, tackles and auxiliaries required for testing at his expense. Approval of statutory authorities related to his work shall be obtained by him at his expense. A final test of the whole work shall be carried out in the presence of the Engineer or his representative at or about the completion of the contract. The satisfactory completion of an earliest test during the progress of work shall in no way relieve the Contractor of any of his obligations and any defects found at the time of the final tests or during the period of guarantee shall be made good to the complete satisfaction of the Engineer.

Statutory Authority Approval Contractor shall submit the final official approval from the concerned statutory authority.

A.18

IDENTIFICATION, COLOUR CODING AND PAINTING

a.

Identification All the pipework, valves, plant and equipment installed shall be suitably identified. The identification system shall be agreed in detail with the Engineer, but shall broadly meet the following requirements as required by BS 1710 and colours to BS 4800.

Pipework The pipework shall be identified with 15 cm wide identification bands in the following manner : i. ii. iii. iv. At connection to equipment. At both sides of isolating valves At 15 metre intervals on straight pipework in the Plantrooms, roof and ceiling voids and at all changes of direction. The direction of flow shall be marked with an arrow.

The colour code identification shall be as per the requirements of BS 4800 as detailed in this specification.

_________________________________________________________________________________ P- 9

____________________________________________________________________________________________________

Valves Identification bands shall be provided on the valves by means of laminated plastic labels securely attached to each valve. The label shall be engraved with a number indicating the service and the area isolated or regulated by that valve. Each valve number shall be noted on the record drawings and record valve chart.

Plant and Equipment Each item of plant and equipment shall be provided with an identification plate giving complete identification of the equipment in English and Arabic.

b.

Colour Coding All pipes whether exposed or concealed in accessible pipe spaces shall be provided with colour bands and legends for identifying contents of pipes by approved colour and legend scheme. Horizontal piping shall be marked at intervals of 15 metres and vertical piping shall be marked on each floor. Marking shall be placed adjacent to valves and fittings.

c.

Painting The Contractor shall clean and paint all brackets and supports with two coats of red oxide paint. All exposed pipes and supports shall be painted with matching colour of the wall or tiles in accordance with the architectural layout.

_________________________________________________________________________________ P - 10

____________________________________________________________________________________________________

A.19

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

The Contractor shall prepare and produce a Master Instruction Manual for all equipment's, systems and installations constructed. It shall include schematic diagrams and all necessary instructions for the proper operation and maintenance of equipment, systems and installations. The Contractor shall make provision for the supply of three copies of the Instruction Manuals before issue of Practical Completion Certificate. This manual shall include the following items: i. Complete list of all items of equipment, controls and accessories as actually supplied, including serial numbers and all name plate details. A set of 'As-installed' drawings showing equipment layout, foundation details, electrical wiring, water piping, drain piping etc. The drawings shall show plans and sections necessary to show all required information correctly. Control panel circuit diagram and its layout shall also be indicated on the drawings. A set of manufacturer's catalogues, wiring diagrams and installation drawings relevant only to the particular item of equipment concerned. General catalogues will not be acceptable. Manufacturer's printed spare parts list for all items of equipment. Operational description of the plants including starting, stopping and shut-down. Preventive maintenance routine at monthly and yearly intervals and maintenance procedures for all plant and equipment. Names, addresses, telephone no., fax number etc., for all manufacturers and suppliers.

ii.

iii.

iv. v.

vi.

vii.

_________________________________________________________________________________ P - 11

____________________________________________________________________________________________________

A.20

AS BUILT DRAWINGS

After the working drawings have been approved, no alteration to the drawings shall be carried out without the consent of the Engineer. These changes shall be supported by sketches and incorporated on the 'As-built' drawings which are to be submitted to the Engineer prior to issuance of Practical Completion Certificate. The Contractor shall keep on site one complete set of working drawings which are to be marked up along and in conjunction with the site progress. These drawings may then be used to form the basis of the 'As-built' drawings. The set of drawings kept at site shall be made available for reference by the Engineer or his representative at any time so requested. The Contractor shall supply to the Engineer for approval two sets of 'As-built' drawings showing the works together with any other information necessary for operation and maintenance. After approval is obtained, three copies of each drawing shall be supplied. In addition, two sets of copy negatives for each drawing shall be handed over to the Client.

A.21

WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE

The Contractor shall guarantee for a period as stated in the Form of Tender Clause 49 (1) after the practical completion of the installation that all plants, equipment and piping shall operate free of any defects due to defective material and bad workmanship and that any part found defective during this period shall be replaced free of cost by the Contractor. Maintenance period for all plumbing, drainage, fire fighting equipment, controls, components and systems etc., shall start only after regular electricity power supply is available at site. If the defects are not rectified within a reasonable period, the Client may proceed to do so by another agency at the Contractor's entire risk and expense without prejudice to any rights of the Client.

_________________________________________________________________________________ P - 12

____________________________________________________________________________________________________

PART B : WATER AND DRAINAGE SERVICES B.1 HOT AND COLD WATER SERVICES

a.

Pipework and Fittings All pipework inside Toilets / Kitchen, below false ceiling, shall be in polypropylene to DIN 8078 and all other pipework (above false ceiling, inside ducts, on roof etc.), shall be in copper to BS 2871 Part 1. i. Polypropylene All water supply pipework inside Toilets / Kitchen, below false ceiling, shall be in polypropylene (PP-R) conforming to DIN:8078. Polypropylene random-copolymer shall be of high molecular weight and stabilized to high temperature. Fittings shall be both welded fittings and metal insert fittings. All metal inserts shall be in dezincification resistant brass. Jointing between pipes and fittings shall be made by melting the parts. Locations where pipe is to be connected to equipment, PP-R fittings with metal insert shall be used. Polypropylene valves shall be used where available with manufacturers in their product range. All the metal components inside the valve in contact with water shall be in dezincification resistant brass. For those valves (type and sizes) which are not available in the PP-R pipe manufacturers range, it shall be made of dezincification resistant brass as described in clause b below. All components of polypropylene pipe systems shall be PN16 & suitable for a working pressure of 8.1 bars at 70C. for 50 years life expectancy. The whole polypropylene piping installation including supports shall be carried out strictly in accordance with manufacturers recommendations. The Contractor shall made allowance for expansion in the pipework. The whole PP-R installation shall be guaranteed for a period of 5 years. The pipe sizes shown on the drawings shall represent the following equivalent PP-R pipe sizes: Pipe sizes shown on the drawings 15 22 28 35 42 54 Equivalent PP-R outside diameter (mm) 20 25 32 40 50 63

_________________________________________________________________________________ P - 13

____________________________________________________________________________________________________

ii.

Copper All pipework above false ceiling, inside ducts, on roof, inside ground water tank yard etc., shall be in copper tube to BS 2871 - Part 1 Table 'X'. All fittings shall be of the capillary type to BS 864 - Part 2, manufactured from gun metal, copper or dezincification resistant brass. Compression fittings shall only be used near the water heaters/tanks as per Engineer's requirements/approval. All underground pipework and buried pipework in floor slabs and concealed pipework inside wall chases if any shall be in copper tube to BS 2871 - Part 1, Table 'Y' covered in factory bonded green colour polyethylene sleeve. Fittings shall be to BS 864 - Part 2 Type 'B'.

b.

Valves All valves shall be marked with the manufacturer's name and the appropriate British standard. Valves on flow pipe work shall be complete with hand wheels. All valves shall be made of gunmetal. i. Gate Valves Gate valves shall be provided to each branch pipe and at the locations as indicated on the tender drawings or as directed by the Engineer. Gate valves shall conform to BS 5154 and shall be made of gun metal, non-rising stem, screwed bonnet, one piece wedge type and tested to 16 bars hydraulic pressure. Valves of 54 mm dia. and below shall be welded ends and provided with unions on both sides. Valves more than 54 mm dia shall be with flanged ends.

ii.

Servicing Valves Servicing valves shall be provided under the sanitary ware for individual isolation of taps, mixer taps and supply to W.C. cistern. It shall be made of chrome plated brass with crutch or capstan head.

iii.

Non-return Valves Non-return valves shall be provided in discharge line of each pump and at other locations directed by the Engineer to prevent reversal of flow. Non-return valves shall be made of gun metal and conform to BS 5154. Valves shall be swing pattern, metal to metal seat and tested to 16 bars hydraulic pressure.

_________________________________________________________________________________ P - 14

____________________________________________________________________________________________________

c.

Pipe Supports All piping shall be supported by means of approved supports. Pipe supports shall be pre-galvanized steel with rubber insert ring. Piping shall be supported to maintain the required grading and pitching of lines to prevent vibration and to secure piping in place. It shall be so arranged as to provide for expansion and contraction. All hangers and supports must be of a design which would permit removal and replacement of bends or clamps and hangers or supports without taking down the pipes. The drop rods for hangers shall be hot-dipped galvanized or electro-plated. The pipe supports on the rods shall be of channel framework, coated with two coats of red-oxide and finished with one coat of paint matching with the building colour. The spacing of pipe supports for the horizontal and vertical runs shall be as per manufacturers recommendations. Brackets shall also be fixed in addition to the afore-mentioned at every branch/tee and at each change of direction of the pipework. Fixings for the above brackets/clips must all be of a type approved by the Engineer. In case of expansion joints, brackets/clips may be used as guides, these being loose fitting to enable pipe movement (See expansion joint manufacturer's installation instruction for fixing distances).

d.

Taps Bib or mixer taps shall be provided and fixed to sinks, lavatory, basins and cisterns as shown on the drawings and/or specified under Architectural Sanitary ware schedule. The bodies and heads of the taps shall be bronze or gunmetal castings or hot pressings of brass or manganese bronze. Taps shall have chromium plated finish or as specified by the Architects. Spindles, glands, crutches, washer plates and nuts shall be of brass or manganese bronze. The taps shall have crutch or capstan heads made of metal being marked hot or cold with tail having external parallel thread. They shall be marked with manufacturer's name or trade mark. The outlet of taps shall not be less than 12.5 cm above the level of the underside of the fixing flange. All taps shall be designed for a working water pressure of not less than 10 bars. Tap threads shall be in accordance with BS 21.

e.

Float Valves Ball valves shall be of gun metal or other equally suitable corrosion resistant alloy in accordance with BS 1212 or Equal and Approved. They shall be of cast gun-metal construction having gun-metal or bronze seat and lever.

_________________________________________________________________________________ P - 15

____________________________________________________________________________________________________

Water tanks shall be provided with float valves where shown on the drawings. The floats shall be of copper construction in accordance with BS 1968. Ball valves shall be of the pressure pattern to suit the required working pressure of the system.

f.

Float Switches Float switches fitted to the water tanks shall be a mercury switch in a plastic casing suspended from its own cable. The casing of the float switch shall be made of polypropylene and cable shall be sheathed with PVC compound. It shall be suitable for water temperature upto 50C.

g.

Automatic Air Vents Automatic air vents shall be high pressure type made of DZR brass and shall be provided at all high points in the system or as instructed by the Engineer.

h.

Strainers Strainers shall be of the 'Y' type with bronze body, having screwed (F) ends. Strainers shall have easily removable cylindrical stainless steel screen with 0.8 mm perforation. The total area of the holes in the strainer shall not be less than three times the cross sectional area of the suction pipe. The strainers shall be suitable for installation in horizontal or vertical pipework and for a working pressure of not less than 10 bars. Care shall be taken while installation that the direction of flow corresponds to the direction of arrow marked on the body of the strainer. The strainers shall be located in such a position that it is easily accessible for maintenance. Unions shall be provided on both ends for easy replacement and removal of the strainers.

i.

Pipe Sleeves The Contractor shall install sleeves in connection with all piping passing through slabs, partitions or other building construction. The sleeves shall be in new concrete construction before pouring. The sleeves in foundation walls shall be buried and installed in opening and joints caulked between the sleeves and piping to make a water tight installation. All the sleeves shall be in UPVC.

j.

Flashings Pipes extending through roofs shall be flashed with sheet lead, copper or other durable material to make the roof water tight. Flashings shall exceed not less than 200 mm from the sleeve and pipes passing through shall be packed with water proof material and mastic compound.

_________________________________________________________________________________ P - 16

____________________________________________________________________________________________________

k.

In-line Cartridge Filters In-line cartridge filters shall be provided with all drinking water fountains. Filter housing shall be made of non-corrosive material, preferably transparent plastic. Filters shall have taste / odour cartridge with dirt / rust pre-filter section. Taste / odour filter shall be capable of removing taste and odour of chlorine as well as stale and metallic tastes and odours from water. Dirt / rust filter section should remove solid particles. Filter shall have discharge rating of 3 U.S. gallons per minute (11.35 lpm).

l.

Piping Installations In general, all pipes and fittings shall be installed in accordance with BS 6700. i. All the pipework inside the building shall be concealed pipework running above false ceiling, purpose made ducts, under counter top and vanity units etc. Pipework inside Toilets shall be buried inside wall chases. However, wall chases shall be avoided where possible. Pipework shall be fixed / supported with brackets / clips. All brackets/clips shall be manufactured from a material compatible with the pipework. In the course of installation, all pipework and fittings shall be protected; All open ends of pipes shall be temporarily plugged to prevent dirt accumulation or stoppage of the pipes by an approved plug. Paper, wood, rag etc., shall not be used for plugging. The internal surfaces of all pipework shall be free from burrs. All excess flux, joining compounds etc., shall be removed at the time of installation. All pipes shall be free from cuts, dents or other surface damage. At the time of final inspection, damaged pipes shall be removed and replaced with new pipe. The Contractor is responsible for the correct marking out of the positions of all necessary holes in walls, floors, ceilings etc., for pipes and pipe supports. Swing joints, off-sets, expansion joints etc., shall be provided wherever necessary to accommodate expansion of piping. Unions or flanges shall be provided at all by-passes, tanks, heaters, pumps and elsewhere as may be required.

ii.

iii.

iv.

v.

vi.

vii.

viii.

_________________________________________________________________________________ P - 17

____________________________________________________________________________________________________

m.

Insulation of Pipes Water supply pipework as mentioned below shall be insulated with 25 mm thick rigid sectional glass fibre block moulded insulation to conform to pipe with aluminium foil laminated to craft paper with adhesive reinforced with glass fibre (density minimum 64 kg/m). i. All outdoor (exposed to sun) water supply pipework running on roof and inside the tank yard. All hot water supply pipework running within false ceiling void .

ii.

The 50 mm overlap of the craft paper shall be used to provide the vapour seal. All butt and longitudinal joints shall be sealed with self adhesive aluminium tape to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The insulation shall further be covered with 200 g/m glass cloth for internal and external installation and painted with two coats of vapour seal material of minimum thickness of 1 mm. The thermal insulation shall be non-corrosive to the metal, water repellent and fire retardant. Insulation shall not be applied to any element of the pipework system until hydraulic tests have been satisfactorily completed. Pipework shall be insulated separately and adjacent paralleled pipes shall not be 'married' together in one common insulation covering. Where insulated pipework passes through walls or floors, the insulation shall also be carried through. Such installation shall be complete with sealing coat and finish painted.

_________________________________________________________________________________ P - 18

____________________________________________________________________________________________________

B.2

EXTERNAL PIPEWORK

The underground main water services shall be copper tube to BS 2871 Part 1 Table Y and fittings to BS 864 Part 2 Table B. Pipes with size upto 54 mm dia shall be factory bonded polythene covered copper tube. The pipework shall be installed in ground minimum 600 mm deep to the satisfaction of the Engineer. All the joints shall be wrapped with Denso tape after testing. Concrete thrust blocks, size 300 x 300 x 300 shall be provided at every junction and change of direction.

B.3

WATER STORAGE TANKS POLYETHYLENE OR GLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC The water storage tanks shall be made of polyethylene or glass reinforced plastic, suitable for storage of potable water and resistant to ultra-violet rays. Tank shall not encourage the growth of algae. The tank shall have a smooth internal surface, single piece body with no seams or joints. Tanks shall be fitted with accessories as shown on the drawings. After installation, tanks shall be filled with water for testing for 24 hours. No leakage shall be observed at joints. On completion of leak tests, the tank shall be flushed out twice using maximum water pressure available and all extraneous matter removed including the water used during the operation. The whole of the installation shall be guaranteed for a period of 5 years. Any defect/damage or leakage occurred during the guarantee period shall be made good by the Contractor at no cost to the Client. SECTIONAL WATER STORAGE TANKS The water storage tanks shall be made of sectional glass fiber reinforced polyester panel construction suitable for potable water and resistant to ultra violet rays. Tank shall not encourage the growth of algae and shall have a smooth internal surface for easy cleaning. The GRP panels shall be insulated with foamed urethane and shall support 80 C radiation temperature. Raw material for water tank panels shall contain long continuous strand fiber to provide high strength. Sealing material between panels shall be high quality material approved for potable water. Assembly bolts shall be high strength stainless steel bolts. Internal bracing shall be high strength stainless steel bars. Tank dimensions shall be as indicated on the drawings. Each tank shall contain external ladders 2 nos (Steel with hot dip galvanized coating), internal ladders 2 nos (PVC) and manholes 600 mm 2 nos. Tank shall include air vent size 100 mm dia and 210 mm height x 2 no. The tank shall be supported on steel skid base members with size 125 x 65 x 6 mm and supporting reinforced concrete beams with dimensions 500 x 300 x 3 Nos. to suit tank dimensions.

_________________________________________________________________________________ P - 19

____________________________________________________________________________________________________

After installation, tanks shall be filled with water for testing for 24 hours. No leakage shall be observed at joints. On completion of leak tests, the tank shall be flushed out twice using maximum water pressure available and all extraneous matter removed including the water used during the operation. The whole of the installation shall be guaranteed for a period of 10 years. Any defect/damage or leakage occurred during the guarantee period shall be made good by the Contractor at no cost to the Client.

B.4

ELECTRICAL WATER HEATERS

Electric water heater shall be of the cylindrical type suitable for either vertical or horizontal mounting as shown on the drawings. Each electric water heater shall be complete as specified herein: a. Welded steel shell galvanized after fabrication and constructed in accordance with an approved international code for unfired pressure vessel, designed for a working pressure of 150 psig and hydrostatically tested to 300 psig at the factory. The tank shall be glass lined (300 microns) with vitreous porcelain enamel tank liner and shall be certified by UL. Stove enameled finished and 2 thick insulated metal outer jacket. Electric immersion type heater element. Number of stages to be as given in the schedules of capacities. The element shall be copper sheathed. d. Adjustable type temperature control thermostat and factory installed high limit cu-off (for safety and prevent over heating). e. f. g. h. i. j. Dial type immersion thermometer. Magnesium anode rod. Terminal box with protective cover. Pilot light to indicate if heater is ON or OFF. Gate valve and check valve at water inlet and gate valve at outlet connections. Pressure and temperature relief valve for protection against excess pressure and high temperature as well as loss of water from the shell. Alternative, a combination shut-off, drain and pressure temperature relief valve may be used. k. l. m. Automatic air vent / Anti-vacuum valve. Steel supports. All pipe work and accessories required for its installation and satisfactory operation including drain. Guarantee for a period of minimum 5 years.

b. c.

n.

_________________________________________________________________________________ P - 20

____________________________________________________________________________________________________

The electric immersion heaters shall be made of copper and shall have electric ratings as shown on the drawings. Water heater shall have factory fitted control panel complete with all necessary safety and controls. It shall be completely factory assembled / wired requiring only final connections at site and shall be suitable for electrical provisions made on electrical drawings. B.5 PACKAGED BOOSTER PUMPSET

Packaged booster pumpset shall be installed for filling roof tanks and for the pressurized supply to the water coolers. The unit shall be of the auto-pneumatic type complete with pumps, air vessel, control panel, interconnecting pipework, electrical wiring etc., fixed to a single base plate. The pump shall be high efficiency centrifugal, vertical single / multi-stage type, of cast iron construction with stainless steel shaft and stainless steel or bronze impellers and with mechanical sealed bearings. All interconnecting pipework to be in copper to BS 2871 Part 1 Table X with fittings to BS 864 Part 2. Each pump shall be provided with an isolating valve at the inlet and an isolating valve, non-return valve at the outlet. The booster pumpset shall be provided with flexible connections at the inlet and outlet. The booster pumpset shall be provided with a strainer at the inlet. The membrane tank shall be of the fabricated steel construction with the water side coated with a proper epoxy resin. The tank shall house a replaceable butyl rubber diaphragm and will be precharged with nitrogen to the correct pressure at the factory. Motors shall have 2900 rpm and shall be TEFC, squirrel cage induction with Class 'F' insulation operating on 415 volts, 3 phase, 50 Hz A.C. supply. Motor shall be suitable for 50C. ambient temperature. The control panel shall be made of corrosion resisting dust proof mild steel. The panel shall include door interlocked mains isolator, earth leakage circuit breaker, pump starters and overload relays, live fuses, low water level cut-out alarm and control, pressure switch, duty selector switch, hand-off auto-switch for each pump, individual pump run, trip lights and panel alive lights, earthing bar, etc. The control panel cubicle shall conform to I.E.E. regulations with enclosure to IP 54 and will be mounted on vibration isolators to minimise the vibration to the electrical equipment's. The panel shall be provided for automatic changeover of the duty pump per pumping cycle. Minimum run timers shall be provided to prevent the frequent hunting of pumps during minimal demand. The standby pump shall switch on automatically in the event of failure of the duty pump or abnormal demand. The base frame shall be fabricated from M.S. angle and channel sections and will be of welded construction with lifting facility and suitable for providing anti-vibration mountings. The unit is to be securely fixed to concrete base with suitable anti-vibration mountings. A 100 mm dial type pressure gauge is to be provided on discharge to indicate the operating pressure.
_________________________________________________________________________________ P - 21

____________________________________________________________________________________________________

The booster set shall be completely factory assembled/wired, requiring only piping connections and shall be suitable for provisions made on electrical drawings. B.6 CENTRAL WATER FILTERS

Media filter shall be fully automatic packaged type complete with all necessary pipework, bypass connections, valves, filter media, gauges, drain and automatic back wash system. All components shall be made of non-corrosive material and suitable for potable water temperature upto 50C. Filter tank and accessories shall be suitable for working pressure of 6.0 bars and test pressure of 9.0 bars. Filters shall be constructed of fibre glass or mild steel lined with rubber lining internally and with epoxy paint externally or any other non-corrosive material construction to Engineers approval. The combined bed area of all filters shall be in accordance with the filtration rate specified. The height of each vessel on the straight shall satisfy the requirements of normal filtration. Filters shall be suitable for removal of sediments, rust, dust etc., from potable water supplies. The filtering media shall be sand or filter-AG (non-hydrous aluminium silicate). The filter shall be complete with internal distributors, automatic control and valves. The backwash of the filter shall be fully automatic activated by a time clock.

B.7

TESTING AND COMMISSIONING FOR WATER PIPES

The whole of the internal hot and cold water installations shall be tested to twice the normal working pressure or 100 psi whichever is more for a minimum of 4 hours. Following testing, the whole of the installation shall be chlorinated and flushed with clean potable water. The above work shall be to the complete satisfaction of the Engineer. The Contractor shall start and operate the whole of the installation for a period of not less than 48 hours during which time all valves, pumps, heaters, fixtures etc., shall be operated as would occur in the normal operation of the installation for the full period of this test and at the conclusion, the whole of the system shall operate to the full satisfaction of the Engineer. Testing generally shall be in accordance with BS 6700. B.8 DISINFECTION OF WATER LINES

All the water supply piping shall be thoroughly flushed with clean potable water prior to disinfection, to remove dirt and other contaminants. Screens of all faucets shall be removed before flushing and reinstalled after completion of disinfection. All related work is to be performed by approved applicators or qualified personnel with chemical and laboratory experience and carry out the necessary chemical tests after completion of disinfection and flushing process and submit the necessary certificates. Flushing and disinfection of water distribution system shall fully conform to KAHRAMAA regulations.
_________________________________________________________________________________ P - 22

____________________________________________________________________________________________________

Cold and hot water lines shall be thoroughly disinfected with a solution containing not less than 50 parts per million of available chlorine, either liquid chlorine or calcium hypochloride or chlorinated lime. The solution shall be introduced into the lines in an approved manner. The sterilising solution shall be allowed to remain in the lines for eight (8) hours during which time, all valves and faucets shall be opened and closed several times. After sterilisation, the solution shall be flushed from the lines with clean water until the residual chlorine content is not greater than 0.2 part per million unless otherwise directed.

B.9

FIRE FIGHTING SERVICES

GENERAL Fire fighting shall be achieved by means of fire hose system, fire department connection all permanently connected to the fire water tank with horizontal split case centrifugal fire pump. Portable fire extinguishers shall be utilized for local use. Fire fighting system shall be in accordance with Regulations of Authority having jurisdiction. Contractor shall be experienced in design and installation of fire fighting systems to NFPA Standards. Provide all labour/products/equipment/services to complete fire fighting system and co-ordinate with all other trades to effect proper installation. 1. Portable Fire Extinguisher and Fire Protection Blanket

Portable fire extinguishers shall comply with NFPA 10 and shall be UL Rated. It shall be fitted with brass valve, pressure gauge, discharge hose w/nozzle, wall bracket and operated by simple method of pulling out safety pin and squeezing lever. Pressure test shall remain valid for 5 years. All extinguishers shall be clearly marked with operating instructions in Arabic and English, capacities whenever indicated on the drawings. Dry Power Extinguishers Water Extinguishers 4.5 kilogram 4.5 kilogram

Fire Blankets shall be provided in all pantries and kitchen and shall be with size 1.8m x 1.2m and shall be made of woven Fibreglass material in purpose made drum with release tables.

_________________________________________________________________________________ P - 23

____________________________________________________________________________________________________

Distribution shall be as shown on drawing or per NFPA-10 requirement (20m maximum travel distance). The Contractor shall supply and install portable fire extinguishers as shown on the drawings. The fire extinguishers shall be manufactured and or high quality steel, inert gas welded and finished externally in colour. The fire extinguishers shall be tested to the following: Working Pressure Test Pressure Temp. Range Body Material : : : : 12 BAR 25 BAR -20 deg. C to 60 deg. C. Cold Roll Steel

Internal and external surface shall have stove epoxy primer. External paint finish shall be stove enamel. The extinguisher shall be fitted with brass valve with pressure gauge and wall bracket. The fire extinguishers shall be operated by the simple method of pulling out the safety pin and squeezing the lever. All the extinguishers shall be clearly marked with the operating instructions in English and Arabic.

2. Fire Hose Cabinet Fire Hose Cabinets : Fire hose cabinets shall be sized to fit the valve, rack, hose and the specified extinguisher. Cabinet shall be recessed. Cabinet shall be prepared for pipe and accessory rough in. Door shall be stainless steel, reinforced for flatness and rigidity, with lock with breakable glass type. Door glazing shall be a minimum of 3mm thick float glass, heat strengthened glass conforming to ASTM C 1048. Glass panel shall be installed with resilient channel gasket glazing conforming to ASTM C 864. Hose : The hose reel drum shall be designed to carry and to be supplied with 30 meters

of 19 mm bore smooth cover hose and 6 mm shut off nozzle. Each fire hose reel shall have a 28 mm dia Lockshield valve at the inlet. The location of hose reel must be clearly identified and operating instructions securely fixed adjacent to hose port box
conforming to NFPA. Coupling threaded shall be rockers-lug type and shall be completed with adjustable nozzles jet spray.

3. Hydrant Hose Cabinet Hydrant Hose Cabinets : Hydrant hose cabinets shall be sized as indicated on the drawing to fit the hose and adjustable jet spray brass polished behind fire nozzle. Cabinet shall be surface mounted. Door shall be stainless steel, reinforced for flatness and rigidity, with lock and breakable glass type. Door glazing shall be a minimum of 3mm thick float glass, heat strengthened glass conforming to ASTM C 1048. Glass panel shall be installed with resilient channel gasket glazing confirming to ASTM C 864. Hose: Hose shall be nominal 65mm, 30 meters cotton-polyster jacketed, rubber lined, mildew proof conforming to NFPA. Couplings shall be rockers-lug type.

_________________________________________________________________________________ P - 24

____________________________________________________________________________________________________

4. Fire Pump Set 4.1 MAIN FIRE PUMPS

Supply and install main fire pump wherever shown on drawings and as specified herein. To be packaged type complex from factory (UL/FM, LPCB or others). The pump should also have approval from the local Civil Defence Department. a. Type: Centrifugal horizontal split case, pump directly coupled to an electric motor through heavy duty flexible coupling (as scheduled). Pump and motor shall be mounted on steel base plate with drip rim, drain tapping, bolt holes and grouting hole. Pumps shall be factory assembled and tested. Standard : pump and accessories is to be listed Under Writers Laboratories and meet requirements of NFPA pamphlet NO. 20, FM approved. Capacity and Pressure to be as shown on the drawings. Pump is to deliver not less than 150% of rated capacity at pressure not less than 65% of rated pressure. Shut-off pressure is not to exceed 120% of rated pressure. Unit to be complete with pump, driver, controller and accessories from factory. Casing: cast iron, minimum tensile strength 35000 psi, designed for working pressure as scheduled and hydrostatically tested at factory to not less than 1.5 times the working pressure. Impeller to be vacuum cast bronze, enclosed type, dynamically balanced, keyed to shaft and held in place with bronze threaded shaft sleeve. Shaft sleeves: to extend entire length of seal boxes to protect shaft and key locked and threaded to tighten with rotation of shaft. Teflon gaskets to be provided between impeller hub and shaft sleeves to protect pump shaft. Bearings: pump rotating element to be supported by two heavy duty, grease lubricated ball bearings mounted in machined moisture proof and dust proof cast iron housing and bolted to pump casing with register fits to ensure permanent alignment. Grease seals and water slingers to be provided to protect bearings from contamination. Bearing housings to be designed to flush lubricant through bearing. Easily accessible grease fittings to be provided for positive bearing lubrication. Shaft to be stainless steel (316) accurately machined to give true running rotating element. Stuffing Box with Gland Packing.. Electric motor: totally enclosed, fan cooled, squirrel cage, induction type with permanently lubricated and sealed ball bearings. Motor speed is not to exceed 2900 rpm.

b.

c.

d. e.

f.

g.

h.

i.

j. k.

_________________________________________________________________________________ P - 25

____________________________________________________________________________________________________

l.

Accessories: pump to be supplied complete with the following: Lifting lugs Coupling guard Tapped holes in suction and discharge flanges for pressure gauge connection. Suction and discharge pressure gauges, with minimum 100mm reading in psi and kg/cm2 and having range equal to twice rated design working pressure of pump and complete with gauge valves, eccentric tapered reduced at suction inlet, eccentric tapered reducer (increaser) at discharge outlet. Relief valve, factory set to open at pressure slightly greater than rated design working pressure of pump, with capacity to pass all water discharged by pump without developing excessive pressure on system. Casing relief valve sized to prevent overheating of pump when operating at shut-off, factory set to open just higher than rated design working pressure of pump and lower than shut-off discharge pressure. Automatic air release valve on casing vent. Test header manifold to include bronze or cast-iron exposed type valve header with nozzle outlets and round brass escutcheon plate, hose valve straight way pattern bronze, ball drip valve.

Flow water measuring device to test the pump capacity of water flow of not less than 175% of pump rated capacity. Lever operated mechanically for emergency direct on line start. Control panel enclosure shall be NEMA ICS 6, Type 2 drop-off. Panel shall be complete with push button operated for local, manual or remote electric start. Panel board shall be equipped with auto-stop control with wiring terminals at clearly marked connector rail and external cable connection shall be through bottom fitted cable glazed plate. Shut off shall be manual/automatic as per NFPA Regulations. Performance Test: pump to be completely tested at factory with positive suction pressure and with a 4.5m suction lift. Certified performance curves for both conditions to submitted for approval prior to shipment.

_________________________________________________________________________________ P - 26

____________________________________________________________________________________________________

4.2

JOCKEY FIRE PUMP Supply and install jockey fire pump, wherever shown on drawings and as specified herein; conformity and NFPA Standard requirement is required. Pump shall be UL/FM approved. a. b. Type: Vertical multistage, centrifugal, directly coupled to motor. Construction: casing to be cast iron/stainless steel designed for working pressure as scheduled and hydrostatically tested at this pressure at factory. Impeller to be bronze, double suction, hydraulically balanced design, dynamically balanced, keyed and bolted to stainless steel shaft. Construction: pump to have internal sealing water passages, removable chrome-plated cast iron channel rings, mechanical seal with carbon washer, Ni-vesist face and stainless steel parts, water slingers to protect bearings and O ring gaskets to prevent leakage. Electric Motor to be close-coupled to pump, totally enclosed, fan cooled squirrel cage, induction type, with permanently lubricated and sealed ball bearings. Motor speed is not to exceed 2900 rpm. Control panel & Starter: totally enclosed, wall mounted, direct-on-line, with no-volt and overload protection in each phase H-O-A selector switch, minimum run timer.

c.

d.

e.

Jockey pump shall pressurize the system and fulfill small demands. Upon increase of demand and drop in pressure, the duty pump will come into operation.

4.3

DIESEL ENGINE DRIVE FIRE PUMP a. General The diesel internal combustion engine driving the fire pump shall be of the compression ignition type, and shall be specifically listed for fire pump service. Diesel Pump shall be to NFPA & UL listed & FM approved. The engine rating shall be corrected for altitude ad ambient temperature. The engine shall have a brake horsepower rating not less than 20% greater than the maximum brake horse power required to drive the pump at its rated RPM. The engine shall be connected to horizontal shaft pumps by means of flexible coupling and shall be connected to vertical shaft pumps by means of a right angle gear drive with suitable universal joints.

_________________________________________________________________________________ P - 27

____________________________________________________________________________________________________

The diesel fire pump shall be complete with a diesel tank having 1 hour operation capacity. The engine shall be provided with the following: Muffler Flexible Exhaust Connector Cooling Water Line Fuel Pump Air Cleaner Fuel Injection System

Supply and install Main fire pump, diesel engine driven type as scheduled and shown on the drawing. B. Instrumentation and Control The engine shall be provided with an adjustable governor capable of regulating engine speed within a range of 10% between shut off and maximum load conditions of the pump. The governor shall be set to maintain rated pump speed at maximum pump load. Engine shall be provided with an over speed shutdown device. It shall be arranged to shutdown the engine at a speed 20% above rated engine speed and for manual reset. Engine shall be provided with (lubricating) oil pressure gauge, and thermometer, both placed on a panel secured to the engine at a suitable point. Engine to be air cooled. Engine shall be provided with a speed-sensitive switch to signal engine running and crack termination. Provide remote indication of status & monitoring with all Fire Alarm Panel.

C.

Engine Starting Methods Engine shall be started electrically from storage batteries. Engine shall be provided with two storage battery units. Each battery unit shall have capacity sufficient to maintain cranking speed recommended by the engine manufacturer through a 6 minute cycle. Batteries shall be furnished in a dry charge condition, with electrolyte liquid in a separate container. Electrolyte shall be added at the time the engine is put in service, and the battery given a conditioning charge. Batteries shall be recharged by two means. One by the generator and the other shall be on automatically controlled charge taking power from an alternating current power source.

_________________________________________________________________________________ P - 28

____________________________________________________________________________________________________

D.

Engine Cooling The engine cooling system shall be of the closed circuit type, including a circulating-pump driven by the engine, a heat exchanger, and a reliable engine jacket temperature regulating device. The coolant shall comply with recommendation of the engine manufacturer. Fuel Oil Tank shall have a minimum capacity of one gallon per Horse Power plus 10% allowance and shall be exclusively for the fire pump. Fuel Tank shall be located above ground and shall have a fuel overflow/leak trap at least equal to the capacity of the fuel tank, preventing the fuel from spreading inside the pump room. Fuel Tank shall be equipped with a light glass for determining the amount of fuel available. The inlet and outlet lines shall be sized strictly as per the manufacturers recommendation. Tank shall be placed at a suitable location for an easy refilling.

E.

Engine Drive Controller Supply and install engine Drive controller panel completely assembled, tested and wired at the factory before shipping and shall be marked Fire Pump Controller. The panel shall be securely mounted in an enclosure which will protect the equipment against mechanical injury and falling drops of water. A wiring diagram shall be provided and permanently attached to the inside of the enclosure showing exact wiring for the controller, including a legend of identifying numbers of individual component. The Controller shall be of the manual and automatic control type and shall be complete with the following: Pilot light to indicate that controller is in the Automatic or Manual position. Separate pilot lights and a common bell indicated trouble caused by: Low oil pressure in the lubrication system. High engine jacket water temperature. Failure of engine to start automatically. Shutdown from over speed. Individual battery failure.

An automatic warning shall be given visually and audibly at the guard control room or where instructed by the Engineer to indicate the following: Operation of controller into a pump running condition. Turning of controller main switch to off or Manual position. Trouble on the controller or engine.

_________________________________________________________________________________ P - 29

____________________________________________________________________________________________________

Pressure switch having high and low calibrated adjustments and responsive to water pressure in the fire system. Two position selector switch marked Auto-Manual. A weekly programme timer to automatically start the pump at least once a week to assure dependable operation of the engine and its controller. A solenoid drain valve on the pressure control line shall be the initiating means. Low level float switch, in the fire storage reservoir to be interconnected with the controller to prevent pumps from starting dry and initiate an alarm in case water level drops to the level of the float switch.

The Fire Pumps shall have the approval of Civil Defense Department. In case of any discrepancies the QCS and the local regulations shall prevail.

5. Fire Department Connections Fire Department 100 dia. mm, 2-Way 65 dia. mm connection shall be provided at locations shown on the drawings for the Fire Truck Hose Connection to supplement the water suppliers to the fire hose reel system. Provide a UL listed and FM approved check valve with automatic ball drip valve for the fire department connection. Each hose connection: a drop clapper valve 65mm (2-1/2 inch) in size, fitter with a valve cap: brass polished. Provide indicating signs which identify the fire department connection as standpipe fire hose.

6. Pipes & Fittings Installations The above-ground piping for the fire hydrants & hose reels shall be based on QCS section 23 Part 4 Fire Fighting System. However the pipes and fittings are not required to be UL listed & FM approved. The installation and testing in general shall be as per procedure described for domestic water services, elsewhere in these specifications. The pipework shall be pressure tested to two times the working pressure of the system. The under-ground pipes and fittings for the fire fighting systems shall be of Ductile Iron based on KAHRAMAAs general specifications of main laying materials. The materials, method of installation, the manufacturers etc. shall be in total compliance with the KAHRAMAAs requirements.

_________________________________________________________________________________ P - 30

____________________________________________________________________________________________________

7. Painting / Identification The complete fire hose reel piping installation shall be painted with two coats of safety red paint. The paint shall be applied on the clean and dry surface of the pipework. Identification of pipe line shall be in accordance with BS 1710. 8. Testing of Hose Reels Before any water is introduced into the hose reels, the supply to it shall be thoroughly flushed out to ensure that no harmful matter is passed into the reel. The two most highly situated and remote reels should be discharged simultaneously, one being led to waste and the other directed into a suitable receptacle to ascertain that it provides a jet of approximately 6 m in length and deliver not less than 0.5 litres/second.

9.Fire Hydrants Fire hydrants shall be approved in accordance with local Authority (CDD). A certificate shall be obtained from manufacturer stating that the fire hydrants to be supplied are suitable for use in Qatar. Fire hydrants shall be installed in accordance with the manufactures instructions. Fire hydrants shall be new and unused, 150 psi (1034 kPa) working pressure, 300 psi (2064 kPa) test pressure, and shall conform to AWWA C502 "Standard for Dry Barrel Fire Hydrants," except where these specifications take exception. Certificate of compliance to AWWA C502-85 is required and shall be UL listed and FM approve. Internal parts to be removed without removing nozzle section. No part of hydrant shall be attached by lead or be made of lead in concentration above 20%. Nozzles Hose and Pumper Outlet Nozzles - Two 2-1/2-inch (65 mm) hose outlet nozzles and one 4-1/2-inch (115 mm) pumper outlet nozzle. Hydrant caps will have inside gaskets. Nozzles shall be lug or screw type and shall be brass. Leaded nozzles will not be accepted. Outlet Nozzle Threads - Conform with NFPA No. 194 for National Standard Fire Hose Coupling Screw Threads. Operating Valve Size of Hydrant - Minimum 5-inch diameter main operating valve opening. Furnish two or more bronze bushed drain valves. Drain valve shall close within six turns, at start of opening hydrant.
_________________________________________________________________________________ P - 31

____________________________________________________________________________________________________

Direction of Operation - Open by turning to the left or counter clockwise direction. Main valve seat ring and seat ring bushings shall be bronze. Removal of main valve assembly including seat ring shall be by a tool that engages the stem either at the breakaway stem coupling or the upper stem section. Connection Inlet Connection - 6-inch mechanical joint, accessories NOT required. Standpipe Cast as one piece, screwed flanges, or mechanical joint retaining ring, flanged extensions may be used for different bury lengths. Flanges shall be cast integral on extension barrel, or screwed flanges. Standpipe Extension Kits - Shall be 6 inch, 12 inch, or 18 inch of breakaway design. Top Casting Cast on top of hydrant an arrow and the word "OPEN" in relief indicating the direction of turning to open the hydrant. Paint Barrel painted orange to the bury line, OSHA Standard Safety Color OA-36 or equal. Nozzle caps painted black, Federal Color Standard 595, #17038 or equal. Pumper caps painted red, OSHA Standard Safety Color OA-41 or equal. Dome or top painted Orange, OSHA Standard Safety Color OA-36 or equal All paints shall be lead free. 10. Fire Water Stee; Sectional Tank (HDG + HDPE)

a. General The fire water storage tank shall be of pressed steel galvanised sectional tank constructed with hydraulically pressed flanged panels conforming to BS 1564: 1949 & 1975. Tank shall be lined internally with 2mm thick HDPE (high density polyethylene) forming a tank within a tank.

Fire water storage tank shall be in accordance with Civil Defence Department requirements and comply with NFPA 22 latest edition. Tank shall be suitable for water at ambient temperature. b. Material The mild steel shall be as used in the manufacture of plates, stays ,cleats and pads for installation and shall conform to the requirements of BS 4360 Grade 43 A.
_________________________________________________________________________________ P - 32

____________________________________________________________________________________________________

c. Tank Panels Tank panels shall be metric or imperial size and shall be hot-dip galvanized to ISO 1461 :1999.Panel thickness shall be 5 mm for bottom, side and end panel and shall be 1.5 mm for cover (top) panels, conical shape and shall comply with ASTM for testing and materials. d. Stays and Cleats The stays and cleats shall be of stainless steel. e. Bolts and Nuts Bolts, nuts and washers internally in the tank shall be AISI type (stainless steel) and those externally shall be hot dip galvanized type. f. HDPE Lining HDPE (high density polyethylene)geo-membrane shall be lined internally in the tank forming a tank within a tank. All the seams shall be homogeneous welded using hot fusion welding. The HDPE membrane shall be NSF approved. g. Manholes Standard pressed cover with flanges and manhole cover lid openable. Each section of the tank shall be provided with manhole where necessary. h. Nozzles Tank manufacturer shall provide full range of pipe connections (nozzles) to satisfy all requirements as shown on the design drawings.

i. PVC Foam Tape (Alternative to Seal-a-strip and Sealing compound) PVC foam tape shall be used between tank panel flanges throughout the flange and shall be supplied by the tank manufacturer if required. j. Accessories The tank manufacturer shall provide the following accessories: i. ii. iii. iv. v. vi. Removable access cover with opening size 600 mm dia minimum or 600 x 600 mm square External ladder made of aluminium Internal ladder made of stainless steel Air vent with size 100mm dia and equipped with an insect proof net. Level Indicator (rubber type) Float switch as specified elsewhere.

k. Certification The tank shall be certified by independent well known certification authority. The tank shall be approved by The Civil Defence of Qatar.
_________________________________________________________________________________ P - 33

____________________________________________________________________________________________________

l.

Base Frame The tank shall be provided with a crossed joist type of steel skid base capable of supporting each bottom panel. Base Frame shall be provided strictly as per manufacturers recommendations. Steel joist and its assembly shall fully comply with the requirement of BS 5950.Base frame shall be sand blasted and provided with epoxy paint confirming to QCS Section26

m. Assembly Drawings and Technical Support Tank manufacturer shall provide certified tank assembly drawings ,steel skid, concrete foundation details, installation manuals for Engineers review and approval. n. Testing and Commissioning After installation, tanks shall be filled with water for testing for 24 hours. No leakage shall be observed at joints. On completion of leak tests ,the tank shall be flushed out twice using maximum water pressure available and all extraneous matter removed including the water used during the operation. o. Guarantee The whole of the tank installation shall be guaranteed for a period of minimum 20 years. Any defect / damage or leakage occurred during the guarantee period shall be made good by the Contractor at no cost to the client. The tank manufacturer must have a registered Local Agent in State of Qatar. B.10 LABORATORY LPG SYSTEM PIPING INSTALLATIONS

General This specification is to be read in conjunction with the drawings. The complete installation shall be carried out by a Specialist Contractor and shall comply with the current B.S. codes and codes of practice. The Contractor shall ensure that the materials and installation are suitable for local conditions and comply with all regulations. The Contractor shall be responsible for the supply, installation and execution of the works described in these specifications for the LPG system to produce a complete, tested, commissioned and fully operational installation including all necessary labor and materials whether or not specified in details.

_________________________________________________________________________________ P - 34

____________________________________________________________________________________________________

LPG System LPG cylinders shall be located in the positions and connected to the manifold as shown on the drawings. The manifold shall be fitted with gas regulator. Change over valve shall automatically change over to reserve cylinder and shall indicate that other cylinder has been brought into use. LPG gas detection system shall be provided as shown on the drawings. It shall comprise of gas detectors, gas control panel, solenoid valves, and control cabling conforming to local Kahra-maa regulations. The Contractor shall provide a fully function system comprising of all components. The complete LPG and LPG gas detection system installation shall be carried out by AL WAQUOOD (Qatar Fuel) approved supplier cum installer. Interface unit shall be provided in the control panels to activate the buzzers in the fire panels to a fault condition in case of a gas leakage.

Pipes and Fittings All pipework shall be in copper tube conforming to B.S. 2871 Part 1 Table 'X'. Fittings shall be of capillary type conforming to B.S. 864 suitable for working pressure of 18 bars. All the changes in direction of pipes shall be achieved by using proper fittings. No gas pipe shall be bent. All branch connections shall be taken from the top or sides of horizontal main lines and not from the bottom. Compression fittings will not be allowed on gas pipework. Isolating Valves Valves shall be of lever operated ball type with an indication of 'ON' and 'OFF' positions. Valves shall be of the non-lubricated type and constructed of non-ferrous materials. The valves shall be designed for capillary joint connections to the pipe lines. Where screwed connections are provided for pipe line connection, they should have I.S.O. matric thread in accordance with B.S. 3643. The valves shall be of wrought copper or bronze. Details of the valves shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. Gas Taps / Outlet Points The gas taps / outlet points shall be provided by the specialist laboratory equipment supplier, i.e. this is not in the scope of the Plumbing Contractor.

Identification of Gas Installation All pipes shall be identified with the appropriate colour near stop valves, at any change of direction and at 1.8 m intervals along the line by means of self-adhesive 2 ply vinyl tapes. Self adhesive vinyl tapes shall be wrapped to overlap so that the tape adheres to itself as well as to the pipe. Each junction point shall be clearly marked by a colour band. Self adhesive vinyl banding shall not be less than 50 mm wide and shall include lettering to indicate the LPG.

_________________________________________________________________________________ P - 35

____________________________________________________________________________________________________

Testing and Commissioning Testing and commissioning of the whole installation shall be carried out in accordance with relevant B.S. Standards. It shall be the responsibility of the Specialist Contractor to provide all labour, materials, instruments and equipment required to test and commission the installation to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The tests shall be conducted and all defects rectified before any part of the installation is concealed or buried. The pressure tests on the pipework shall be carried out by the Specialist Contractor as described below. Plug all open ends of the pipework and put the pipework on pressure test (7 bars g) with the air. Disconnect the air supply and keep the pipework on test for 24 hours. No leak shall be observed during this period. If the above pressure is not maintained, the Specialist Contractor shall detect any leaks by the use of soap solution applied externally to joints and connections. The soap solution shall be carefully washed off and dried after testing. Care shall be taken to ensure that all valves on main and submain branches of the pipework are properly subjected to this test. B.11 SANITARY WARE INSTALLATIONS

Sanitary ware shall be as specified in the contract documents. All sanitary ware shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions for conditions indicated and as required to obtain a rigid installation. The location of each fixture and the fixing method of ceramic fixtures shall be as shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer. After all fittings have been mounted and are ready for use and before completion, all fittings furnished and mounted shall be thoroughly cleaned removing all plaster, stickers, rust, hair and other foreign matter or discoloration of fixtures, leaving each and every part in perfect condition and ready for use. The Contractor shall take adequate precautions to ensure that the sanitary ware is not damaged in any way before or after installations. Any piece of sanitary ware that is damaged shall be replaced at the Contractor's expense. Testing Procedures Just prior to handing over the building to the Client, each piece of sanitary ware shall be tested. Each water closet shall be flushed twice and checked for leaks and any other defects by the Engineer. Each basin and sink shall be filled to the overflow level and then after running the water through the overflow for a minimum of 30 seconds, the plug shall be removed or opened. Each of the above mentioned fixtures shall be inspected for leaks and defects by the Engineer. Any defects or leaks shall be repaired or in the case of the defect being chips or cracks or other visible damage, the fixture shall be replaced at the Contractor's expense. Any sanitary ware condemned by the Engineer for any other reason shall be replaced at the Contractor's expense.
_________________________________________________________________________________ P - 36

____________________________________________________________________________________________________

B.12

INTERNAL DRAINAGE AND RAIN WATER PIPEWORK & FITTINGS

Internal above ground drainage pipework/fittings shall be UPVC to BS 4514 and internal underground drainage pipework/fittings shall be UPVC to BS 4660. All pipework, fittings and accessories shall carry Kitemark and be installed strictly in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. The Contractor shall ensure that the UPVC used is of a sufficiently high temperature rating to withstand the environmental conditions. Waste pipes 50 mm and under shall be of MUPVC or ABS to BS 5255. UPVC sockets shall have an integral seal ring or alternatively solvent welded joints as required to suit the installation requirement and allow for thermal movement between fixed points.

Joining of WC Outlet to UPVC Joining of WC outlet to UPVC pipework shall be by means of either a straight or bent connector as required complete with rubber seal ring and suitable connection for the W.C. spigot outlet and shall be complete with the fittings and pipework.

UPVC Access Plates and Rodding Eyes UPVC pipework shall be fully accessible with bolted full width access door incorporating central bolt or bolted side fixing. A single 'Wye' fitting may be used having a screwed plug on pipework below 50 mm O.D. Roding eyes shall be screwed cap type with threaded and gasket joints.

Roof Terminals Where pipework passes through the roof, adequate weathering precaution shall be taken to ensure a water tight arrangement using weather apron. The pipework shall be terminated 900 mm above the roof level with a UPVC cowl.

Floor Gullies and Cleanouts Floor gullies and cleanouts shall consist of Stainless Steel grating / frame, UPVC straight connector, UPVC P or S traps (with gullies). Exact location of the floor gullies and cleanouts shall be coordinated with the architectural tiling layout. Floor gullies grating to be provided equidistant in one tile space. Floor gullies and cleanouts installed with number of floor tiles cut unevenly will not be acceptable. All floor gullies and cleanouts shall be set in concrete and installed as shown on the drawings.

_________________________________________________________________________________ P - 37

____________________________________________________________________________________________________

Rain Water Outlets Rain water outlets shall be provided as detailed on the drawings. It shall be made of cast iron complete with wide flashing flange, flashing clamp, adjustable collar, epoxy coated grate etc.

Storage and Handling of UPVC Pipework The UPVC pipework and fittings shall be stored preferably in air-conditioned stores or storage space suitable for temperature limits of the material. UPVC pipework shall not be stored in open air, unventilated spaces or under direct sunlight. Discoloured and distorted pipework will be rejected.

B.13

PIPEWORK INSTALLATIONS

During installation of the internal drainage and waste system, the Contractor shall make due allowance for the expansion of the Vulcathene / PVC pipework and fittings during normal working conditions. Further allowance shall be made for solvent weld joining of the above materials with regard to temperature and humidity. The bores of all pipework shall be smooth and free from all burrs or obstructions; bends wherever possible shall be of the long radius type. All connections between soil, waste, vent or fixtures shall be made with approved connectors. The termination at high level of all vent stacks shall be carried out with a vent guard. All sanitary fittings which discharge directly to the foul drainage system shall be provided with traps in accordance with BS 5572. Each trap shall be provided with a disconnecting union for future removal and cleaning. All fixtures and fittings draining into the internal drainage installation shall be fitted with traps. In case of traps for sanitary fitments, e.g. wash hand basins, sinks etc., these shall be of the deep seal type having a seal of 75 mm. * * Sinks Wash basins : : 40 mm 32 mm

Pipework shall be fixed accurately to approved falls, the gradient shall be consistent and pipework shall follow a true line. Allowance shall be made for the rodding of the whole installation, in addition to which, at all changes of direction, a rodding eye shall be installed. The pipework shall be fixed to the walls using standard PVC coated mild steel or PVC brackets of a screw-on type as recommended by the manufacturer.

_________________________________________________________________________________ P - 38

____________________________________________________________________________________________________

The maximum spacing between supports shall be as follows: Pipe Diameter 32 to 40 mm 50 mm 75 to 100 mm Low Gradient Pipes 0.5 m 0.6 m 0.9 m Vertical Pipes 1.2 m 1.2 m 1.8 m

The Contractor shall provide access or rodding eyes wherever required to provide full access to the system. The rodding eye shall be provided at the foot of all vertical stacks at the point of connection to the underground drain pipe. Access doors in suspended pipework within 0.5 m of the soffit shall not face upwards but be located on the side or underneath the pipe. Where traps, access branches and access doors are located above false ceiling, removable panels shall be provided. No offsets shall be installed in pipework other than those indicated on the drawings, without the consent of the Engineer. The offsets provided shall be sufficient to allow all parts of the installation to be rodded in the event of a blockage. Access doors provided shall be sufficient to allow all parts of the installation to be rodded in the event of a blockage. The whole of the installation shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of BS 5572, the tests being to the full satisfaction of the Engineer.

B.14

LABORATORY WASTE SYSTEM

Waste and vent system for the laboratory shall be carried out in chemical and acid resistant high density polyethylene pipes and fittings conforming to DIN 19535-19537 with butt joints or electric socket fusion welded joints. Floor gullies shall have large liquid capacity with 75 mm liquid seal. The top grating shall be removable type to give easy access for cleansing purposes. Floor gully shall be complete with back and side inlets. The complete waste system shall be installed in accordance with the general method of installation described under Internal Drainage System and as per recommendation of the manufacturer. The Contractor shall submit detailed specifications and catalogues for the proposed pipes and fittings for Engineers approval before ordering the materials.

_________________________________________________________________________________ P - 39

____________________________________________________________________________________________________

B.15

EXTERNAL DRAINAGE

The external drainage system consists of complete sewer system comprising of manholes and interconnected pipework. Pipework and fittings used in external drainage installation are to be of extra strength vitrified clay to BS EN 295:1991 and BS 65:1991. Pipework and fittings used in external surface water drainage shall be UPVC to BS 4660 as indicated on the drawings. All pipework shall be laid with due regard to the falls and invert levels set out on the drawings or as given on site by the Engineer. All pipework is to be laid accurately with consistent gradients and following a true line. All bends shall be of the long radius type. The bore of the pipework shall be clear of all obstructions; further the Contractor shall ensure that, no cement or other substance which sets hard when the contact with water is allowed, to remain in the installation. The Contractor shall ensure that during backfilling of the excavations required to install the external drainage no damage is caused to this installation. Pipework passing through the walls or foundations shall be sleeved with UPVC of sufficient size to allow clearance round the drain pipe. The gap between the drain pipe and sleeves shall be caulked with mastic. Where drains pass through or below foundations, flexible couplings shall be provided not closer than 150 mm or more than 300 mm from the face of the building. The whole of the external drainage installation shall be tested in accordance with the requirement of BS 8301, this shall be to the complete satisfaction of the Engineer.

_________________________________________________________________________________ P - 40

____________________________________________________________________________________________________

B.16

MANHOLES

The Contractor shall provide manholes at the locations and to the sizes shown on the drawings. Manholes shall be constructed in accordance with the detailed drawings and as described in this specification. Manhole chambers with depth upto one metre shall be constructed in sulphate resisting concrete blocks of minimum strength 7.0 MN/m laid in bond and joined with a 3 : 1 sand and sulphate resistant cement mortar and set on a 150 mm thick concrete base. The block courses shall be laid even and uniform and broken blocks are not to be used except for snap headers. Block cavities shall be filled with concrete and finished smooth with face rendering. Manholes with depth more than one metre shall be cast insitu with reinforced cement concrete as detailed in the drawings. An insitu concrete cover shall be constructed over the manhole to the size and thickness shown on the drawings with a clear opening to suit the type of cover specified. The opening being located to afford direct access onto the step irons. Half channels with three quarter section bends shall be laid in the bottom of the manhole with flexible joints on the drains immediately outside the manhole wall. Concrete benching shall be formed to a fall of not less than 1 in 10 to the channel and finished smooth with 12 mm thick 2:1 sand and cement mortar trowelled with all angles rounded. External faces of structures shall be kept clear for inspection until they have been approved by the Engineer. Re-inforcing bars for cover slab shall be 12 mm diameter, high tensile, or 16 mm mild steel fixed at 100 mm centres with 25 mm cover from the underside of slab. The minimum thickness of slabs shall be 150 mm. B.17 MANHOLE COVERS AND GRATING

All manhole covers, frames and gratings shall be in ductile iron and shall comply with BS EN 124. Heavy duty manhole covers shall be suitable for use in carriageways carrying vehicles with wheel loads upto 40 tones. Medium duty manhole covers shall be suitable for use in minor roads and other areas carrying slow moving commercial vehicles with wheel loads upto 12.5 tones. Manhole covers shall have sizes and duties as shown on the drawings. Two sets of lifting keys shall be provided for each type of manhole cover. All manhole covers shall have prior approval of the Drainage Department.

_________________________________________________________________________________ P - 41

____________________________________________________________________________________________________

B.18

TESTING AND COMMISSIONING FOR DRAIN PIPES

The Contractor shall provide all equipment necessary for testing. Generally, the whole installation shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of BS 5572 and 8301. Before any test is carried out, the Engineer shall be given 24 hours notice. All defects located shall be corrected before further work proceeds and the whole of the section of work affected shall be re-tested. No section of drain shall be back-filled before it has been tested.

Water Test for Drains Testing shall be carried out before any pipes are haunched or surrounded with concrete. All joints shall be exposed. Drains should be tested in sections from manhole to manhole. Short branches connected to main runs shall be tested at the same time. The length to be tested shall be subjected to a static head pressure of not less than 1.5 m at the highest point of the section being tested. After sufficient length of time has been allowed for the absorption of water into joints the section under test shall be 'topped-up' and the head maintained without apparent loss for not less than one hour.

Water Test for Manholes All manholes shall be tested separately. The external faces of manholes shall be kept clear until after they have been tested. All inlets and outlets to the manhole shall be plugged and the manhole filled with water. After a sufficient length of time has been allowed for the absorption of water into the structure, the water level should be 'topped-up' and the water level should remain constant for a period of time not less than one hour. Arrangements should be made for the easy removal of water from manholes after the completion of tests.

_________________________________________________________________________________ P - 42

____________________________________________________________________________________________________

B.19

TESTING AFTER BACKFILLING

After backfilling of drain trenches has been completed and consolidation has taken place, all drains shall be retested as previously specified. B.20 RECORD OF TESTS

The Contractor shall keep a proper record of tests carried out on the drainage installation throughout the contract, recording date of test, by whom tested, witnessed and result; one copy of the record shall be sent to the Engineer on completion of each phase of the contract. Records shall be countersigned by the witness. A final test of the whole installation shall be carried out in the presence of the Engineer or his representative at or about the completion of the contract. The satisfactory completion of an earlier test during the progress of work shall in no way relieve the Contractor of any of his obligations, and any defects found at the time of the final tests, or during the period of maintenance shall be made good to the complete satisfaction of the Engineer. B.21 RODDING BEFORE HANDOVER

Before the installation is handed over all drains and soil waste and vent and rain water pipes shall be rodded and cleaned out. All traps shall be cleared of any collected debris and the system shall be demonstrated to be operating in an efficient manner to the satisfaction of the Engineer. B.22 GULLY POT

Gully pot shall be 450 mm diameter x 1050 mm deep internally and comply with the requirements of B.S. 5911, except that gullies shall be manufactured from non-reinforced concrete containing not less than 350 kg of sulphate resisting cement per cubic metre of concrete. Gully gratings and frames shall be of ductile iron complying with BS 497. B.23 SOAKAWAYS

Soakaways shall be constructed in accordance with tender drawings and shall have a minimum internal depth of 2400 mm. Excavation and disposal of surplus earth shall be as per general specifications for the purpose under Civil Works. The precast rings shall be minimum 150 mm thick and shall have three evenly spaced lifting points. The perforated rings shall be constructed with 75 mm diameter holes at 410 mm centres in rows spaced 300 mm apart vertically with each row symmetrically staggered.
_________________________________________________________________________________ P - 43

____________________________________________________________________________________________________

The soakaway shall be surrounded by granular material and shall infill all of the void between the soakaway and the side of the excavation. The granular material shall be laid and taped by hand in 300 mm layers and shall no where be less than 500 mm in width.

Borehole The Contractor shall drill borehole at the bottom of soakaways for surface water drainage. Size of borehole shall be 250 mm diameter. Borehole shall be taken to a depth of 20 m below the bottom of soakaway or upto water table which ever is deeper, or as instructed by the Engineer. Borehole shall be thoroughly flushed clean using compressed air and clean water. The bore shall be lined to a depth of 2 metre below soakaway base and extend minimum 200 mm above soakaway base. Bore hole lining material shall be high density polyethylene pipe. In the event of any discrepancies, the requirements of QCS shall prevail. B.24 SEPTIC / HOLDING TANK

Excavation, disposal of surplus earth lean concrete below foundation, floor and sub-base, walls, plaster, fill back and R.C.C. slab etc., shall be as per general specifications for civil works. The overall construction shall be as per standard practice, drawings and instructions if any, and positions of inlets, outlets, bed levels, slopes, vent etc., shall be strictly with the drawings. The whole job shall be in S.R. cement and special attention shall be given to water proofing treatment to prevent any possible leakage.

Testing of Septic / Holding Tank Before the tank is commissioned for use, it shall be tested for water tightness by filling it with water and allowing it to stand for 24 hours. It shall then be topped up, if necessary and allowed to stand for a further period of 24 hours, during which time, the fall in the level of water shall not be more than 1.5 cm.

_________________________________________________________________________________ P - 44

____________________________________________________________________________________________________

PART C : IRRIGATION SYSTEM C.1 GENERAL The Specialist Irrigation Subcontractor, hereinafter referred to as the Contractor shall be responsible for the detailed design, preparation of working drawings, installation and execution of the works described in these specifications to produce a complete, tested, commissioned and fully operational installation including all necessary labour and materials whether or not specified in detail. The irrigation system for various planting materials shall be as follows: a. Automatic Irrigation System ( Sprinkler System) Irrigation system shall be automatic sprinkler system comprising of irrigation pipe work, controller, valves, sprinklers, accessories, electrical wiring, etc. It shall be noted that the tender drawing is only tentative layout; the contractor will employ a specialist sub contractor who will provide shop drawings to suit the soft landscaping layout. The type of sprinkler shall be suitable for specific application and shall be as per the QCS standard requirements. b. Automatic Irrigation System Irrigation system for the trees, palms and landscape grassed areas in around of the school shall be automatic irrigation system. The purpose of the automatic irrigation system is to water automatically through a station programmer and a number of irrigation terminals, palms, trees and grass grouped into zones or stations. It shall be noted that only the general requirements of the works have been indicated in the tender documents. The Specialist shall include all equipment's, materials, accessories, finishing materials, electrical wiring to controller, valves and associated equipment etc., required so as to have a complete fully functional system even though the same may not have been specifically mentioned in the specifications or drawings. It shall be the responsibility of the Specialist that the plant and equipment supplied by them produce the desired results. This shall include all items of a minor nature necessary to complete the installation and usually included in similar work, whether specifically mentioned in the contract documents or not. The Irrigation Contractor shall work in close co-operation with Planting Contractor, Electrical Contractor and Civil Contractors at site and shall protect his equipment and piping etc., from getting damaged due to works being carried out by other Contractors. The complete irrigation system shall be fine tuned to efficiently and evenly irrigate all areas in accordance with the engineered design and shall be complete in every respect. The system shall be set in operation and adjusted to the satisfaction of the Engineer. All irrigation equipment and components shall be the product of one manufacturer having a local representative Engineer capable of advising and assisting to the required adjustments.

_________________________________________________________________________________ P - 45

____________________________________________________________________________________________________

C.2

WATER TANK AND PUMPSET Irrigation water tank and pump set shall be as specified for Domestic Water services as mention in the drawing.

C.3

IRRIGATION PIPEWORK a. UPVC Main / Distribution Pipework All irrigation mains and distribution pipework shall be UPVC pressure pipe conforming to BS 3505, Class E. UPVC pipes and fittings shall be capable of withstanding ultra-violet degradation and shall incorporate a rodent inhibitor. Pipes shall have excellent chemical resistance properties and shall be suitable for use with aggressive liquids in corrosive environmental conditions. Irrigation pipework upto 100 mm in diameter shall be solvent welded in accordance with BS 4346 Part 1. Pipework with sizes more than 100 mm diameter shall be with push fit joints incorporating a rubber ring seal. Both jointing systems shall be suitable for operation at the same nominal working pressure as the parent pipe. Irrigation pipework shall be suitable for working pressure of 15 bars at 20C. and 6 bars at 50C. UPVC pipework transportation, handling, storage and installation shall be carried out strictly in accordance with manufacturers recommendations. b. Polyethylene Drip Tubing Drip irrigation pipework shall be inch dia ultra-violet resistant, low density polyethylene and connected by purpose made compression or barb fittings compatible with the tubing. The polyethylene tubing shall be highly flexible resistant to kinking and damage caused by routine landscape maintenance activities. The tubing should be capable of withstanding the applied necessary pressure after installation of irrigation terminals without splitting or bursting. Tubing should be suitable for use above and below ground. All the dead ends of tubing shall be provided with end closures. Polyethylene tubing shall generally run above ground.

C.4

VALVES Valves on irrigation distribution pipework shall be UPVC ball valve. Valves shall have pressure rating of 16 bars at 20C. Valve body moulding and security ring shall act as a rigid stress absorbing unit to protect ball, stem and seals from any mechanical strain imposed by pipeline. Valve shall provide full bore opening to ensure good flow characteristics. Position of handle shall indicate whether valve is open or closed. Valves shall be suitable for use with water temperature upto 50C. and in climate and soil conditions encountered in the State of Qatar.

_________________________________________________________________________________ P - 46

____________________________________________________________________________________________________

Ball seals shall be in PTFE. Backing seals, body seal, union O-ring seals and stem seals shall be in ethylene propylene rubber (EPDM) or fluorine rubber (FPM). Valves shall have union ends on both sides for easy removal and replacement. Valve assemblies shall be located inside heavy duty plastic valve boxes of suitable size with cover which shall be in green colour. C.5 DRIP EMITTERS The drip irrigation emitters shall be manufactured from durable heat resistant plastic. The emitter shall be pressure compensating type so that the discharge (flow rate) from the emitter is constant irrespective of fluctuations in the system pressure. The operating range shall be to suit the system pressure. The pressure regulating diaphragm shall be of silicon. Emitters shall have barbed inlet for connecting to polyethylene drip tubing. Emitters shall have six barbed outlets, with each outlet delivering a nominal flow of 1.0 gallon per hour. Emitters shall be installed by punching with the special punching tool of appropriate diameter holes at required spacing. The emitters shall then be pushed in the hole and no leak should occur when the line is pressurised. Misplaced holes should be plugged-in by appropriate plastic plugs. Optionally emitters may have self piercing type inlet barb, requiring no hole punch tool, for insertion of emitter into the drip tubing. Manufacturers recommended tool kit shall be used for installation of emitters. C.6 SPRAY SPRINKLERS

The full or part circle spray type sprinkler shall be capable of water flow performance and details shall be as shown on the drawings. The overall pop-up height shall be 4 inches. The sprinkler body, stem, nozzle, and screen shall be constructed of heavy-duty, ultra-violet resistant plastic. It shall have a heavy-duty stainless steel retract spring for positive pop-down and a ratcheting system for easy alignment of the pattern. The sprinkler shall have a soft elastomer pressure activated co-moulded wiper seal for cleaning debris from the pop-up stem as it retracts into the case to prevent the sprinkler from sticking up and to minimize "flow-by". The sprinkler shall have a matched precipitation rate (MPR) plastic or brass nozzle with an adjusting screw capable of regulating the radius and flow. The sprinkler shall be capable of housing under the nozzle protective, non-clogging filter screens or pressure compensating (PCS) screens. The screen shall be used in conjunction with the adjusting screw for regulating. The sprinkler shall have a flush Plug pre-installed. The plug shall prevent debris from clogging the sprinkler during installation and allow for system to be flushed before nozzling. The plug shall be constructed of polypropylene material.

_________________________________________________________________________________ P - 47

____________________________________________________________________________________________________

C.7

QUICK COUPLING VALVES The valves shall constructed of heavy cast brass with easy to service two piece body design and shall have a thermoplastic, locking rubber cover with molded warning of DO NOT DRINK. The valves shall be opened and closed by a brass key with swivel hose, all provided by the same manufacturer. The valve throat shall have a key way with detent positions for regulating water flow. QCVs shall be located inside heavy duty plastic valve boxes with cover which shall be green in colour. The Contractor shall provide three sets of valve key and swivel hose reels.

C.8

IRRIGATION CONTROL SYSTEM The purpose of the irrigation control system is to irrigate planting material automatically through irrigation controllers, solenoid valves and control wiring. The EPIC Contractor shall include all equipment, material, accessories, finishing materials, electric wiring, valves, controllers etc., required so as to have a complete fully functional system, even though the same may not be specifically mentioned in the specifications or drawings. The irrigation control system shall comprise of the following components: a. Controller The irrigation system controller shall be a micro-processor based / micro-electronic solid state type, capable of fully automatic or manual operation of the system. It shall be housed in a 16 gauge, weather proof steel cabinet with a key lock door. The controller shall be suitable for wall mounting. The controller shall operate on a 240 volts A.C. power input and be capable of operating the required number of 5.5 VA 24 VAC electric remote control valves. The controller shall have a reset circuit breaker to protect it from power overload. The controller shall have 4 Nos. independently programmable stations. The controller programming schedule shall be based on a variable 16 day cycle. Each station shall have the capability of being programmed to automatically start on any quarter hour upto eight times per day. Station timing shall be variable from 1 to 99 minutes in 1 minute increments or for 0.1 to 9.9 hours in 0.1 hour increments. Controller station operation shall be of automatic sequential stacking to avoid overlapping operation. The controller shall have a water budgeting mode to allow simultaneous increasing or decreasing of watering time for all stations from 25% to 200% in 25% increments. During operation, the controller shall provide a monitoring read out indicating station in operation and time remaining. The controller shall have a 12 hour AM/PM or 24 hour clock. The controller shall be capable of being operated manually at any time. A manual single station or group of stations can be selected for a single manual operation. The controller shall have internal non-volatile memory capable of program memory retention for a minimum of 10 years without power. The controller shall include a 9 VDC Ni-cad rechargeable battery and recharging circuit which will maintain the run the time of day operation during power outages of upto 48 hours.

_________________________________________________________________________________ P - 48

____________________________________________________________________________________________________

b.

Electric Control Valves The remote control valves shall be normally closed, 24 volts AC, 50 Hz, solenoid actuated globe pattern diaphragm rated at not less than 13.7 bars. Electric control valves shall be pressure regulating type with globe type installation. Valves shall be designed to provide a constant outlet pressure regardless of fluctuation of inlet pressure or flow through the valve. Flow control adjustment shall permit adjustment of down stream pressure and flow or use for manual shut off. The valve body and bonnet shall be constructed of nylon plastic, diaphragm shall be of nylon reinforced nitrile rubber. Solenoid coil shall be encapsulated in molded epoxy. The solenoid plunger shall have a grit filter to ensure positive valve operation. Control water pressure for the solenoid actuator shall be delivered from the inlet of the valve to the actuator by means of an external tube connected to a self flushing nylon screen located in the inlet water passage of the valve. The valve shall have a flow control stem and cross handle for regulating or shutting off the flow of water and a bleed screw for manual operation without electrically energising the solenoid coil. The valve construction shall be such as to provide for all internal parts to be removable from the top of the valve without disturbing the valve installation. Valve assemblies shall be located inside heavy duty plastic valve boxes of suitable size with cover which shall be green in colour.

c.

Control Wiring The Electrical Contractor shall draw the cable for power supply to the controller, complete with neutral and earth etc., as per locations and Engineer's approval. The wiring from the controller to the various control valves etc., shall be carried out by the Electrical Contractor experienced in irrigation system in order to provide a complete fully functional system. The Specialist Electrical Contractor is to provide run and connect all low voltage cabling as required for operating the irrigation control valves from their positions throughout the site. This cabling should be of the telephone type with copper conductors of a size suitable to operate the control valves without undue voltage drop. The cable should be multi-cored with colour coded conductor insulation and PVC sheathed overall. The number of pairs in each length shall correspond to the number of solenoids to be controlled by that length of cable. The multi-core cables shall be sheathed in PVC or other material suitable for installation direct into the ground without further protection. All joints on low voltage irrigation cabling shall be completely protected and be made by crimping the two sections to be completely sealed against ingress of moisture. All cables crossing footings and hard landscaped areas shall be run in 50 mm PVC ducts.

_________________________________________________________________________________ P - 49

____________________________________________________________________________________________________

C.9

TESTING AND COMMISSIONING All underground pipework shall be hydraulically tested to 1 times the working pressure of irrigation system or as required by the manufacturer, whichever is higher, but in no case be less than 7 bars, prior to back-filling each portion of pipe length. Pipes shall be securely held in position, during testing, by adequate temporary anchorage. Underground piping shall be kept under pressure for 16 hours. The Contractor shall keep continuous record of hydro tests. The Contractor may pre-test the system to establish its functionality. Above ground piping hydro tests shall last for two hours or until the Engineer has inspected all joints, whichever is longer. On completion of the entire irrigation installation, the system shall be commissioned to demonstrate the proper functioning of controllers, control valves, irrigation terminals etc. The process of commissioning shall be carried out in the presence of Engineer's representative. Adjustments and retesting of controllers, programme, control valves etc., should be carried out until a satisfactory result is obtained and the whole system is functioning to the design requirement.

_________________________________________________________________________________ P - 50

____________________________________________________________________________________________________

PART D : SCHEDULES

D1. LIST OF SUGGESTED MANUFACTURERS (PLUMBING & DRAINAGE) 1. Pumpsets : PULLEN GRUNDFOS HOLDEN & BROOKE NOCCHI WILO LOWARA SAER ITT BELL & GOSSETT CRANE COPRAX BANNINGER ARIETE WAVIN KELIT RAKTHERM WEDNESBURY IMI YORKSHIRE MULLER BRASS WEDNESBURY YORKSHIRE TRIFLOW LTD HATTERSLEY PEGLERS CRANE NIBCO KEY TERRAIN HEPWORTH HUNTER MARLEY SAPPCO QATAR PLAST HEPWORTH GEBERIT GEORGE FISCHERS VONROLL DURAPIPE HEPWORTH SAUDI CLAY PIPES

2.

Polypropylene Pipes & Fittings

3.

Cooper Tubes

4. Cooper Fittings

5. Gun Metal Valves/Strainers

6. UPVC Pipes and Fittings

7. Laboratory Waste System (HDPE) :

8. ESVC Pipes

_________________________________________________________________________________ P - 51

____________________________________________________________________________________________________

9. Hangers & Supports

MUPRO HILTI GRINNEL WEICCO HEPWORTH DURAPIPE Q-PLAST GEORGE FISHER WATTS SPIRAX SARCO HONEYWELL ZURN-WILINS MASON CRANE KINETICS TOZEN GLYNWED-BBI STANTON CRESCENT SAUDICAST KISWOK A.O. SMITH (USA) BRANDFORD WHITE (USA) PACIFIC (USA) ATLANTIC ECOTHERM CARESS CULLIGAN METITO PENTAIR ENVIROMATCH

10. Irrigation Pipes/Fittings

11. Pr. Reducing Valves/ T&P Relief Valves

12. Expansion Joints

13. Manhole Covers

14. Electric Water Heaters

15. Water Filters (Central)

16. Floor Gullies, Cleanout, Rain Water: Outlets, Balcony Drain, Grating etc.

FROST HARMER ZURN JAY R. SMITH WADE DALLMER

_________________________________________________________________________________ P - 52

____________________________________________________________________________________________________

17. Water Tanks

QATAR ROTOMOULD AL MUFTAH GULF GLASS FIBRE

18. Pipe Insulation

KIMMCO AFICO AEROFLEX ARMAFLEX ARMACELL


FOSTER MIRACLE IDENDEN IDEAL

19.

Adhesive, Coating, Sealants

20.

GRP Water Tanks

BRIDGESTONE
BALMORAL A.C. PLASTIC SAMSUNG SEKISUI MITSUBISHI

21.

Irrigation System

RAINBIRD HUNTER TORO

_________________________________________________________________________________ P - 53

____________________________________________________________________________________________________

D2. 1.

LIST OF SUGGESTED MANUFACTURERS - (FIRE FIGHTING) Pumpsets : FAIRBANKS MORSE


SPP PATTERSON ITT BELL & GOSSET AURORA PEERLESS

2.

Steel Pipes

AL-ZAZEERA SAUDI STEEL PIPES ZENITH NIPPON STEEL BIS SAUDI PIPES

3.

Ductile Iron Pipes & Fittings

4.

Fire Hose Cabinet

SFFECO NAFFCO CHUBB MOYNE SRI

5.

Fire Department Connection

Mueller Centurian Angus Micron Fireater SRI NAFCO Viking Grinnel


NEWMAN HATTERSLEY PEGLERS CRANE

6.

Gun Metal Valves

7.

Supports

MUPRO GRINNEL HILTI EASYFLEX KENNEDY MUELLER AVK

8.

Fire Hydrant

9.

Groove Couplings

VICTAULIC NATIONAL SHURJOINT CENTRAL


GRINNEL

_________________________________________________________________________________ P - 54

____________________________________________________________________________________________________

9.

Steel Sectional Water Tanks

STEEL WORK ENGINEERING (MALAYSIA) BRATHWAIT (UK) BALMORAL (UK)


UL LISTED / FM APPROVED

10.

Valves

:
1. 2. 3.

Notes :

For approval of materials equivalent to the specified, Engineers decision shall be final and binding. The above suggested manufacturers should meet the detailed specifications given in the relevant sections. The name of the Manufacturer, model no and the country where the product is manufactured should be clearly and permamently marked (sticker is not acceptable) on the product itself.

_________________________________________________________________________________ P - 55

____________________________________________________________________________________________________

D.3

SCHEDULE OF DRAWINGS

The following drawings shall be read in conjunction with these specifications: PLUMBING
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Site & Location Plan Extl Irrigation Layout Site & Location Plan Extl Plumbing Layout Ground Floor Plan, Plumbing Layout First Floor Plan, Plumbing Layout Roof Floor Plan, Plumbing Layout Water Supply Schematic Diagram and LPG Layout Standard Plumbing & Irrigation Details Guard, Gardener, Drivers Room Plan & roof plumbing layout Water meter cabinet details & standard notes. IR-00 PL-00 PL-01 PL-02 PL-03 PL-04 PL-05 PL-06 PL-07

DRAINAGE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Site & Location Plan Extl Drainage & Rain Water Surface Layout Ground Floor Plan, Drainage Layout First Floor Plan, Drainage Layout Roof Plan, Drainage Layout Guard & Gardener Plans, Drainage Layout Standard Drainage Detail Septic Tank and Soak away Details
DR-00 DR-01 DR-02 DR-03 DR-04 DR-05 DR-06

FIRE FIGHTING
1 2 3 4 5 6
Site & Location Plan- Fire Fighting Layout Ground Floor Plan- Fire Fighting Layout First Floor Plan- Fire Fighting Layout Guard, Gardener, Driver Room & S/S-Fire Fighting Layout Riser Schematic Diagram Standard piping, support and fire standard details

FF-00 FF-01 FF-02 FF-03 FF-04 FF-05

_________________________________________________________________________________ P - 56

AIR CONDITIONING SPECIFICATION

AIR CONDITIONING SPECIFICATION INDEX


CL. NO. TITLE PAGE NO.

M.1 M.2 M.3 M.4 M.5 M.6 M.7 M.8 M.9 M.10 M.11 M.12 M.13 M.14 M.15 M.16 M.17 M.18 M.19 M.20 M.21 M.22 M.23 M.24 M.25 M.26 M.27 M.28 M.29 M.30 M.31 M.32 M.33 M.34 M.35 M.36 M.37 M.38 M.39 M.40

EXTENT OF CONTRACT ...................................................................................... 1 EXCLUSIONS ........................................................................................................ 1 STANDARD OF WORKS ....................................................................................... 1 PROGRAMME ....................................................................................................... 2 DATA TO BE SUPPLIED WITH TENDER .............................................................. 2 PRACTICAL COMPLETION................................................................................... 2 DESIGN DATA ....................................................................................................... 3 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................... 5 DESCRIPTION OF AIR CONDITIONING AND VENTILATION SYSTEMS ............. 5 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................ 8 TEST AT SITE ..................................................................................................... 12 AIR CONDITIONING PACKAGE UNITS 14 SPLIT AIR CONDITIONING UNIT (WALL MOUNTED) .......................................17 WINDOW AIR CONDITIONING UNITS ................................................................ 20 DRINKING WATER COOLER..............................................................................20 VIBRATION ISOLATORS ....................................................................................21 CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPES .............................................................................21 DUCTWORK........................................................................................................22 MANUAL DAMPERS ...........................................................................................24 FIRE DAMPERS ..................................................................................................25 TEST HOLES ......................................................................................................26 FRESH AIR INTAKE AND OUTLET LOUVRES ...................................................26 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS .................................................................................26 DUCT HANGERS AND SUPPORTS .................................................................... 27 GRILLES, REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS ..........................................................28 AIR CURTAINS .................................................................................................... 29 ACCESS DOORS ................................................................................................29 SOUND ATTENUATORS ....................................................................................29 INSULATION .......................................................................................................30 EXHAUST FANS.................................................................................................. 32 INSTRUMENTS ...................................................................................................35 ELECTRICAL WORKS......................................................................................... 35 CONTROL SYSTEM ............................................................................................ 38 BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS.40 BUILDERS WORK ............................................................................................... 86 PAINTING AND FINISHING ................................................................................. 86 IDENTIFICATION/COLOUR CODING ................................................................. 86 INSPECTION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING ................................................ 86 WARRANTY ........................................................................................................ 87 SCHEDULES, EXPLANATORY NOTES .............................................................. 88

M.41 M.42 M.43 M.44 M.45 M.46 M.47 M.48 M.49

SCHEDULE OF DRAWINGS ............................................................................... 88 COMMISSIONING SHEETS ................................................................................ 89 SCHEDULE OF ROOF TOP PACKAGE A/C UNIT.... 94 SCHEDULE OF SPLIT AIR CONDITIONING UNIT............................................. 97 SCHEDULE OF WINDOW AIR CONDITIONING UNIT ........................................ 98 SCHEDULE OF EXHAUST FANS ...................................................................... 99 SCHEDULE OF DRINKING WATER FOUNTAINS ........................................... 101 SCHEDULE OF AIR CURTAINS....................................................................... 102 SCHEDULE OF MANUFACTURERS (AIR-CONDITIONING) ............................ 103

*****************************************

M.1

EXTENT OF CONTRACT The work under this section of the specification shall include for the supply, delivery to site, installation, testing and commissioning and setting to work the new Air conditioning and Ventilation systems for the Standard School, as given hereunder: 1. All air conditioning and ventilation system complete with all accessories and controls, as per specifications, schedules and drawings. Complete air distribution system, return air collecting system, fresh air and ventilation system as shown on the drawings and as specified. Various controls, instruments and their connections, electrical works related to air conditioning and ventilation systems as detailed in the specifications.

2.

3.

The Contractor shall provide all the materials, labour, cartage, plant and appliances necessary for the supply, installation, testing and commissioning of the work and all other minor and incidental works necessary for the system. The specifications and drawings are intended to indicate the nature and scope of the project. The Contractor shall be responsible for the installation of plant of the correct capacity and shall guarantee the efficient performance of the equipment. M.2 EXCLUSIONS Items necessary for the completion of the plant but not included in the tender are to be listed as exclusions. It will be assumed that any items or services necessary to the air conditioning plant and not specifically excluded will be provided by the Contractor even if not mentioned in the tender. M.3 STANDARD OF WORKS Unless otherwise specified, all equipment is to comply with the current KAHRAMAA regulations, relevant British and American codes of practice as listed below. However, the KAHRAMAA / local latest regulations shall take precedence over all other regulations. 1. ASHRAE : American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air conditioning Engineer The Institute of Heating and Ventilation Engineers (UK) American Society of Mechanical Engineers Air conditioning Refrigeration Institute (USA) American Society of Testing and Materials American Welding Society

2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

IHVE ASME ARI ASTM AWS

: : : : :

M-1

7. 8.

DW142 SMACNA

: :

Specification for Sheet metal ductwork Sheet Metal and Air conditioning Contractor's National Association, Vienna Qatar Construction specification

9.

QCS

The workmen employed must be accustomed to the highest class of air conditioning installation. A competent Engineer must be in regular attendance throughout the whole contract. The whole of the installation shall be executed in conformity with the drawings, specifications, internationally accepted codes of practice and local regulations. M.4 PROGRAMME Immediately on receipt of an order the Contractor shall prepare a programme detailing the services and sequence of installation. Approval of programme by the Engineer or Client shall not relieve the Contractor from his obligations to execute and complete the works in conformity with the directions and requirements of the Engineer. M.5 DATA TO BE SUPPLIED WITH TENDER a. b. c. d. Full description of equipment's and system proposed. Exclusions and departures from specifications. Guarantee particulars. Letter of compliance confirming that the offer fully complies with the tender documents, specifications and tender drawings and that there are no deviations.

M.6

PRACTICAL COMPLETION The Contractor shall deliver the Operation and Maintenance Manuals along with the 'As-built' drawings and loose items if any to the Client before practical completion. The completion certificate will be issued by the Engineer after obtaining the Operation and Maintenance manuals. Recommendation for release or the release of Practical Completion Certificate would not absolve the Contractor of his responsibility to provide the installation complete in all respects and in satisfactory working order. If any item is discovered later during commissioning, maintenance period or at F.C.C. stage to be short supplied or not in working order, the Contractor shall be liable to make good the same to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

M-2

M.7

DESIGN DATA The broad design parameters of air conditioning system shall be as follows: Latitude Outside design conditions a. Summer : 46C. DB, 30C. WB (115F. DB, 86F. WB) : 10C. DB, 90% RH (50F. DB, 90% RH) : 25 North

b.

Winter

Inside design conditions a. b. c. d. e. f. g. Administration Classrooms Laboratories Library Multi-purpose Hall Pantry Changing Area : : : : : : : 231C DB, 50% RH 231C DB, 50% RH 231C DB, 50% RH 22C DB, 50% RH 231C DB, 50% RH 27C DB, 50% RH 27C DB, 50% RH

Note: Humidity control and winter heating are not required. Occupancy a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. Administration Classrooms Library Class and Activity Room Canteen Auditorium Chemistry Lab Computer Lab Teachers Room : : : : : : : : : 97 persons 30 persons each max. 60 persons max. 30 persons max. 120 persons max. 140 persons max. 33 persons max. 26 persons max. 30 persons max.

Lighting load a. b. c. d. e. Administration Classrooms Activity Zone Multi-purpose Hall Auditorium : : : : : 20 watts/sq.m. 20 watts/sq.m. 8 - 10 watts/sq.m. 16 watts/sq.m. 25 watts/sq.m.

M-3

Equipment Load As per room equipment details (PC, Printers in Administration room) Fresh air a. b. c. d. e. Administration Classrooms Laboratory Library Cafeteria : : : : : 15 cfm/person 7.5 cfm/person 10 cfm/person 10 cfm/person 7.5 cfm/person

Noise level a. b. c. d. e. Classrooms Labs, Language, Administration etc. Corridors Auditorium Internal Courtyard : : : : : 35 to 40 NC 30 to 35 NC 40 to 45 NC 30 NC 35 to 40 NC

Ventilation (Exhaust) a. b. c. d. Bath area Toilets Pantries Kitchen : : : : 8 air changes per hour 10 air changes per hour 12 air changes per hour 100% exhaust in case of cooking

General a. b. Electric Supply 'U' Factors * Heat Transmission Co-efficient : (U) value for the roofs (As per Kahra-maa Circular) Heat Transmission Co-efficient : (U) value for the walls (As per Kahra-maa Circular) All Windows : 0.077 Btu/ft. sq.hr.F (0.437 watts/m.sq.C) : 415 V, 3 Ph, 50 Hz, 4 wire and 240 V, 1 Ph, 50 Hz A.C. supply

0.10 Btu/ft. sq.hr.F (0.568 watts/m.sq.C)

Double glazed / solar reflective glass (3.20 watts/m.sq.C)

c.

Rating for Continuous Service & Local Ambient Conditions The outside air temperature may occasionally rise to 50C. (122F). All apparatus shall be rated for continuous service, twenty four hours a day, seven days a week throughout its normal rated life except for necessary routine maintenance. The Contractor shall offer equipment which is capable of operating at the ambient temperature of 50C. without any failure.

M-4

M.8

INTRODUCTION The new school building shall be of two storey, each comprising of the following areas: Ground Floor i. ii. iii. iv. v. vi. vii. Administration Auditorium Library Classrooms and Activity Zone Canteen and Kitchen Multi-purpose Hall (Volleyball, Basketball Internal Courts and Changing) Internal Courtyard / Assembly Hall

First Floor i. ii. iii. iv. v. M.9 Laboratories (Physics, Chemistry etc.) Computer Lab and Art Rooms Classrooms and Activity Zones etc. Language Lab Teachers Room etc.

DESCRIPTION OF AIR CONDITIONING AND VENTILATION SYSTEMS AIR CONDITIONING The air conditioning system shall be designed to have comfort conditions keeping in view the environmental conditions of institutional requirement, specific ventilation requirement and air quality as recommended by ASHRAE and in accordance with the international standards and codes of practice. It is proposed to provide Package A/C units for the School building. Split A.C. system as standby facility for Computer room, Split A.C. system for the Guard House and Window A.C. for the M.V. room in the Substation.

SYSTEM WITH PACKAGE A/CUNITS Administration, Classrooms, Auditorium, Library, Laboratories, Canteen, Multi-purpose Hall, Internal Courtyard, Computer Labs, Art Rooms, Language Lab, Teachers room etc., shall be served by Package A/C units applicable for each area block floor wise or as applicable as shown on the drawing. The Package A/C units for each area shall be located on the roof. The supply air from the various A/C units to the respective area would be transmitted to the conditioned areas via galvanized sheet metal insulated duct work and distributed through ceiling diffusers/linear diffusers and wall type grilles. The supply air duct shall run on the roof, in the vertical shafts where applicable and in the ceiling void. The return air would be collected above the false ceiling / bulk head and carried back to the respective Package unit via return air duct.

M-5

Sound attenuators shall be provided in the supply and return duct work in order to achieve the specified noise criteria. The ductwork shall be provided with volume control dampers for proper balancing of the system. Fresh air shall be mixed with the return air of each air handling unit before filter and passing over the cooling coils. Fresh air connection shall be complete with louver, insect screen, sand trap, VCD and removable filter. Bypass type VAV controls shall be provided for classrooms and certain other areas for temperature control. Winter heating shall not be provided. Smoke detector installed in the return air duct of each unit shall shut down the supply fan in the event of smoke detection. Fresh Air Control Fresh air intake for the A/C units serving Internal Courtyard / Assembly Hall, Multipurpose Hall and Auditorium shall be provided with two stage motorized dampers. The modulating motors of these two stage dampers shall be connected to the programmable timers fixed in the respective unit control panel and CO2 sensors located in the space to regulate the fresh air to 50% in the event when these areas are not having full occupancy. CLASSROOMS - CROSS TALK SILENCER Since the classrooms are served by common Package A/C unit, in order to dampen the cross talk noise, classroom to corridor return air passage shall be provided with cross talk silencers as shown on the design drawings. LINK CORRIDOR / ACTIVITY ZONE These areas would be served by the same A/C units which serve the respective area classrooms and other related areas. SYSTEM WITH SPLIT AIR CONDITIONING UNITS GUARD ROOM The Guard room / Gardener and Drivers room / Store/BMS Room shall be served by wall mounted type split air conditioner. COMPUTER LAB The Computer Lab in the Administration area shall be provided with wall mounted type split air conditioners as a standby facility, in addition to ducted A.C. supply from the AHUs on this block. SYSTEM WITH W INDOW CONDITIONING UNITS The Pump room and M.V. room shall be served by window type air conditioners.

M-6

DRINKING W ATER FOUNTAIN Drinking water fountains shall be provided at Ground and First Floors, as per the locations indicated on the drawings. VENTILATION TOILET BLOCKS These areas shall be mechanically ventilated by roof mounted twin exhaust fan. Exhaust grilles/diffusers from the Toilets shall be connected with the duct. Exhaust from these areas shall be drawn from the adjacent area in order to keep these areas under negative pressure. ADMINISTRATION TOILET This area shall be mechanically ventilated by roof mounted twin exhaust fans. Exhaust grilles from the bathrooms shall be connected with ductwork. CHEMISTRY LAB This area shall be mechanically ventilated by suitable fans applicable for this area. Fume cupboard from this area shall be connected with suitable ductwork. MULTI-PURPOSE HALL, CHANGING AREA AND TOILETS These areas shall be mechanically ventilated by roof mounted twin exhaust fans. Exhaust diffuser / grilles from these toilets shall be connected with exhaust duct as shown on the drawing. Exhaust air shall be drawn from the adjacent area in order to keep these areas under negative pressure. The twin fans shall be provided with fan controller. INTERNAL COURTYARD AND AUDITORIUM These areas shall be mechanically ventilated by roof mounted single exhaust fans as shown on the drawings. KITCHEN The kitchen shall be ventilated by exhaust hood and ductwork connected to the extract fans. Fresh air shall be supplied around exhaust hood. The kitchen shall also be kept under negative pressure. Part of the exhaust air shall be drawn from the Canteen area. BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM & CONTROLS The complete BMS & Control system shall be provided for maintaining all the conditions as detailed in the design data and Kahramaa requirements.

M-7

M.10

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Quality of Equipment and Materials All equipment and materials shall be brand new, of a quality accepted by the Engineer and presenting no dent, damage or breakage during transportation or installation. All metal parts shall be protected on site from rust, corrosion and dirt by properly storing, packing and covering. All rusted parts of metal, subject to the Engineer's approval shall be cleaned of corrosion products and given two coats of anti-rust paint before installation. Instructions for Operation and Routine Maintenance The Contractor shall provide written instructions both in Arabic and English languages as to the method of operation of equipment and the routine maintenance works (cleaning of air filters etc.). Six copies of such instructions shall be handed over to the Engineer. Painting, Tags, Nameplates All steel works in connection with supports for pipes, cable trays etc., exposed to the elements are to be painted with two coats of an approved rust preventive paint, preferably zinc rich primer and two coats of enamel paint of grey color or as approved by the Engineer. All exposed metal surfaces of refrigeration and electrical apparatus, motors, guards, insulated pipework etc., must be painted with one coat of under-coat and two coats of enamel paint finish to approved color. Identification bands, color codes (refer BS 1710: 1975) and directional flow arrows shall be painted on piping or insulation at frequent intervals indicating the unit services and the fluid conveyed. Lettering shall be in English. Identification of ductwork, color codes, directional flow arrows and application of symbols shall be carried out in accordance with DW 142. Internal surfaces of ducts at the grille or diffuser terminals and connections visible to occupants in rooms shall be painted with two coats of dull black paint. All power supply switches shall be tagged identifying the area served, the capacity of switching and equipment they feed. Same identification must appear on the wiring diagram submitted with the operating instructions. All wires shall bear identification numbered tags corresponding to the same wiring diagram mentioned above. Drawings, Submittals, Instructions, Manuals and Samples General All drawings and material submissions, other information and samples must be supplied to the Engineer as laid down in the specifications and as and when agreed during the site meetings, in the progress chart or as instructed by the Engineer.

M-8

Submittals and Engineers Approval The Contractor shall submit for approval a detailed information data for all the equipment he proposes to install. Such submittals shall contain the following information: i. ii. iii. Model number Name of manufacturer and country of origin Manufacturer's data showing the capacity of equipment, physical dimensions, list of all components and their characteristics.

The Engineer shall check, if he so requires, all parts of installation and materials. Any part rejected shall be immediately dismantled, removed from site and replaced or repaired to conform to the specifications and to the full satisfaction of the Engineer. Any part requiring realignment or repositioning in co-ordination with the decoration, false ceilings, carpentry or finishing works as required by the Engineer shall be carried out without delay. Any interim approval given by the Engineer does not relieve the Contractor of his obligations under this contract. Shop Drawings to be prepared by the Contractor The Contractor shall prepare and submit for approval, detailed shop drawings for all equipment or distribution services described herein. Such drawings shall indicate : i. ii. iii. iv. v. vi. All civil works, openings, bases, position of sleeves etc. The physical dimensions of the equipment. The sizes of foundation base wherever required. Location of centre bolts to base. Position of motors, controls, air duct connections etc. Detailed wiring diagram of all electrical systems consisting of control wiring diagram for various controls, instruments, sensors, step controllers etc., and their connections, power wiring diagram from isolator / control panel in various equipment etc., as detailed elsewhere in the specification. Detail piping connection in double line with position of valves, controls, instruments and fittings. Isometric piping for the complete piping layout (water/refrigerant). Co-ordinated drawings with all other services, structure space frame and finishes or any other drawing found necessary or requested by the Engineer for coordination of works.

vii. viii. ix.

M-9

x.

The following drawings shall be provided by the A.C. Contractor for each panel : a. b. c. d. e. f. g. General arrangement of control panel Control schematics Single line diagram Circuit diagram Terminal block connection diagram Cable schedule Material list

The work described on any shop drawing submitted shall be properly checked by the Contractor for all clearance, field conditions, maintenance space and proper coordination. Equipment layout is to be detailed on drawings showing the exact method of installing and clearly illustrating components to be used in making all connections. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer, shop drawings of all sheet metal ductwork and pipework for approval before work is fabricated and installed. Ductwork drawings must show clearances between the ductwork and masonry. All dampers, fresh air inlets, exhaust outlets, connections to equipment and methods of support and any other details necessary for the satisfactory installation of the system must be indicated. Each type of register, diffuser and louver is to be referenced in a schedule and the type and size clearly indicated at each location. Piping drawings must be fully detailed showing all piping in double line and indicating the precise size of fittings, valves and equipment. Position of hangers and supports with reference numbers must be indicated and large scale detail must be given showing the type and method of installation of each type of hanger. A schedule is to be included on each drawing, detailing the type of hanger fixing with a reference number for each type. All general layout drawings are to be drawn in 1 : 50 scale. Details of hangers, method of fixing of pipes and ducts, detailed cross sections of pipes, ducts and risers, details of control and piping connections to equipment are to be drawn in 1 : 10 scale. In case the Contractor fails to produce the shop drawings and co-ordinated shop drawings in accordance with the specified/agreed time schedule, the Engineer reserves the right to engage an outside agency to undertake this work and debit the entire cost to the Contractor's account. At all places where multiple services cross over, the Contractor shall submit specific details on the drawings of all services on a larger scale, which should be thoroughly checked by the A.C. Contractor for their location, clearances, method of fixing etc., before submitting to the Engineer for approval.

M - 10

The Contractor shall prepare drawings and schedules showing precise details of holes in concrete, masonry etc., and necessary wooden frames required for passage of ducts, pipes and fittings of grilles, registers, diffusers, louvers, plant, plant supports etc. Drawings and schedules approved by the Engineer must be available before any structural work requiring holes or other modification is constructed. This schedule is to be submitted in a form to be agreed with the Engineer. All drawings prepared by the Contractor shall be submitted in the form of three sets of blue prints to the Engineer for approval, who in turn, after making his comments will return one set of the same to the Contractor for necessary revisions if any. Thereafter the Contractor shall submit five sets of blue prints for the Engineer's final approval. Once the drawings are finally approved, the Contractor shall submit in reproducible copy negative for Engineer's signature and the same shall be kept on site for execution. It is the Contractor's responsibility to co-ordinate all grilles, equipment, pipes, light fittings, false ceiling layout and other services to allow a completely symmetrical installation. The Contractor shall supply to the Engineer a set of 'As-installed' drawings showing the works 'As-installed' together with any other information necessary for operation and maintenance. Six copies of each such drawing shall be supplied. In addition, two sets of copy negatives for each drawing shall be handed over to the Client. Manuals The Contractor shall make provision for the supply of three copies of the Instruction Manual before issue of Practical Completion Certificate. This manual shall include the following items : i. Complete list of all items of equipment, controls and accessories as actually supplied including serial nos. and all name plate details. A set of 'As-built' drawings showing equipment layout foundation details, ducting layout and details, electrical wiring and drain piping. The drawings shall show plans and sections necessary to show all required information correctly. A set of manufacturer's catalogues, wiring diagram and installation drawings relevant only to the particular item of air conditioning and ventilation equipment concerned. General catalogues will not be acceptable. Manufacturer's printed spare parts list for all items of equipment. Operational description of the air conditioning plant including starting, stopping and seasonal shut-down. Preventive maintenance routine at weekly, monthly and yearly intervals and maintenance procedures for all plant and equipment. Manufacturer's full name and address together with telephone, fax numbers. Name, address, telephone and fax numbers of local agents / suppliers.

ii.

iii.

iv. v.

vi.

vii. viii.

M - 11

Storage of Materials and Equipment All materials and equipment must be stored properly so as to prevent damage, corrosion, deterioration or dirt penetration. All duct outlets must be adequately closed to prevent dust and dirt penetration during the course of erection.

Tests Certificates The Contractor shall supply all the Test certificates in original to the Engineer at the time of handing over the project. M.11 TEST AT SITE General The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer, one month prior to the date of commencement of the tests, six (6) copies of the complete test procedures to be used. The procedure, method of calculation etc., shall be approved by the Engineer before any test is carried out. Six (6) copies of the test results shall be furnished to the Engineer for his approval. The Contractor shall supply skilled staff and all necessary instruments and carry out tests of any kind on a piece of equipment, apparatus, part of system or a complete system if the Consultant requests such a test, for determining specified or guaranteed data as given in the specifications or in the schedule of equipment filled in by the Contractor. Any damage resulting from the tests shall be repaired and/or damaged material replaced, all to the satisfaction of the Engineer. In the event of any repair or adjustment required to be made, other than the normal running adjustment, the tests shall be void and shall be recommended after the adjustments or repairs have been completed. The tests shall not be void due to circumstances beyond the Contractor's control. All testing, balancing and final adjustment shall be in accordance with the provision of the applicable 'ASHRAE' standards. Ductwork All branches and outlets shall be tested for air quantity and the total of the air quantities shall be within five percent of fan capacity. Volume control dampers and splitter dampers shall be tested for proper operation.

M - 12

Equipment All Package A/C units and ventilating equipment, ductwork and air outlets shall be adjusted and balanced to deliver the specified air quantities indicated at each inlet and outlet on the drawings. Where the equipment or systems depend upon controls for proper operation, functioning and performance, the latter shall be operated simultaneously with the equipment or system during tests. If air quantities cannot be delivered without exceeding the speed range of the sheaves or the available horse-power, the Engineer shall be notified before proceeding with the balancing of air distribution system. Other tests as specified under the specific equipment headings are to be completed to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Electrical Equipment All electrical equipment shall be cleaned and tested on site before application of power as mentioned below : i. ii. Wire and cable tests Insulation resistance test, phase to phase and phase to earth on all circuits and equipment's using a 500 volt megger. The insulation resistance shall not be less than one (1) meg.ohm. Earth resistance between conduit system and earth must not exceed five (5) ohms. Phasing out and phase rotation tests. Operating tests on all protective relays to prove their correct operation before energizing the main equipment. Operating tests on all starters, circuit breakers etc. Any other test required as per Kahra-maa regulations.

iii.

iv. v.

vi. vii.

Test on Completion After finishing the above tests and adjustments, the Contractor shall be responsible for running a reliability trial test for the whole plant installed. The whole of the trial of the plant shall take place during the appropriate seasons when design conditions are met or approximated. The trial shall take place at any reasonable time subject to the approval of the Engineer. The trial shall last for a period of thirty one (31) consecutive days during which time the whole of the plant shall operate continuously without readjustments or repair to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

M - 13

During the reliability trial test, performance tests shall be conducted on the refrigerating and air conditioning equipment. The test data shall not deviate by more than three percent from the guaranteed capacity data. Temperature readings shall be taken for the entering and leaving air of each air handling unit. Should any part of the apparatus or system fail to meet with the specification requirements, it shall be adjusted, repaired or replaced to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The complete performance test shall then be repeated. The date of commencement of the above said tests shall be subject to agreement with the Engineer. As soon as all tests prescribed in this clause are carried out satisfactorily in the opinion of the Engineer, a formal letter of completion shall be drawn up in three (3) copies and signed by the Engineer. During the maintenance period, the Contractor shall demonstrate that all equipment and apparatus fulfill the requirements of the specifications and he shall operate all fans, refrigeration and air conditioning equipment for a sufficient time to adjust all dampers, thermostats and controls and shall provide the Engineer with a complete log and report indicating air quantities, fan speed etc., throughout each of the various systems for the operating seasons. Maintenance Test During 400 days maintenance period, the operation and day to day routine maintenance of the plant and equipment shall be carried out by the owner's staff whereas the defects / failure in the plant and equipment not as a result of inadequate maintenance, shall be part of the Contractor's responsibility and shall be rectified free of cost by the Contractor. During the last month of the Maintenance period, the Contractor shall demonstrate to the Engineer that all equipment and systems are operating according to the capacities and the manner set down in the specifications. On completion of these tests, the Engineer shall issue a formal letter of acceptance for the equipment and system or parts of the system satisfactorily tested and approved. The Maintenance Certificate will not be issued to the Contractor by the Engineer until all plant has received the above mentioned letter of acceptance and/or unless a bank guarantee is provided by the Contractor for the performance of that part of the plant and equipment not formally tested and accepted.

M.12 AIR CONDITIONING PACKAGE UNITS


General The air conditioning unit shall be direct expansion air cooled, package type, factory assembled & charged, designed for outdoor installation. It should have multiple refrigeration system for efficient and part load operation. All controls should be located on one side of the unit and be readily accessible for maintenance, adjustment and service. The unit shall have built in duct connections for side discharge supply/return. The unit shall be manufactured in an ISO-9002 registered facility. The unit shall be factory tested prior to shipment and the cooling performance shall be rated in accordance with ARI testing procedures.

M - 14

Refrigerant Side (Condensing Unit Section) The condensing unit shall be factory assembled, piped internally fully charged with refrigerant 410A or 407C pre-wired and shall be designed to operate at outside ambient temperatures as high as 50C. Compressors should be hermetic scroll type and complete with vibration isolators, crankcase heaters, internal protection etc. Package unit shall have minimum two compressors each, connected to its own independent refrigeration circuit. Condenser fans shall be of propeller type, statically and dynamically balanced and directly driven by TEFC electric motor having Class B insulation with IP 54 protection. Complete fan assembly shall be provided with suitable acrylic coated fan guard. Fan motors shall have permanently lubricated bearings and inherent thermal overload protection. The condenser coil (s) should be constructed of seamless copper tube with pre-coated aluminum fins. Each refrigerant circuit should include the following: a. Thermostatic Expansion Valve. b. Combination filter drier. c. Crankcase heater. d. 6 minutes anti-recycling control e. Gauge port and connections on suction, discharge & liquid lines. f. High and low pressure cut-outs g. Solid state motor protector h. Refrigerant suction line insulation. j. Oil level sight glass Air Side (Evaporator Section) The evaporator coil (s) should be constructed of seamless copper tube with aluminum fins. The evaporator fan must be selected to deliver the required air quantity and fan motor to be of ample size to run without overloading at all operating speeds to allow for the necessary speed regulations. Fan belt drive shall include an adjustable pitch motor pulley. Fan motor shall be TEFC IP54 protection with minimum Class B ins ulation. Fan motors shall have permanently lubricated sealed bearings and inherent thermal overload protection. The panels should be easily removable to provide access for servicing. All supply and return air openings should be flanged for duct connections. The interior of the panels shall be insulated with minimum thick glass fibre insulation with neoprene coating. Cabinet The cabinet should be single enclosed, weather proof casing suitable for outdoor installation constructed of heavy gauge, galvanized steel with powdered paint finish. The top panels should have lip joint interlocking connections that are fully gasketed to ensure a water tight seal. Panels shall be easily removable for servicing and maintenance.

M - 15

Holes shall be provided in base rails to facilitate transit and overhead rigging. Condensate pan shall be fabricated of zinc coated steel with polyester powder paint or stainless steel. Air Filter Section Standard filter section shall consist of factory installed filters. The return air filters shall be synthetic fibre cleanable/washable type and be of 50 mm thickness. The dust resistance efficiency of air filters shall be between 90 to 95% depending upon operating resistance and air velocity. The filters should conform to ASHRAE 62-92 standards. Filters shall be accessible through a removable access door sealed airtight. For fresh air there shall be synthetic fibre cleanable/ washable type air filter of 50 mm thickness. All outside air intake shall be provided with bird screen, insect screen, filter and VCD. The thickness of the filter media for all the above said filters shall not be less than 45 mm. Microprocessor Control Panel Each package A/C unit shall be equipped with Microprocessor based control panel to enable monitoring and diagnostics of various functions. The control panel shall be manufacturers standard product and shall incorporate all provisions to be integrated with the Building Management System as specified in these documents. Energy Efficiency Ratio (EER) The package A/C units shall have minimum EER in accordance with local KAHRAMAA regulations and shall comply with ASHRAE 90.1 2007. The test standard shall be AR I 340/360 or AR I 390 as applicable. Units Control The units electrical control should include compressor contactor, condenser and evaporator fan contactors and control transformer. Safety controls shall include combination compressor winding thermostat, current overload device and phase failure protection. The unit power wiring shall enter at a single point through cable gland. Unit Protection Devices and Operation Sequences The unit shall be equipped with a room/duct mounted thermostat located as shown on the tender drawing. The operation switch shall be with a function of OFF -FAN-COOL. The operation control shall conform to manual starting, automatic continuous operation whenever the thermostat requires and the protection devices allow. The unit shall be restarted by resetting the operation switch if any one of the protection devices trips. A switch on the remote control box manually selects the ventilating or cooling operation. When the operating switch is set at FAN, the evaporator fan is started. When the operation switch is set at COOL and all electrical protective devices are satisfied, the thermostat controls the compressor operation. The whole sequence of operation shall be as described in the Building Management System.

M - 16

Noise Level and Sound Isolation Noise level inside the conditioned space resulting from the unit shall be kept within the specified limits when measured by an approved sound level meter. All the running equipment shall be isolated from the building structure and the supports isolated from the other items of equipment.

M.13

SPLIT AIR CONDITIONING UNIT (WALL MOUNTED) General The plant required shall consist of air cooled split type air conditioning unit of wall mounted type. The unit shall be composed of an indoor unit with refrigerant circuit and an air cooled outdoor unit for application with R.22 refrigerant. Indoor Unit The indoor wall mounted type A.C. unit shall comprise of an evaporator, evaporator fan, fan motor, air filter, liquid and gas inlets, strainer/drier, controls, internal wiring and piping all housed in a decorative sheet steel cabinet with baked resin paint. The cabinet interior shall be fully insulated to prevent sweating and to muffle the sound. The evaporator coils shall be the multi-pass, cross-finned tube type, equipped with aluminum plate fins, mechanically bonded to seamless oxygen free copper tubes. The coil shall be cleaned, dehydrated and tested for leakage at the factory. The evaporator fan shall be forward curved, centrifugal type, statically and dynamically balanced and directly driven by the motor. The fan motor shall be permanently lubricated. The evaporator fan must be selected to operate quietly with no overloading of fan motors. The air filter shall be washable type, long life as per manufacturer's standard. The panels should be easily removable to provide access for servicing. The refrigerant circuit shall have one shot coupling for liquid and gas inlets, a strainer, a capillary tube and an evaporator coil. Outdoor Unit The outdoor unit shall comprise of air cooled condenser, condenser fan and fan motor, suction and discharge outlets, liquid line shut-off valves and necessary safety controls such as crank-case heater, solid state motor protector, anti-recycling control etc., all as per manufacturer's standard. The outdoor unit shall be factory assembled, piped internally, pre-wired, charged with R.22 refrigerant and shall be designed to operate at outdoor ambient temperatures as high as 50C. The cabinet shall be constructed of steel, finished with baked synthetic resin paint. The fan guard wire net shall be mounted on top or side of the unit and shall be adequately protected against corrosion.

M - 17

The unit shall contain a hermetic multi-cylinder reciprocating / rotary compressor from the same manufacturer. The hermetic compressor shall be welded shell type and spring suspended internally. The compressor shall be protected against breakdown by the mercury over current relay, pressure switch and an in-built internal thermostat. The condenser coil shall be the multi-pass, cross-finned type, equipped with aluminum plate fins mechanically bonded to seamless oxygen free copper tubes. The coil shall be cleaned, dehydrated and tested for leakage at the factory. The condenser fan shall be propeller type with aluminum / PVC blades, statically and dynamically balanced and driven directly by the motor for up flow or horizontal air discharge. The motor shall be permanently lubricated and shall be protected from water invasion. The refrigerant circuit shall be composed of a gas inlet, one shot coupling, a condenser coil and a liquid outlet one shot coupling. Unit Control The indoor unit shall be equipped with an operation switch, fan speed selector switch and a thermostat mounted on the remote control switch for wall mounted units. The operation switch shall have the function of OFF-FAN-COOL. The operation control shall conform to manual starting, automatic continuous operation whenever the thermostat requires and protection devices allow. The unit shall be restarted by resetting the operation switch if any one of the protection devices trips. Protection Devices The magnetic switch box incorporated in the outdoor or indoor unit shall contain magnetic contactor for all motors, including condenser fan motor, over current relays and auxiliary relays. Noise Level and Sound Isolation (for Split Unit) Noise level inside the conditioned area resulting from the unit shall not exceed 50 dbA (NC 45) at low speed and 55 dbA (NC 50) at high speed when measured at one meter distance in a room with normal occupancy and furnishing. All the running equipment's shall be isolated from the building structure and the support isolated from other items of equipment. All the units shall have anti-vibration mountings of approved make and shall be as described elsewhere. Electrical Works The electrical works shall include the following: a. Provide all power and control wiring from isolator to outdoor unit, from outdoor unit to indoor D.P. switch, from D.P. Switch to indoor unit and the control panel. Provide earthing for A.C. equipment as per KAHRAMAA regulations.

b.

All electrical works shall be carried out in conformity with the current I.E.E. and KAHRAMAA regulations.

M - 18

Refrigerant Pipes Refrigerant pipework between the condensing unit and indoor unit shall be installed as per applicable ASHRAE standards and to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Refrigerant quality seamless cold drawn copper piping shall be used. Silver brazing alloy shall be used for making joints. The pipework will be run as indicated on the drawings and as per instructions. All necessary unions, flanged valves or fittings should be provided for disconnecting. In case the refrigerant piping is fabricated at site, the system shall be pressure tested with nitrogen to at least 1 times the working pressure for leaks, vacuum dried and then charged with refrigerant in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Factory supplied, pre insulated, precharged refrigerant piping kit may be used for the split unit of smaller capacity (upto 2.5 TR nominal). But this refrigerant piping shall be additionally wrapped with glass cloth and finished with two coats of vapor barrier compound. Thermal Insulation for Pipes The thermal insulation shall be non-corrosive to the metal, water repellent and fire resistant. Refrigerant suction lines and liquid lines (wherever required) shall be insulated with 19 mm thick foam rubber insulation. The insulation materials shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to ordering. All pipe surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned and treated with approved corrosion inhibitor before applying insulation. The pipe insulation shall be stuck to the pipework with an approved adhesive. The insulation shall be applied to the pipes with longitudinal joints staggered; laps and sealing strips shall be sealed applying adhesive on circumferential joints. Insulation shall be covered externally with 200 gm/sq.m. quality glass cloth and painted with two coats of approved weather proofing compound forming minimum thickness of 1 mm as per Kahra-maa regulations. Pipe Supports All refrigerant piping shall be supported to prevent deflection, buckling and vibration. Piping shall be supported at all changes in direction and at intervals of not more than 1.5 meters on straight runs. Pipe supports and clamps shall be subject to approval of the Engineer. Pipework on roof shall be supported on off-set clamps, floor or rikker stands. The pipe support stands shall be bolted to the concrete slab/base. Condensate drain pipe supports shall be capable of vertical adjustment after installation of piping.

M - 19

All pipework passing through the walls, floors and roof slabs shall be provided with pipe sleeves of adequate size to allow the passage of insulation. M.14 WINDOW AIR CONDITIONING UNITS Window air conditioning units shall comprise of direct expansion cooling coil, condenser, compressor, evaporator and condenser fans and washable filter. The entire air conditioner assembly shall be mounted on robust chassis which shall be easily removable from the casing for maintenance. The casing and components shall be of robust construction and all items shall be adequately protected against corrosion, sun, high outside temperature and humidity and have easy serviceability. The units shall incorporate all thermostatic controls, safety devices, relays etc., to ensure efficient and safe operation of the unit. Thermostat of the type lockable at the extreme setting shall not be acceptable. The following operating controls shall be provided: a. b. Fan speed selector to give BOOST-NORMAL-SLOW operation (i.e. extra quiet). Unit control knob to give OFF-FAN-COOL functions. The degree of cooling provided should be adjustable from a maximum to minimum. Exhaust air damper control.

c.

The condenser fan shall incorporate a condensate collecting ring in order to allow condensate to be thrown over the condenser coil. The condenser and evaporator coils shall be made out of copper tubes with aluminum fins. The fins shall be spaced at not more than 14 fins per 25.4 mm. The air conditioners shall be quiet in operation. Sound level shall not exceed 55 DBA (NC 50) at low speed and 60 DBA (NC 55) at high speed when measured at one meter distance in a room with normal occupancy and furnishing. M.15 DRINKING WATER COOLER (a) Fully Recessed Type The Contractor shall supply and install where shown on the drawings fully recessed drinking water fountain and cooler assembly with filter. Complete assembly to be one piece seamless construction of 16 gauge stainless steel polished in one direction to satin finish, with no exposed hinges, screws or raw edges. Fountain to have a minimum head room of 24 (600 mm) and be equipped with a chromed brass push button bubbler with an automatic flow regulator. Each unit shall be complete with factory installed glass filler, in-line strainer, cup dispenser and disposer having the same finish.

M - 20

(b)

Disabled Type The drinking water cooler for the disabled shall be wall mounted barrier free electric water cooler complete with bubbler head, waste strainer, push button operated valve with front accessible cartridge and flow adjustment. The grill/slots shall be designed to eliminate sharp edges and shall be backed with foam filter to protect the condensing unit from debris. The whole construction shall be in 16 gauge stainless steel with one piece rectangle bowl designed for extra durability and maintenance ease. The whole unit shall meet the standard regulations for the disabled.

The condensing unit for both type of coolers shall be hermetically sealed and suitable for refrigerant R-134 a. The minimum cooling capacity shall be 8 GPH. The unit shall be fitted with a 2 gallons capacity stainless steel 316L - storage tank so as to reduce the temperature of the incoming water. The cooler shall be suitable for 240 Volts 1 Phase 50 Hertz electric supply. The drinking water fountains shall be suitable for public use of Safe Drinking Water Act and Lead Contamination Control Act. All components in the waterway shall contain less than 0.1% lead. The Contractor shall seek approval before placing order of the above drinking water fountains. At each location of the water coolers one no. recess type and one no. disabled type cooler shall be provided. M.16 VIBRATION ISOLATORS All plant shall be isolated from the building structure and the supports isolated from other items of equipment. The Package A/C units shall be provided with suitable anti-vibration mountings. The anti-vibration mountings shall be installed in accordance with the maker's recommendations and the Mechanical Contractor shall ensure that the performance and type of isolator is suitable for the machinery to be installed. The Package units shall have anti-vibration mountings in the following form: Multi-layer rubber pads with square grid convolutions on both sides, spaced with steel shims and of a thickness to suit the points of uniform loading of the plant item, but of a minimum thickness of 32 mm spaced not more than 750 to 1000 mm apart. The condensing unit of split unit shall also have similar A.V. pads as described above. However, the thickness shall be 10 mm. M.17 CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPES Condensate drains shall be provided in copper pipes to BS 2871 Part 1 Table 'X' above ground and in UPVC to BS 5255 for vertical drops buried in the walls, in floors or below ground and shall be adequately supported along their length. All condensate drains shall be fitted with 75 mm deep trap with dirt pocket and removable plug provided and extended to the nearest drains/soakaways as shown on the drawings. Removable plugs shall be provided at every change in direction to allow rodding access.

M - 21

All surface mounted condensate drains within the building shall be insulated with 10 mm thick rubber foam and weather proofed to the satisfaction of the Engineer. All exposed pipes external to the building shall be painted with two coats of paint matching with the building color. M.18 DUCTWORK The Contractor shall provide and erect all ductwork including controls, isolating/balancing dampers, grilles, diffusers and vapor proof insulation to form a complete air distribution system as indicated on the tender drawings. The Contractor shall balance, test and commission all installations prior to the Engineer issuing a Completion Certificate. Shop drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer prior to the commencement of works. All sheet metal ductwork shown on the drawings, specified or required for various air conditioning and ventilating systems, shall be fabricated and finished from best quality, cold rolled annealed galvanized mild steel sheets of soft bending quality specially suitable for air conditioning works. Materials used for ductwork, shall be free from blisters, pits and imperfections in coating. All bracing and re-inforcement angles shall be preferably galvanized or made of black steel properly cleaned from rust and painted with two prime coats of zinc-chromate paint prior to installation, as approved by the Engineer. Angles shall be carried around all four sides of ducts. Reinforcing angles shall be fixed to the ducts by means of bolted joints made with cadmium plated or galvanized steel hexagonal nuts and bolts with flat steel washers to the following sizes : * * 25 mm angles 38 mm angles : : 6 mm diameter bolts at 10 cm centers 8 mm diameter bolts at 10 cm centers

Pockets, locks, deflectors and all branch ducts which need joints between two sheet metal pieces, shall be made by aluminum rivets 5 mm diameter by 10 mm length minimum size having head at one side. Rivets will be as specified in HVAC/DW/142. Ductwork shall be so constructed that when erected, it shall be made air tight by tightly sealing after fabrication and free from movement, sagging or drumming under all operating conditions. It shall be true to size and accurately lined-up. While the tender drawings shall be adhered to as closely as possible, runs and sizes of ductwork may be varied only by the Engineer, at no extra cost to the Employer, when deemed necessary for co-ordination purpose with other works. All duct elbows having an inside radius smaller than the width of the elbow shall be equipped with approved vanes tightly riveted to the duct and in general as shown on the details of the tender drawings. Approved duct-turn shall be installed in all cases where 90 degree square elbows are used and short take-offs are used on large ducts. Guide splitter vanes shall not be spaced more than 15 cm apart.

M - 22

Take-offs from main ducts shall be conical. All take-offs and connections shall be constructed to minimize pressure loss. All raw edges of ductwork seams, rivets and areas where galvanizing has been destroyed shall be cleaned, prepared and painted with zinc rich paint at works and a further coat shall be applied after erection. Allowances shall be made in ductwork construction for instruments and control connections and adequate local stiffening shall be incorporated to provide rigid mountings. The fabrication of ductwork shall be carried out in accordance with HVAC/DW/142, ASHRAE or SMACNA standards.

Laboratory Area Ductwork (Chemistry Lab) The laboratory area ductwork including all related accessories for exhaust shall be of PVC / Polyethylene / GRP. Contractor shall submit the material for Engineers approval.

Material Galvanized Sheet Hot dip galvanized steel shall be to ASTM-A527-87 standard, steel shall be of lock forming quality, zinc coating designation Z-27 or equivalent approved standard. Pre-insulated flexible ducting for the linear diffusers shall be suitable for low / medium pressure. The inner core shall shield the fiber glass insulation from the air stream. The outer jacket shall be of very tough spirally reinforced multilayer aluminum laminated construction. Duct sealant shall be non hardening, non migrating mastic or liquid sealant as compounded and recommended by the manufacturer specially for sealing joint and seams in the duct. Aluminum alloy sheet shall be easy to form and to join and shall have extra resistance to moist atmosphere (BS 1470).

Flexible Ducting

Duct Sealant

Aluminum

PVC / Polyethylene/ GRP -

Suitable material shall be proposed by the Contractor for Engineers approval.

M - 23

M.19

MANUAL DAMPERS

Damper Quadrants All dampers other than dampers behind registers shall be fitted with substantial locking cast metal quadrants. Quadrants shall be mounted outside the duct in an accessible position. On insulated ducts, the quadrants shall be fastened to bearing plates flush with the outside finish of the insulation. Volume Control Dampers Manual volume control dampers shall be provided as shown on the drawings or as required additionally for balancing purposes. The dampers shall have sturdy corrosion resistant construction. All dampers shall have multi-leaf double skin aerofoil section opposed blades. Individual blades should not exceed 1200 mm in length or 175 mm in width. Double skin blades shall be made out of minimum 22 gauge galvanized steel sheet. Damper frames shall be galvanized made out of 16 gauge steel sheet. Single blade dampers with single skin blade section may be used for damper sizes upto 300 x 150 mm. Single skin blades shall be fabricated from 18 gauge galvanized steel sheet. The blades shall be securely bolted to plated steel spindles, the ends of which shall be extended to the outside of the duct with a groove in line with the blade. Spindles shall be carried in brass or nylon bearings. The control linkage shall be outside the air stream. Clear air flow area equal to the duct size shall be maintained within the damper frame. Maximum clearance between the blades and between the blades and the frame shall be limited to 3 mm. It should be noted that the dampers shall be separate and independent from the dampers, hereafter specified to be set behind registers and diffusers. Splitter Dampers At each point of division in a supply duct, where a branch is taken off a trunk, an adjustment splitter or deflecting damper shall be fitted, two gauges heavier than the duct, with the operating rod and locking quadrant as above, with length extending through the duct to externally mounted bearing plates. These deflecting dampers shall be permanently set and locked in position after completion of the installation and adjustment. Non-return Dampers Non-return dampers shall be manufactured similar to duct dampers but shall incorporate additionally, felt rubber or neoprene strips on long edges of blades to ensure positive shut-off and quiet closure.

Dampers on fresh air inlets shall be similarly edged to prevent ingress of dust and sand particles.

M - 24

Motorized Dampers Motorized dampers shall be provided in the positions indicated on the drawings. Dampers shall be constructed of galvanized steel sheet or extruded aluminum frame in natural anodized finish. All dampers shall have multi-leaf double skin aerofoil section opposed blades. The blade shaft shall be in steel / brass and bearing section in PVC or ball bearings. Dampers shall be two stage type with motor suitable for 24 volt supply (low voltage) and tied to the timer for fresh air intake control. Location of all dampers shall be identified by fixing different colored pins on the false ceiling tiles. M.20 FIRE DAMPERS Fire dampers shall be of the galvanized steel curtain type. The steel blades of the damper curtain shall fold completely upon themselves and be stacked at one end of the damper outside the air stream. The dampers shall be arranged for vertical or horizontal operation as detailed on the drawing. The damper fusible links shall be rated at 72C. The fire dampers shall be constructed generally to the same standards of air tightness as the rest of the system. Both the curtain and the fusible link shall be accessible for servicing through air tight inspection doors placed up and down stream wherever possible. Each access door shall be of a minimum size of 450 mm square or full duct width on ducts less than 450 mm. Each damper shall be rated at 2 hours fire resistance. Dampers shall be fitted in all fire-break walls and other fire barriers as indicated on the contract drawings. Ducting dampers and casings are to be manufactured in strict compliance with BS 476 Part 8 and appropriate fire and other statutory regulations for fire damper specifications where such exist (otherwise to HVAC specifications DW/142). The fire damper frame shall not be less than 18 G thick. Any necessary fixing framework shall be supplied and installed by the Contractor.

M - 25

M.21

TEST HOLES

The test holes shall be provided in the horizontal side of the duct and shall be of 22 mm dia fitted with an effective removable seal. The test holes shall be located at the following locations : i. ii. iii. iv. v. M.22 At fans (in the straight section of duct near to fan outlet) At cooling coils At main branches after regulating dampers At any other position as per Engineer's requirements. Location of test holes shall be marked on the duct surface or on the insulation.

FRESH AIR INTAKE AND OUTLET LOUVRES

All fresh air inlets shall be fitted with double skin opposed blade volume control dampers, sand traps, insect wire mesh and filter as indicated on the drawings. All fresh air inlets shall be fitted with aluminum mesh bird screens and louvers in addition to 50 mm thick washable metallic filters. Filter media thickness shall not be less than 45 mm, having same efficiency as filters for AHUs. Fresh air louvers shall be of extruded aluminum having color / finish as approved by the Engineer. Louver blade extrusion shall be of a design to prevent ingress of rain and shall be approved by the Engineer. Exhaust air outlets shall be fitted with aluminum mesh bird screens. Fresh air intake for the Internal Courtyard and Multi-purpose Hall air handling unit shall be provided with two stage motorized damper in order to regulate the fresh air to 50% in the event when these areas are not fully occupied. M.23 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS Flame proof flexible connections shall be fitted on all intake and discharge connections of fans and air conditioning units for preventing the transmission of vibration through the ducts to occupied spaces. Flexible connections shall also be provided where ductwork passes across building expansion joints. Flexible connections shall be factory fabricated from chemically impregnated canvas. Connections shall fit closely and be secured in airtight fashion to connections to ductwork, fans and apparatus.

M - 26

The material shall have a penetration time of at least fifteen minutes when tested in accordance with BS 476 and shall remain flexible and without strain or distortion. Flexible connections shall be 150 mm minimum and 250 mm maximum in length. M.24 DUCT HANGERS AND SUPPORTS Ductwork shall be supported by means of pre-galvanized fully threaded drop rods and also preferably galvanized mild steel angle/channel sections, with spacing between supports not exceeding 2.4 m and projecting 100 mm on either side to allow for proper insulation. Rectangular Duct
Maximum Duct size (longer side) mm Supporting bottom angle iron - mm Alternative flat iron mm Rod hanger dia. mm Bolt dia. mm

400 600 1000 1500 2000 3000 Circular Duct


Maximum Duct dia.

25x25x1.5 25x25x3 30x30x3 40x40x3 40x40x4 According to circumstances


Supporting stirrup mm

25x0.8 25x3 30x3 40x5 40x5 40x6

6 8 8 10 10 12

6 8 8 10 10 12

Rod hanger mm

Bolt. dia. mm

305 813 1016 1524

25x0.8 30x4.0 40x5.0 50x5.0

6 8 10 15

6 8 8 15

All channels and angles shall be pre- galvanized and the cut edges shall be treated with two coats of red primer and zinc chromate paint prior to erection. Ductwork supports shall preferably be positioned close to dampers, diffusers and all similar equipment. Ductwork supports shall in general conform to HVAC/DW/142 or SMACNA standards. Contractor to submit complete details for approval before fixing.

M - 27

M.25

GRILLES, REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS General Air outlets and air inlets of an approved make, type and model shall be provided with sizes as indicated on the drawings. They shall be fitted with sponge rubber gasket behind the frames and nylon bushings at the blades connection to the frame. All air outlets and inlets shall be of white powder coated extruded aluminum / custom proprietary finish and a sample of all air devices must be approved by the Engineer prior to ordering. Grilles and Registers Supply and return air registers shall have individually adjustable horizontal front blades, vertical rear blades and shall be equipped with opposed blade dampers. Exhaust air registers shall be single deflection fixed horizontal blades and be equipped with opposed blade volume control damper. Exhaust air grilles shall be similar to exhaust air registers but without volume control dampers. Outside air louvers shall be equipped with insect screen. Wooden frames with grooved jointed pattern shall be used with all grilles and registers and shall be supplied and installed by the Contractor. Diffusers The diffusers shall be fitted with opposed blade volume control dampers as furnished by the manufacturer. Volume controls for these outlets shall be accessible through the outlet from below the ceiling and shall maintain their setting, when adjusted. Each diffuser shall be provided with sponge rubber or felt gasket and angle ring or frame for securing to ductwork. Return air diffusers shall be identical to supply air diffusers. Diffusers shall be of the type and shape indicated on the drawings, a sample of which must be approved by the Engineer prior to ordering. Door Grilles/Undercuts Door grilles shall be of the inverted 'V' blade type, not permitting vision through the grille blades and not more than 12 mm apart. Minimum free area shall be at least 50%. Louvers shall be of the double frame type with a frame on each side of the door. Undercuts shall be provided on doors wherever indicated on the drawings. Jet Diffusers Jet diffusers shall be of approved make, aluminum construction. Jet diffusers shall also be fitted with opposed blade dampers.

M - 28

Alternative Contractor can offer circular adjustable diffusers of aluminum construction, however, throw and noise level should comply with the requirement and specifications. The circular diffusers shall also be fitted with opposed blade dampers. Note : i. All diffusers, grilles, registers, linear diffusers etc., shall be powder coated including the pattern adjustment and volume control elements in linear diffusers to match the interior finish or as advised by the Engineer. No internal insulation or lining shall be used inside the ducts, plenums etc.

ii. M.26

AIR CURTAINS Air curtains shall be supplied and installed above all the student's entrances in the areas as shown on the drawing. Air curtains shall be provided to prevent the loss of air conditioning due to opening of doors by the incoming and outgoing persons to and from the school building and also to prevent / minimize infiltration of dirt, dust / flying objects along with the nonconditioned outdoor air to the conditioned area. Thus the air curtains shall provide an invisible barrier for an unobstructed view for the persons. The air curtains shall be suitable for continuous operation, fitted with heavy duty motor. Air curtain shall be provided with magnetic-switch with the doors so that they will start when the door opens and stop when the door closes. Each air curtain shall be provided with three speed regulator.

M.27

ACCESS DOORS Wherever necessary, the Contractor shall provide suitable access openings to permit inspection, operation and maintenance of all filters, controls, dampers, fire dampers, bearings or other apparatus. Doors shall be of double skin construction of not less than 20 gauge metal sheet and shall have sponge rubber gaskets around their entire perimeter. On insulated ductwork, the space between the inner and outer door sheets shall be insulated as specified for ductwork and insulation thickness be equal to duct insulation. All access doors in sheet metal shall be air tight and shall be hinged or liftoff type and secured in the closed position by means of cam latches.

M.28

SOUND ATTENUATORS All air ductworks shall be attenuated to limit the noise level to the values specified in the design criteria. The method of fabrication and supporting ducts should be such as to avoid generation of noise because of air movement or drumming of sheet metal.

M - 29

The silencers shall be provided in the supply and return air ducts as shown on the tender drawings. The silencers shall be constructed and tested according to BS 4773 Part 1971 and ASHRAE Standard 36 B-63 for dynamic insertion loss, self generated noise and aerodynamic performance. The outer casing of the silencers shall be constructed of 22 gauge galvanized sheet steel. Baffles shall be made of 24 gauge perforated galvanized steel, filled with an odourless, incombustible, vermin and moisture proof inorganic sound absorbing material. The fill shall be compressed 10% and shall be of a density sufficient to meet catalogued performance. The acoustical fill shall have the following minimum ratings - flame spread not over 25, smoke developed not over 20. The silencers construction shall be such that perforated sheet shall cover the black neoprene sheet over the insulation in order to avoid ingress of fiber particles. The silencers shall be complete with flanges to facilitate their removal for inspection. Externally, the silencers shall be insulated in the same manner as the adjoining air ducting. The Contractor shall carry out sound absorption calculations with respect to the characteristics and the duct system to ensure the proper selection of silencers. Cross Talk Silencers In order to dampen the noise within the specified limits classrooms to corridor return air passage shall be provided with cross talk silencers as shown on the tender drawings. Cross talk silencers shall be similar in construction as detailed above, however, sound absorbing material shall have minimum density of 50 kg/m to meet the required performance. Cross talk silencers shall be suitable to isolate noise from adjacent areas. They shall be selected to meet the sound transmission loss properties of walls, ceilings or doors separating the rooms. M.29 INSULATION General All insulating materials required for piping, mechanical equipment, ductwork etc., shall be furnished and installed under this section of the specifications. The thermal insulation shall be non-corrosive to the metal, water repellent and fire-retardant. All metal surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned and treated with approved corrosion inhibitor before applying insulation. Inhibitor coating will not be required for galvanized surfaces. All surfaces to be insulated shall be dry and free of loose scale, dirt, oil or water, when insulation is applied. Application and completion shall be of highest quality and shall comply with BS 5244 and CP 3005. Insulation shall be carried out neatly and to a high standard by skilled workers, experienced in the trade. Insulation shall be applied in such a manner that there will be no air circulation within the insulation or between the insulation and the applied surface. Surface imperfections in the insulation such as chipped edges, small joints or cracks and small voids not over 25 mm square shall be filled with light insulating material or with insulating cement. Samples of all materials proposed for use shall be submitted.

M - 30

All duct flanges, stiffeners and inspection doors etc., shall be insulated in accordance with the recommended practices and to the Engineer's approval. Where a vapor barrier is fixed at site, it shall be fixed in such a manner as to obviate the possibility of moisture penetration. No piping, ducts or equipment shall be insulated until tested and approved for air/water tightness. Insulation for all services shall be continued through sleeves. The insulation on exposed risers extend through the floor slab. All materials including fixing and furnishing materials shall be rated Grade 'P' when tested for ignitability as defined in BS 476 - Part 4. Thermal Insulation to Ductwork (Internal) and Exhaust Ducts (Internal / External) Ductwork internal to the building shall be insulated with 25 mm thick rigid fiber glass insulation of 48 kg/m3 density covered with re-inforced aluminum foil. The insulation for the round ductwork shall be flexible fiber glass blanket of not less than 24 kg/m3 density with reinforced aluminum foil and thickness of 50 mm compressed to 25 mm during application. The Contractor shall ensure that the surface to be insulated is completely cleaned and free from dust before applying the insulation. The method of application shall be as follows: An approved adhesive material shall be applied on the entire surface of duct-wall and entire surface of insulation. In addition, adhesive shall also be applied on insulation butt and lap joints. The adhesive applied to the insulation shall cover evenly the faces to be fixed, the surfaces forming the longitudinal joint and the surfaces forming the circumferential joint. Upon the application of the approved adhesive, the insulation shall be fixed in position immediately and permanently. Adhesive tape, not less than 75 mm wide, shall be used to seal both the circumferential and longitudinal joints. Suitable GI angle edges shall be applied on the four corners of square and rectangular ducts as an additional protection. Cover and secure 200 g/sq. meter high quality canvas cloth while it is wet (soaked in approved vapor sealant) and then wrap carefully to become a vapor seal with a smooth surface free from wrinkling and gaps. Ensure that the overlap shall be 50 mm minimum. After it is dry, apply further brush coats of vapor seal to the Engineer's satisfaction. The vapor seal material shall be fire-resistant, non-toxic, weather resistant and of anti-fungus quality. Alternatively, the Contractor may propose self adhesive type cross linked polyethylene insulation of minimum 15mm thickness complete with factory applied aluminium foil. Contractor shall be obliged to obtain engineers approval before ordering any alternative materials.

M - 31

Thermal Insulation to External Ductwork Ductwork external to the building shall be insulated in the same manner as the internal ductwork but the insulation thickness shall be 50 mm and covered with glass cloth. For insulating the underside of the internal and external ducts whose longest side is more than 600 mm, apply plastic hangers and washers riveted to the duct as additional supports. Hangers shall be provided at 300 mm centers. Thermal Conductivity The duct insulation (both internal and external) shall have a thermal conductivity of 0.036 W/MC. at a mean temperature of 24C. Thermal Insulation (Circular Duct) The circular ductwork in the Multi-purpose hall and Internal Courtyards shall be insulated with 50 mm thick fiber glass flexible blanket type insulation of density not less than 24 kg/m. 50 mm thick insulation shall be compressed to 25 mm thick during application. The flexible fiber glass strips of the mattress shall be assembled at right angles to the original plane. The insulation shall be covered with 200 g/sq.m. high density glass cloth and soaked in weather proofing compound of approved make in a similar manner as described for internal ducts. Treated hardwood / plastic inserts or high density polyurethane insulation capable of withstanding compression shall be provided at the locations of duct hangers. The outer surface of the insulated circular duct shall be painted with suitable colors, if required by the Architect. Contractor to submit the complete system for Engineer's approval. M.30 EXHAUST FANS General Exhaust fans shall be supplied and installed by the Contractor as shown on the drawings. Capacity, type and rating of the fans shall be as indicated in the schedule. The fan motors and switches shall be in accordance with this specification regarding electrical works. Fixing details shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. All roof fans shall be suitable to operate for 50C. ambient temperature.

M - 32

Wall Mounted Fans The wall mounted extract fans shall be sheet metal propeller type having totally enclosed, Class 'B' insulation, shaded pole/capacitor, start/run motor in aluminum alloy casing, protected by thermal overload cut-out having the following components.

i. ii. iii. iv. v.

Box enclosure including electrical terminal box. Non lubricating ball bearings. Fan casing, fan impeller and tightly sealed dust proof fan motor. Automatic shutter and outer grille. Fans shall be low speed for silent operation.

As an alternative, heat resistant plastic fans, if offered shall have the above components except for the fan casing and impeller construction. The Contractor shall also produce a certificate of approval from Qatar Fire Department and further it shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. Twin Roof mounted / In-line Extract Fans The fan unit shall comprise of a duplicate fan assembly complete with motors and drives mounted on a heavy duty unit base plate by anti-vibration mountings. The fans shall be direct/belt driven with double inlet forward curved centrifugal impellers running on two life-long lubricated bearings. The fan unit shall be fitted with automatic shutters to prevent air recirculation through standby fan and blow back when not in use. The fan impeller shall be of Aluminum/GI. construction. The fan unit electric motors shall be manufactured in accordance with BS 5000 and be of the shaded pole or capacitor start and run type suitable for an electrical supply of 240 volts, single phase, 50 Hz and capable of operating in ambient conditions as described earlier. The fan unit shall have air operated flow switches fitted, arranged to change over to the standby fan in the event of the selected fan failing and also to provide a fault signal. The fan unit shall be prewired with switches and isolators to a single terminal box on the casing. The unit casing shall be constructed from aluminum alloy with centrally positioned inlet spigot and access panel to allow ease of service. Twin in-line extract fans shall have flexible connections at both inlet and outlet of the fan. All twin fans shall be provided with twin fan control, automatic duty sharing. Controllers shall be manual system On / Off via the touch button with automatic duty fan change over every 12 hours. Status LED indication Fan / System Failure. Canteen / Kitchen Extract Fans Roof mounted kitchen extract fans shall be suitable for use in the kitchen exhaust system for a combustible grease laden air stream. The exhaust fan shall be of aluminum construction, upblast type. The impeller shall be of backward curved centrifugal type, statically and dynamically balanced of aluminum construction.

M - 33

The fan motor and drive components shall be out of the air stream and protected by a weather proof cover. The fan shall be provided with accessible weather proof electrical isolator (disconnect switch). The fan drive assembly shall be provided with an adjustable pitch pulley to adjust the fan speed for air balancing the exhaust air quantity. The fan shall be provided with a drain connection for drainage of grease, water, or other residue and a grease trap of aluminum construction to collect grease residue, avoiding drainage onto roof surface. The selection of the exhaust fans shall be made using a safety factor of +20% for the calculated maximum fan static air pressure requirement and +15% for the design fan exhaust air volume flow rate. Fan shall be provided with two speed controller as per the cfm required as indicated on the drawing. Laboratory Extract Units The laboratory extract units shall be GRP bladed axial flow / bifurcated type and suitable to handle the chemical fumes / mixed corrosive fumes etc. Fans and motors shall be mounted on a frame or support base and the complete assembly isolated from the casing to prevent the transmission of vibration. All parts exposed to fumes shall be non-metallic and the motor shall be outside air stream type. Fan casing shall be weather proof and be resistant to solar radiation and constructed from GRP. Alternatively, metallic fan with epoxy coating on all the parts exposed to fumes shall be provided. The casing construction shall allow fan withdrawal including access panels for maintenance and incorporate a weathering skirt for mounting directly on to a roof opening curb. Non-metallic back draught dampers and bird guard shall be provided at the outlet of fan / cowl. A weather proof isolator shall be provided for the fan motors. The fans shall be rated to IP 55 and suitable for outdoor installation. Roof Extract Fans - Single (Multi-purpose Hall and Internal Courtyards) The fan unit shall comprise of a fan assembly complete with motors and drives mounted on a heavy duty unit base plate by anti-vibration mountings. The fans shall be direct/belt driven with double inlet forward curved centrifugal impellers running on two life-long lubricated bearings. The fan impeller shall be of aluminum construction. The fan unit shall be fitted with automatic shutters to prevent air blow back when not in use. The fan unit electric motors shall be manufactured in accordance with BS 5000 and be of the shaded pole or capacitor start and run type suitable for an electrical supply of 240 volts, single phase, 50 Hz and capable of operating in ambient conditions as described earlier. The fan unit shall be prewired with switches and isolators to a single terminal box on the casing. The unit casing shall be constructed from aluminum alloy with centrally positioned inlet spigot and access panel to allow ease of service. The fan for the Multi-purpose Hall shall be in-line type.

M - 34

Kitchen Exhaust Hood The kitchen exhaust hood shall be provided by the A.C. Contractor. The kitchen exhaust hood shall be constructed from 18 gauge stainless steel 304. The hood shall be constructed using double wall and standing seam method. All seams shall be welded and liquid tight. All unexposed interior surfaces shall be constructed of minimum 18 gauge corrosion resistant steel including but not limited to ducts, plenum and bracket. The hood shall include supply air plenum with perimeter supply at minimum two sides. The hood shall be provided with grease filter and grease trough which shall drain into a removable grease container. The exhaust hood shall be upto Engineers approval. M.31 INSTRUMENTS Manometers Inclined type differential pressure manometers shall be installed to measure the pressure drop across the filters. The manometers shall be provided across mixed return air filters at each Package unit. The manometers shall be of metallic construction and shall be suitable for outdoor installation. M.32 ELECTRICAL WORKS General All electrical works and materials shall be as described under the Electrical specifications and shall conform to the regulations of Ministry of Electricity and Water. All electrically operated equipment shall be so designed that it will continue to function without damage to itself or otherwise, if the voltage and/or frequency vary within the following tolerances: i. ii. Voltage Frequency 6% 0.3%

All electrically operated equipment shall be suitable for continuous and prolonged operation within the ambient temperature or exposed condition to the atmosphere where they are installed to operate. Allowance for the local high ambient temperature shall be made by reducing the permitted rise of temperature above ambient or by derating the capacity and ratings. Electrical Motors All motors shall be designed to suit the maximum temperature of air passing over the motors and the additional temperature rise caused by exposure to the sun. The type of winding insulation shall, however, be not less than Class 'B'. The motors for exhaust fans shall have the insulation suitable to operate on 50C. ambient temperature.

M - 35

All motors smaller than 0.50 kW shall be designed to operate on single phase. All motors 0.75 kW and above shall be designed to operate on three phase. All motors shall be wound for 240 volts, single phase, or 415 volts, 3 phase, 50 Hz, A.C. system. Any motors brought to site not complying with above mentioned voltage and insulation requirements shall not be accepted. Electrical Wiring All power cabling up to and including isolators to the Package units, split units and fan controlled isolator as indicated on the drawing shall be carried out by the Electrical Contractor. The electric supply shall be terminated into the main incomer of the control panel/isolator. It is the A.C. Contractor's responsibility to continue the connections from the isolator up to all the air conditioning and ventilation units. The A.C. Contractor shall be responsible for complete electrical equipment/controls associated with the Air conditioning and Ventilation works. A.C. Contractor's scope of works shall include but not be limited to the following : All control wiring including necessary conduits, cables, cable trays etc., for the air conditioning equipment, controls and remote emergency push buttons (if required), etc. All HVAC control components such as flow switches, temperature sensors, thermostats etc., are to be wired to control panel and other associated components using armoured cable on galvanized cable rack / tray. Power cabling to isolators of A/Cunits and power cabling from isolators to fans etc. shall be carried out by the A.C. Contractor. In case of remote installed A.C. control panels, the power cabling from the control panel upto the isolator near the A.C. equipment shall be carried out by the Electrical Contractor. (For continuity, refer electrical drawings and specifications). Specifications for conduits, cables, cable trays to conform to electrical specifications. Power cabling from the controller of twin extract fans to the actual fan units. Starters All three phase motors for A.C. units shall be provided with D.O.L. / Star Delta starters having the following facilities : i. ii. iii. iv. v. To disconnect the supply in the event of power failure or voltage drop. To protect the motor from overload in each phase. Start/stop push button. ON/OFF/TRIP indicating lamp. Single phase preventer

All three phase starters shall have thermal overload protection in each phase as well as under voltage reset plus two auxiliary normal open contacts. Isolators All electrical drives shall have local isolators, weather proof to IP 55. Isolators shall be of reputed manufacturers, up to Engineer's approval.

M - 36

Earthing All motors starting equipment panels shall have their frames, carcasses and all metal parts effectively and continuously connected to the general mass of the earth. Testing All wiring within control panels shall be works checked, prior to despatch, for loose connections, correct terminations and compliance with wiring diagrams. In addition, functional checks shall be carried out in the works to ensure that all interlocking and sequencing is in accordance with the performance requirements of the specification. The Engineer shall be given 7 days written notice of such tests so that he may attend if he so desires. With all control circuits disconnected but with all isolators closed and power fuses fitted, the panels shall be subjected to a voltage test of 2.5 kV for one minutes, across the following points : a. b. c. d. Phase to phase Phase to neutral Phase to earth Neutral to earth

Certified schedules detailing all tests and their results shall be submitted to the Engineer within fourteen days of the test.

Approval of Workmanship Standards The standard of workmanship shall comply with the requirements of the Engineer who shall carry out periodic inspections of completed work and work in progress. Any work not to the Engineer's satisfaction during such inspection shall be replaced to a standard satisfactory to the Engineer at no cost to the contract for the subsequent inspection. Tags, Color Coding All equipment shall be properly identified by means of permanent tags. All components shall be labeled in the control panel as per the approved drawings. All wires shall be color coded in accordance with the Electrical regulations of the Kahra-maa. Labeling system shall be agreed with the Engineer. Wiring and Regulation All installation shall comply with the Electrical regulations of Kahra-maa.

M - 37

M.33

CONTROL SYSTEM The air conditioning installation shall be capable of automatic operation. Necessary operational and safety controls shall be provided for all AC equipment. Low voltage control system shall be preferred. The location of controls should permit easy access for calibration, adjustment and maintenance. The Contractor shall submit the control schematic diagrams indicating the single line from all the control functions in sequential order, control wiring diagram and power wiring from control panel as a whole to the Engineer for his approval. Temperature Sensors Space mounted temperature sensors wherever required shall have suitable ranges on either sides of set point. Sensors shall be of corrosion resistant construction, suitable for mounting on a vibrating surface. The sensors shall be provided with suitable fixing arrangement. Averaging element sensors shall be provided when the duct area exceed 0.4 m or when installed within air handling equipment. Pipe mounted temperature sensors shall be insertion type complete with a stainless steel pocket/immersion tube for pipe entry. For electronic control systems the measuring element shall be either incorporated into a copper capillary for averaging type or enclosed in a stainless steel immersion housing or tubular probe. The accuracy shall be 0.5C. All sensors shall be of non-adjustable construction calibrated at the manufacturer's works and be provided complete with the manufacturer's mounting brackets/flanges etc. Package A/C Unit Controls The package unit shall be started by space mounted operation switch which shall have the function of OFF-FAN-COOL. The operation shall be controlled by either duct mounted or room thermostat. Some of the areas will be controlled by VAV boxes as shown in the drawings. The details of the single duct relief box shall be as follows: The box shall consist of a single primary air damper that shall proportion the total primary air through the box to either the ceiling plenum or the space as dictated by the space thermostat demand. The flow into the relief box shall remain essentially constant regardless of the primary damper position. The box casing shall be fabricated of minimum 22 gauge zinc coated steel, and shall be lined with minimum 1 thick 11/2 pcf glass fiber which conforms to NFPA 90A. A radiated noise shroud shall limit the radiated sound levels not to exceed those shown in the air terminal unit schedule. A bypass adjustment damper shall be located on the top of the unit to allow for field balancing of the unit to maintain a constant total flow to the unit from maximum by pass to zero bypass. A balancing damper (by others) shall be located a minimum of three diameters up-stream of the relief box to adjust the constant volume flow to the unit.

M - 38

Exhaust Fan Controls Roof mounted twin exhaust fans and in-line type twin fans shall be controlled from automatic starters installed as shown on the drawings. All other fans shall be controlled through their respective control panels. Interlinking shall also be carried out as detailed elsewhere. Volt free control for BMS monitoring shall be provided for future monitoring. Smoke Detectors Smoke detectors suitable for duct mounting shall be installed in the main return air duct adjacent to Package units. The smoke detectors shall be photo-electric obscuration type and interlocked with air handling unit to stop it in the event of smoke detection. Smoke detectors shall be interlocked with fire alarm system by the Electrical Contractor. The smoke detectors shall be suitable for operation on 240 volts and shall have two volt-free relay contacts. These relays shall be energized only when the smoke detector operates on detection of smoke. It shall be manual reset type. The Detector shall be installed in a weather proof enclosure having air intake, exhaust and sampling tube. Top cover will be clear to see smoke inside same as SIMPLEX MODEL NO: 4098-9845. Time Schedule Control The starting and stopping of Package A/C units shall be carried out by the selector switch. Fresh Air Control Fresh air intake for the Package unit serving Internal Courtyard and Multi-purpose Hall shall be provided with two stage motorized dampers. The modulating motors of these two stage dampers shall be operated from the controller based upon the momentary push button signal in the respective unit control panel to regulate the fresh air to 50 100% in the event when these areas are having full occupancy. Building Management System The operation of the HVAC System shall be controlled & monitored through a dedicated BMS system. Please refer to the specifications and drawings nos. BMS-1 & 2 for details.

M - 39

M.34

BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS

Part 1 - GENERAL 1.1 Provide a Building Automation System (BAS) incorporating an open system technology in the network methodology and management, programming tools and data exchange to control the specified HVAC, Lighting, Card Access and other related building systems. The BAS shall consist of Direct Digital Control controllers, Network Devices, Graphical User Interface, sensors, relays, valves, actuators, and other equipment as may be necessary to provide for a complete and operational control system for the HVAC and other building related systems as described within these specifications. The definition of an Open System shall be defined within these specifications and subject to interpretation by the owner and their designated representative. All manufacture specific BAS and installing contractors shall be required to demonstrate their Open System BAS to the owner and their representative and gain qualification approval prior to submission of bids for this project. Qualification approval does not exempt the manufacture or the installing contractor from any of the requirements contain with this specification or of subsequent addendums.
A.

B.

C.

D.

The system installed shall seamlessly connect devices other than HVAC throughout the building regardless of subsystem type, i.e. HVAC, lighting, and security devices shall easily coexists on the same network channel without the need for gateways. All VAV controllers and all other field installed controllers for the HVAC system shall be provided by one manufacturer. Any components not supplied by the primary BAS manufacturer shall be integrated to share common software for network communications, time scheduling, alarm handling, and history logging. The documentation contained in this section and other contract documents pertaining to HVAC Controls is schematic in nature. The Contractor shall provide hardware and software necessary to implement the functions shown or as implied in the contract documents. System configuration and monitoring shall be performed via a PC-type computer. Under no circumstances shall the PC be used as a control device for the network. It can be used for storage of data. All system controllers shall utilize a peer-to-peer communications scheme to communicate with each other. The use of a higher level controller to perform control logic other than alarm, trends and schedules shall not be accepted.

1.2

Open Systems Design. The intent of the specification contained herein is to provide for an open interoperable Building Automaton System (BAS). The BAS provided shall maintain open interoperability in the following areas.
A.

Communications - All communication between field level controllers, routers and field level user interface devices, network level devices and personal computers used as GUI or service tools shall communication language that is a published protocol and an ANSI standard. Such protocol shall be in use by no less that 50 manufactures of HVAC or building system control devices.

M - 40

B.

Network Management - Network management tools shall be interchangeable between manufacture products and BAS. The test of this interchangeability shall be as follows: Demonstrate that the proposed network management tool for the BAS can open up a database from at least three other manufactures BAS, read and write to all exposed data from the controllers and add additional control devices from any of the three manufactures to the network. Databases - All databases shall be provided in a format that can be access and expanded by other manufactures network management tools. Demonstrate database compatibility with at least 3 other network management tools as part of the pre-qualification. The database shall be stored on the owner PC which serves as the Graphical User Interface and provide on a separate CD upon final acceptance of the project. An updated database shall be provided on a CD at the end of the warranty period. Administrative level password shall be provided to the owner upon acceptance of the project. Network Level Devices - All network level devices (devices that provide for communication interface between the field level controllers and the Ethernet) and the associated engineering and operating software shall be available for purchase by the owner from multiple sources within his respective market. Field Level Controls - All field level controls shall conform to industry standards for control logic functionality, input and out configurations and interchangeability. This conformity to industry standards shall be established by: 1. Demonstrating that the controllers to be used on the project are certified by an independent certifying organization that they conform to the organizations and industry standards for functionality and input and output configurations and interchangeability appropriate to their intended application. Demonstrate interchangeability of product with a live demonstration of 3 different manufactures controllers. Such demonstration shall include the replacement of one type controller such as a VAV with another like controller from another manufacture and the sharing of information with other controllers on the network. Providing to the owner for all controllers provided under this specification a file that identifies and describes the function of all points both hardware and software that are contained within the controller. Demonstrate that all points within a controller including hardware I/O and software based points are available for viewing and manipulation by at least 3 other manufactures network management and Graphical User Interface tools.

C.

D.

E.

2.

3.

4.

F.

Software Tools - All software tools needed for full functional use, including programming of controllers, network management and expansion, and graphical user interface use and development, of the BAS described within these specifications shall be provided to the owner or his designated agent. The installing contractor shall be demonstrate to the owner or their designated agent that they comply with the specified requirements of the software based programming tools as described in BAS software tool section of this specification. Any licensing required by the manufacturer now and into the future, including changes to the licensee of the software tools and the addition of hardware

M - 41

corresponding to the licenses, to allow for a complete and operational system for both normal day to day operation and servicing shall be provided. Any such changes to the designated license holders for servicing and expansion shall be made by the manufacturer upon written request by the owner, future owners or their agent. Any cost associated with the license changes shall be identified within the BAS submittals. The Installing Contractors acceptance of a purchase order by the owner or his designated agent shall imply agreement with this section of the specification.
G.

Distribution - All products provided within these specifications shall be available for purchase, by the owner or his designated agent, through multiple sources without manufacturer limited territorial or project specific restrictions. A list of such sources shall be provided as part of the BAS Submittals. Training - Manufacturer provided training on the use and operation of all products provided within these specifications shall be available for purchase and attendance by the Owner or his designated agent. Such training shall be of the same curriculum as the training courses provided by the manufacturer to the System Integrator. A manufacturer certified instructor shall give all training classes. A list of training courses and the associated cost shall be provided as part of the BAS submittals.

H.

1.3

Quality Assurance
A.

General - The HVAC Control System shall be furnished, engineered, and installed by a licensed Controls Contractor or System Integrator (SI). All work provided under this section shall be provided by direct employees of the SI or under the direct supervision of the SI personnel. System Integrator Qualifications 1. 2. The SI must be regularly engaged in the service and installation of the proposed BAS as specified herein. The system integrator must be an authorized factory direct representative in good standing of the manufacturer of the proposed hardware and software components. The SI shall be staffed with a minimum of 2 technicians who have successfully completed the factory authorized training of the proposed manufactures hardware and software components. SI must provide proof of required training. The SI capabilities shall include engineering and design of control systems, programming, electrical installation of control systems, troubling shooting and service. The system integrator shall Submit a list of no less than three (3) similar projects, which have BAS as specified herein installed by the system integrator These projects must be on-line and functional such that the Owners/Users representative can observe the system in full operation.

B.

3.

4.

M - 42

C.

Hardware and Software Component Manufacturer Qualifications 1. The manufacturer of the hardware and software components must be primarily engaged in the manufacture of BAS as specified herein, and must have been so for a minimum of five (5) years. The manufacturer shall be ISO 9001:2000 certified. This is to insure that all manufacturing, design and support policies comply with a minimum quality assurance standard. Corporate quality assurance policies should be available for examination upon request by the owner or his agent. The manufacturer of the hardware and software components shall have a technical support group accessible via a toll free number that is staffed with qualified personnel, capable of providing instruction and technical support service for networked control systems.

2.

3.

1.4

Submittals
A.

General 1. 2. 3. Meet all applicable Submittal requirements of Division 1, Division 15, and the following including listed below and in the Submittal check list. Provide to the Engineer and Owner all information or data necessary to determine compliance with these specifications. Indicate dimensions, description of materials and finishes, general construction, specific modifications, component connections, anchorage methods, hardware, and installation procedures, including specific requirements indicated. All Drawings and Diagrams shall be machine drafted using AutoCAD 2000 or later, or Microsoft Visio. At project closeout, provide vellum plots and diskette or CD copy of control drawings and layout drawings to the Owner. Provide system device and LAN conduit routing drawing, using building plans for a background. All controllers, gateways, hubs, devices and communication cabling shall be accurately shown, except that individual sensor I/O wiring and devices need not be shown. Layout drawings shall be the same size as the Engineers construction documents.

4.

5.

B.

Hardware - Include a complete list of materials of equipment to be used, including technical data, performance curves, project specification sheets and installation/ maintenance instructions. Control System Diagrams - Provide schematic diagrams for each controlled system. Illustrate the relationship between control system and controlled equipment. Show all control elements. Show all terminations and cable/tube numbers. 1. 2. Provide equipment interface details using actual equipment termination information. Blank terminals or field verify is not acceptable. Provide individual diagrams for each mechanical system. If two systems are identical, then a single diagram may represent multiple mechanical systems. Notations similar to this section only applies to units xxx, etc. are not acceptable. The control diagrams and sequence of operation shall be together on the same sheet and shall be suitable for posting.

C.

3.

M - 43

4.

5.

The sequence of operation shall reference a schematic diagram of the controlled system. The sequence of operation shall describe in words the control strategies utilized, worded in such a way to serve as an informative reference to the maintenance and service personnel who will be responsible for unit operation. Each component and instrument on the control diagrams shall have a unique tag number such as temperature element TE-1. The sequence of operation verbiage shall make specific reference to the individual component tag numbers, such as Controller (C-1) compares the space temperature sensor (TE-1) to set point, and modulates hot water heating coil valve (V-1) as required. The mechanical system being controlled shall be schematically drawn and show the measurement and control points, such as TE-1 and V1.

D.

Graphic Displays - Include draft copies of graphic displays indicating mechanical system components, control system components, and controlled function status and value. Point List - Provide a point list for each system controller including both inputs and outputs (I/O) point, point number, the controlled device associated with the I/O point and the location of the I/O device. Use naming convention consistent with control diagrams and sequence of operation. Software manuals - Include software manuals that describe programming, testing, system overview. The manuals shall include a detailed description of each software feature including editing and writing control programs, reading or modifying printout and logs, adding, deleting and modifying user password, creating and modifying graphics. software manuals may be provided on CD ROM in lieu of paper copy. If submitted as a CD ROM, the vendor shall arrange to review the software manuals with the engineer at the engineers office. Other Items Requiring Submittals 1. 2. 3. Point to point and basic function commissioning forms to be used on site for the start, test and check of network components and systems. List of specific personnel who will be involved in the system installation and commissioning. Functional performance test documentation and procedures to be used in commissioning control sequences.

E.

F.

G.

H.

Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall be submitted indicating the correct procedures and processes to operate and maintain the system. O&Ms shall be delivered either hard copy or on a CD-ROM developed specifically for the project. Contractor shall submit (3) copies of the Operation and Maintenance Manuals. Parts List shall be submitted listing: manufacturer's name, part number, nomenclature, and stock level required for maintenance and repair necessary to ensure continued operation with minimal delay.

I.

M - 44

1.5

Training - Meet all applicable Training requirements of Division 1, Division 15, and the following.
A.

Instruct the operators how to accomplish control of the system. Include basic troubleshooting and override of equipment and controls in the event of system failure. Training Allowance: Provide formal training to the Owners designated operations personnel. Trainers - Persons conducting the training shall be knowledgeable in the workings of the system, and shall be regularly engaged in training exercises, so as to provide effective training. Acceptability of the trainers shall be at the discretion of the Owner. Training Manuals - Include the following in training manuals. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Manufacturers training brochures. Operation and maintenance manuals. Completed Field Acceptance Test Procedure. As-installed Drawings. Manufacturers Operation Manuals. Software interaction sheets to be used in instructing students how to use the control system, on a command-by-command basis.

B.

C.

D.

E.

Training Classes - Prior to conducting training, prepare and submit for approval the proposed training literature and topics. Submit this information at least two weeks prior to the first class. Provide approved training manuals to the Owner at least one week prior to the first class. Provide Audio Visual Turtorials both in a CD format and on the manufactures website instructing on the operation of the software tools as provided under this specification.

F.

G.

1.6

Warranty
A.

The HVAC Control System shall be free from defects in workmanship and material under normal use and service. If within eighteen (18) months from the date of substantial completion, the installed equipment is found to be defective in operation, workmanship or materials, the building systems contractor shall replace, repair or adjust the defect at no cost. Service shall be provided within 4 hours upon notice from Owners designated Representative. The warranty shall extend to material that is supplied and installed by the Contractor. Material supplied but not installed by the Contractor shall be covered per the above to the extent of the product only. Installation labor shall be the responsibility of the trade contractor performing the installation. All corrective software modifications made during warranty service periods shall be updated on all user documentation and on user and manufacturer archived software disks.

B.

C.

M - 45

Part 2 NETWORK ARCHITECTURES AND DEVICES

2.1

Network Architecture and Protocol - The intent of this specification is to provide a peerto-peer network at the field controller level. The minimum baud rate shall be 78,000 baud for communication between controllers and 1,250,000 baud for communication between network devices that are not communicating over the Ethernet.
A.

All communication between field level controllers, routers and field level user interface devices, network level devices and personal computers used as GUI or service tools shall use a communication language that is a published protocol and an ANSI standard. Such protocol shall be in use by no less that 100 manufactures of HVAC control devices. No modifications to the standard protocol shall be allowed unless the manufacture publishes such modifications and the SI can demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Owner or his representative that the other user of the protocol can recognize the modified protocol without the use of any manufacture specific tools. To facilitate facility expansion or to support large Wide Area Networks (WANs) the Network Interface shall directly support a minimum of 4 logical networks using the same physical network. The ability to support bi-directional access to any remote field level controller shall be supported by a single point of connection from any where on the network including communication over the Ethernet. Field level control networks shall maintain a Bus topology in order to maintain network integrity and improve network diagnostics and maintenance. Star network topologies shall not be accepted. All Network wiring See Part 7 - Execution The system shall be able to connect to remote sites via standard telephone lines or Ethernet LAN.

B.

C.

D.

E. F.

2.2

Network Devices These various devices can service multiple functions on the network depending on network design, communication medium and needed task. These functions include: management of traffic on the network, reconfiguring and strengthening of signals, the conversion of the communication protocol into TCP/IP packets for transmission over the Ethernet, global activities such as alarms, trends and scheduling, control logic, and protocol conversion.
A.

Routers and Repeaters - The network router shall be designed to route messages from a segment, sub-net, or domain in full duplex communication mode. Routers shall be fully programmable and permit a systems integrator to define message traffic, destination, and other network management functions. The routers, shall be capable of DIN rail or panel mounting and be equipped with status LED lights for Network traffic and power. A router many not manage more than 90% of the total capacity of devices (as established by the manufacture) on any single channel so as to allow for future expansion.

M - 46

B.

Repeaters - A repeater or signal booster may only be used to increase ths signal strength of the communictions. Under no circumstances may it be used in the place of a router. Field Level Controller Communication to Ethernet All network devices that provide for a communication interface between Field Level Controller Communication and the Ethernet shall comply with the following standards and functions. 1. The Network devices shall provide for the following global functions if required in the sequence of operation. All functions shall be provided with a graphical user interface. a) Scheduling provide for the individual schedules as required in the sequence of operation and the associated points schedule. Scheduling functions shall include: 1) Daily schedules Provide for a minimum of 6 different event changes per day with the ability to set different state values for each event. 2) Holiday Provide for a minimum of 4 separate holiday schedule that can be implemented for any day. 3) Global scheduling function Provide for the ability to implement a permanent and temporary global schedule that will override multiple schedules in multiple network devices. Any temporary global schedule shall be erased once the time period of the schedule elapses. b) Alarm Management provide for the management and reporting of alarms as required in the sequence of operation. c) Data Log management provide for the logging of all points as shown on the associated Points Schedule. Log intervals shall be as frequent as one minute intervals. Log Data shall be exportable to other applications via SQL or XML.

C.

Part 3 - BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM CONTROLLERS 3.1 All controllers shall conform to the standards as established in Section 1.2E so long as such standards exist for its intended application. If such standards do not exist then the SI shall demonstrate that the controller meets industry standards for communication and data sharing for the protocol used. Where possible provide controllers that can meet the required sequence of operation that can be configured rather that custom programmed. All controllers shall be designed for easy installation and servicing including removable enclosures, removable terminals, and factory applied labels for all I/O. All internal points within the Programmable controllers shall be fully supported by the Graphical User Interface (GUI), allowing the user to easily modify them and monitor them. In addition all of the internal programming points (e.g. variables, constants, inputs and outputs) shall be exposed to the network on dedicated network variable outputs. Programmable Controllers (PC) a controller designed for more complex sequences of operations such as built up AHUs, central plant operations, electrical monitoring, and control and management for chillers, boilers and generators. The PCs are to allow for the flexibility of custom control programming to meet the needed sequences of operation.
A. Performance Each PC shall have a minimum of 64K of Non-volatile Flash

memory for control applications and 128K non-volatile flash memory for storage with an 8 bit processor at 10MHz. The FPC shall have a minimum ambient operating temperature range of -0oC to 70oC or 32oF to 158oF.

M - 47

B. Inputs Analog inputs shall have the following minimum level of performance: 16-

bit A to D resolution; allow monitoring of platinum 100 ohms, platinum 1000 ohm, nickel 1000 ohms, thermistor 10K type II, thermistor 10K type III, voltage input 010VDC, current input 4-20mA, digital input, pulsed input minimum 2 Hz.
C. Outputs Outputs shall be either software configurable to be either analog or

digital or dedicated digital only - Analog outputs shall be selectable as voltage of 010 VDC (linear) or 4-20mA or Digital outputs shall be 0-12 VDC (off/on), floating or PWM. Outputs shall have an adjustable range of 2 seconds to 15 minutes. Output Resolution shall be a minimum 8 bits digital / analog converter. All individual outputs and power supply shall be protected by an auto reset fuse. There shall be an LED status indicator on each of the outputs.
D. PC (Programmable Controller) Features

1.

2.

3.

4.

5. 6. 7.

8.

For stand alone applications the PC shall be provided with a real time clock with a battery backup. If using multiple controllers on a network, provide one PC, User Interface Device or Network Interface with a real time clock to serve as the master time clock for all nodes on the network Provide the ability to trend any point in the controller or on the network. Total capacity of the trended events shall be no less than 12,000 samples. Trending frequency for each report shall be operator definable from a sample once a second to a sample once every 24 hours. The system shall have the ability to automatically upload the trend log data onto the site computer at definable periods of time. The file format in which the trend log data is saved shall be a Microsoft Access file. The PC shall have the ability to share over the network with other controllers a minimum of 17 variable inputs and 17 variable outputs. One of the network inputs on the FPC shall have a built in averaging function such that multiple variable outputs values can be received by this one variable input and perform a weighted average. This function shall be used to average terminal load or temperature. The averaging function shall have a customizable input validity period. The PC shall be provided with a minimum of 2 schedules that can be bound to one or many devices on the network. Each schedule shall have six individual changes of state per day plus 4 separate special day schedules. The PC shall be provided with a diagnostic indicator light that when flashing signifies that the application program is running correctly. Provide an onboard network communication jack The PC can be provided with a built-in real time clock that supports daylight saving time by default. The daylight saving time parameters should be configurable if need be. The real time clock shall also have a dedicated variable output that supports the time stamp network variable type. This is in order to ensure the possibility of having the controller run in standalone mode or as a master real time clock for the rest of the network. There shall be a battery backup of fifteen years for the real time clock. Enclosures Provide for a plastic enclosure with a separate back plate with terminals such that the electronic portion of the controller can be easily remover for ease of installation and servicing.

M - 48

3.2

Configurable Controllers (CC)- A controller designed through its I/O configuration and configurable control logic to be used for a specific type mechanical equipment. Typical applications are VAV boxes, Fan Coil Units, Roof Top Units, Unit Ventalators, Split DX Systems, Heat Pumps. Lighting Controls, etc. All SCs shall conform to the standards as established in Section 1.2E so long as such standards exists for its intended application. If such standards do not exist then the Si shall demonstrate that the controller meets industry standards for communication and data sharing for the protocol.
A.

Performance: Inputs Provide software selectable universal inputs. Analog inputs - shall have the following minimum level of performance: 12 bit A to D resolution; manage thermistors with an accuracy of: 0.5oC; 0.9oF, and a Potentiometer. For VAV Applications provide a differential pressure input sensor built in to the controller with a adjustable range of 0 to 1 H20 (0-248.8 Pa) static pressure with a minimum accuracy of 3%. Minimum response time shall be 0.5 seconds from input to output time. Output Analog outputs shall have the following minimum level of performance: Tri-mode Voltage of 0-10 VDC (linear), digital 0-12 VDC (off/on) or PWM. All analog outputs shall be equipped with an auto reset fuse. Output Resolution shall be a minimum 8 bits digital / analog converter. Digital outputs shall be provided with a minimum of a triac output rated at 0.75 amps @ 24VAC. All analog outputs and shall be fuse protected. CC Features: 1. The CC except for the VAV shall be provided with an optimum start program internal to its control logic. The optimum start shall be activated by a time of day event signal from its associated scheduler on the network. The CC shall allow the use of its spare I/O as dumb I/O to be shared over the network to other controllers such as FPC, where a sequence of operation can be applied to the I/O. Such applications shall include but not be limited to exhaust fan control, heaters, light control, etc.

B.

C.

2.

D.

Powered Fan Coil Unit Specific functions: In addition to the features for the CC the Powered Fan Coil Unit controller shall provide the following functions 1. Provide for four line voltage relays rated for 85 265 at 33 VA for the control of the fan and other auxiliary devices. These relays shall be an integral part of the controller Provide for wireless sensing capabilities as described in section _______ Provide for a built in 24 VAC 300 mA power supply Provide for a LCD based sensor that operates as an user interface for temperature adjustment, override and display of values. Accept platinum 1k ohm and thermistor 10k ohms type II sensors as well as nickel 1k ohm thermistor sensors.

2. 3. 4. 5.
E.

VAV Specific functions. In addition to the features for the CC VAV controller shall provide the following functions 1. The CC VAV shall be a single integrated package consisting of a microprocessor, power supply, damper actuator, differential pressure transducer, field terminations, and application software. An alternate model shall be offered that allows for direct connectivity to an external actuator for those applications that employ a non-butterfly style damper configuration. All input/output signals shall be directly hardwired to the CC VAV controller

M - 49

2.

3. 4.
F.

except were there is a requirement for wireless sensing. The internal actuator shall employ a manual override that allows for powered or non-powered adjustment of the damper position. In all cases, the controller shall automatically resume proper operation following the return of power to, or control by the CC VAV. Programming, configuring and/or troubleshooting of input/output signals shall be easily executed through the CC VAV sensor at the wall sensor location through a network connection. The CC VAV control algorithms shall be designed to limit the frequency of damper repositioning, to extend the life of the components. The CC VAV shall provide an internal differential pressure transducer. Flows through transducers requiring filter maintenance are not acceptable. The CC VAV shall provide zone control accuracy equal to or better than +/- 1 degree Fahrenheit. With the submittal package, supplier/provider shall provide performance data that verifies control accuracy of the CC VAV. Provide for CO2 control from control logic within the CC VAV as per the sequence of operation. Configuration of all I/O points shall be accomplished without physical hardware jumpers, switches or settings. Precalibration: Provide as part of the configuration wizard for the CC VAV an automatic calibration tool that will calibrate the box air balance position based upon the K factor of the box and the cross section of the input duct to the VAV box. The precalibration procedure shall be implemented for all boxes within 5 working days of delivery of conditioned air to the boxes. If such a precalibration tool cannot be provided then System Integrator shall provide for manual adjustment to all VAV boxes to meet the comfort need in the respective areas. Certified Air Balance: The following Air Balancing tools shall be provided: a) LCD sensor calibration tool. Provide for a LCD based sensor that operates as a user interface for temperature adjustment, override and display of values along with the ability to perform Air Balance task. The LCD sensor shall provide for access to all of the VAV input and out put variables to allow for complete Air balance task. Upon completion of Air Balance the application shall deliver a code that documents the air balance calibration for each individual VAV box. In addition the LCD sensor shall operate as a stand alone Air Balance tool that communicates directly to the VAV through a wall mounted sensor with communication port to the VAV. b) The CC VAV shall also provide a web browser based balancing tool. This tool shall allow the air balancer to manually control the action of the actuator (e.g. full open, full close, open slowly, close slowly, etc). Automatic calibration as well as two-point calibration shall be available through this web page. The air balance sequence shall step the balancing supplier/provider through the checkout and calibration of the CC VAV. Upon completion of the balancing sequence, the flow values presented by the CC VAV shall match those observed by the balancing supplier/provider's measurement equipment. Additionally, upon completion of the air balance, the CC VAV shall automatically archive the balance settings for future use including a calibration code that documents the air balance calibration for each individual VAV box.

CC VAV - Air Balancing 1.

2.

M - 50

c)

Systems not able to provide a web based air balance tool and a LCD Sensor bases balancing tool as part of their the CC VAV shall provide an individual full time technician during the Air-balancing process to assure full balance compliance.

3.3

Special Purpose Configurable Controllers (SPCC) A controller designed with unique functions and featues particular to a specific type of mechanical equipment or applications that may be less common and or standarizied in its use and application. A. SPCC Thermostat (SPCCT) A self contained controller with a built-in user interface that is intended for installation in the occupied space of the building. The SPCCT shall have the following features: 1. The SPCCT shall be a microprocessor based controller with all of its control logic, sensors, inputs and outputs, network communication and user interface provided within a manufacture provided enclosure specific to the application. The enclosure shall be aesthetically appealing with a modern design that will fit in with the architecture of the building. A sample of the SPCCT shall be provided as part of the submittal process. The SPCCT shall be programmed through the user interface contained within the controller and through a software based configuration tool. The User interface display shall be provided with 3 levels of password protection: Level 1 Lockout with view only and time adjustment; Level 2 schedule override and mode settings; Level 3 full access to all parameters. Where required in the sequence of operation provide for within Level 2 access the ability to change the units of measure displayed for temperature from Fahrenheit to Celsius. The display shall be back lighted for easy viewing. If required within the sequence of operation, provide for a control schedule and time clock within the SPCCT. The control schedule shall provide for a separate schedule for each day of the week with 4 events per day. The real time clock will have a six hour power reserve time The SPCCT shall utilize a PI (proportional and integral) control algorithm. Upon power failure, all programmed schedules and parameters must be retained in non volatile flash memory. Progressive temperature recovery shall be a standard feature. Two configurable digital/binary inputs will be available as well as two remote temperature sensor inputs for outdoor air and remote room/return air monitoring. Built-in frost protection, which can be disabled, will energize the heating as soon as the ambient temperature falls below 45F (5C). An auxiliary digital/binary output, which can be configured for normally open or normally closed operation, will also be available. B. Provide for wireless sensing of the designated sensors and or switches as shown on the Point List Chart. Wireless sensing is comprised of the following components; wireless sensor or switch (transmitter), wireless receiver, wireless configuration application and wireless transmission test equipment. All components shall comply with these requirements. 1. Wireless temperature sensor/switch the wireless sensing technology provided shall transmit a RF message indicating the value or position of the sensor. The transmission range shall be a minimum of 100 meters unobstructed line of sight and 30 meters in buildings.

2. 3.

4.

5.

M - 51

a)

2.

3. 4.

Each sensor or switch shall be provided with energy harvesting technology such that no battery will be required to maintain normal operations. If using a Solar Cell for energy harvesting, normal operation parameters shall be defined as a minimum of 4 hours of 200lx of light to produce an operation of the sensor for a period of no less than 20 hours in total darkness. In sufficient light levels are not available, provide a battery back up. b) For temperature sensors all measurement of value shall be read by the sensor no less than once every 100 seconds and transmit a signal to the receiver within this time period should a variations occur from set point of more than +- 0.3 deg. C for a space sensor or an outside air or duct or water sensor. c) Sensor or switch shall be provided with a unique identifying code to correspond its location to the receiver. The identifying code shall be displayed in bar code permanently attached to the sensor or switch. In addition the sensor or switch shall be provided with a manual push button to transmit its identifying code to the receiver for installation. d) All sensor locations shall be verified to be in compliance with manufactures installation requirements and be tested for acceptable signal strength. e) Wireless sensors and switches shall be provided for the following as required: 1) Space Sensors Space sensors shall be provided as required with temperature measurement, set point adjustment, override and humidity sensing. Accuracy of the sensors shall be 0.4 deg. C. Sensor shall be submitted for pre-approval for performance and visual appearance. 2) Mechanical Room Sensors Duct temperature sensor, outside air sensor, Surface temperature contact temperature sensor and Well emersion sensor. 3) Light Switches Light switches shall be provided as required, either in a 2 channel or 4 channel configurations. For CC provide for the management a minimum of 5 wireless sensors or switches inputs. For PC provide for a minimum of 14 wireless sensor or switches inputs. Where needed to achieve signal range requirements, provide for an external antenna. Wireless Configuration: The configuration of the wireless sensors shall be an integral part of the CC configuration tool. Wireless Transmission Test Equipment. Provide for test equipment that will measure the strength of the transmission between the required location of the sensor or switch and the receiver located at the controller. All Sensors or switched shall be verified to have acceptable signal strength prior to installation.

C.

Lighting Control (SPCC-LC) A standalone microprocessor based lighting control panel that contains line and or low voltage relays for control of the lighting circuits along with the appropriate schedules and local user interface. 1. The SPCC-LC shall provide as a minimum the following functionality; a. Occupant-Sensitive Operating Scenarios b. Schedule With Flick Warn c. Time-delay Overrides With Flick Warn d. Common Area Interlock With Egress Timer e. Master Switch Control With Flick Option f. Cleaning Lights

M - 52

3.

4. 5. 6.

7.

g. Automatic Daylight Switching With Occupant Interlock/Override h. Status and Runtime Data It shall be composed of multiple controllers, with the capacity to manage input switches and sensors, output relays as well as lighting sequences and groups, enabling the user to configure and monitor a very large number of different lighting schemes and schedules. The SPCC-LC shall provide, as a minimum, the ability to interface with the hardware of the associated relay panels to allow for minimal disruption to the existing high voltage panel wiring. The SPCC-LC shall be capable of providing all logic, control, runtime data, status information, and communications functions. From any built-in operator interface of any display unit, the ability to read the status of the lighting relays and switches shall be provided. It shall be configured using a software configuration tool. The SPCC-LC shall allow for the configuration of up to 16 schedules, each comprised of 7 weekday and 4 holiday schedules. The SPCC-LC display unit shall allow for the local display of lighting points as described in 5.2 . It shall also contain an astrological time clock that allows for the real time calculation of the geographic location using latitude and longitude information. This is to allow for precise and efficient outside lighting control. The SPCC-LC shall be able to control the General Electric three-wire relay or a two wire Aromat relay.

Part 4 - BAS SOFTWARE TOOLS 4.1 Provide adequate copies of all tools necessary for the development, maintenance, expansion and use of the BAS described within these specifications. All software tools shall be compatible with Microsoft Windows XP Professional. For the purpose of this specification software tools shall be divided into the following categories and meet these specified requirements.
A.

Plug-Ins or Wizards: Software modules used for the configuration and programming of the BAS controllers. Plug-ins shall be provided free of charge and be compatible with the current published versions of the network management tool that is provided as part of this project. The plug-in software shall be available for public access from the manufacturers web site. These plug-in programming tools shall be compatible with at least 3 other manufactures network management tools. The SI shall demonstrate as part of their prequalification as to how they intend to comply with these requirements. Should plug-ins as specified herein not be available then the SI shall provide the following: 1. Provide adequate copies of the programming or configuration tools (excluding the UIP and GUI tools) along with any manufacture specific software tools required to operate the programming or configuration tools. Such tools shall be provided with a permanent and operating system transferable license. Provided free of charge to the owner or his designated agent for a period of 10 years the latest manufactures updates to the software described in paragraph 1. Provide a statement, as part of the prequalification, signed by an officer of the Manufacture validating the performance of the requirements in paragraph 1 & 2.

2.

3.

M - 53

B.

Network Management Tool (NMT): A software tool set that provides for the development and management of Building Automations Systems networks as described within these specifications. The NMT shall provide the following minimum functionality: 1. Creation of BAS databases through device / controller installation. This database shall reside on the BAS GUI Personal Computer or other PC based server as specified. This application shall support multiple clients on the LAN including User Interface devices. Provide for device / controller configuration and or programming through software modules as described in the field level controller programming section. Support copy-paste function for network, subsystem and device Provide for device / controller diagnostics. Provide for device / controller maintenance activities Provide for binding of variable to and from controller to controller over the network. Provide for the ability to view and modify all of the point variables contained within any controller on the network. Provide for the monitoring of variable and configuration properties in realtime. Provide for support of a client-sever operating system with a single Server and multiple interoperating client applications Provide for support of a full client-sever operating system with multiple Servers and multiple interoperating client applications Provide for system diagnostics. Provide for management of the database including backup, copy, import and export functions.

2.

3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.


C.

Field Level Controller Programming; Software tools used for the configuration and custom programming of the Configurable Controllers (CCs), Programmable Controllers (PCs) and or the Special Purpose Configurable Controllers (SPCCs). The programming tools shall perform the following functions: 1. PC programming shall be accomplished by either: Text based codes similar to the BASIC programming language combined with objects to define normal controller functions such as PID loops, optimum start stops, I/O configurations, timers, schedules, trends, and network variables or; Graphical programming language (GPL) where objects are used to define different portions of the control sequence. All control sequences programmed into the PC shall be stored in non-volatile memory. Systems that only allow selection of sequences from a library or table are not acceptable. All code must be exportable to a library for future use. CC and SPCC Provide for the programming of the required sequence of operation through an intuitive menu driven selection process. No text code or graphical programming will be allowed. The configuration tools menu shall define items such as I/O configurations, set point, delays, PID loops, optimum start stops, and network variables settings. The configuration tool must indicate the device status and allows system override Field Level Controller Programming tools shall provide for the viewing and manipulation in real time all hard I/O and soft points including constants, and variables through a table menu or browser. Any point may be hidden from view for easier operation. Provide the ability to save view configurations settings along with a short cut to the browser that does not require the operating the NMT.

2.

3.

M - 54

D.

Network Level Device Programming: Programming software used to configure or program the Network Level Devices. These tools shall be provided as a plug-in that is compatible with the network management tool. User Interface Design (UID) designing tools used to create a graphical or text based user interface. A library of preprogrammed components shall be provided to simplify creation of animated graphics and placement of dynamic point values on the graphical screens. The graphic screen creation shall be accomplished by a drag and drop programming as opposed to line code programming. The line code programming shall be available for advanced screen design and editing. All linking of the data points from the data base to the graphics shall be completed from within the graphical tool set. The tools shall allow for the creation of graphics in animation and 2 and 3 dimensional formats. The software shall place no restriction on number: of points used or tags in the system; of users; or on connectivity to other database aware applications. The software shall be capable of being backed up and restored by commercially available backup mechanisms. Note that this software can be provided as a separate tool set from the GUI. Graphical User Interface (GUI) Operating System: Tools used to provide for user access to the day to day operation of the BAS. These tools shall include for the display, management and adjustment of all points within the system using a direct driver to BAS network. The following functions shall be included within this toolset: 1. Administrative functions Provide all necessary administrative functions to insure a complete secure and reliable GUI. Provide a minimum these administrative functions: a) Security. Each operator shall be required to log on to the system with a user name and password in order to view, edit, add, or delete data. System security shall be selectable for each operator. The system supervisor shall have the ability to set passwords and security levels for all other operators. Each operator password shall be able to restrict the operators access for viewing and/or changing each system application, full screen editor, and object. Provide five levels of password protection ranging from view only to full administrative functions. b) On-Line Help. Provide a context sensitive, on-line help system to assist the operator in operation and editing of the system. On-line help shall be available for all applications and shall provide the relevant data for that particular screen. c) Manual Database Save and Restore d) System Diagnostics. The system shall automatically monitor the operation of network connections, building management panels, and controllers. The failure of any device shall be annunciated to the operator. 2. Graphics Display. The system graphics shall be able to be modified while on line. An operator with the proper password level shall be able to add, delete, or change graphics. a) All analog I/O values shall be available to be displayed in imperial and or metric units, with plain English descriptors based upon the owners preference. b) Standard Graphics: All graphics shall be created from a library of standard HVAC equipment such as chillers, boilers, air handlers, terminals, fan coils, fans, pumps, coils, valves, piping, dampers, ductwork, etc. contained within the UIP where possible. If custom graphical objects are required, the objects must be stored within the library of the UIP

E.

F.

M - 55

Where floor plan graphics are required, AutoCAD files shall be provided by Owner for use in developing floor plan graphics. d) As a minimum, the operating software shall permit the operator to perform the following tasks with a minimum knowledge of the HVAC Control System provided and basic computing skills. e) View data (temperature, flowrate, etc.) on HVAC equipment, and/or lighting, card access, and intrusion detection equipment. f) Navigate multiple sites. g) Locate potentially faulty equipment through audible or visible alarms. h) Override values and states of all equipment as allowed by their respective password level. 3. Provide the following Dynamic Graphics. a) Show all motor-driven equipment, liquid level control, and temperature deviations from set point in floor plan graphics. b) Show animation by shifting image files based on the status of the point (e.g. moving fan, filling tank, room getting warmer, etc.) c) All mechanical system controlled or monitored by the BAS d) Use pictorial representation of components. Provide the current status of all I/O points being controlled and applicable to the mechanical system. e) Provide overall floor plan of each floor, showing individual air handler zones. and space temperature zones. Show heating and cooling zones in a range of colors, which shows deviations from set points. The colors shall be updated dynamically as zones comfort conditions change. Show space sensor locations for each zone, with set points. f) Lighting floor plan. Show each floor lighting control zone and override push buttons. g) Point values, adjustment and override. Provide dynamic point values that are refreshing at a rate of no less than a 20 second interval. All points in override shall be displayed as a separate color from the normal state. 4. Programming tool access. Provide for access to any programming tools required for the configuration and programming of the BAS through a direct link contained within the graphics associated with the controller to be programmed. This function shall not require the inclusion of a network management tool 5. Trend log management. Display all required trended points in a color graphical format on a XY axis. Provide for the display of up to 10 points on a single graph each with a separate color and a legend to describe the point displayed and the associated color. Date time range shall be selectable from 1 minute to 1 year or more. Provide for a zoom function and a time, date, value stamp that corresponds to the mouse courser position on the graph. All data shall be exportable in a SQL format to an access database. 6. Scheduling Provide for a graphical display of a monthly calendar that allow for implementation of six individual change of states per day plus 4 separate special day schedules. Implementation of special day shall be implemented with a drag and drop function on to the calendar. All resulting time schedules shall be viewable by placing the cursor over the selected day. The scheduling functions shall be provided as plug-in and be opened from any graphic page without the need for a network management tool. 7. Alarm Management All alarms from any device residing on the network shall be reported and logged in an alarm management tool resident in the GUI. The alarms shall be displayed in a table with user defined groups that can be arranged by column, reported date, priority, trouble, disabled, acknowledged and unacknowledged status. Each alarm shall have a user defined name associated with it along with a descriptive action to take.

c)

M - 56

All alarmed points shall have the ability to be delivered to designated reporting devices such as a printer, alpha numeric pager, cell phone, email or to an audio visual device. Each alarm shall have the ability to have its reporting location designated based upon a 24 hour 365 day schedule where as a different designated reporting destination can be specified based upon the time of day and the day of week. The alarms that are not acknowledged within a user defined period of time shall be provided with 2 additional level escalated levels of reporting. Provide the ability to export all alarm histories in a csv, access or excel format. Part 5 - USER INTERFACES 5.1 GUI Personal Computer The PC provided as the primary means of access into the BAS. It shall contain all the required software tools as discribed in Section 4 - BAS Software Tools.
A. B.

PC Hardware Provide a (insert latest PC discription and printer) PC Operating System The PC shall be provided with Microsoft Windows XP professional Operating Systems software and the latest version of Symantec Antivirus Software including a 1 year upgrade subscription service to the Symantec software.

5.2

LCD Display A wall mounted easy to operate User Interface that provides direct read / write access to any point on the network. The LCD Display shall provide the following:
A.

The Display shall consist of an alphanumeric LCD display of 16 lines x 16 characters, and a multi-function keyboard. At total of 250 points shall be available for display and or control in groups of 50. Each group shall have a minmun of 13 alpha numeric character descriptor and each point shall have up to a minimun of 16 character alpha numeric descriptor. The display shall have a graphical logo displayed on its default screen. This logo shall be a standard monochrome bitmap of 89 x 128 pixels that the user can replace. Configuration of the display shall be made available from a wizard contained within the system programming tools The Display User access shall be through a simple to use directional and entry buttons. Full keyboards shall be accepted The LCD Display shall be provided as a surface mount or flush mount as shown on the mechanical drawings.

B.

C.

D.

5.3

LCD Sensor - Where required provide for a LCD based sensor to connect to the VAV and or FCU that operates as a user interface for temperature adjustment, override and display of values along with the ability to perform Air Balance task (for VAV).

M - 57

5.4

PHERIPHERAL DEVICES 1.1 Temperature Sensors and Transmitters General Sensor & Transmitter Requirements
A.

Provide sensors and transmitters required as outlined in the input/output summary and sequence of operation, and as required to achieve the specified accuracy as specified herein. Temperature transmitters shall be equipped with individual zero and span adjustments. The zero and span adjustments shall be noninteractive to permit calibration without iterative operations. Provide a loop test signal to aid in sensor calibration. Temperature transmitters shall be sized and constructed to be compatible with the medium to be monitored. Transmitters shall be equipped with a linearization circuit to compensate for non-linearities of the sensor and bridge and provide a true linear output signal. Temperature sensors shall be of the resistance type and shall be either platinum 1k ohm or thermistor 10k ohms type II as specficied elsewhere. Thermistors are acceptable provided the mathematical relationship of a thermistor with respect to resistance and temperature with the thermistor fitting constraints is contained with the CU operating software and the listed accuracys can be obtained. Submit proof of the software mathematical equation and thermistor manufacturer fitting constants used in the thermistor mathematical/expressions. Thermistors shall be of the Thermistor (NTC) Type with a minimum of 100 ohm/F. resistance change versus temperature to insure good resolution and accuracy. Thermistors shall be certified to be stable 0.24F. over 5 years and 0.36F. accurate and free from drift for 5 years. CU operating software shall be equipped with a self-calibrating feature for temperature sensors. The following accuracys are required and include errors associated with the sensor, lead wire and A to D conversion. Point Type Accuracy Outside Air 0.5F Chilled Water 0.5F Room Temperature 1.00F Hot Water/Steam 0.75F Duct Temperature 0.5F Sensors Used in Energy Water (BTU) or Process Calculations 0.1F

B.

C.

D.

E.

F.

G.

H.

Sensors used in BTU or process calculations shall be accurate to 0.10F over the process temperature range. Submit a manufacturers calibration report indicating that the calibration certification is traceable

M - 58

to the National Bureau of Standards (NBS) Calibration Report Nos. 209527/222173.


I.

Thermowells 1. When thermowells are required, the sensor and well shall be supplied as a complete assembly including well head and greenfield fitting. Thermowells shall be pressure rated and constructed in accordance with the system working pressure Thermowells and sensors shall be mounted in a threadolet or NPT saddle and allow easy access to the sensor for repair or replacement. Thermowells shall be constructed of the following materials: Chilled and Hot Water: brass;Steam: 316 stainless steel; Brine (salt solutions): marine grade stainless steel. Outside air sensors shall be designed to withstand the environmental conditions to which they will be exposed. They shall also be provided with a solar shield. Sensors exposed to wind velocity pressures shall be shielded by a perforated plate surrounding the sensor element. Temperature transmitters shall be of NEMA 3R construction and rated for ambient temperatures. Duct mount sensors shall mount in a hand box through a hole in the duct and be positioned so as to be easily accessible for repair or replacement. A neoprene grommet (sealtite fitting and mounting plate) shall be used on the sensor assembly to prevent air leaks. Duct sensors shall be insertion type and constructed as a complete assembly including lock nut and mounting plate. Duct sensors probe shall be constructed of 304 stainless steel. For outdoor air duct applications, use a weatherproof mounting box with weatherproof cover and gasket. Averaging Duct Type Sensors For ductwork greater any dimension than 48 inches and/or where air temperature stratification exists, utilize an averaging sensor with multiple sensing points. The averaging sensor shall be a 304 stainless steel tube with holes extending across the duct or plenum to be sampled. A bleed hole outside the duct or plenum causes air to enter the sample tube and exit at the bleed hole, thus bathing the sensor in average air. The averaging sensor shall be installed complete with end cap, compression fittings, gaskets, mounting flange and required accessories. Provide capillary supports at the sides of the duct to support the sensing string. The sensor shall be a solid state, resistance type relative humidity sensor of the Bulk Polymer Design. The sensor element shall be washable and shall resist surface contaminations.

2. 3.

4.

J.

Outside Air Sensors 1.

2. 3.
K.

Duct Type Sensors 1.

2.

3. 4.

L.

Relative Humidity Sensors/Transmitter 1.

M - 59

2.

3. 4. 5.
M.

Humidity transmitter shall be equipped with non-interactive span and zero adjustments, a 2 wire isolated loop powered, 4-20Ma, 0-10 VDC linear proportional output. The humidity transmitter shall meet the following overall accuracy including lead loss and A to D conversion. Room Type Sensor 3% RH Provide a single point humidity calibrator, if required, for field calibration. Transmitters shall be shipped factory pre-calibrated. General Air and Water Pressure Transmitter Requirements: Pressure transmitters shall be constructed to withstand 100% pressure over-range without damage and to hold calibrated accuracy when subject to a momentary 40% over-range input. Pressure transmitters shall provide the option to transmit a 0 to 5VDC, 0 to 10VDC, or 4 to 20 mA output signal. Differential pressure transmitters used for flow measurement shall be sized to the flow-sensing device and shall be supplied with shutoff and bleed valves in the high and low sensing pickup lines (3 valve manifolds). Provide a minimum of a NEMA 1 housing for the transmitter. Locate transmitters in accessible local control panels wherever possible. Low air pressure, differential pressure transmitters used for room filter monitoring. Shall be equipped with a LED display indicating the transmitter output signal. Low Air Pressure Applications (0 to 0.5 WC) a) The pressure transmitter shall be capable of transmitting a linear electronic signal proportional to the differential of the room and reference static pressure input signals with the following minimum performance specifications. b) Span: Not greater than two times the design space DP. c) Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.5% of F.S. d) Dead Band: Less than 0.3% of output. e) Repeatability: Within 0.2% of output. f) Linearity: Plus or minus 0.2% of span. g) Response: Less than one second for full span input. h) Temperature Stability: Less than 0.01% output shift per degree F. change. The transmitter shall utilize variable capacitance sensor technology and be immune to shock and vibration. Provide a 18 month warranty for each transmitter. Replace all transmitters found to be defective at no cost to the Owner during the warranty period. Traverse Probe Air Flow Measuring Stations- Traverse probes shall be a dual manifold, cylindrical, type constructed of 3003 extruded aluminum with an anodized finish to eliminate surface pitting and unnecessary air friction. The multiple total pressure manifolds shall have sensors located along the stagnation plane of the approaching air flow and without the physical presence of forward projecting sensors into the airstream.

Differential Pressure Transmitters and Accessories 1. 2.

3. 4.

5.

6.

7.

8. 9.

N.

Flow, Pressure, and Electrical Measuring Apparatus 1.

M - 60

2.

3. 4.

5. 6.
O.

The static pressure manifold shall incorporate dual offset static tips on opposing sides of the averaging manifold so as to be insensitive to flow-angle variations of as much as 20o in the approaching airstream. The air flow traverse probe shall not induce a measurable pressure drop, nor shall the sound level within the duct be amplified by its singular or multiple presences in the airstream. Each airflow measuring probe shall contain multiple total and static pressure sensors placed at equal distances along the probe length. The number of sensors on each probe and the quantity of probes utilized at each installation shall comply with the ASHRAE Standards for duct traversing. Traverse probes shall be accurate to 25% of the measured airflow range down to 0.25 WC static pressure. Each flow measuring station shall be complete with its own dedicated microprocessor with a 4-line, 80 character, Alpha Numeric display and full function key pad. The panel shall be fully programmable and display calculated CFM directly on a LED monitor on the panel face. Each station shall log air flow rates in real time and download data to its control unit (CU) via a RS-232 interface. Provide 24 volt 1 phase power to each flow measuring station. Provide for each zone where required a shielded static pressure sensor suitable for ceiling surface mounting, complete with multiple sensing ports, pressure impulse suppression chamber with minimum volume of 50 cubic inches, airflow shielding, and 3/8" compression takeoff fittings, all contained in a welded stainless steel casing, with polish finish on the exposed surfaces. These probes shall be capable of sensing the static pressure in the proximity of the sensor to within 1% of the actual pressure value while being subjected to a maximum airflow of 1000 FPM from a radial source. The shielded static sensing devices shall be used for both reference and space pressure sensing. Pressure sensors used for outside air pressure reference purposes shall be equipped with a conduit seal for pneumatic tubing and bushings for a weather tight installation.

Shielded Static Pressure Sensor 1.

2.

3. 4.

P.

Static Pressure Traverse Probe - Provide multipoint traverse probes in the duct at each point where static pressure sensing is required. 1. Each duct static traverse probe shall contain multiple static pressure sensors located along the exterior surface of the cylindrical probe. Pressure sensing points shall not protrude beyond the surface of the probe. The duct static traverse probe shall be of 304 stainless steel construction and (except for 3/4" dia. probes with lengths of 24" or less) be complete with threaded end support rod, sealing washer and nut, and mounting plate with gasket and static pressure signal fitting. The static traverse probe shall be capable of producing a steady, non-pulsating signal of standard static

2.

M - 61

pressure without need for correction factors, with an instrument accuracy of 21.
Q.

Carbon Dioxide Sensor for Demand Controlled Ventilation. Provide a general purpose indoor transmitter/sensor assembly with removable sensor, UL listed. 4-20 mA DC output representing 0-2000 ppm. Minimum (5) year sensor life, with field-replaceable sensor unit. Accuracy +/- 1 percent of reading at 77 degF. Long term drift less than 1 percent of scale per year. For wall-mounted sensors, provide local readout display.. Venturi Flowmeter Provide venture flowmeters with the following features: 1. Pressure drop on venturi type flow meters shall not exceed 0.25" WC. Each venturi low and high pressure taps shall be equipped with nipples, valves and quick disconnects. Equip each venturi with a metal identification tag indicating the size, location, GPM and meter reading for the GPM specified. Provide (1) 6" dial differential pressure meter of the proper range to determine piping system flow rate. The meter shall be the property of the Owner. Venturi meters shall utilize flanged or screwed connections for removal purposes and shall be rated for the system operating pressures. The venturi flow meter shall be factory calibrated to provide a minimum of flow accuracy between actual and factory flow calibration data.

R.

2. 3.

4.

5.

S.

Current Transformers Provide current transformers with the following features: 1. The current transformers shall be designed to be installed or removed without dismantling the primary bus or cables. The transformer shall be of a split core design. The core and windings shall be completely encased in a UL approved thermoplastic rated 94VA. No metal parts shall be exposed other than the terminals. Frequency Limits: 50 to 400 Hz. Insulation: 0.6 KV Class, 10 KV BIL. Accuracy: 1% at 5.0 to 25.0 VA accuracy class with U.P.F. burden. Provide a disconnect switch for each current transformer.

2.

3. 4. 5.
T.

Current Sensing Switches - Current sensing switch shall be selfpowered with solid-state circuitry and a dry contact output. Current sensing switches shall consist of a solid state current sensing circuit, adjustable trip point, solid state switch, SPDT relay and an LED indicating the on or off status. A conductor of the load shall be passed through the window of the device. It shall accept over current up to twice its trip into range. Relays - Relays other than those associated with digital output cards shall be general purpose, enclosed plug-in type with 8-pin octal plug and protected by a heat and shock resistant duct cover. Number of contacts and operational function shall be as required.

U.

M - 62

V.

Solid State Relays (SSR): Input/output isolation shall be greater than lOE9 ohms with a breakdown voltage of 1500V root mean square or greater at 60 Hz. The contact life shall be 10 x 10 E6 operations or greater. The ambient temperature range of SSRs shall be -20 to +140F. Input impedance shall not be less than 500 ohms. Relays shall be rated for the application. Operating and release time shall be for 100 milliseconds or less. Transient suppression shall be provided as an integral part of the relay. Contactors: Contactors shall be of the single coil, electrically operated, mechanically held type. Positive locking shall be obtained without the use of hooks, latches, or semipermanent magnets. Contractor shall be double-break-silver-to-silver type protected by arcing contacts. The number of contacts and rating shall be selected for the application. Operating and release times shall be 100 milliseconds or less. Contactors shall be equipped with coil transient suppression devices. Dirty Filter Differential Air Pressure Switch Provide for a large diaphragm operated, SPDT switch, exposed adjustment, 1% repetitive accuracy. Differential Water Pressure Switch Provide a double diaphragm type, brass or stainless wetted parts, min. 200 psi working pressure. Adjustable cut-in and differential, SPDT snap acting switch suitable for 120 VAC control circuit. Water Flow Switch (Paddle Type) Provide a brass body, aluminum housing, and stainless steel segmented paddle. Magnetic link between paddle movement and switch movement.

W.

X.

Y.

Z.

5.2.

Valves and Actuators A. General - Provide electric and electronic control system products in sizes and capacities indicated, consisting of automatic control valves, automatic control dampers, thermostats, clocks, sensors, controllers, and other components as required for complete installation. Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturers standard control system components as indicated by published product information, designed and constructed as recommended by manufacturer. Provide electric control systems with the following functional and construction features as indicated.

M - 63

B.

Automatic Control Valves 1. Provide automatic control valves suitable for the specified controlled media of the type and general construction indicated. Where type or general construction is not indicated, provide selection as determined by manufacturer for installation requirements and pressure class, based on controlled media, maximum pressure and temperature rating of piping system, and other pertinent application requirements. Unless otherwise indicated, provide valves which mate and match material of connecting piping. Provide equipment control valves with control valve actuators of required input power type and control signal type that will accurately position the flow control element and provide sufficient force to achieve required leakage specification. a) Distribution Valves 1) Flanged Valves, line size 2.5 to 6 a) Controlled Media Specific Items (Select one or more of the following controlled media) 1) Steam - The control valve shall be suitable for saturated steam to a maximum temperature of 337F (170C) and a maximum pressure of 100 psig (690 kPa). A Linear flow characteristic and stainless steel trim is recommended. 2) Water - The control valve shall be suitable for chilled water to a minimum of 32F (0C) and hot water to a maximum temperature of 250F (120C). A modified equal percentage flow characteristic is recommended. Bronze trim is recommended for operating differential pressures up to 25psi. Stainless steel trim is recommended for operating differential pressures up to 50psi. 3) Glycol Solutions - The control valve shall be suitable for 50% ethylene or propylene glycol solutions, chilled glycol/water solutions to a minimum of 20F (-7C) and hot glycol/water solutions to a maximum temperature of 250F (120C). A modified equal percentage flow characteristic is recommended. Bronze trim is recommended for operating differential pressures up to 25psi. Stainless steel trim is recommended for operating differential pressures up to 50psi. b) General Construction Materials/Applicable Standards Select one or both of the following Pressure Classes. 1) Pressure Class 125 - Control valve bodies shall be constructed of gray cast iron according to ASTM A126B, and shall meet requirements of ANSI B16.1, pressure class ANSI 125. 2) Pressure Class 250 - Control valve bodies shall be constructed of gray cast iron according to ASTM A126B, and shall meet requirements of ANSI B16.1, pressure class ANSI 250. 3) Flange Connection Dimensions - For Class 125 and Class 250 valve assemblies, flange dimensions shall be according to ANSI B16.1, and valve body flange-to-flange dimensions shall be according to ANSI/ISA S75.03. 4) Flow Rate (Cv) - The control valve flow rate (Cv) shall meet the requirements of ANSI/ISA S75.02.

M - 64

Select one or both of the following flow characteristic types. 5) Linear Flow Characteristic - The control valve shall have a linear flow characteristic, according to ANSI/ISA S75.11. 6) Equal Percentage Flow Characteristic - The control valve shall have a modified equal percentage flow characteristic. 7) Rangeability - The control valve shall have a minimum rangeability of 100:1. 8) Leakage Class IV (0.01%) - Valve shall meet the requirements of seat leakage Class IV according to ANSI/FCI 70.2, with no more than 125% of nominal force necessary to balance fluid forces applied to valve stem. Select one or both of the following stem packing types. 9) Chilled and Hot Water Packing - Valve stem packing shall be of a cartridge type and shall contain at least two EPDM o-rings. 10) Steam Packing - Valve stem packing shall be of a springloaded cartridge type and shall contain at least seven Teflon v-rings and one EPDM o-ring. Select one or both of the following trim material types. Stainless steel is recommended for steam applications and high differential pressure applications. Bronze trim is recommended for normal duty water service. 11) Bronze Trim - Control valve seat shall be made of stainless steel according to UNS S30300 or ASTM A582 Type 303, and plug shall be made of bronze according to UNS C84400. 12) Stainless Trim - Control valve seat and plug shall be made of stainless steel according to UNS S30300, or ASTM A582 Type 303. 13) Stem Materials - Valve stem shall be made of polished stainless steel according to ASTM A581/A or ASTM A582/A. c) Service Parts 1) Packings Select one or both of the following stem packing types. (i) Chilled and Hot Water Packing - Valve stem packing shall be of a cartridge type and shall contain at least two EPDM o-rings. The cartridge type packing shall be replaceable as a unit. (ii) Steam Packing - Valve stem packing shall be of a spring-loaded cartridge type and shall contain at least three Teflon v-rings and one EPDM o-ring. 2) Trim Plug and Stem The control plug shall be replaceable as a unit.

M - 65

2)

Threaded Valves, line 0.5 to 2 a) Controlled Media Specific Items Select one or more of the following controlled media. 1) Steam - The control valve shall be suitable for saturated steam to a maximum temperature of 337F (170C) and a maximum pressure of 100 psig (690 kPa). A Linear flow characteristic and stainless steel trim is recommended. Water - The control valve shall be suitable for chilled water to a minimum of 32F (0C) and hot water to a maximum temperature of 250F (120C). A modified equal percentage flow characteristic is recommended. Bronze or brass trim is recommended for operating differential pressures up to 25psi. Stainless steel trim is recommended for operating differential pressures up to 50psi. 3) Glycol Solutions - The control valve shall be suitable for 50% ethylene or propylene glycol solutions, chilled glycol/water solutions to a minimum of 20F (-7C) and hot glycol/water solutions to a maximum temperature of 250F (120C). A modified equal percentage flow characteristic is recommended. Bronze or brass trim is recommended for operating differential pressures up to 25psi. Stainless steel trim is recommended for operating differential pressures up to 50psi. b) General Construction Materials/Applicable Standards 1) Pressure Class 250 - Control valve bodies shall be constructed of cast bronze according to UNS C84400 or forged brass according to UNS C37700, and shall meet requirements of ANSI B16.1, pressure class ANSI 250. 2) Threaded Connection Dimensions Threaded connection specifications shall be according to ANSI B2.1. 3) Flow Rate (Cv) - The control valve flow rate (Cv) shall meet the requirements of ANSI/ISA S75.02. Select one or both of the following flow characteristic types. 4) Linear Flow Characteristic - The control valve shall have a linear flow characteristic, according to ANSI/ISA S75.11. 5) Equal Percentage Flow Characteristic - The control valve shall have a modified equal percentage flow characteristic. 6) Range ability - The control valve shall have a minimum range ability of 100:1. 7) Leakage Class IV (0.01%) - Valve shall meet the requirements of seat leakage Class IV according to ANSI/FCI 70.2, with no more than 125% of nominal force necessary to balance fluid forces applied to valve stem. 2)

M - 66

Select one or both of the following stem packing types. 8) Chilled and Hot Water Packing - Valve stem packing shall be of a cartridge type and shall contain at least two EPDM o-rings. 9) Steam Packing - Valve stem packing shall be of a springloaded cartridge type and shall contain at least three Teflon v-rings and one EPDM o-ring. Select one or both of the following trim material types. Stainless steel is recommended for steam applications and high differential pressure applications. Bronze/Brass trim is recommended for normal duty water service. 10) Bronze/Brass Trim - Control valve seat shall be made of stainless steel according to UNS S30300 or ASTM A582 Type 303, and plug shall be made of bronze according to UNS C84400 and/or brass according to UNS C36000 or C37700. 11) Stainless Trim - Control valve seat and plug shall be made of stainless steel according to UNS S30300, or ASTM A582 Type 303. 12) Stem Materials - Valve stem shall be made of polished stainless steel according to ASTM A581/A or ASTM A582/A. c) Service Parts 1) Packings Select one or both of the following stem packing types. (i) Chilled and Hot Water Packing - Valve stem packing shall be of a cartridge type and shall contain at least two EPDM o-rings. The cartridge type packing shall be replaceable as a unit. (ii) Steam Packing - Valve stem packing shall be of a spring-loaded cartridge type and shall contain at least three Teflon v-rings and one EPDM o-ring. 2) Trim Plug and Stem The control plug and stem shall be replaceable as a unit. Terminal Unit Valves 1) Threaded Valves, line 0.5 to 1.5 a) Controlled Media Specific Items Select one or more of the following controlled media. 1) Steam - The control valve shall be suitable for saturated steam to a maximum temperature of 250F (120C) and a maximum pressure of 15 psig (103.5 kPa). A linear flow characteristic and stainless steel trim is recommended. 2) Water - The control valve shall be suitable for chilled water to a minimum of 32F (0C) and hot water to a maximum temperature of 250F (120C). Bronze or brass trim is recommended for operating differential pressures up to 25psi. Stainless steel trim is recommended for operating differential pressures up to 50psi. 3) Glycol Solutions - The control valve shall be suitable for 50% ethylene or propylene glycol solutions,

b)

M - 67

chilled glycol/water solutions to a minimum of 32F (0C) and hot glycol/water solutions to a maximum temperature of 250F (120C). Bronze or brass trim is recommended for operating differential pressures up to 25psi. Stainless steel trim is recommended for operating differential pressures up to 50psi. b) General Construction Materials/Applicable Standards 1) Pressure Class 250 - Control valve bodies shall be constructed of cast bronze according to UNS C84400 or forged brass according to UNS C37700, and shall meet requirements of ANSI B16.1, pressure class ANSI 250. 2) Threaded Connection Dimensions - Threaded connection specifications shall be according to ANSI B2.1. 3) Flow Rate (Cv) - The control valve flow rate (Cv) shall meet the requirements of ANSI/ISA S75.02. 4) Modified Equal Percentage Flow Characteristic - The control valve shall have a modified equal percentage flow characteristic, according to ANSI/ISA S75.11. 5) Rangeability - The control valve shall have a minimum rangeability of 100:1 on valves with a Cv value greater than or equal to 1.0 and a minimum rangeability of 50:1 on valves with a Cv value less than 1.0. 6) Leakage Class IV (0.01%) - Valve shall meet the requirements of seat leakage Class IV according to ANSI/FCI 70.2, with no more than 125% of nominal force necessary to balance fluid forces applied to valve stem. 7) Chilled Water, Hot Water and Steam Packing - Valve stem packing shall contain at least two EPDM orings. Select one or both of the following trim material types. Stainless steel is recommended for steam applications and high differential pressure applications. Bronze/Brass trim is recommended for normal duty water service. 8) Bronze/Brass Trim - Control valve seat and plug shall be made of bronze according to UNS C84400 and/or brass according UNS C36000 or C37700. 9) Stainless Trim - Control valve seat and plug shall be made of stainless steel according to UNS S30300, or ASTM A582 Type 303. 10) Stem Materials - Valve stem shall be made of polished stainless steel according to ASTM A581/A or ASTM A582/A.

M - 68

c)

Zone Valves 1) Threaded or Sweat Connection Valves, line size 0.5 to 1. a) Controlled Media Specific Items Select one or more of the following controlled media. 1) Water - The control valve shall be suitable for chilled water to a minimum of 34F (1C) and hot water to a maximum temperature of 230F (110C). 2) Glycol Solutions - The control valve shall be suitable for 50% ethylene or propylene glycol solutions, chilled glycol/water solutions to a minimum of 34F (1C) and hot glycol/water solutions to a maximum temperature of 230F (110C). b) General Construction Materials/Applicable Standards 1) Pressure Class 125 - Control valve bodies shall be constructed of forged brass and shall meet requirements of ANSI B16.1, pressure class ANSI 125. Select one or more of the following connection types. 2) Threaded Connection Dimensions Threaded connection specifications shall be according to ANSI B2.1. 3) Sweat Connection Dimensions - Sweat connection specifications shall be according to ANSI B16.22. 4) Flow Rate (Cv) - The control valve flow rate (Cv) shall meet the requirements of ANSI/ISA S75.02. 5) Linear Flow Characteristic - The control valve shall have a linear flow characteristic, according to ANSI/ISA S75.11. 6) Leakage Class III (0.1%) - Valve shall meet the requirements of seat leakage Class III according to ANSI/FCI 70.2, with no more than 125% of nominal force necessary to balance fluid forces applied to valve stem. 7) Chilled and Hot Water Packing - Valve stem packing shall contain at least two EPDM orings. 8) Brass Trim - Control valve seat and plug shall be made of brass according UNS C36000. 9) Stem Materials - Valve stem shall be made of polished stainless steel according to ASTM A581/A or ASTM A582/A.

M - 69

d) Ball Valves 1) Threaded Valves, line size 0.5 to 2 a) Controlled Media Specific Items Select one or more of the following controlled media. 1) Water - The control valve shall be suitable for chilled water to a minimum of 32F (0C) and hot water to a maximum temperature of 250F (120C). 2) Glycol Solutions - The control valve shall be suitable for 50% ethylene or propylene glycol solutions, chilled glycol/water solutions to a minimum of 32F (0C) and hot glycol/water solutions to a maximum temperature of 250F (120C). b) General Construction Materials/Applicable Standards 1) Body Material - Control valve bodies shall be constructed of forged brass according to ASTM B283, and shall meet requirements of no less than 360 PSI at 250F. 2) Ball Material - Valve ball shall consist of chemically nickel-plated brass. Manufacturer shall provide a glass filled polymer ball insert, as an integral part of the ball, for modulating flow applications. 3) Threaded Connection Dimensions Threaded connection specifications shall be according to ANSI B2.1. 4) Flow Rate (Cv) - The control valve flow rate (Cv) shall meet the requirements of ANSI/ISA S75.02. 5) Equal Percentage Flow Characteristic - The control valve shall have an equal percentage flow characteristic, according to ANSI/ISA S75.11. 6) Leakage Class IV (0.01%) - Valve shall meet the requirements of seat leakage Class IV according to ANSI/FCI 70.2, with no more than 125% of nominal force necessary to balance fluid forces applied to valve stem. 7) Chilled and Hot Water Packing and Stem Valve shall have a blow-out proof stem with two EPDM O-rings. 8) Stem Materials - Valve stem shall be made of brass. 9) Manual Operation - Valve shall have the ability to be manually operated in the event of a power failure.

M - 70

C.

Control Valve Actuators 1. Pneumatic Valve Actuators a) General Requirements 1.) Operating pressure - Valve actuator shall operate with supply pressure up to a maximum of 35psi (240kPa). 2.) Safety pressure - Valve actuator shall withstand a maximum supply overpressure of 50psi (345kPa) then resume normal operation when control pressure is applied. 3.) Pressure vessel integrity Valve actuator shall be tested for pressure vessel integrity at a level of triple maximum operating pressure. b) Distribution Valve Actuators 1) Mounting locations The control valve actuator shall be suitable for mounting in plenum spaces as defined by NEC, Article 100 Definitions. 2) Direct Coupled - The control valve actuator shall be directly coupled to the valve, with no intermediary linkage kit required, to facilitate repair and/or replacement. 3) Control signal - The actuator control signal shall be 5 psi nominal, and shall have a fully adjustable start point over the nominal range of 3 to 10 psi, to facilitate operational sequencing. 4) Control signal accuracy - Valve actuator position resolution shall be >100:1, with a hysteresis <5% of nominal control signal span. Select one of the following operating ambient specifications. 5) Normal duty operating ambient conditions - The control valve actuator shall be suitable for operation to a minimum temperature of -40F (-40C), and a maximum temperature of 150F (65C), with 0-95% non-condensing ambient humidity, and dry air supply. 6) Heavy duty operating ambient conditions - The control valve actuator shall be suitable for operation to a minimum temperature of -40F (-40C), and a maximum temperature of 180F (82C), with 0-95% non-condensing ambient humidity, and dry air supply. 7) Accessories For 8 and 12 pneumatic actuators only The valve actuator shall have provisions to field or factory mount a pilot positioner. c) Terminal Unit Valve Actuators 1) Mounting locations - The control valve actuator shall be suitable for mounting in plenum spaces as defined by NEC, Article 100 Definitions. 2) Direct Coupled - The control valve actuator shall be directly coupled to the valve, with no intermediary linkage kit required, to facilitate repair and/or replacement.

M - 71

2.

Control signal - The actuator control signal shall be 5 psi nominal, and shall have a fully adjustable start point over the nominal range of 3 to 10 psi, to facilitate operational sequencing. 4) Control signal accuracy - Valve actuator position resolution shall be >100:1, with a hysteresis <5% of nominal control signal span. 5) Normal duty operating ambient conditions - The control valve actuator shall be suitable for operation to a minimum temperature of -40F (-40C), and a maximum temperature of 150F (65C), with 0-95% non-condensing ambient humidity, and dry air supply. Electronic Valve Actuators 24Vac Powered a) General Requirements 1) Applicable Standards a) The valve actuator shall be identified as a Class 2 operating device, according to NEC, Article 725. b) The valve actuator shall be tested and listed by Underwriters Laboratories according to UL873, and shall bear the UL and cUL approval symbols. c) The valve actuator shall be designed and tested to NEMA 1 standards, according to NEMA 250. For product likely to be exported to or used in Europe or a European territory or commonwealth. d) The valve actuator shall bear the CE mark, and shall be designed and tested according to EU directives 89/336/EWG and 72/23/EWG. Distribution Valve Actuators Omit the following for Linkage Coupled Actuators. a) Direct Coupled - The control valve actuator shall be directly coupled to the valve, with no intermediary linkage kit required, to facilitate repair and/or replacement. The control valve actuator shall be equipped with a manual override feature, allowing operation of the control valve upon loss of control power or signal, without the aid of a separate tool or auxiliary power supply. b) Fail Safe Operation Select one or more of the following fail safe operation options. 1) Upon power failure or loss of control signal, the valve actuator shall return to a fail-safe operating position by means of a mechanical spring. 2) Upon power failure, the valve actuator shall maintain its last controlled position (fail in place).

3)

2)

M - 72

Visual Position Indication - The valve actuator shall provide indication of valve stem position, clearly visible from a distance of 15ft. (4.5m). 3) Terminal Unit Valve Actuators Omit the following for Linkage Coupled Actuators. a) Direct Coupled - The control valve actuator shall be directly coupled to the valve, with no intermediary linkage kit required, to facilitate repair and/or replacement. The control valve actuator shall be equipped with a manual override feature, allowing operation of the control valve upon loss of control power or signal, without the aid of a separate tool or auxiliary power supply. b) Fail Safe Operation Select one or more of the following fail safe operation options. 1) Upon power failure or loss of control signal, the valve actuator shall return to a fail-safe operating position by means of a mechanical spring. 2) Upon power failure or loss of control signal, the valve actuator shall return to a fail-safe operating position by self-contained electronic means. 3) Upon power failure, the valve actuator shall maintain its last controlled position (fail in place). c) Visual Position Indication - The valve actuator shall provide indication of valve stem position, clearly visible from a distance of 15ft. (4.5m). Zone Valve Actuators a) Direct Coupled - The control valve actuator shall be directly coupled to the valve, with no intermediary linkage kit required, to facilitate repair and/or replacement. The control valve actuator shall be equipped with a manual override feature, allowing operation of the control valve upon loss of control power or signal, without the aid of a separate tool or auxiliary power supply. b) Fail Safe Operation Select one or more of the following fail safe operation options. 1) Upon power failure or loss of control signal, the valve actuator shall return to a fail-safe operating position by means of a mechanical spring. 2) Upon power failure, the valve actuator shall maintain its last controlled position (fail in place). c) Visual Position Indication - The valve actuator shall provide indication of valve stem position, clearly visible from a distance of 15ft. (4.5m).

c)

4)

5) Ball Valve Actuators a) Direct Coupled - The control valve actuator shall be directly coupled to the valve, with no intermediary linkage kit required, to facilitate repair and/or replacement. The control valve actuator shall be equipped with a manual override feature, allowing operation of the control valve

M - 73

upon loss of control power or signal, without the aid of a separate tool or auxiliary power supply. b) Fail Safe Operation Select one or more of the following fail safe operation options. 1) Upon power failure or loss of control signal, the valve actuator shall return to a fail-safe operating position by means of a mechanical spring. 2) Upon power failure, the valve actuator shall maintain its last controlled position (fail in place). 3) Torque Requirement - The control valve actuator shall provide minimum torque required for full valve shutoff position. 3. Electric Valve Actuator 115Vac/230Vac Powered a) General Requirements 1) Applicable Standards a) The valve actuator shall be identified as a Class 1 operating device, according to NEC, Article 725. b) The valve actuator shall be tested and listed by Underwriters Laboratories according to UL873, and shall bear the UL and cUL approval symbols. c) The valve actuator shall be designed and tested to NEMA 1 standards, according to NEMA 250. For product likely to be exported to or used in Europe or a European territory or commonwealth. d) The valve actuator shall bear the CE mark, and shall be designed and tested according to EU directives 89/336/EWG and 72/23/EWG. Distribution Valve Actuators Omit the following for Linkage Coupled Actuators. a) Direct Coupled - The control valve actuator shall be directly coupled to the valve, with no intermediary linkage kit required, to facilitate repair and/or replacement. The control valve actuator shall be equipped with a manual override feature, allowing operation of the control valve upon loss of control power or signal, without the aid of a separate tool. b) Fail Safe Operation Select one or more of the following fail safe operation options. 1) Upon power failure or loss of control signal, the valve actuator shall return to a fail-safe operating position by means of a mechanical spring. 2) Upon power failure, the valve actuator shall maintain its last controlled position (fail in place). c) Visual Position Indication - The valve actuator shall provide indication of valve stem position, clearly visible from a distance of 15ft. (4.5m). 3) Terminal Unit Valve Actuators Omit the following for Linkage Coupled Actuators. a) Direct Coupled - The control valve actuator shall be directly coupled to the valve, with no intermediary linkage kit required, to facilitate

2)

M - 74

4)

repair and/or replacement. The control valve actuator shall be equipped with a manual override feature, allowing operation of the control valve upon loss of control power or signal, without the aid of a separate tool. b) Fail Safe Operation Select one or more of the following fail safe operation options. 1) Upon power failure or loss of control signal, the valve actuator shall return to a fail-safe operating position by means of a mechanical spring. 2) Upon power failure, the valve actuator shall maintain its last controlled position (fail in place). c) Visual Position Indication - The valve actuator shall provide indication of valve stem position, clearly visible from a distance of 15ft. (4.5m). Zone Valve Actuators a) Direct Coupled - The control valve actuator shall be directly coupled to the valve, with no intermediary linkage kit required, to facilitate repair and/or replacement. The control valve actuator shall be equipped with a manual override feature, allowing operation of the control valve upon loss of control power or signal, without the aid of a separate tool. b) Fail Safe Operation Select one or more of the following fail safe operation options. 1) Upon power failure or loss of control signal, the valve actuator shall return to a fail-safe operating position by means of a mechanical spring. 2) Upon power failure, the valve actuator shall maintain its last controlled position (fail in place). c) Visual Position Indication - The valve actuator shall provide indication of valve stem position, clearly visible from a distance of 15ft. (4.5m).

D.

Direct Coupled Damper Actuators 1. 2. Actuators shall be designed for mounting directly to the damper shaft without the need for connecting linkages. All actuators having more than 100 lb-in torque output shall have a self-centering damper shaft clamp that guarantees concentric alignment of the actuator's output coupling with the damper shaft. The self-centering clamp shall have a pair of opposed "V" shaped toothed cradles; each having two rows of teeth to maximize holding strength. A single clamping bolt shall simultaneously drive both cradles into contact with the damper shaft. All actuators having more than a 100 lb-in torque output shall accept a 1" diameter shaft directly, without the need for auxiliary adapters.

3.

M - 75

4. 5.

6. 7.

8. 9.

10.

11. 12. 13. 14.

All actuators having more than 100 lb-in torque output shall have an all metal housing made from die-cast aluminum. All actuators must provide overload protection throughout the full range of rotation, enabling the actuator to detect a blockage in the damper and withstand a continuous stall condition without premature failure, or degradation in performance. All spring return actuators shall be capable of both clockwise or counterclockwise spring return fail-safe operation. All spring return actuators shall use a continuously engaged mechanical return spring that returns the actuator to a fail-safe position within 15 seconds, under rated temperature and load, in response to a loss of power. Other fail-safe mechanisms which are either engaged only in response to a loss of power, or which are non-mechanical are not acceptable. All actuators shall provide a means of manually positioning the output coupling in the absence of power. Dual independently adjustable auxiliary switches must be integral to the actuator, thus maintaining a low total installed cost. The addition of this feature as an accessory kit is not acceptable. All actuators having more than 100 lb-in torque shall provide a factory mounted electrical cable (3 feet) and conduit fitting, thus maintaining a low total installed cost. All actuators shall not require more than 10 VA. Proportional actuators shall accept a 0-10 VDC or 4-20mA control signal, and provide a 0-10 VDC feedback signal. All actuators shall provide an easily readable high contrast yellow on black position indicator. All actuators shall be designed for a minimum of 50,000 full stroke cycles at the actuators rated torque and temperatures, and manufactured using ISO9002 and ISO14000 registered procedures, and shall be UL873 and CSA22.2 listed. Identification tags shall be available for all valves; tags shall be indelibly marked with Cv, model number and location.

E.

Accessories 1.

Part 6 - EXECUTION 6.1 Examination A. Verification 1. 2. Verify that all systems are ready to receive work. The project plans shall be thoroughly examined for control device and equipment locations, and any discrepancies, conflicts, or omissions shall be reported to the Architect/Engineer for resolution before rough-in work is started. The contractor shall inspect the site to verify that equipment is installable as show, and any discrepancies, conflicts, or omissions shall be reported to the Architect/Engineer for resolution before rough-in work is started.

3.

M - 76

4.

The Control System Contractor shall examine the drawings and specifications for other parts of the work, and if head room or space conditions appear inadequate or if any discrepancies occur between the plans and his work and the plans for the work of others, he shall report such discrepancies to the Architect/Engineer and shall obtain written instructions for any changes necessary to accommodate his work with the work of others. 1) Install all control components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. 2) If the controls contractor is responsible for providing the damper then provide mixing dampers of parallel blade construction arranged to mix streams. Provide separate minimum outside air damper section adjacent to variable outside air damper. 3) Mount control panels adjacent to associated equipment on vibration-free walls or freestanding angle iron supports. One cabinet may accommodate more than one system in same equipment room. Provide nameplates for instruments and controls inside cabinet and nameplates on cabinet face. 4) After completion of installation, test and adjust control equipment. Submit data showing setpoints and final adjustments of controls. 5) Install equipment, piping, wiring/conduit parallel to building lines (i.e., horizontal, vertical, and parallel to walls) wherever possible. 6) Provide sufficient slack and flexible connections to allow for vibration of piping and equipment. 7) Verify integrity of all wiring to ensure continuity and freedom from shorts and grounds. 8) All equipment, installation, and wiring shall comply with acceptable industry specifications and standards for performance, reliability, and compatibility and be executed in strict adherence to local codes and standard practices.

B.

General Installation Requirements

C.

Graphical User Interface PC Location 15. Install Graphical User Interface PC in the location indicated. Do not deliver the Graphical User Interface PC to the job site until a proper location has been prepared. Location shall be clean and dry, free from construction dust and debris. Location shall have a dedicated work surface (table or desk with chair). Work surface shall be provided by Owner or General Contractor for use by this Contractor. Location shall have ample storage provisions for documentation and manuals, either shelving or a four drawer upright filing cabinet. Storage provisions shall be provided by Owner or General Contractor for use by this Contractor. Location shall have a dedicated locked electrical circuit for use by this Contractor.

16.

17.

18.

M - 77

D.

Ethernet Network Connection 19. All nevices that require a connection to the LAN or access to an ISP shall be approved by the owners Information Technology representitive prior to installation. All ethernet communication connections shall be provided by the owner or General Contractor.

20. 6.2

Electrical System Installation


A. B.

Comply with all Division 16 Installation Requirements. Provide interlock wiring between supply and exhaust fans, electrical wiring for relays (including power feed) for temperature and pressure indication. Provide power wiring, conduit and connections for low temperature thermostats, high temperature thermostats, alarms, flow switches, actuating devices for temperature, humidity, pressure and flow indication, point resets and user disconnect switches for electric heating, appliances controlled by this Section. Provide all other wiring required for the complete operation of the specified systems. Where required install all wiring raceway systems complying with the requirements of the National Electrical Code. All required conduit shall be installed in EMT. Provide interlock wiring between supply and exhaust fans, electrical wiring for relays (including power feed) for temperature and pressure indication. Surge Protection and Lighting Protection
1. All equipment and all communication media shall be suitably protected from damage associated with electrical surge and lightning strike. Submittal and approval is required for all such devices. All input-output hardware and instrumentation located outdoors shall be isolated using approved surge suppression devices. All telephone modem connections shall be isolated using approved surge suppression devices. All building-to-building communication connections shall be isolated using approved surge suppression devices. All temperature control panels and controllers shall be provided with a control power transformer with fuse protection on both the primary and secondary sides.

C.

D.

E.

F.

G.

2. 3. 4. 5.

H.

Provide electrical disconnecting means for servicing, for each control panel, digital controller, router, transformer, power supply, and other devices that are served by 120VAC or higher voltage.

M - 78

I.

Enclosures shall be fabricated of 14ga. steel with sub-panels for component mounting and have removable, hinged doors. Enclosures shall be sized to house the controllers, power supplies, transformers, relays, wire duct and miscellaneous equipment required to support the application. Enclosures shall be provided for all controllers that are not located within an OEM provided mechanical equipment or on a VAV box. Enclosure power supply shall provide at least one 40VA and one 100VA transformer with individual on/off switches and circuit breakers and two 120VAC outlets. Enclosures and power supplies shall be UL listed Class II. Network Communication Requirements 1. Wired network communication shall be via channels in compliance with manufactures recommendations for communications In all communication conduits, provide one spare twisted pair to be installed, tagged and labeled at each end. Communication conduits shall not be installed closer than six feet from high power transformers or run parallel within six feet of electrical high power cables. Care shall be taken to route the cable as far from interference generating devices as possible. There shall be no power wiring, in excess of 30 VAC rms, run in conduit with communications wiring. Platinum 1k ohm and thermistor 10K type II wiring shall be twowire or four-wire twisted, shielded, minimum number 22 gauge. Other analog inputs shall be a minimum of number 22 gauge, twisted, shielded. Binary control function wiring shall be a minimum of number 18 gauge. Analog output control functions shall be a minimum of number 18 gauge, twisted, shielded. Binary input wiring shall be a minimum of number 18 gauge.

J.

K.

2. 3.

4.
L.

Input/Output Control Wiring 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

M.

Splices in shielded cables shall consist of terminations and the use of shielded cable couplers, which maintain the integrity of the shielding. Terminations shall be in accessible locations. Cables shall be harnessed with cable ties as specified herein. Conduit and Fittings 1. Conduit for Control Wiring, Control Cable and Transmission Cable: Electrical metallic tubing (EMT) with compression fittings, cold rolled steel, zinc coated or zinc-coated rigid steel with threaded connections. Outlet Boxes (Dry Location): Sheradized or galvanized drawn steel suited to each application, in general, four inches square or octagon with suitable raised cover.

N.

2.

M - 79

3. 4.

5.

6.

Outlet Boxes (Exposed to Weather): Threaded hub cast aluminum or iron boxes with gasket device plate. Pull and Junction Boxes: Size according to number, size, and position of entering raceway as required by National Electrical Codes. Enclosure type shall be suited to location. Install low voltage power and field level network and LAN communication trunks in conduit in the following locations regardless of local building code allowances otherwise. a) Mechanical rooms. b) Electrical rooms. c) Vertical risers (exception: fire rated continuous closet like a telephone closet). d) Open Areas where the wiring will be exposed to view or tampering. Conceal conduit within finished shafts, ceilings and wall as required. Install exposed conduit parallel with or at right angles to the building walls.

O.

Where Class 2 wires are in concealed and accessible locations including ceiling return air plenums, approved cables not in raceway may be used provided that: 1. Circuits meet NEC Class 2 (current-limited) requirements. (Lowvoltage power circuits shall be sub-fused when required to meet Class 2 current-limit.) All cables shall be UL listed for application, i.e., cables used in ceiling plenums shall be UL listed specifically for that purpose.

2.
P.

Do not install Class 2 wiring in conduit containing Class 1 wiring. Boxes and panels containing high voltage may not be used for low voltage wiring except for the purpose of interfacing the two (e.g., relays and transformers). Where Class 2 wiring is run exposed, wiring to be run parallel along a surface or perpendicular to it, and NEATLY tied at 3m (10 ft.) intervals. All wire-to-device connections shall be made at a terminal blocks or terminal strip. All wire-to-wire connections shall be at a terminal block, or with a crimped connector. All wiring within enclosures shall be neatly bundled and anchored to permit access and prevent restriction to devices and terminals. Plug or cap all unused conduit openings and stub-ups. Do not use caulking compound. Route all conduit to clear beams, plates, footings and structure members. Do not route conduit through column footings or grade beams. Set conduits as follows: 1. Expanding silicone fire stop material sealed watertight where conduit is run between floors and through walls of fireproof shaft. Oakum and lead, sealed watertight penetration through outside foundation walls.

Q.

R.

S.

T.

U.

2.

M - 80

V. W.

Cap open ends of conduits until conductors are installed. Where conduit is attached to vibrating or rotating equipment, flexible metal conduit with a minimum length of 18 inches and maximum length of 36 inches shall be installed and anchored in such a manner that vibration and equipment noise will not be transmitted to the rigid conduit. Where exposed to the elements or in damp or wet locations, waterproof flexible conduit shall be installed. Installation shall be as specified for flexible metal conduit. Provide floor, wall, and ceiling plates for all conduits passing through walls, floors or ceilings. Use prime coated cast iron, split-ring type plates, except with polished chrome-plated finish in exposed finished spaces.

X.

Y.

6.3

Temperature Sensors
A.

Temperature sensor assemblies shall be readily accessible and adaptable to each type of application in such manner as to allow for quick, easy replacement and servicing without special tools or skills. Strap-on mountings shall not be permitted. Outdoor installations shall be; of weatherproof construction or in appropriate NEMA enclosures. These installations shall be protected from solar radiation and wind effects. Protective shield shall be stainless steel. Sensors shall be with enclosure where located in finished space. Sensors in ducts shall be mounted in locations to sense the correct temperature of the air only and shall not be located in dead air spaces or positions obstructed by ducts, equipment, and so forth. Locations where installed shall be within the vibration and velocity limit of the sensing element. Ducts shall be securely sealed where elements or connections penetrate ducts to avoid measuring false conditions. All sensors measuring temperatures in pipes larger than 2 inches in diameter or in pressure vessels shall be supplied with wells properly fabricated for the service. Wells shall be noncorrosive to the medium being measured and shall have sufficient physical strength to withstand pressures and velocities to which they are subjected. Wells shall be installed in the piping at elbows where piping is smaller than the length of the well to effect proper flow across the entire area of the well. All field sensors, transmitters, actuators, switches, etc. shall be field calibrated. The calibration shall be guaranteed for the period of the control system warranty. Any corrections or re-calibration required during the warranty will be performed at no cost to Owner. Calibration methods, means, instruments, and standards shall be in strict accordance with ISO-9000 standards.

B. C.

D. E.

F.

G.

M - 81

6.4

Controls Valves, Control Dampers and Actuators A. Control Valves. 1. 2. Control valves shall be installed by the Div. 15 contractor. Coordinate with the Div. 15 contractor and verify that each control valve can be serviced, including adjustment and removal of the actuator. All control valves shall have unions installed at each inlet and outlet to permit removal of the valve for servicing. Valves shall be installed with stems vertical where possible. Where space conditions require valves to be mounted with stems greater than 45 off vertical the actuator shall be externally supported. In no case will the control valve be mounted with the stem greater than 90 off of vertical. Control dampers shall be installed by Div. 15 contractor. Coordinate with the Div. 15 contractor the service access requirements of the control dampers, and verify that each control damper can be serviced, including adjustment and removal of the actuator. Div. 15 Contractor shall provide necessary blank-off plates required for installation of reduced-size dampers (dampers that are smaller than duct size). Furnish interconnecting hardware, linkages, etc. for installation of multiple section dampers by Div. 15 Contractor.

3. 4.

B.

Control Dampers. 5. 6.

7.

8. 6.5 Access Doors.


H.

Div. 15 Contractor shall provide access doors or other approved means of access through ducts for service to control equipment.

6.6

Instrument Enclosures and Control Panels A. Securely mount all control panels and enclosures to wall or structure using bolts, anchors, etc. Mount enclosures and control panels with top at 60 inches above finished floor, unless noted otherwise. Field fabricate enclosure mounting rack from Unistrut or Kindorf, where required. Locate enclosures and control panels to ensure full door swing. Seal all conduit entrances into enclosures and control panels, water tight. Locate enclosures indoors where possible. Provide drains and block heaters for all panels located outdoors.

B. C.

6.7

Identification of Hardware and Wiring

M - 82

A.

All wiring and cabling, including that within factory-fabricated panels shall be labeled at each end within 2" of termination with a cable identifier and other descriptive information. Permanently label or code each point of field terminal strips to show the instrument or item served. Identify control panels with minimum 1 inch letters on nameplates. Identify all other control components with permanent labels. Identifiers shall match record documents. Affix engraved tags plates on each motor starter controlled through the EMS. Minimum tag size shall be 1 in. X 3 in. Minimum lettering size shall be 3/16 in. high. Tag shall be red with white lettering. Tags shall indicate the following: CAUTION This equipment is operating under automatic control and may start at any time without warning

B. C. D. E.

F. Identify room sensors relating to terminal box or valves with nameplates. 6.8 Cleaning
A.

This contractor shall clean up all debris resulting from his or her activities daily. The contractor shall remove all cartons, containers, crates, etc. under his control as soon as their contents have been removed. Waste shall be collected and placed in a location designated by the Construction Manager or General Contractor. At the completion of work in any area, the Contractor shall clean all of his/her work, equipment, etc., making it free from dirt and debris, etc. At the completion of work, all equipment furnished under this Section shall be checked for paint damage, and any factory-finished paint that has been damaged shall be repaired to match the adjacent areas. Any metal cabinet or enclosure that has been deformed shall be replaced with new material and repainted to match the adjacent areas.

B.

C.

6.9

Protection A. B. The Contractor shall protect all work and material from damage by his/her work or workers, and shall be liable for all damage thus caused. The Contractor shall be responsible for his/her work and equipment until finally inspected, tested, and accepted. The Contractor shall protect his/her work against theft or damage, and shall carefully store material and equipment received on-site that is not immediately installed.

M - 83

The Contractor shall close all open ends of work with temporary covers or plugs during storage and construction to prevent entry of foreign objects. 6.10 Field Quality Control
A.

All work, materials and equipment shall comply with the rules and regulations of applicable local, state, and federal codes and ordinances as identified in Part 1 of this Section. Contractor shall continually monitor the field installation for code compliance and quality of workmanship. All visible piping and/or wiring runs shall be installed parallel to building lines and properly supported. Contractor shall arrange for field inspections by local and/or state authorities having jurisdiction over the work.

B.

C.

6.11

Performance Evaluation/Acceptance Procedure A. General. - Acceptance of the control system depends in part upon successful demonstration of control system performance. The SI shall prepare a detailed final functional test and verification plan indicating in a step-by-step logical fashion the procedures by which the control system will be tested. This shall include the following procedures: 1. 2. 3. Sequence of Operation - Demonstrate all sequences of operation. Test Documentation Provide standard formatted documentation for each controlled system and element test. Pre-Testing - The control system installer shall have performed pre-testing of all tests on all components before final testing. If during final testing more than 10 percent of the points or sequences checked are found to be faulty, the Contractor shall halt the test and re-check all parts of the system test. Testing Plan. Submit test plan for approval not less than 4 weeks prior to tests. Meet with Owners representative, discuss the test plan, and make necessary revisions. The test plan shall include, as a minimum, for each control system and sub-system the following: a) System name. b) List of devices with brief description of functional purpose of each. c) The expected signal values transmitted by the sensors/transmitters. d) The expected signal values transmitted by the controller to the controlled device or actuator. e) The expected values of the control medium from limit-tolimit. f) A description of the instrumentation required to test the system, including proof of calibration.

4.

M - 84

g) h) i) B.

A detailed step-by-step process in conducting test and verification. Log sheets on which expected and actual values will be recorded. Other criteria for test to indicate that the system is operating in accordance with Contract requirements.

Testing - Inform the Engineer and Owner of all test dates for attendance, so that the Engineer and/or Owner may attend the test if desired. Perform all tests. Correct all system maladies found in the testing procedure. Retest as required. If Owners representative does not witness test, provide performance certification. Acceptance - The control systems will not be accepted as meeting the requirements of Completion until all tests described in this specification have been performed to the satisfaction of both the Engineer and Owner. Any tests that cannot be performed due to circumstances beyond the control of the Contractor may be exempt from the completion requirements if stated as such in writing by the Owner's representative.

C.

M - 85

M.35

BUILDERS WORK The Contractor shall carry out the cutting of holes and making them good where pipes, conduits, cable and cable trays are passing through the walls, floor and roof slabs as measured in the Bill of Quantities. Two sets of builders work drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer for his approval.

M.36

PAINTING AND FINISHING After completion of the installation, the entire work shall be checked for finish and appearance. Any portion of work found damaged, unpainted or not finished to the satisfaction of the Engineer shall be rectified, painted and finished satisfactorily.

M.37

IDENTIFICATION/COLOUR CODING All insulation, exposed ductwork etc., shall be identified by color codes/safety indicated and basic color identification bands to B.S. 1710. The safety color and color code indication bands shall be 100 mm wide between two basic color identification bands each of length 150 mm. The identification shall be at centers of not more than 6 meters and adjacent to all valves, items of plant, changes in direction and both sides where the pipework passes through walls, floors etc., and all service access points. The safety color, contents, code and color identification bands shall be applied by means of self adhesive colored or printed tape. Flow and return (F & R) and direction of flow arrows shall be in black with letters 25 mm high on 50 mm wide white self adhesive tape applied in a continuous band around the pipe insulation. All ductwork whether insulated or exposed shall be identified in accordance with DW/142 Appendix 'A' together with descriptive lettering approved by the Engineer. The materials employed shall be as for pipework identification, i.e. self-adhesive plastic. All the lettering and wording shall be in Arabic and English.

M.38 INSPECTION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING All works shall be inspected at any stage during the progress of work and after the completion of works. All works shall be tested and commissioned in accordance with the relevant British Standards, Specifications and Codes of practice to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer. Any defects pointed out at any time during the progress of work during the test or occurring after the test, shall be rectified and retested at no additional cost to the contract.

M - 86

No insulation shall be carried out on any section of the works or concealed in any other way prior to testing and inspection. At least two copies of Test Certificates of the tests carried out at manufacturer's works shall be forwarded to the Engineer prior to despatch of the materials to site. All the test points required for carrying out the tests and commissioning of the system including the measuring instruments to measure pressure, temperature, pressure drop, velocity, volume, flow rate or any conditions to be measured shall be provided by the Contractor. The Contractor shall carry out all the performance tests initially before requesting the Engineer to witness the tests in order to avoid unnecessary delay. All the necessary labour force, skilled or unskilled, required during the test, prior to or after the test shall be provided by the Contractor. It shall be ensured that the system is free from any dirt, welding snag or any other foreign matter before the system is finally filled with working fluid. The system shall be properly vented for bringing it to operating conditions. The system shall then run at full load and the flow rate then regulated to specifications and design conditions. All readings on air, water and electrical power consumption shall be recorded every hour and details forwarded to the Engineer. The system shall be regulated and balanced for flow rates, temperature and pressure drop tests. A copy of the test showing the final operating point shall be submitted to the Engineer. During the tests, all the readings of pressure, temperature, flow rates, pressure drop, power consumption, noise level or any other, as advised by the Engineer shall be tabulated and at least two copies submitted to the Engineer. Statutory Authority Approval Contractor shall submit the final official approval from the concerned statutory authority. M.39 WARRANTY The Contractor shall guarantee for a period as stated in the form of tender clause 49 (1) after the practical completion of the installation that all plant and equipment shall operate free of any defects due to defective material and bad workmanship and that any part found defective during this period shall be replaced free of cost by the Contractor. Maintenance period for all air conditioning equipment, controls, components and systems etc., shall start only after regular electricity power supply is available at site. All the compressors up to and including 15 HP shall be guaranteed for a period of 5 years from the date of regular power supply at site. The Contractor shall also guarantee the performance and efficiency of the plant and equipment as per the specifications for a similar period as stated in the form of tender clause 49 (1) after the practical completion and if the services of Contractor's personnel are requisitioned during this period, such works shall be made available free of cost to the Client.

M - 87

If the defects are not rectified within a reasonable period, the Client may proceed to do so by another agency at the Contractor's entire risk and expense without prejudice to any rights of the Client. M.40 SCHEDULES, EXPLANATORY NOTES i. The schedules have been prepared for the purpose of facilitating selection of equipment and evaluating the tenders. The reference given against each item in the schedules refers to the appropriate references in the drawings. Technical details of the equipment offered by the Contractor should be furnished, as asked for in the technical schedules enclosed. The external static pressure for fans, where given are approximate and the Contractor will be required to supply equipment to handle the requirements of his installation without extra cost to the contract. Should the Contractor wish to amplify any information to be provided, this should be set out on separate sheets and submitted with his tender together with explanatory manufacturer's catalogues, curves and selection charts. If the equipment selected by the tenderer should require any special alteration or addition to the architectural or structural work, he must list the requirements separately.

ii.

iii.

iv.

v.

M.41

SCHEDULE OF DRAWINGS

The following drawings shall be read in conjunction with these specifications. S.N 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Drawing No. AC-01 AC-02 AC-03 AC-04 AC-05 BMS-01 BMS-02 Title HVAC WORKS GROUND FLOOR HVAC WORKS FIRST FLOOR HVAC WORKS ROOF FLOOR HVAC WORKS, GUARD, GARDENER, STORE, MV DETAIL & SECTION HVAC WORKS-STANDARD DUCTING DETAILS BMS NETWORK SCHEMATIC BMS NETWORK SCHEDULES

M - 88

M.42

COMMISSIONING SHEETS
COMMISSIONING SHEET OF PACKAGE AIR CONDITIONERS

Package A.C. No. Manufacturers Name Name Plate Details Operation of Controls Flow Switch (if applicable) High Pressure Cutout Low Pressure Cutout Oil Pressure Cutout Crankcase Oil heater Selector Switch Pump Down Cycle

: :

Sheet No Model

: :

: : : : : : :

Satisfactory/Not Satisfactory (i) (i) (i) (ii) (ii) (ii)

Satisfactory/Not Satisfactory Satisfactory/Not Satisfactory Satisfactory/Not Satisfactory Compressor 1 Compressor 2 ... ..

Time Ambient DB Ambient WB Incoming Voltage Full load amperes Fan Motor Operation Rated Current/Actual Current Thermostat Operation Condensate Drainage Smoke Detector Operation Filter Inspection and Removal Air Temp. (Return) Air Temp (Supply)

...

: : : : : : :

Satisfactory/Not Satisfactory Satisfactory/Not Satisfactory Satisfactory/Not Satisfactory Satisfactory/Not Satisfactory Satisfactory/Not Satisfactory deg. C (deg. F) DB/WB deg. C (deg. F) DB/WB

M - 89

Air Volume Inlet Face Area Average Air Velocity Actual Air Flow Specified Air Flow Space Temperatures Time: Room Room Room Room Amb. Temp. : : : : sq. m (sq.ft) m/s (fpm) l/s (cfm) l/s (cfm)

..AM/PM ..AM/PM ..AM/PM ..AM/PM ..AM/PM ..AM/PM Fresh Air Inlet Area Face Velocity Actual Fresh Air Velocity Specified Fresh Air Velocity Filter Details : : : : sq. m (sq.ft) m/s (fpm) l/s (cfm) l/s (cfm)

Size

(i) (ii) (iii)

Quantity

(i) (ii) (iii)

Make

(i) (ii)

Type

(i) (ii)

M - 90

DUCT VOLUME TEST SHEET

Project System Reference Design Vol. m/s Date Duct Size mm Sheet No. of Duct Area m Velocity m/s

Velocity Profile (Taken .................... Airflow)

Units ..........................

A________________________________________________________________ B________________________________________________________________ C________________________________________________________________ D________________________________________________________________ E________________________________________________________________ F________________________________________________________________ G________________________________________________________________ H________________________________________________________________ I_________________________________________________________________ J_________________________________________________________________ K________________________________________________________________

Correction Factor of Meter Total of Velocities Average Velocity Test Volume Design Static Pressure

Remarks _____________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________

Certified By ...........................

M - 91

DUCT VOLUME TEST SHEET (FRESH AIR)

Project System Reference Design Vol. m/s Date Duct Size mm Sheet No. of Duct Area m Velocity m/s

Velocity Profile (Taken .................... Airflow)

Units ..........................

A________________________________________________________________ B________________________________________________________________ C________________________________________________________________ D________________________________________________________________ E________________________________________________________________ F________________________________________________________________ G________________________________________________________________ H________________________________________________________________ I_________________________________________________________________ J_________________________________________________________________ K________________________________________________________________

Correction Factor of Meter Total of Velocities Average Velocity Test Volume Design Static Pressure

Remarks _____________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________

Certified By ...........................

M - 92

GRILLES AND DIFFUSERS

Project System Reference Terminal No. Location Design Free Area Volume m m/s Date Sheet of

Measured Comments Velocity Volume % of m/s m/s Design

_____________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________

Correction Factor of Meter __________________________________________________________________

Remarks _____________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________

Certified By ...........................

M - 93

M. 43 -

SCHEDULE OF ROOF TOP PACKAGE A/C UNITS


SUPPLY AIR CFM (EACH) FRESH AIR CFM (EACH) 1,385 AIR ON COIL DBF WBF COOLING CAPACITY TOTAL SENSIBLE MBH MBH 338 270 EXTERNAL ST. PR. IN. (WG) 1.4

PAC REF. PAC-1

AREA SERVED Classrooms & Activity Zone Ground Floor Classrooms & Activity Zone First Floor Classrooms & Activity Zone Ground Floor Part Assembly Hall Area Ground Floor Classrooms, Activity Zone First Floor Canteen, GF Library & Corridor, FF Physics Lab, F.F. Biology Lab, F-25 GF +

QTY

12000

77.9

64.9

PAC-2

14000

1,385

77.2

64.3

380

280

1.38

PAC -3

12000

1,385

77.9

64.9

338

270

1.4

PAC -4

4500

500

77.7

64.8

120

95

1.22

PAC -5 PAC -6 PAC -7 PAC -8 PAC -9

1 1 1 1 1

14000 12000 9500 3000 4500

1,385 1,000 970 240 330

77.9 76.5 77.3 76.4 76.1

64.9 63.7 64.3 63.7 63.4

380 310 250 96 125

280 220 200 88 96

1.38 1.30 1.35 1.22 1.22

M - 94

PAC REF. PAC -10 PAC -11 PAC -12

AREA SERVED Chemistry Lab, F-22. Auditorium, G.F. Art Room -2/F-07 Art Room-1, F-06

QTY 1 1 1

SUPPLY AIR CFM (EACH) 4500 9000 3500 3

FRESH AIR CFM (EACH) 330 1,400 240

AIR ON COIL DBF WBF 76.1 79.5 75.9 63.4 66.3 63.3

COOLING CAPACITY TOTAL SENSIBLE MBH MBH 125 270 125 96 200 96

EXTERNAL ST. PR. IN. (WG) 1.22 1.25 1.22

PAC -13

1 500

240

75.9

63.3

96

88

1.22

PAC-14 PAC -15

Computer Lab-1, F-10 Computer Lab-2, F-11

1 1 1

2500 2500 14000

218 218 1,495

76.7 76.7 77.5

63.9 63.9 64.6

81 81 380

61 61 280

1.20 1.20 1.40

PAC -16 PAC 17A,17B& 17C PAC -18

Administration, G.F. Multi-purpose Hall, G.F.

14000

1300

76.9

64.1

380

280

1.32

Changing / Toilet and Part Assembly Hall, G.F.

9500

1,250

78.5

65.4

285

220

1.35

M - 95

PAC REF. PAC -19 & 20

AREA SERVED Assembly Hall, G.F. Teachers Room and Language Lab, Classrooms & Activity Zone Ground Floor Home Needle Room/Activity Room ,G-33

QTY 2 1

SUPPLY AIR CFM (EACH) 15000 5000 8500 14000

FRESH AIR CFM (EACH) 1,500 685 1265 1,385

AIR ON COIL DBF WBF 77.2 78.8 80.1 77.2 64.4 65.5 66.7 64.4

COOLING CAPACITY TOTAL SENSIBLE MBH MBH 440 175 281 380 350 128 216 280

EXTERNAL ST. PR. IN. (WG) 1.30 1.25 1.35 1.4

* PAC -21
PAC -22

PAC -23

3500

330

77.0

64.2

110

90

1.38

NOTES:

1) All capacities are actual at 115 F ambient temperature. 2) Static pressure in these tables is tentative only. Contractor to calculate actual values based on the equipment and accessories offered. 3) PAC -10 shall be provided with suitable filters for the chemistry laboratory. 4) In the absence of a humidity control it is allowed to select a Package unit upto a minimum of 64.5F WB where ever the tabulated WB is below this figure. 5) The schedule is to be read in conjunction with the Project Specifications.

* For PAC-21 Capacity refer to drawing no. AC-03.

M - 96

M.44

SCHEDULE OF SPLIT AIR CONDITIONING UNITS

REFERENCE

AREA SERVED

DESCRIPTION OF A.C. UNIT

NOMINAL CAP. (BTU/HR.)

ELECTRICAL SUPPLY

QTY. (NOS.)

IU-1 / OU-1

Computer Room

Air cooled wall mounted type split unit with remote outdoor unit. -do-

18,000

240V / 1 Ph / 50 Hz

IU-2 / OU-2 & IU-3 / OU-3 IU-4 / OU-4 & IU-5 / OU-5 IU-6/OU-6 IU-7/OU-7

Guard House / Gardener

18,000

240V / 1 Ph / 50 Hz

Drivers Room / Store

-do-

24,000

240V / 1 Ph / 50 Hz

Drivers Room BMS Room

-do-do-

24,000 18,000

240V / 1Ph / 50Hz 240V / 1Ph / 50Hz

1 1

Notes : 1. 2. The nominal capacity of the split unit shall be based on 80F. DB / 67F WB air on coil and 95F. ambient temperature. The units shall be suitable for tropical climate, capable of operating under the specified design ambient conditions and maximum temperature of 122F. Electrical supply - 240V, 1 Ph., 50 Hz. And 415 volts, 3 phase, 50 Hz., A.C. supply

M - 97

M.45

SCHEDULE OF WINDOW AIR CONDITIONING UNITS

REFERENCE

AREA SERVED

DUTY - TR (BTU/HR) (NOMINAL)

QTY. (NOS.)

WAC -1 and 2 WAC - 3 and 4

M.V. Room Pump room

1.5 (18,000) 2.0 (24,000)

2 2

Note: 1. Electrical supply - 240V, 1 Ph., 50 Hz., A.C. supply

M - 98

M.46
UNIT REF. AREA SERVED

SCHEDULE OF EXHAUST FANS


AIR VOLUME (CFM) STATIC PRESSURE IN. W.G. TYPE QTY

EF-1 EF-2 EF-3 EF-4 EF-5 EF-5A EF-6 EF-6A EF-7 EF-8 EF-8A EF-9 EF-10 EF-11 EF-12 EF-13 EF-14 EF-15 EF-15A EF-16 EF-17

Toilets & Electrical Room (G-47 & F-36) Toilets (G-58 & F-47) Toilets (G-57 & F-44) Toilets (G-72 & F-57) Cafeteria Kitchen Servery and Store Chemistry Lab Fume Cupboard Physic Lab Room Tailoring & Cooking Room (Applicable for Preparatory & Secondary Girls School only) Toilet and Electrical Room (F-17, G-19, G-24, F-19) Toilet GF (G-31) Administration Block Pantry & Toilet Teachers Room Pantry & Toilet Toilets and Changing Area Biology Lab (F-25) Assembly Hall (G-35) Assembly Hall (G-35) Multi-purpose Hall (G-84) Auditorium Art Room 1/ F-6

1,380 880 380 1180 500 / 600 490 880 300 1000 1078 390 275 400 1,865 600 1,500 1,500 1,200 1,200 300 200

0.25 0.22 0.20 0.22 0.6 0.25 0.22 0.20 0.5 0.25

Twin roof mounted Twin roof mounted Twin roof mounted Twin roof mounted Roof kitchen extract Twin Roof mounted Fume cupboard extract Twin roof mounted Roof kitchen extract Twin exhaust fan Twin exhaust fan

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

0.20 0.20 0.20 0.26 0.4 0.4 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.20

Twin exhaust fan Twin exhaust fan Twin exhaust fan Twin exhaust fan In-line exhaust fan In-line exhaust fan Twin exhaust fan (in-line) Twin exhaust fan (in-line) Twin exhaust fan Twin exhaust fan

M - 99

M.46

SCHEDULE OF EXHAUST FANS (contd.)


AIR VOLUME STATIC PRESSURE IN. W.G. TYPE QTY

UNIT REF.

AREA SERVED

(CFM)

EF-17A EF-18 EF-18A EF-19 & 20 EF-21 & 22 EF-23 FAF-1

Art Room / Store FF Pump Room Pump Room Drivers/Guard / Gardeners Toilet Drivers/Guard / Gardeners Kitchen Store (Below Auditorium) To Kitchen hood

400 550 150 50 125 425 400

0.20 Free discharge Free discharge Free discharge Free discharge 0.15 0.6

Twin exhaust fan Wall mounted fan Wall mounted fan Wall mounted fan Wall mounted fan Twin cabinet type In-line fan

1 1 1 2 2 1 1

Notes: 1. 2. 3. Exhaust fans EF-1, 2, 4, 5, 8, 11, 13, 14, 15 and 16 shall be suitable for 415 volts, 3 phase, 50 Hz., A.C supply, while all other fans shall be suitable for 240 volts, 1 phase, 50 Hz., A.C. supply. Contractor shall be responsible to check the static pressure in conjunction with the proposed equipment and related systems. The kitchen hood exhaust fan shall be provided with speed regulator and shall be interlinked with fresh air fan.

M - 100

M.47

SCHEDULE OF DRINKING WATER FOUNTAINS

REFERENCE

AREA SERVED

TYPE

CONDENSING UNIT HP (MIN)

CAPACITY (LITRES/HR. )

QTY (NOS.)

DWF-1 & 1A DWF-2 & 2A DWF-3 & 3A DWF-4 & 4A DWF-5 & 5A DWF-6 & 6A DWF-7 & 7A DWF-8 & 8A DWF-9 & 9A DWF-10 & 10A DWF-11 & 11A

Classrooms, GF Classrooms, GF Canteen External Changing Room External Classrooms, FF Classrooms, FF Classrooms, FF Laboratories Teachers Room

Fully recessed stainless steel self contained type/disabled type -do-do-do-do-do-do-do-do-do-do-

1/3 1/3 1/3 1/3 1/3 1/3 1/3 1/3 1/3 1/3 1/3

40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Notes : 1. 2. 3. All drinking water fountains shall be of fully recessed self contained type, stainless steel finish and shall be fitted with filter. All drinking water coolers shall be suitable for 240V, 1 Ph., 50 Hz., A.C. supply. At each of the above referenced locations one unit shall be recessed self contained and the other unit shall be suitable for the disabled.

M - 101

M.48

SCHEDULE OF AIR CURTAINS

REFERENCE

AREA SERVED

SIZE OF AIR CURTAIN

APPLICABLE HEIGHT (MAX)

TYPE

NO. OF UNITS

DAC-1 to 12 DAC-13 DAC-14 and 15 DAC-16 and 17

Assembly Hall Cafeteria Lobby Cafeteria Hallway

900 mm 1200 mm 900 mm 900 mm

2.4 m 2.4 m 2.4 m 2.4 m

Wall mounted Wall mounted Wall mounted Wall mounted

12 1 2 2

DAC-18 to 23

Multi-purpose Hall

900 mm

2.4 m

Wall mounted

Notes: 1. 2. Air curtains to operate on 240V, single Ph, 50 Hz., A.C. supply. Each air curtain shall be provided with minimum two or three speed regulator (High, Medium and Low).

M - 102

M. 49 SCHEDULE OF SUGGESTED MANUFACTURERS (AIR-CONDITIONING)

1. Package A/C Units

York Trane Carrier Mc Quay Daikin Mitsubishi York National Mitsubishi Carrier Rheem Trane Toshiba Daikin

2. Split Units

3. Window A.C Unit

York Carrier National Toshiba Mitsubishi General Nuair Nouvovent Penn Greenheck Elta Casals Systemair Dynair KMC CIACO AIRMASTER DASCO BETA KBE KMC GULF ACCOUSTICS ATAI SAFID AIRMASTER KBE

4. Exhaust Fan Twin & Single

5. Grills, Registers and Diffusers

6. Sound Attenuators

M 103 -

7. Duct Insulation & Pipe Insulation :

KIMMCO AFFICO JOHNSMANVILLE IZOTOPORAK KMC, SAFID ATAI BETA AIRMASTER DASCO CIACO KBE : RUSKIN ATAI BETA AIRMASTER SAFID KBE SAFID ATAI ATCO URODYNE CONTRACT COMPONENT LTD ARMAFLEX AEROFLEX THERMOBREAK ARMACELL

8. Volume Control Dampers/ Fresh air Intake/Access Doors

9. Fire Dampers

10. Flexible Ducts

11. Duct Flexible Connection

12. Rubber Foam Insulation

13. Building Management Systems & Controls

HONEYWELL DELTA SAUTER TAC/SCHNIEDER JOHNSON CONTROLS DISTECH CONTROLS TREND FILTRINE AQUARIUS WATROUS HAWS

14. Drinking Water Fountains

15. Vibration Isolator

MASON WEICCO KINETIC

M 104 -

16. Air Curtains

THERMOSCREEN 2-VV CASALS GREENHECK NIPPON STEEL JINDAL KOBE MUPRO HILTI GRINNEL WEICCO DWYER AIR CONTROL

17. G.I sheet

18. Hangers/Support

19. Manometer

20. Adhesive, Coatings & Sealants:

FOSTER MIRACLE IDENDEN IDEAL

Notes :

1. 2. 3.

For approval of materials equivalent to the specified, Engineers decision shall be final and binding. The above suggested manufacturers should meet the detailed specifications given in the relevant sections. The name of the Manufacturer, model no and the country where the product is manufactured should be clearly and permanently marked (sticker is not acceptable) on the product itself.

M 105 -

You might also like